International Codes V8i

STAAD.
Pro
V8i (SELECTseries 3)
International Design Codes Manual

DAA037810-1/0004 Last updated: 10 October 2011
Copyright Information
Trademark Notice
Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, STAAD.Pro are registered or nonregistered trademarks of Bentley Sytems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright Notice
2011, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Bentley Systems, Incorporated and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
Acknowledgments
Windows, Vista, SQL Server, MSDE, .NET, DirectX are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Restricted Rights Legends

If this software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America, its agencies and/or instrumentalities ("U.S. Government"), it is provided with restricted rights. This software and accompanying documentation are "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," respectively, pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 227.7202, and "restricted computer software" pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19(a), as applicable. Use, modification, reproduction, release, performance, display or disclosure of this software and accompanying documentation by the U.S. Government are subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement and pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212, 52.227-19, 227.7202, and 1852.227-86, as applicable. Contractor/Manufacturer is Bentley Systems, Incorporated, 685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341- 0678. Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and International treaties.
End User License Agreements

To view the End User License Agreement for this product, review: eula_en.pdf.
International Design Codes Manual i
Table of Contents
About STAAD.Pro About the STAAD.Pro Documentation
Getting Started and Tutorials Examples Manual Graphical Environment Technical Reference Manual International Design Codes
2 4
4 4 4 5 5
Batch Design versus Design Modes

Batch Design Design Modes
6
6 6
Section 1 Australian Codes

1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001 1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998
9
11 19
Section 2 British Codes

2A. British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110 2B. British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000 2C. British Codes - Design per BS5400 2D. British Codes - Design per BS8007 2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
49
51 67 93 97 101
Section 3 Canadian Codes

3A. Canadian Codes - Concrete Design per CSA Standard A23.3-94 3B. Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16-01 3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94 3D. Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-086-01
119
121 129 165 173
Section 4 Cypriot Codes

4A. Cypriot Codes - Concrete Design in Cyprus
193
195
International Design Codes Manual iii
Section 5 Danish Codes

5A. Danish Codes - Steel Design per DS412
201
203
Section 6 Dutch Codes

6A. Dutch Codes - Steel Design per NEN 6770
207
209
Section 7 European Codes

7A. European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2 7B. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992] 7C. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005] 7D. European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005] 7E. Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1
213
215 221 237 283 349
Section 8 Finnish Codes

8A. Finnish Codes - Concrete Design per B4 8A. Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7
369
371 375
Section 9 French Codes

9A. French Codes - ConcreteDesign per B.A.E.L 9B. French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code
379
381 387
Section 10 German Codes

10A. German Codes - ConcreteDesign Per DIN 1045 10B. German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code
397
399 407
Section 11 Indian Codes

11A. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 456 11B. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 13920 11C. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800 - 1984 11D. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 802 11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code 11F. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800:2007
417
419 441 465 483 505 513
Section 12 Japanese Codes

12A. Japanese Codes - ConcreteDesign Per 1991 AIJ
541
543
iv STAAD.Pro
12B. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ 12C. Japanese Codes - SteelDesign Per 2002 AIJ
551 565
Section 13 Mexican Codes

13A. Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987 13B. Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per NTC 1987
583
585 597
Section 14 Norwegian Codes

14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD 14B. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004 14C. Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473
607
609 663 685
Section 15 Russian Codes

15A. Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per SNiP 2.03.01-84* 15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
689
691 719
Section 16 Singaporian Codes

16A. Singaporean Codes - Concrete Design per CP65
737
739
Section 17 South African Codes

17A. South African Codes - Concrete Design per SABS-0100-1 17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
745
747 753
Section 18 Spanish Codes

18A. Spanish Codes - Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972 18A. Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE
773
775 777
Section 19 Swedish Codes

19A. Swedish Codes - Steel Design per BSK 99 19B. Swedish Codes - Concrete Design per BBK 94
781
783 787
Section 20 American Aluminum Code Section 21 American Transmission Tower Code

21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
793 805
807
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports 813
International Design Codes Manual v
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code Section 23 ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes
23A. ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code 23B. ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code
819 835
837 853
Section 24 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Codes 873
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes 24B. ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code 24B. 18B.6 Example 24C. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code 24C. 18C.6 Example 24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code 875 885 892 897 905 909
Section 24 Technical Support
921
vi STAAD.Pro
This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the various international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as additional codes by Bentley Sytems, Incorporated. In other words, they do not come with the standard license package. Hence, information on only some of the codes presented in this document may be actually pertinent to the license package available to you. This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference Manual and the STAAD Application Examples Manual . Effort has been made to provide some basic information about the analysis considerations and the logic used in the design approach. A brief outline of the factors affecting the design along with references to the corresponding clauses in the codes is also provided. Examples are provided at the appropriate places to facilitate ease of understanding of the usage of the commands and design parameters. You are urged to refer to the Examples Manual for solved problems that use the commands and features of STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains references to the clauses in the code that govern the design, we recommend that you consult the documentation of the code of that country for additional details on the design criteria.
International Design Codes Manual 1
About STAAD.Pro
About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with applications primarily in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and highway structures, industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining walls, turbine foundations, culverts and other embedded structures, etc. The program hence consists of the following facilities to enable this task. 1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands for creating the mathematical model. Beam and column members are represented using lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented using triangular and quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are represented using brick elements. These utilities allow the user to create the geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as desired, assign materials like steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply loads explicitly as well as have the program generate loads, design parameters etc. 2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite element analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history, steady state, etc.). 3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs and shear walls. Design of shear and moment connections for steel members. 4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam, plate and solid stress contours, etc. 5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other widely accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas like reinforced and prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel connection design, etc. 6. A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to access
2 STAAD.Pro
About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pros internal functions and routines as well as its graphical commands to tap into STAADs database and link input and output data to third-party software written using languages like C, C++, VB, VBA, FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD allows users to link in-house or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation Getting Started and Tutorials
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation

The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described below. These manuals are normally provided only in the electronic format. All the manuals can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. If you want to obtain a printed copy of the books, visit the docs.bentley.com site to check availability and order. Bentley also supplies the manuals in the PDF format at no cost for those who want to print them on their own. See the back cover of this book for addresses and phone numbers.
Getting Started and Tutorials

This manual contains information on the contents of the STAAD.Pro package, computer system requirements, installation process, copy protection issues and a description on how to run the programs in the package. Tutorials that provide detailed and step-by-step explanation on using the programs are also provided.
Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD engine. The examples represent various structural analyses and design problems commonly encountered by structural engineers.
Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis and design, result verification, and report generation.
4 STAAD.Pro
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation
Technical Reference Manual

This manual deals with the theory behind the engineering calculations made by the STAAD engine. It also includes an explanation of the commands available in the STAAD command file.
International Design Codes

This document contains information on the concrete, steel, aluminum, and timber design codes that are supported in the batch design routines. Note that most steel and concrete batch design routines for the US design codes can be found in the Technical Reference Manual. Details of the steel design codes supported in the post processing Steel Design Mode can be found in the User Interface manual. Details of the beam, column and slab concrete design codes supported in the Concrete Design Mode can be found in the RCDesigner manual. The documentation for the STAAD.Pro Extension component(s) is available separately.
Batch Design versus Design Modes Batch Design

STAAD.Pro has two means by which structural members can be designed.
Batch Design
Using this method, code checks and/or member selection is performed directly by the analysis and design engine when an analysis is performed. The contents of this manual, along with those in the Technical Reference manual, are all used for batch design.
Design Modes
Code checks and member selection is performed in a post-processing module for either Steel Design or Concrete Design. These modes are available in the Graphical User Interface. Refer to the Steel Design mode and Concrete Design mode help sections for additional information. Table 14.1-Available steel design codes in the Steel Design mode Country/Region Egypt Europe Great Britain India United States Code 205 2001 EC3 DD BS5950 2000 IS800 AISCASD
6 STAAD.Pro
Note: Design per the Chinese steel code GB50017-2003 must be performed per the
localized STAADSSDD interface. Please download and install this application from Bentley SELECT. Table 14.2-Available design codes in the Concrete Design codes Country/ Region Australia China Egypt Europe Eurocode 2 - 2004 France Germany Great Britain India Japan Norway Russia Singapore Spain Turkey BAEL DIN 1045-1 BS 8110 IS456 AIJ NS3473 SP52-101-03 CP65 EHE TS 500 ACI 318-99 United States ACI 318-05 / 318M-05 Code AS 3600 GB50010 ECCS 203 Eurocode 2 - 1991
8 STAAD.Pro
Section 1
Australian Codes
10 STAAD.Pro
1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Australian code AS 36002001 Australian Standard-Concrete Structures. Design of members per AS 3600 - 2001 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
1A.1 Section Types for Concrete Design

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed.
l l
For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) For Columns: Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)
1A.2 Member Dimensions

Concrete members which will be designed by the program must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. The following example shows the required input:
UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTY 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250. 11 13 PR YD 350.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
1A.3 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 1A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 1A.1-Australian Concrete Design per AS 3600 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description Must be specified as AUSTRALIAN to invokes design per AS 3600 - 2001. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual. CLEAR 25 mm 40 mm DEPTH YD For beam members. For column members Total depth to be used for design. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. Concrete Yield Stress. Applicable values per Clause 6.1.1.1 of AS 36002001: 20 25 32 40 50 65 FYMAIN 450 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel. Applicable values per Table 6.2.1 of AS 36002001: 250 400 450 500
FMC
40 N/mm 2
12 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name FYSEC
Default Value 450 N/mm 2
Description Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel. Applicable values per Table 6.2.1 of AS 36002001: 250 400 450 500
MAXMAIN
60 mm
Maximum main reinforcement bar size. Minimum main reinforcement bar size. Maximum secondary reinforcement bar size. Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. Maximum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement in columns. Tied column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral reinforcement.
MINMAIN
10 mm
MAXSEC
12 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
RATIO
4.0
REINF
0.0
Parameter Name TRACK
Default Value 0.0
Description For beam design: 0.0 = output consists of reinforcement details at the member start, middle, and end 1.0 = critical moments are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output 2.0 = required steel for intermediate sections defined by NSECTION are printedin addition to TRACK 0.0 output For column design: 0.0 = reinforcement details are printed
WIDTH
ZD
Width to be used for design. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
1A.4 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated. One option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design moments. STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The PDELTA ANALYSIS will accommodate the requirements of the second- order analysis described by AS 3600, except for the effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration. Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must be realized that the evaluation of slenderness effects is also by an approximate method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway. Considering all of the above information, a P-Delta analysisas performed by STAADmay be used for the design of concrete members. However the user must note that to take
14 STAAD.Pro
advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
1A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9, and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes.
1A.5.1 Design for Flexure

Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per AS 3600. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
1A.5.2 Design for Shear

Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design is performed at 13 equally spaced sections (0. to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. Example of Input Data for Beam Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE AUSTRALIAN FYMAIN 415 ALL FYSEC 415 ALL FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9 DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9 END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by AS 3600 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. Example of Input Data for Column Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE AUSTRALIAN FYMAIN 415 ALL FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6 END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.7 Slab or Wall Design

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the specification. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, MAXMAIN, MINMAIN, and CLEAR listed in Table 1A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 1A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
16 STAAD.Pro
Figure 1A.1 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE AUSTRALIAN FYMAIN 415 ALL FC 25 ALL CLEAR 40 ALL DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20 END CONCRETE DESIGN
18 STAAD.Pro
1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Australian code AS 4100-1998 Standards Australia - Steel Structural Design. Design of members per AS 3600 - 1998 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
1B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability, and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of AS 4100. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
1B.1.1 Strength Limit States

Strength design capacities (Ru) are calculated and compared to user-defined design action effects (S*), so as to ensure that S* Ru in accordance with AS 4100 3.4. Details for design capacity calculations are outlined in the sections that follow.
1B.1.2 Deflection Limit States

STAAD.Pros AS 4100 implementation does not generally check deflections. It is left to the user to check that both local member and frame deflections are within acceptable limits.
Note: Local member deflections parallel to the local member y-axis can be checked against
a user-defined maximum span / deflection ratio. This can be performed using the DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 design parameters, however this is only available for MEMBER Design. Details are provided in the sections that follow.
1B.1.3 Eccentric Beam Reactions

STAAD.Pro does not automatically account for minimum eccentricity distances for beam reactions being transferred to columns as per AS 4100 4.3.4. However member offsets can be used to model these eccentricities. Refer to Section 5.25 of the Technical Reference manual for further information on the Member Offset feature.
1B.1.4 Limit States Not Considered

The following limit states are not directly considered in STAAD.Pros implementation of AS 4100. Table 1B.1-Limit States Not Considered in STAAD.Pro AS 4100 Design Limit State Code Reference AS 4100 3.3 AS 4100 3.5 AS 4100 3.7 AS4100 3.9 AS 4100 3.11
Stability Serviceability Brittle Fracture Fire Other Design Requirements
1B.1.5 Connection Design

STAAD.Pro and Bentleys RAM Connection program currently do not support design of connections in accordance with AS 4100. In some cases connection design may govern the size of members. Such considerations are not considered in STAAD.Pros AS 4100 and should be checked by separately.
1B.1.6 Bolts and Welds

Bolt holes and welds are not generally considered in STAAD.Pros AS 4100 member design.
Note: NSC and NSF design parameters are used to manually specify a reduction in net
section area for compression or tension capacity calculations. These can be used to account for bolt hole area reductions. Further details are provided in the sections that follow.
20 STAAD.Pro
1B.2 Analysis Methodology

Either the elastic or dynamic analysis methods may be used to obtain the forces and moments for design as per AS4100 section 4.4. Analysis is done for the specified primary and repeat loading conditions. Therefore, it is your responsibility to enter all necessary loads and load combination factors for design in accordance with the AS/NZS 1170 Series or other relevant design codes. You are allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
Note: Plastic analysis and design in accordance with AS 4100 section 4.5 is not
implemented in STAAD.Pro.
1B.2.1 Elastic Analysis

Two types of elastic analysis can be performed using STAAD.Pro in accordance with AS4100: i. First Order Linear, Elastic Analysis - used to perform a regular elastic stiffness analysis as per AS 4100 4.4.2.1. Refer to Section 5.37.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on this feature. ii. Second Order PDelta Linear, Elastic Analysis - Depending on the type of structure, a PDelta analysis may be required in order to capture second-order effects as per AS 4100 4.4.1.2. Second-order effects can be captured in STAAD.Pro by performing a PDelta second-order elastic analysis as per AS 4100 Appendix E. Refer to Section 5.37.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on this feature.
Note: Moment amplification as per AS 4100 clause 4.4.2 is not considered.
Hint: In order to correctly capture second-order effects for combination load cases
using a PDelta Analysis, the Repeat Load feature must be used. Second-order effects will not be correctly evaluated if the Load Combination feature is used. Load Combinations are combinations of results where Repeat Loads instruct the program to perform the analysis on the combined load actions. Refer to Section 5.32.11 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on using Repeat Loads.
1B.2.2 Dynamic Analysis

Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results. Refer Section 5.32.10 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on Dynamic Loading and Analysis features.
1B.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, either the steel section library available in STAAD or the User Table facility may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information. Table 1B.2-Available Australian Sections for STAAD.Pro AS 4100 Design General Profile Type Australian Sections I-SECTION WB, WC UB, UC T-SECTION CHANNEL ANGLE TUBE PIPE BT, CT PFC EA, UA SHS, RHS CHS Description Welded beams and columns Universal beams and columns Tees cut from universal beams and columns Parallel flange channels Equal and unequal angles Square and rectangular hollow sections Circular hollow sections
Note: STAAD.Pro will not design the following section types to AS 4100: Double Profiles
(D), Composite Sections (C), Top Cover Plates (TC), Bottom Cover Plates (BC), and Top & Bottom Cover Plates (TB), Double Channels (D, BA, & FR) and Double Angles (LD & SD). Refer to Section Profile Tables in the Graphical Environment for these options.
Hint: When adding and assigning sections using the built-in steel section library
through the Graphical Environment, STAAD.Pros default tables are American. To change the default tables to Australian, select File > Configuration from the
22 STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro Start page (no input file open). Set the Default Profile Table to Australian on the Configure Program dialog Section Profile Table.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
1B.4.1 UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0 36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1
1B.4.2 UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8 23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8
1B.4.3 Welded Beams

Welded Beams are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WB700X115 23 56 TA ST WB1200X455
1B.4.4 Welded Columns

Welded Columns are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WC400X114 23 56 TA ST WC400X303
1B.4.5 Parallel Flange Channels

Shown below is the syntax for assigning names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST PFC75 6 TO 10 TA ST PFC380
1B.4.6 Double Channels

Back-to-back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
11 TA D PFC230 17 TA D C230X75X25 SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel PFC230 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels.
1B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30 mm and a leg thickness of 6 mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA A150X150X16
Note: Single angles must be specified with an RA (Single Angle w/Reverse Y-Z Axis) in
order to be designed to AS 4100. This is to ensure that the major and minor principal axes align with the local member z and y axes respectively, similar to other section profiles.
1B.4.8 Double Angles

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by means of input of the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
33 35 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6 37 39 TA LD A75X50X6 43 TO 47 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
24 STAAD.Pro
1B.4.9 Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)

Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube is as shown below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is available in the steel table. In these examples, members 1 to 5 consist of a 2X2X0.5 inch size tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of 10X5X0.1875 inch size tube section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10 times the width, and 16 times the thickness.
1 TO 5 TA ST TUB20202.5 6 TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections specified in this latter manner.
1B.4.10 Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)

Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe is as shown below. This method is meant for pipes whose property name is available in the steel table.
1 TO 5 TA ST PIP180X5 6 TO 10 TA ST PIP273X6.5
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this latter manner.
1B.4.11 Sample File Containing Australian Shapes

STAAD SPACE UNIT METER KN JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 11 100 0 0 MEMB INCI 1 1 2 10
UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTIES AUSTRALIAN * UB SHAPES 1 TA ST UB200X25.4 * UC SHAPES 2 TA ST UC250X89.5 * CHANNELS 3 TA ST PFC125 * DOUBLE CHANNELS 4 TA D PFC200 * ANGLES 5 TA ST A30X30X6 * REVERSE ANGLES 6 TA RA A150X150X16 * DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK 7 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6 * DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK 8 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75 * TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS) 9 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 * PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS) 10 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 PRINT MEMB PROP FINISH
1B.5 Section Classification

The AS 4100 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact, or slender; depending upon their local buckling characteristics. This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes. Design is performed for all three categories of section described above.
1B.6 Material Properties

For specification of material properties, the user can use either: a. built-in material constants b. user-defined materials
26 STAAD.Pro
Refer Section 5.26.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on the Built-in Material Constants feature. Refer Section 2.26.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on the Define Material feature.
1B.6.1 Youngs Modulus of Elasticity (E)

STAAD.Pros default steel materials E value is 205,000 MPa. However AS 4100 section 1.4 states that the modulus of elasticity should be taken as 200,000 MPa. There are a number of options to change this value:
l l
change the steel material through the input file or GUI for each file created define a new steel material for each file created change the default STAAD.Pro metric E value in the file C:/Windows/StaadPro20070.ini, going to the [Material-Metric] section, and changing E1=205.0e6 to E1=200.0e6. Restart STAAD.Pro for this to take effect.
Warning: Virtualization features of Windows Vista and Windows 7 may require

additional files to be modified. Contact Bentley Technical Support for assistance.
1B.7 Member Resistances

The member resistance is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in AS 4100. Calculated design capacities are compared to corresponding axial, bending moment, and shear forces determined from the STAAD.Pro analysis. These are used to report the fail or pass status for the members designed. Two types of design checks are typically performed per AS 4100:
l l
Nominal section checks Nominal member checks
The nominal section capacity refers to the capacity of a cross-section to resists applied loads, and accounts for cross-section yielding and local buckling effects. The nominal member capacity on the other hand refers to the capacity of a member to resist applied loads, and includes checks for global member buckling effects including Euler buckling, lateral-torsional buckling, etc.
1B.7.1 Axial Tension

The criteria governing the capacity of tension members are based on two limit states per AS 4100 Section 7. The limit state of yielding of the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member.
The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area Nt section axial tension capacities are calculated (Cl.7.2). Through the use of the NSF parameter (see Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limit states per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2 respectively of AS 4100. Eccentric end connections can be taken into account using the KT correction factor, perCl.7.3. The f yield stress is based on the minimum plate yield stress. Parameters y FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
1B.7.2 Axial Compression

The compressive strength of members is based on limit states per AS 4100 Section 6. It is taken as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity. Nominal section capacity, Ns, is a function of form factor (Cl.6.2.2), net area of the cross section, and yield stress of the material. Through the use of the NSC parameter (see Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section area. Note that this parameter is different from that corresponding to tension. The program automatically calculates the form factor. The k form factors are f calculated based on effective plate widths per Cl.6.2.4, and the f yield stress is based on the y minimum plate yield stress. Nominal member capacity, Nc, is a function of nominal section capacity and member slenderness reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). This value is calculated about both principal x and y axes. Here, you are required to supply the value of b (Cl.6.3.3) through the ALBparameter (see Table 1B.1). The effective length for the calculation of compressive strength may be provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ, LY, and LZ (see Table 1B.1).
1B.7.3 Bending
Bending capacities are calculated to AS 4100 Section 5. The allowable bending moment of members is determined as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity (ref. Cl.5.1). The nominal section moment capacity, M , is calculated about both principal x and y axes s and is the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and is expressed as the product of the yield stress of the material and the effective section modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The effective section modulus is a function of section type (i.e., compact, noncompact, or slender) and minimum plate yield stress f . The nominal member capacity depends on overall y flexural-torsional buckling of the member (ref.Cl.5.3).
Note: For sections where the web and flange yield stresses (fy,web and fy.flange respectively)
are different, the lower of the two yield stresses is applied to both the web and flange to determine the slenderness of these elements.
Member moment capacity, Mb , is calculated about the principal x axis only (ref. Cl.5.6). Critical flange effective cross-section restraints and corresponding design segment and subsegments are used as the basis for calculating capacities.
28 STAAD.Pro
1B.7.4 Interaction of Axial Force and Bending

Combined section bending and shear capacities are calculated using the shear and bending interaction method as per Cl.5.12.3.
Note: This check is only carried out where Vv section web shear capacities are calculated.
Refer Table 1B.6-1 for details.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Here, the adequacy of a member is also examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and member capacity (ref.Cl.8.4.5). These account for both in-plane and out-of-plane failures. If the summation of the left hand side of the equations, addressed by the above clauses, exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
1B.7.5 Shear
Section web shear capacity, Vv , is calculated per Cl.5.11, including both shear yield and shear buckling capacities. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z-axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear. Table 1B.6-1 below highlights which shear capacities are calculated for different profile types. Table 1B.3-Section Type Shear Checks General Profile Type Australian Section WB, WC, UB, UC Shear Checks
I-SECTION (i.e., parallel to minor principal y-axis) T-SECTION CHANNEL ANGLE TUBE
Calculated for web only
BT, CT PFC EA, UA SHS, RHS No checks performed Calculated parallel to both x & y principal axes Per AS 4100 5.11.4
PIPE
CHS
Note: Only unstiffened web capacities are calculated. Stiffened webs are not considered.
Bearing capacities are not considered.
1B.7.6 Torsion
STAAD.Pro does not design sections or members for torsion for AS4100.
1B.8 Design Parameters

The design parameters outlined in Table 1B.1 are used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The design scope indicates whether design parameters are applicable for MEMBER Design, PMEMBER Design, or both. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 1B.4-Australian Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Design Scope Description
Must be specified as AUSTRALIAN to invoke design per AS 4100 1998. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
ALB
0.0
Member section constant (refer cl. 6.3.3) If ALB is 0.0, it is automatically calculated based on TABLE 6.3.3(1), 6.3.3(2); otherwise the input value is used.
30 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name ALM
Default Value
Design Scope
Description
0.0
Moment modification factor (refer cl. 5.6.1.1) If ALM is 0.0, it is automatically calculated based cl.5.6.1.1; otherwise the input value is used.
BEAM
0.0
0.0 = design only for end moments and those at locations specified by SECTION command. 1.0 = Perform design for moments at twelfth points along the beam.
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check)
Analytical members only
Deflection Length/ Maximum Allowable local deflection. Joint No. denoting start point for calculation of deflection length Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of deflection length Maximum allowable depth (Applicable for member selection) Minimum required depth (Applicable for member selection) Ultimate strength of steel.
DJ1
Start Joint of member
DJ2
End Joint of member
DMAX
45.0 [in.]
DMIN
0.0 [in.]
FU
500.0 [MPa]
Parameter Name FYLD
Default Value
Design Scope
Description
250.0 [MPa]
Yield strength of steel. Steel type - 1 - SR, 2 HR, 3 - CF, 4 - LW, 5 - HW Correction factor for distribution of forces (refer cl. 7.2) K value for general column flexural buckling about the local Y-axis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio. K value for general column flexural buckling about the local Z-axis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio. Physical members only Load height position as described in Table 5.6.3(2)of AS 4100:1998 0 = at Shear center 1 = At top flange
IST
KT
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LHT
LY
Member Length
Length for general column flexural buckling about the local Y-axis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio.
32 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name LZ
Default Value
Design Scope
Description
Member Length
Length for general column flexural buckling about the local Z-axis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio. A value of either 0.0 or 1.0 suppresses the slenderness ratio check. checks are not explicitly required per AS 4100. Any value greater than 1.0 is used as the limit for slenderness in compression.
MAIN
0.0
NSC
1.0
Net section factor for compression members = An / Ag (refer cl. 6.2.1)
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members. Physical members only Refer to section 1B.11 for details on the PBRACE parameter. Capacity reduction factor Permissible ratio of actual load effect to the design strength. Steel Grade. Refer to Note a below. 0.0 = normal grade 1.0 = high strength grade steel
PBRACE
None
PHI
0.9
RATIO
1.0
SGR
Parameter Name SKL
Default Value
Design Scope
Description
1.0
A load height factor given in Table 5.6.3(2) A lateral rotation restraint factor given in Table 5.6.3(3) A twist restraint factor given in Table 5.6.3(1) Output detail 0.0 = report only minimum design results 1.0 = report design strengths in addition to TRACK 0.0 output 2.0 = provide full details of design
SKR
1.0
SKT
1.0
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported length in bending compression of the bottom flange for calculating moment resistance.
UNT
Member Length
Unsupported length in bending compression of the top flange for calculating moment resistance.
1B.8.1 Notes
a. DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection calculations Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
34 STAAD.Pro
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as the case may be.
Note: Deflection calculations are not applicable to PMEMBERs.

a. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
D = Maximum local deflection for members 1, 2, and 3.

PARAMETERS DFF 300. ALL DJ1 1 ALL DJ2 4 ALL
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local deflections will be measured from original member line. c. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no default value for DFF. b. LHT Parameter If the shear force is constant within the segment, longitudinal position of the load is assumed to be at the segment end. If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting downward determined from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.4. If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting upward determined from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not
FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.0 as the load acting at the top flange is contributing to stabilize against local torsional buckling. c. SGR Parameter AS 4100 defines the values of steel grades that are used as either normal steel or high grade steel. The following table explains the material values used when either option is specified for a particular shape: Table 1B.5-Steel Grades used for the SGR Parameter Section Type SGR Value Steel Grade Used 300 400 300 350 250 350
WB, WC, Tee section cut from WB and 0 (Normal) WC WB, WC, Tee section cut from WB 1 (High) and WC UB, UC, Tee section cut from UB and UC, EA, UA and all UPT sections UB, UC, Tee section cut from UB and UC, EA, UA and all UPT sections Pipe, Tube, CHS, RHS, SHS Pipe, Tube, CHS, RHS, SHS 0 (Normal) 1 (High) 0 (Normal) 1 (High)
Note: If a value for the FYLDparameter has been specified, then that value will be
used. Otherwise, the SGR value will be used to determine the yeild strength and tensile strength values for the steel. based on maximum thickness of the individual elements of the section. Only for shear capacity calculation web thickness is used. Similarly, Tensile Strength is determined either from FU parameter or from SGR parameter.
Warning: A check is introduced to see if yield stress is more than 450 MPa or not.
If it is, a warning is issued and the yield stress is set to 450 MPa. The following example uses the Member design facility in STAAD.Pro. However, it is strongly recommended to use the Physical member design capabilities for AS4100:
PARAMETER 1 CODE AUSTRALIAN ALB 0.0 MEMBER ALL ALM 1.13 MEMBER ALL BEAM 1.0 MEMBER ALL DFF 250.0 MEMBER ALL
36 STAAD.Pro
DMAX 0.4 MEMBER ALL DMIN 0.25 MEMBER ALL FU 400.0 MEMBER ALL FYLD 310.0 MEMBER ALL IST 2.0 MEMBER ALL KT 0.85 MEMBER ALL KX 0.75 MEMBER ALL KY 1.0 MEMBER ALL LX 4.5 MEMBER ALL LY 6.0 MEMBER ALL MAIN 1.0 MEMBER ALL NSC 0.9 MEMBER ALL NSF 1.0 MEMBER ALL PHI 0.9 MEMBER ALL RATIO 0.9 MEMBER ALL SGR 1.0 MEMBER ALL SKT 1.0 MEMBER ALL SKL 1.0 MEMBER ALL SKR 1.0 MEMBER ALL TRACK 2.0 MEMBER ALL UNB 3.4 MEMBER ALL UNT 6.8 MEMBER ALL CHECK CODE MEMBER ALL
1B.9 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to evaluate whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate for the specified loads as per AS 4100 requirements.
Hint: The member selection facility can be used to instruct the program to select a
different section if the specified section is found to be inadequate. Code checking for an analytical member is done using forces and moments at every twelfth point along the beam. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Example of commands for code checking:
UNIT NEWTON METER PARAMETER CODE AUSTRALIAN FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4 NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
Note: Code checking cannot be performed on composite and prismatic sections.
1B.9.1 Physical Members

For physical members (PMEMBERs), code checks are performed at section stations positioned at 1/12th points along each analytical member included in the PMEMBER. It is up to you to determine if these locations cover critical sections for design, and adjust as necessary. The number of stations for PMEMBER Design cannot be altered, however the analytical members can be split so that in effect more stations are checked for a PMEMBER. For each section station along a PMEMBER, section capacity checks are carried for design actions at that station location. Member capacity checks are also carried out for each station. For these the program searches each side of the station to find adjacent effective restraints and design forces and moments. This allows the program to determine the segment / subsegment that the section station resides in, and then proceeds to calculate the member capacities. Enough section stations should be included to capture all segments / subsegments for checking.
Note: When checking combined actions for the section capacities, the design actions at
the section station are used. However when checking combined actions for the member capacities, the maximum forces from anywhere along the segment / subsegment being considered are used. This is as stipulated in AS 4100 8.2. The output reports whether the member has PASSed or FAILed the design checks, as well as the critical condition, critical load case, magnitudes of design actions for the most critical cross-section location (distance from the start joint), and complete calculations for design. The TRACK design parameter can be used to control the level of detail provided in the output. Color-coded results can also be viewed in the GUIs Post Processing Beam |Unity Check page. In some cases some of the output will report N/A values. This occurs where a calculation does not apply to a member. For example if a member never goes into tension then no values can be reported in the tension capacity output sections.
38 STAAD.Pro
Note: As per AS 4100 1.4, the TRACK 2.0 detailed level of output for PMEMBER Design
uses x and y subscripts to refer to major and minor principal axes respectively. These differ to STAAD.Pro local member axes, where z and y refer to major and minor principal axes.
1B.10 Member Selection

This process incrementally checks increasing section profile sizes until a size is found that is AS 4100 compliant, or the largest section has been checked. Only section profiles of the same type as modeled are incrementally checked, with the increasing sizes based on a least weight per unit length criteria. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command. The design calculations for Member Selection are the same as for Code Checking.
Hint: A Fixed Group command is also available, and can be used to force all members
within a user-defined group to take the same section size based on the most critical governing design criteria for all members within that group. This is particularly useful when you want to use the Member Selection feature, but want a group of elements to have the same size. Refer to Section 5.49 of the Technical Reference Manual for information on using this feature.
Note: Member Selection will change member sizes, and hence will change the structures
stiffness matrix. In order to correctly account for this, a subsequent analysis and Code Check should be performed to ensure that the final structure is acceptable. This may need to be carried out over several iterations. Example of commands for member selection:
UNIT NEWTON METER PARAMETER FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4 NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL SELECT MEMB 3 4
Note: Composite and prismatic sections cannot be selected.
1B.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AS 4100 specification which governs the design.
1B.12 Physical Member Design

There are two methods available in STAAD.Pro for checking members against the requirements of AS 4100: a. Analytical member method b. Physical member method Herein these are referred to as MEMBER Design and PMEMBER Design respectively.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or higher.
Traditionally STAAD.Pro performed code checks based on single analytical members (i.e., single members between two nodes). This implementation remains in place as shown in the example in Section 1B.8. Physical Member (PMEMBER) Design on the other hand allows you to group single or multiple analytical members into a single physical design member for the purposes of design to AS 4100. PMEMBER Design also has additional features, including:
l l l l
automated steel grades based on section type; automated tensile stress (f ) and yield stress (f ) values based on plate thicknesses;
u y
automated segment / sub-segment design; improved detailed design calculation output; and
Thus, it is strongly recommended that PMEMBER Design be used, even for the design of single analytical members.
1B.12.1 Modeling with Physical Members

Physical Members may be grouped by either of the following methods:
l
STAAD.Pro Editor - Directly specify physical members in the input file. Refer to Section 5.16.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information. Graphical Environment - Using the tools in the Steel Design toolbar, members can be manually or automatically formed. Refer to Section 1.4 of the Graphical Environment manual for additional information.
40 STAAD.Pro
Note: When creating PMEMBERs for AS 4100, this must be performed in STAAD.Pros
Modeling mode. Do not use the Steel Design mode.
1B.12.2 Segment and Sub-Segment Layout

For calculation of member bending capacities about the principal x-axis, the PMEMBER Design uses the concept of segment / sub-segment design. By default PMEMBERs are automatically broken up into design segments and sub-segments based on calculated effective restraints. User-defined restraints assigned using the PBRACE design parameter are checked to see if they are effective (i.e., if they are placed on the critical flange as per AS 4100 5.5). Restraints not applied to the critical flange are ineffective and hence are completely ignored. Refer to Section 1B.7 for further information on how user-defined restraints are applied using the PBRACE design parameter, including available restraint types, and restraint layout rules.
Note: Segment and sub-segment layouts for PMEMBERs may change for different load
cases considered for design. Some restraints may be effective for one particular load case as they are found to apply to the critical flange, however for another load case may be found not to act on the critical flange, and found to be ineffective. In other words the critical flange can change for each load case considered. Typically the critical flange will be the compression flange, except for segments with a U restraint at one end, in which case it will be the tension flange (as is the case for a cantilever). The PMEMBER Design uses the following routine to determine effective cross-section restraints for each load case considered: i. first all user-defined restraints are checked to see if they are applied to the compression flange, with those that arent ignored; ii. next a check is made to see if a U type restraint is found at either end of the PMEMBER. If this is the case then any adjacent L restraints up to the next F, FR, P or PR restraint are also ignored, regardless of whether they are placed on the critical or non-critical flange. Refer AS 4100 5.4.2.4. The compression flange in step 1 of the routine above is calculated based on the bending moments at the locations of the restraints being considered. If the bending moment is zero at the same location as a restraint then the following method is used to determine which flange is critical at the zero moment location: a. If the zero moment is at the end of the PMEMBER, then the compression flange is based on the bending moment at a small increment from then end; b. If the zero moment is along the PMEMBER and is a peak value, then the compression flange is based on the bending moment at a small increment from that location;
c. If neither 1 or 2 above is valid, then the stiffer of the restraints at that location is taken. The stiffness of different restraint types from the most stiff to least stiff are taken as outlined in Table 1B.9-3. Table 1B.6-Assumed Order of Restraint Stiffness for Zero Moment Critical Flange Stiffness Most Stiff Restraint Type FR F PR P L U Least Stiff None
Once the effective restraints have been determined, the PMEMBER is divided into segments bounded by F, P, FR, PR or U effective restraints. These segments are then further divided into sub-segments by effective L restraints.
Note: Sub-segment lengths are not automatically checked to determine if they provide
full lateral restraint as per AS 4100 5.3.2.4. For design of cantilevers, the free tip should have user-defined U restraints applied to both top and bottom flanges.
Note: If the effective restraints for any load case consist of U or L restraints only, an
error will be reported.
1B.12.3 Physical Member Restraints Specification

The PBRACE parameter is used to specify the restraint condition along the top and bottom flange of a PMEMBER.
General Format
PBRACE { TOP | BOTTOM } f1 r1 f2 r2 f52 r52 (PMEMBpmember-list) Where: f is a fraction of the PMEMBER length where restraint condition is being
n
42 STAAD.Pro
specified. This value is any ratio between 0.0 and 1.0. r is one of the possible restraint condition as in the following:
n
Table 1B.7-Physical Member Restraint Types Designation, r

1
Restraint Type Fully restrained Partially restrained Laterally restrained Unrestrained
Description
Cannot be specified at the ends of design members. Can only be applied at the ends of design members, and must be applied to both flanges to be effective.
Warning: Both top and

bottom flanges can not be unrestrained at the same location (as this is unstable). FR Fully and rotationally restrained Partially and rotationally restrained Continuously The flange is assumed to be restrained continuously supported at that flange up to next restraint location. For continuously supported flange unbraced length is assumed to be zero.
PR
Example
PBRACE TOP 0.85 FR 0.33 PR 0.33 PR 0.25 F 0.75 L 0.5 PR 1.0 U 0.0 U PBRACE BOTTOM 0.75 L 0.0 U 0.25 P 0.5 L 1.0 U PMEMB 3 7
Description
Refer to AS 4100 Section 5.5 for a full definition of the critical flange. Typically this will be the compression flange, except for segments with U restraint at one end, then it will be the tension flange (as is the case for cantilever portion at the end).
l
when gravity loads are dominant (i.e., negative local y-axis direction), the critical flange of a segment shall be the top flange (i.e., tension). when upward wind loads are dominant (i.e., positive local y-axis direction), the critical flange shall be the bottom flange (i.e., tension).
Design physical members are divided into segments by F, P, FR, PR or U effective section restraints. Segments are further broken down into sub-segments by L restraints, but only if the L restraints are deemed to be effective. L restraints are only considered to be effective when positioned on the critical flange between F, P, FR or FP restraints. If an L restraint is positioned on the non-critical flange it shall be completely ignored. Further, if an L restraint is positioned between a U and an F, P, FR or PR restraint, it shall be ignored (regardless of whether it is on the critical or non-critical flange). Design members must have either a F, P, FR, PR, or U restraint specified at both ends, for both flanges.
l
If UNL is not specified, segment length is used as UNL and used as L in effective length calculation as per 5.6.3. If ALM i.e., _m is not provided, automatic calculation of ALM is done based on moments within the segment. If SKR i.e., Kr is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on table 5.6.3(3) considering restraint conditions are the end of the segment. If FR or PR is found at only one of the end, Kr is assumed to be 0.85; if FR or PR is found at both the ends, 0.70 is used as Kr. If SKT i.e., Kt is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(1) considering end restraints of the segment and section geometric information and segment length. If SKL i.e., Kl is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(2) considering end restraints of the segment, Load Height Position parameter, LHT and shear force variation within the segment.
44 STAAD.Pro
Notes
a. If PMEMBER list is not provided, all the PMEMBERS are restrained by same configuration. b. It is not necessary to provide the restraint locations in sequence as the program sorts them automatically. c. Unless specified, PMEMBER ends are assumed to be Fully Restrained (F). d. While designing any section of the member, effective restraints are searched on each side of the section along the critical flange. e. The types of restraints applied to the top and bottom flanges at each location determines the effective section restraints. These are outlined in the table below: Table 1B.8-Restraint Meanings in Critical and Noncritical Flanges Case Flange Restraint on a Critical Flange Restraint on a NonCritical Flange U Nothing L Nothing or U P or F Effective Section Restraint
I II 1 2 III 1
U L Nothing P or F
U L None F
Nothing or U PR or FR
IV
Nothing or U PR or FR
FR
Nothing or U L, P or F
PR
L, P, F, FR or PR L, P, F, FR or PR
FR or PR
FR
Note: The critical flange can change for each load case considered.
1B.12.4 Automated PMEMBER Design Calculations

The AS 4100 PMEMBER Design automates many design calculations, including those required for segment / sub-segment design. Table 1B.9-Automated PMEMBER AS 4100 Design Parameters and Calculations Automated Design Calculations PMEMBER Design Parameter ALB Comments
compression b member section constant per AS 4100 6.3.3. moment m modification factor per AS 4100 5.6.1.1. f tensile strength per u AS 4100 2.1.2.
ALM
Calculated based on moments distribution for individual segments and sub-segments. Based on nominal steel grade specified using SGR design parameter and section type. Based on nominal steel grade specified using SGR design parameter and section type. Based on section type.
FU
f yield stress per AS y 4100 2.1.1.
FYLD
residual stress category for AS 4100 Table 5.2 and AS 4100 Table 6.2.4. correction factor for distribution of forces in a tension member per AS 4100 7.3. Load height position for automated calculation of the kl load height factor per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2).
IST
KT
Based on section type and eccentric end connection specified using EEC design parameter. LHT is used for automating calculation of kl load height factors for segments and subsegments, per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2). See "Load Height Position" on page 47 for details.
LHT
Segment and subsegment layout.
PBRACE
Refer to the Segment and SubSegment Layout section above for details.
46 STAAD.Pro
Automated Design Calculations
PMEMBER Design Parameter SGR SKT
Comments
Nominal steel grade. k twist restraint factor t as per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(1). k load height factor as l per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2).
Based on section types. Based on effective end restraints for each segment / sub-segment.
SKL
Based on effective end restraints for each segment / sub-segment, and LHT design parameter (refer above). Based on effective end restraints for each segment / sub-segment. This is where the distinction between F and FR, as well as P and PR is used.
k lateral rotation r restraint factor as per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(3).
SKR
1B.12.5 Load Height Position

When LHT is set to 1.0 to specify a top flange load height position, STAAD.Pro takes the top to be the positive local y-axis of the member.
Note: This may not literally be the top flange for say a column or beam with a beta angle.
The local member axes can be viewed in the GUI by selecting Beam Orientation in the Diagrams Labels dialog (or Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut). To automate kl using AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2), the longitudinal position of the load also needs to be considered, i.e., as either within segment or at segment end. To determine which of these applies, the shear forces at the ends of each design segment / sub-segment is considered. If the shear force is found to have the same direction and magnitude at both ends, it is assumed that loads act at the segment end. If on the other hand the shear force at each end is found to have different directions or magnitudes, loads are assumed to act within the segment.
Note: The above method includes an allowance for the self-weight of the member to be
considered, as the self-weight always acts through the shear center. The net sum of the end shears is also used to determine if the load is acting in the positive or negative local member y-axis direction. If LHT is set to 1.0 for top flange loading, the net sum is used to determine whether the top flange loading is acting to stabilise or destabilise the member for lateral torsional buckling. Negative local y-axis net loads act to destabilise the
segments / sub-segments, whereas positive local y-axis net loads act to stabilise segments / sub-segments.
1B.12.6 Example
PARAMETER 1 CODE AUSTRALIAN DMAX 0.4 PMEMBER ALL DMIN 0.25 PMEMBER ALL KX 0.75 PMEMBER ALL KY 1.0 PMEMBER ALL LX 4.5 PMEMBER ALL LY 6.0 PMEMBER ALL LHT 0.0 PMEMBER ALL NSC 0.9 PMEMBER ALL NSF 1.0 PMEMBER ALL PBRACE BOTTOM 0.0 F 1.0 F PMEMBER ALL PBRACE TOP 0.0 P 0.5 L 1.0 P PMEMBER ALL SGR 0.0 PMEMBER ALL TRACK 2.0 PMEMBER ALL CHECK CODE PMEMBER ALL
48 STAAD.Pro
Section 2
British Codes
50 STAAD.Pro
2A. British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the British code BS8110-1:1997 Structural use of concrete - Part 1: Code of practice for design and construction. Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, the program will calculate the required reinforcement to resist the forces and moments. Design of members per BS8110-1:1997 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
Note: It is strongly recommended that you perform new concrete design using the RC
Designer Module. The following is provided to allow old STAAD files to be run.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to BS8110. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 2A.1-British Concrete Design BS 8110 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as BRITISH to invoke design per BS8110. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BRACE
0.0
0.0 = Column braced in both directions. 1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z direction only 2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y direction only 3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z directions
Parameter Name CLEAR
Default Value 20 mm
Description
Clearance of reinforcement measured from concrete surface to closest bar perimeter, in current units. Depth of concrete member, in current units. This value default is as provided as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. Face of support location at end of beam, in current units.
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must be

positive numbers. ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction for column design. Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in current units Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in current units (For slabs, it is for reinforcement in both directions) Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a, in current units. Applicable to shear bars in beams Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
ELZ
1.0 30 N/mm 2
FC
FYMAIN
460 N/mm 2
FYSEC
460 N/mm 2
MAX MAIN
50mm
MINMAIN 8mm
Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
MINSEC
8mm
Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to shear reinforcement in beams
MMAG
1.0
Factor by which column design moments are magnified
52 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name NSE CTION
Default Value 10
Description
Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moment for beam design. The upper limit is 20. Serviceability checks: 0.0 = No serviceability check performed. 1.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were continuous. 2.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were simply supported. 3.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were cantilever beams.
SERV
0.0
SFACE
0.0
Face of support location at start of beam, in current units. (Only applicable for shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for bending ) 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy slabs only -500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate Wood & Armer moments for design. A = skew angle considered in Wood & Armer equations where A is the angle in degrees.
SRA
0.0
TRACK
0.0
0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. Column design gives no detailed results. 1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0 List of design sag/hog moments and corresponding required steel area at each section of member
Parameter Name WIDTH
Default Value ZD
Description
Width of concrete member, in current units. This value default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
2A.2 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations

STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effects in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In this section, the code recognizes that additional moments induced by deflection are present and states that these 'secondary' moments are accounted for by the design formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the method used in the design for concrete in STAAD. Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects of these second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the design. In a PDELTA analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the structure, the additional moments induced in the structure are calculated. These can be compared to those calculated using the formulation of BS8110.

Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required input:
UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES *RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300MM WIDE X 450MM DEEP 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300. *CIRCULAR COLUMN 300MM DIAMETER 11 13 PR YD 300. * T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB) * - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP) 14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas ( AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition above.
54 STAAD.Pro
2A.4 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and locate the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is ten, unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed with cut-off lengths calculated to include required development length. Shear design as per BS8110 clause 3.4.5 has been followed and the procedure includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The program will scan from each end of the member and provide a total of two shear regions at each, depending on the change of shear distribution along the beam. If torsion is present, the program will also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4. A table of shear and/or combined torsion is then provided with critical shear. Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. The example output below shows a sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD. The following annotations apply:
l
LEVEL - Serial number of the bar center which may contain one or more bar groups. HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its local y axis. BAR INFO - Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and their size. FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcing bar. TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcing bar. ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook or (STA,END) continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END).
l l l l l
The following is an example TRACK 2.0 beam design output:

==================================================================== B E A M N O. 13 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE LEN - 1500. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 300. X 300. mm LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR mm mm mm STA END ------------------------------------------------------------------1 29. 4- 8 MM 467. 1500. NO YES 2 264. 4- 8 MM 0. 1158. YES NO REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY : ------------------------------SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) LOAD(+VE/-VE) ( MM ) (SQ. MM ) (KN-METER) 0. 0.0/ 184.4 0.00/ 19.71 0/ 3 125. 0.0/ 157.2 0.00/ 16.80 0/ 3 250. 0.0/ 129.9 0.00/ 13.89 0/ 3 375. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 10.98 0/ 3
500. 625. 750. 875. 1000. 1125. 1250. 1375. 1500. B E A M
0.0/ 0.0/ 0.0/ 117.0/ 117.0/ 117.0/ 117.0/ 136.3/ 165.3/
117.0 117.0 117.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.00/ 0.00/ 0.00/ 2.15/ 5.25/ 8.36/ 11.46/ 14.57/ 17.67/
8.07 5.16 2.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0/ 0/ 0/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/ 1/
3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0
N O. 13 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR PROVIDE SHEAR LINKS AS FOLLOWS |----------------------------------------------------------------| | FROM - TO | MAX. SHEAR | LOAD | LINKS | NO. | SPACING C/C | |----------------|------------|------|-------|-----|-------------| | END 1 749 mm | 24.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187 mm | | 749 END 2 | 24.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187 mm | |----------------------------------------------------------------| ___ 7J____________________ 1500.X 300.X 300_____________________ 8J____ | | ||========================================================= | | 4No8 H 264. 0.TO 1158 | | | | | 5*8 c/c187 | | | 5*8 c/c187 | | 4No8 H |29. 467.TO 1500 | | | ====================================================|| | | |___________________________________________________________________________| _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ | | | | | | | | | oooo | | oooo | | oooo | | | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | | | | oooo | | oooo | | oooo | | | | | | | | | |_______________| |_______________| |_______________| |_______________|
2A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load and is displayed. The requirements of BS8110 Part 1 - section 3.8 are followed, with the user having control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as described in Table 2A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is short or slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial bending, the recommendations of 3.8.4.5 of the code are considered. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative results in certain cases. Below is a typical column design results.
56 STAAD.Pro
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load case.
==================================================================== C O L U M N N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM2 SQRE SIZE - 300. X 300. MM, AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 940. SQ. MM. BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION ---------------------------------------------------12 10 MM 1.047 1 EACH END (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE) ---------------------------------------------------|BRACED /SLENDER in z E.L.z= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)| |BRACED /SLENDER in y E.L.y= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)| |END MOMS. MZ1= -12 MZ2= -24 MY1= -15 MY2= -31| |SLENDERNESS MOMTS. KNM: MOMZ= 2 MOMY= 2 | |DESIGN LOADS KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL LOAD= 74| |DESIGNED CAP. KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL CAP.= 74| ----------------------------------------------------
2A.6 Slab Design

Slabs are designed to BS8110 specifications. To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with Section 5.52 of the Technical Reference Manual. A typical example of element design output is shown in below. The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement ( Fig. 4.1 ). The following parameters are those applicable to slab design:
l l l
FYMAIN - Yield stress for all reinforcing steel FC - Concrete grade CLEAR - Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on both surfaces. SRA - Parameter which denotes the angle of the required transverse reinforcement relative to the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of Wood & Armer design moments.
Other parameters, as shown in Table 2A.1 are not applicable.
2A.6.1 Wood & Armer equations

Ref: R H WOOD CONCRETE 1968 (FEBRUARY) If the default value of zero is used for the parameter SRA, the design will be based on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set
Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce Wood & Armer moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the element local x-axis to the reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16 mm in both directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior face. Typical output is as follows:
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS ----------------------------------------MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS. PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS: FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD (mm2/m) (kN-m/m) (mm2/m) (kN-m/m) -------------------------------------------------------------------------| WOOD & ARMER RESOLVED MOMENTS FOR ELEMENT: 47 UNITS: METRE kN | | LOAD MX MY MXY MX* MY*/Ma* ANGLE | | 1 -10.441 -13.347 1.270 0.000 0.000 0.000 TOP | | 1 -10.441 -13.347 1.270 -11.710 -14.617 0.000 BOTT | | 3 -9.541 -11.995 0.986 0.000 0.000 0.000 TOP | | 3 -9.541 -11.995 0.986 -10.527 -12.981 0.000 BOTT | -------------------------------------------------------------------------47 TOP : 195. 0.00 / 0 195. 0.00 / 0 BOTT: 229. -11.71 / 1 329. -14.62 / 1
2A.7 Shear Wall Design

Design of shear walls in accordance with BS 8110 has been added to the features of the program. The program implements the provisions of BS 8110 for the design of shear walls. It performs in-plane shear, compression, as well as in-plane and out-of-plane bending design of reinforcing. The shear wall is modeled by a single or a combination of Surface elements. The use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information. The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for user specified number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is 10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) reinforcing and the link required due to out-of-plane shear.
58 STAAD.Pro
2A.7.1 Design Parameters

START SHEARWALL DESIGN CODE BRITISH shearwall-parameters DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list END The next table explains parameters used in the shear wall design command block above.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 2A.2-Shear Wall Design Parameters Parameter Name FYMAIN Default Value 460 Mpa 30 Mpa Description
Yield strength of steel, in current units. Compressive strength of concrete, in current units. Minimum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Maximum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
FC
HMIN
HMAX
36
VMIN
VMAX
36
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Minimum size of links (range 6mm 16mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Maximum size of links (range 6mm 16mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Clear concrete cover, in current units. Reinforcement placement mode:
EMIN
EMAX
36
LMIN
LMAX
16
CLEAR
25 mm
TWOLAYERED
0. single layer, each direction 1. two layers, each direction
KSLENDER
1.5
Slenderness factor for finding effective height.
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation. 2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command. 3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the line 2 TO 5GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints. 4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively. 5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and END . The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For British code the parameter is BRITISH. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST
60 STAAD.Pro
command is followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear wall components.
2A.7.2 Technical Overview

The program implements provisions of section 3.9 of BS 8110:Part 1:1997 and relevant provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The wall is designed as unbraced reinforced wall. The following steps are performed for each of the horizontal sections of the wall set using the SURFACE DIVISION command (see Description above).
Checking of slenderness limit

The slenderness checking is done for out-of-plane direction. For out-of-plane direction, the wall is assumed to be simply supported. Hence, the provisions of clause 3.9.3.2.2 and 3.9.4.2 are applicable. The default effective height is 1.5 times the clear height. User can change the effective height. The limit for slenderness is as per table 3.23 for unbraced wall, which is taken as 30.
Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall force output)
Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and carrying loads to the foundation. Extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension (concentrated) reinforcement distance, d, is taken as 0.8 horizontal length of the wall. Flexural design of the wall is carried out in accordance with the provisions of clause no. 3.4.4. The flexural (concentrated vertical ) reinforcing is located at both ends (edges) of the length of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal length on each side. This length is inclusive of the thickness of the wall. Minimum reinforcements are according to table 3.25.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2. Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8. The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into consideration the effect of axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and checked against the minimum area as per clause no. 3.12.7.4.
Design for compression and out-of-plane vertical bending

This is denoted by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force output.
The wall panel is designed as simply supported (at top and bottom), axially loaded with outof-plane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections occurring at midheight. Design is done as per clause no. 3.8.4 for axially loaded column with uni-axial bending. The minimum reinforcement percentage is as per table 3.25. The maximum reinforcement percentage of vertical reinforcement is as per clause no. 3.12.6.3. Links if necessary are calculated as per the provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane shear (denoted by Qy in the shear wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The design shear stress is calculated as per 3.4.5.2 and shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per table 3.8 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7 and the provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall force output)
The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane shear is checked against the whole section subjected to out-of-plane bending and axial load. The axial load in this case is the in-plane shear. The section is again designed as axially loaded column under uni-axial bending as per the provisions of clause 3.8.4. Extra reinforcement in the form of horizontal bars, if necessary, is reported.
2A.7.3 Example
The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the shear wall design.
. . SET DIVISION 12 SURFACE INCIDENCES 2 5 37 34 SUR 1 19 16 65 68 SUR 2 11 15 186 165 SUR 3 10 6 138 159 SUR 4 . . . SURFACE PROPERTY
62 STAAD.Pro
1 TO 4 THI 18 SUPPORTS 1 7 14 20 PINNED 2 TO 5 GEN PIN 6 TO 10 GEN PIN 11 TO 15 GEN PIN 19 TO 16 GEN PIN . . SURFACE CONSTANTS E 3150 POISSON 0.17 DENSITY 8.68E-005 ALPHA 5.5E-006 . . START SHEARWALL DES CODE BRITISH UNIT NEW MMS FC 25 FYMAIN 460 TWO 1 VMIN 12 HMIN 12 EMIN 12 DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4 END
2A.7.4 Shear Wall Design With Opening

The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are available for user selected locations. Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall panels.
Shear wall set-up

Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing
divisions of four edges of the opening(s). SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1, ..., sdj RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION od1, ..., odk Where: n1, ..., ni -node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall, s -surface ordinal number, sd1, ..., sdj - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node distance on the surface perimeter, x1 y1 z1 (...)- od1, ..., odk- coordinates of the corners of the opening, divisions along edges of the opening.
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-tonode segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the SET DIVISION command). Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows: SURFACE DIVISION X xd SURFACE DIVISION Y yd Where: xd - number of divisions along X axis, yd - number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface
where output is requested. The output is provided for sections located between division segments. For example, if the number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the center of the edge).
Stress/force output printing

Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall. The general format of the command is as follows: PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, ...,si Where: - local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
64 STAAD.Pro
a - distance along the axis from start of the member to the full crosssection of the wall, d1, d2 - coordinates in the direction orthogonal to , delineating a fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is desired.** s1, ...,si - list of surfaces for output generation ** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If command AT

is omitted, output is provided for all sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number of sections will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. If the BETWEEN command is omitted, the output is generated based on full cross-section width.
Definition of wall panels

Input syntax for panel definition is as follows: START PANEL DEFINITION SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 ENDPANEL DEFINITION where: i - ordinal surface number, j - ordinal panel number, ptype - WALL x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the panel
Note: Design of COLUMN and BEAM panels is currently not available.
Shear wall design

The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows: START SHEARWALL DESIGN (...) DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT c) LIST s TRACK tr
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN Parameter TRACK specifies how detailed the design output should be: 0 - indicates a basic set of results data (default), 1 - full design output will be generated. If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. a. No panel definition. Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted bars. b. Panels have been defined. Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section located at a distance c from the start of the panel.
66 STAAD.Pro
2B. British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5950-1:2000 Structural use of steelwork in building - Part 1: Code of practice for design - Rolled and welded sections, Incorporating Corrigendum No. 1. Design of members per BS 5950-1:2000 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of limit state design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit state are recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built into the program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual design process. See section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these sections. In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees, composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes, and angles, there is a provision for user provided tables. STAAD.Pro 2006 and later have the additional option to design tapered I shaped (wide flange) beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See Section 2B.13 for a complete description.
Single Angle Sections

Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you must consider four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ KZ. The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or RA specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).
Figure 2B.1 - Axis orientation for single angles
ST angle and USER table angles
RAangle

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. Any user-defined section may be specified, except for GENERAL or PRISMATIC sections. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
68 STAAD.Pro
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available:
2B.4.1 Universal Beams, Columns, and Piles

All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following examples illustrate the designation scheme.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54 33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287 100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186
2B.4.2 Rolled Steel Joists

Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with the weight omitted. In those cases where two joists have the same specifications but different weights, the lighter section should be specified with an "A" at the end.
10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127 1 2 TA ST JO127X114A
2B.4.3 Channels
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may be used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102 55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76

Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter "D" in front of the section name will specify a double channel (e.g., D CH102X51, D CH203X89, etc.)
51 52 53 TA D CH152X89 70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
(specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units)
Note: Face-to-face double channels can not be used in a CHECK CODE command.
2B.4.5 Tee Sections

Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the universal beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22
(tee cut from UB254X102X22)
2B.4.6 Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or reversed angle, RA specification. Note, however, that only angles specified with an RA specification can be designed. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V axis specified in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5 23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
"SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle sections.
Note: If the section is defined from a Double Angle User Table, then the section
properties must be defined with an 11th value which defines the radius of gyration about an individual sections principal v-v axis (See Technical Reference Manual, 5.19 User Steel Table Specification)

To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP followed by the numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the
70 STAAD.Pro
value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP213.2
(specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness) Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units) Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
2B.4.9 Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections (Tubes)

Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:
Figure 2B.2 - BSI tube nomenclature
Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by any table designations.
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 (A TUBE THAT HAS A HEIGHT OF 8, A WIDTH OF 6, AND A WALL THICKNESS OF 0.5 LENGTH UNITS)
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
2B.5 Member Capacities

The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic moment of the section. This is a significant departure from the standard practice followed in BS449, in which the limiting condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme fibres of a given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as the basic measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to the influence of local buckling on moment capacity. To assist this, sections are classified as either Class 1, plastic, Class 2, compact, Class 3, semi-compact or Class 4, slender, which governs the decision whether to use the plastic or the elastic moment capacity. The section classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for both hot rolled and built up sections. In addition, for slender sections, BS5950 recommends the use of a 'stress reduction factor' to reduce the design strength. This factor is again a function of the geometry of the section and is automatically determined by STAAD for use in the design process.
2B.5.1 Axial Tension

In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the effective area as outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member per this procedure, based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1), proceeding with member selection or code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness limitations for tension members.
2B.5.2 Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the member is greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is determined according to the compressive strength, which is a function of the slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behavior. Based on data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Annex C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson constant ( representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength. A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members are no longer required to be checked for slenderness limitations, however, this option can be included by specifying a MAIN parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still applied on double angles checked as battened struts as per clause 4.7.9.
72 STAAD.Pro
2B.5.3 Axially Loaded Members With Moments

In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the member must be calculated about both principal axes and all axial forces must be taken into account. If the section is plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities will constitute the basic moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. For semi-compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact sections with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to accommodate the shear loads. The STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates the procedure outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate moment capacities of the section. For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity. For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction formulae must be satisfied Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the Member Buckling Resistance check (4.8.3.3 ). Three types of approach for the member buckling resistance check have been outlined in BS5950:2000 - the simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2) and Annex I1 for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the more appropriate criteria can be used. Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m m and m , can be specified by the user or x y yx calculated by the program. Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial forces are checked using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also carries out cross checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic sections may be more critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the presence of moments.
2B.5.4 Shear
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the section is greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the procedure outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if appropriate, considering the appropriate shear area for the section specified.
2B.5.5 Lateral Torsional Buckling

Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used in BS5950, members are likely to experience relatively large deflections. This effect, coupled with lateral torsional buckling, may result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence, lateral torsional buckling must be considered carefully.
The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has been incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this procedure, for a member subjected to moments about the major axis, the 'equivalent uniform moment' on the section must be less than the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance moment, the procedure outlined in Annex B.2 has been implemented for all sections with the exception of angles. In Annex B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function of the elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent slenderness, which are calculated within the program; and the equivalent moment factor, m , which is determined as a function of the loading configuration and the nature of LT the load (stabilizing, destabilizing, etc).
2B.5.6 RHS Sections - Additional Provisions

Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I. recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In such cases, the following expressions are used to calculate the reduced plastic moduli: For n 2t(D-2t)/A
S rx =
A 2D (B t ) 1 n 4(B t ) A
2
+ n 1
For n 2t(B-2t)/A
S ry =
A 2B (D t ) 1 n 4(D t ) A
2
+ n 1

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5950 are listed in table 2B.1 along with their default values.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 2B.1-British Steel Design BS5950:2000 Parameters Parameter Name Default Value Description Must be specified as BS5950 CODE Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. AD Depth at end/2 Distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint. See G.2.3
74 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Beam divisions 0. Design only for end moments or those locations specified by the SECTION command. 1. Calculate forces and moments at 12th points along the member. Establish the location where Mz is the maximum. Use the forces and moments at that location. Clause checks at one location. 2. Same as BEAM = 1.0 but additional checks are carried out for each end. 3. Calculate moments at 12th points along the member. Clause checks at each location including the ends of the member. Deflection check method. See Note 1 below. 0. Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection occurs within the span between DJ1 and DJ2. 1. Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection is of the cantilever type (see note below)
BEAM
3.0
CAN
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Moment calculation: 1. BS5950 per clause B.2.5 (continuous) to calculate Mb. 2. To calculate Mbs (simple) as per Clause 4.7.7 as opposed to Mb.
CB
1.0
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check, TRACK 4.0)
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local deflection See Note 1d below. Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length." See Note 1 below.
DJ1
DJ2
End Joint of member 100.0cm 0.0 cm
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length." See Note 1 below.
DMAX * DMIN *
Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2 0.0 = Fail ratio uses MIN of 4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and Annex I1 checks. 1.0 = Fail ratio uses MAX of 4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and Annex I1 checks.
ESTIFF
0.0
KY
1.0
K factor value in local y - axis. Usually, this is the minor axis. K factor value in local z - axis. Usually, this is the major axis.
KZ
1.0
76 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Valid range from 0 7 and 10. The values correspond to table 25 of BS5950 for fastener conditions. See note 2 below.
LEG
0.0
Maximum of Lyy LVV * and Lzz (Lyy is a term used by BS5950) Used in conjunction with LEG for Lvv as per BS5950 table 25 for double angles. See note 6 below.
LY *
Member Length
Length in local y - axis (current units) to calculate (KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness ratio. Length in local z - axis (current units) to calculate (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness ratio. Equivalent moment factor for lateral torsional buckling as defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4 Equivalent moment factor for major axis flexural buckling as defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4 Equivalent moment factor for minor axis flexural buckling as defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4 Equivalent moment factor for minor axis lateral flexural buckling as defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4 Net section factor for tension members. Transverse stiffener spacing (a in Annex H1)
LZ *
Member Length
MLT
1.0
MX
1.0
MY
1.0
MYX
1.0
NSF
1.0
PNL *
0.0
0.0 = Infinity Any other value used in the calculations.
Parameter Name PY *
Default Value Set according to steel grade (SGR)
Description
Design strength of steel Slenderness limit for members with compression forces, effective length/ radius of gyration, for a given axis: 0.0 = Slenderness not performed.
MAIN
0.0
1.0 = Main structural member (180) 2.0 = Secondary member. (250) 3.0 = Bracing etc (350)
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio of the actual capacities. Controls the sections to try during a SELECT process. 0.0 = Try every section of the same type as original 1.0 = Try only those sections with a similar name as original, e.g., if the original is an HEA 100, then only HEA sections will be selected, even if there are HEMs in the same table.
SAME**
0.0
78 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Identify Section type for section classification 0.0 = Rolled Section
SBLT
0.0
1.0 = Built up Section 2.0 = Cold formed section Specifies a load case number to provide the sway loading forces in clause 4.8.3.3.4 (See additional notes) Steel Grade per BS4360 0.0 = Grade S 275
SWAY
none
SGR
0.0
1.0 = Grade S 355 2.0 = Grade S 460 3.0 = As per GB 1591 16 Mn 0.0 = Elastic stress analysis
TB
0.0 1.0 = Plastic stress analysis Output details 0.0 = Suppress all member capacity info. 1.0 = Print all member capacities. 2.0 = Print detailed design sheet. 4.0 = Deflection Check (separate check to main select / check code)
TRACK
0.0
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Factor applied to unsupported length for Lateral Torsional Buckling effective length per section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950. Unsupported Length for calculating Lateral Torsional Buckling resistance moment section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950. Weld Type, see AISC steel design 1.0 = Closed sections. Welding on one side only (except for webs of wide flange and tee sections) 2.0 = Open sections. Welding on both sides (except pipes and tubes)
UNF
1.0
UNL *
Member Length
1.0 closed WELD 2.0 open
* current units must be considered. **For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
Note: There was an NT parameter in STAAD.Pro 2005 build 1003 which is now
automatically calculated during the design as it is load case dependant.
2B.6.1 Notes
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual. If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the
80 STAAD.Pro
member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member. Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2) Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as the case may be. Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the Deflection Length will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the Deflection Length may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.

c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local deflections will be measured from original member line. d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no default value for DFF. e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel design. 2. LEG follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table concerns the fastener restraint conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and channels for slenderness.
The following values are available: Table 2B.2- LEG Parameter values Clause Bold Configuration (a) - 2 bolts 4.7.10.2 Single Angle (b) - 1 bolts long leg short leg (a) - 2 bolts long leg short leg (b) - 1 bolts 4.7.10.3 Double Angles (c) - 2 bolts short leg long leg (d) - 1 bolts short leg (a) - 2 or more rows of bolts 4.7.10.4 Channels (b) - 1 row of bolts 4.7.10.5 Tee Sections (a) - 2 or more rows of bolts (b) - 1 row of bolts 0.0 1.0 0.0 4.0 1.0 5.0 0.0 long leg long leg 6.0 1.0 7.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 long leg short leg 3.0 0.0 Leg short leg LEG Parameter 1.0
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member. To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member. The following list indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950 connection definition: Clause 4.7.10.2 Single Angle: a. 2 Bolts: Short leg = 1.0, Long Leg = 3.0 b. 1 Bolt: Short Leg = 0.0, Long Leg = 2.0 For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as: La = KY * KY
82 STAAD.Pro
Lb = KZ * LZ The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength p for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified c angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength p for the stronger principal axis.
c
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used. For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh value, r , should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values vv corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair. 3. PY Steel Design Strength The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for an entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for a particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and particular element considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and the program should be allowed to ascertain the appropriate value. 4. UNL, LY, and LZ Relevant Effective Length The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ (which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even though they are often the same values. The former relates to compression flange restraint for lateral torsional buckling while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for compression checks. 5. TRACK Control of Output Formats When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0, or 2.0, member capacities will be printed in design related output (code check or member selection) in kilonewtons per square meter. TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a different load list to the main code check. The members that are to be checked must have the parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 set.
6. MX, MY, MYX, and MLT Equivalent Moment Factors The values for the equivalent moment factors can either be specified directly by the user as a positive value between 0.4 and 1.0 for MX, MY and MYX and 0.44 and 1.0 for MLT.
The program can be used to calculate the values for the equivalent moment factors by defining the design member with a GROUP command (see the Technical Reference Manual section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by Specification of GROUPS). The nodes along the beam can then be defined as the location of restraint points with J settings. Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the upper flange restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower flange restrained (negative local Y) with a L setting. For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single continuous member as shown below:
To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called MainBeam:
START GROUP DEFINITION MEMBER _MAINBEAM 11 2 38 12 3 END GROUP DEFINITION
Note: This can be done in the User Interface by selecting Tools > Create New
Group. Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that: Joint 1 = Node 3 Joint 2 = Node 1 Joint 3 = Node 33
84 STAAD.Pro
Joint 4 = Node 14 Joint 5 = Node 7 Joint 6 = Node 2 a. Consider MX, MY and MYX Say that this member has been restrained in its major axis (local Y) only at the ends. In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the ends and also at node number 33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling, it has only been restrained at its ends. Hence: For the major axis, local Y axis: MX _MainBeam J1 J6 For the minor axis, local Z axis: MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6 For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis: MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6 b. Consider MLT Say that this member has been restrained at its ends against lateral torsional buckling and the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and only the lower flange at node number 7, (joint 5). Hence: MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6 To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L at joint 14:
y
MY _groupname J1 J4 J6 7. SWAY Sway Loadcase This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway load case in the context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to represent the k M amp s mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add the forces from this load case to the forces of the other load case it is designed for. Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a separate load case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:
Parameter Name SWAY
Default Value
Description
(load case number)
ALL MEMBER (member list) _(group name)
Example
SWAY 5 MEM 1 TO 10 SWAY 6 _MAINBEAMS
2B.7 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l
Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load cases. Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with the list of members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements.
2B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per BS5950. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking. When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code (like any of the BS5950 specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition occurs). Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, except profiles defined in GENERAL and ISECTION tables.
86 STAAD.Pro
Note: PRISMATIC sections are also not acceptable steel sections for design per BS5950 in
STAAD.Pro. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as defined in section 2B.8 Code Checking. Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic or as above limitations for code checking. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is performed. TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the BS5950 code which governs the design. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING provides the load case number, which governed the design FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern. TRACK If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will print the allowable bending capacities in compression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in compression (PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design results as shown in section 2B.9. An example of each TRACK setting follows:
2B.10.1 Example output for TRACK 0.0

MEMBER RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3 179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00 TABLE

MEMBER RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3 179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00 |---------------------------------------------------------------------| | CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 | |MCZ= 519.4 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2455.9 PT= 0.0 MB= 435.0 PV= 600.1| | BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT = 1.00, mx = 1.00, my = 1.00, myx = 1.00 | | PZ= 3975.00 FX/PZ = 0.05 MRZ= 516.9 MRY= 234.3 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------| TABLE

MEMBER RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3 179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00 ======================================================================= MATERIAL DATA TABLE
88 STAAD.Pro
Grade of steel = S 275 Modulus of elasticity = 210 kN/mm2 Design Strength (py) = 265 N/mm2 SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm) Member Length = 600.00 Gross Area = 150.00 Net Area = 127.50 Eff. Area = 150.00 z-z axis y-y axis Moment of inertia : 27700.004 9060.001 Plastic modulus : 1960.000 895.000 Elastic modulus : 1761.526 589.460 Effective modulus : 1960.000 895.000 Shear Area : 103.471 37.740 DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950-1/2000 Section Class : PLASTIC Squash Load : 3975.00 Axial force/Squash load : 0.045 z-z axis y-y axis Compression Capacity : 3551.7 2455.9 Moment Capacity : 519.4 234.3 Reduced Moment Capacity : 516.9 234.3 Shear Capacity : 1645.2 600.1 BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m) (axis nomenclature as per design code) x-x axis y-y axis Slenderness : 44.153 77.203 Radius of gyration (cm) : 13.589 7.772 Effective Length : 6.000 6.000 LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m): 435.00, 6.000 LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm): mLT = 1.00 : mx = 1.00 : my = 1.00 : myx = 1.00 Mlt = 334.46 : Mx = 334.46 : My = 0.00 : My = 0.00 CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m): CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.143 3 85.6 BS-4.3.6 0.769 3 85.6 334.5 BS-4.7 (C) 0.098 1 239.7 BS-4.8.3.2 0.647 3 179.7 85.6 0.0 334.5 0.0 BS-4.8.3.3.1 0.842 3 179.7 334.5 0.0 BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.842 3 179.7 334.5 0.0 ANNEX I.1 0.714 3 179.7 334.5 0.0 Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
2B.11 Plate Girders

Sections will be considered for the Plate Girder checks (BS 5950 Section 4.4) if d/t > 70 for rolled sections or d/t >62 for welded sections. The parameter SBLT should be used to identify sections as rolled or welded; see the parameter list for more information. If the plate girder has intermediate stiffeners, the spacing is set with the PNL parameter. These are then used to check against the code clauses 4.4.3.2 - Minimum web thickness for serviceability and 4.4.3.3 - Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange buckling. The following printout is then included if a TRACK 2.0 output is selected:
Shear Buckling check is required: Vb = 1070 kN : qw = 118 N/mm2 d = 900 mm : t = 10 mm : a = 200 mm : pyf = 275 N/mm2 BS-4.4.3.2 status = PASS : BS-4.4.3.3 status = PASS
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause 4.4.5.2 - Simplified method and the result is included in the ratio checks.
2B.12 Composite Sections

Sections that have been defined as acting compositely with a concrete flange either from a standard database section using the CM option, or from a modified user WIDE FLANGE database with the additional composite parameters, cannot be designed with BS5950:2000.
2B.13 Design of Tapered Beams

Sections will be checked as tapered members provided that are defined either as a Tapered I section or from a USERtable. Example using a Tapered I section:
UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTY 1 TO 5 TAPERED 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4
Example using a USER table:

START USER TABLE TABLE 1 UNIT CM ISECTION 1000MM_TAPER 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4 0 0 0 750MM_TAPER 75 2.5 50 25 4 25 4 0 0 0 END
You must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange using the parameter UNL. The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter. The beam is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional Buckling check which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check.
90 STAAD.Pro
2B.13.1 Design Equations

A beam defined with tapered properties as defined above will be checked as a regular wide flange (e.g., UB or UC), except that the following is used in place of clause 4.3.6, the lateral torsional buckling check.
2B.13.2 Check Moment for Taper Members as per clause G.2.2

The following criterion is checked at each defined check position in the length of the member defined by the BEAM parameter. Mxi Mbi (1 - Fc/Pc) Where: F is the longitudinal compression at the check location;
c
M is the buckling resistance moment M from 4.3.6 for an equivalent bi b slenderness , see G.2.4.2, based on the appropriate modulus S, S , Z or Z of TB eff eff the cross-section at the point i considered; M is the moment about the major axis acting at the point i considered;
xi
P is the compression resistance from 4.7.4 for a slenderness . , see G.2.3, c TC y based on the properties of the minimum depth of cross-section within the segment length L
2B.13.3 G.2.3 Slenderness lTC

TC = y Where:
2 1 + (2a / h s) y= 2 2 1 + 2 a / h + 0.05( / x ) ( ) s
0.5
= Ly /ry Where: a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint, h is the distance between the shear centers of the flanges;
s
L is the length of the segment;

y
r is the radius of gyration for buckling about the minor axis;

y
x is the torsional index
2B.13.4 G.2.4.2 Equivalent slenderness ITB for tapered members

TB = cntt Where, for a two-flange haunch:
4a / h s vt = 2 2 1 + 2 a / h + 0.05( / x ) s) (
0.5
Where: C is the taper factor, see G.2.5;
2B.13.5 G.2.5 Taper factor

For an I-section with D 1.2B and x 20, the taper factor, c, is as follows:
c = 1+
3 D max x 9 D m in 2/3
Where: D is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure max G.3; D is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure min G.3; x is the torsional index of the minimum depth cross-section, see 4.3.6.8 Otherwise, c is taken as 1.0 (unity).
92 STAAD.Pro
2C. British Codes - Design per BS5400

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5400:Part 3:1982 Steel, concrete and composite bridges Part 3. Code of practice for design of steel bridges and Amd No. 4051 and Amd No. 6488. Design of members per BS 5400:Part 3:1982 requires the STAAD British Specialized Design Codes SELECTCode Pack. It does not come as standard with British versions.
2C.1 General Comments

The British Standard, BS5400 adopts the limit state design philosophy and is applicable to steel, concrete, and composite construction. The code is in ten parts covering various aspects of bridge design. The implementation of part 3, Code of practice for design of steel bridges, in STAAD is restricted in its scope to simply supported spans. It is assumed that the depth remains constant and both construction and composite stages of steel I-Sections can be checked. The following sections describe in more detail features of the design process currently available in STAAD.
2C.2 Shape Limitations

The capacity of sections could be limited by local buckling if the ratio of flange outstand to thickness is large. In order to prevent this, the code sets limits to the ratio as per clause 9.3.2. In the event of exceeding these limits, the design process will terminate with reference to the clause.
2C.3 Section Class

Sections are further defined as compact or noncompact. In the case of compact sections, the full plastic moment capacity can be attained. In the case of noncompact sections, local buckling of elements may occur prior to reaching the full moment capacity and for this reason the extreme fibre stresses are limited to first yield. In STAAD, section types are determined as per clause 9.3.7 and the checks that follow will relate to the type of section considered.
2C.4 Moment Capacity

Lateral torsional buckling may occur if a member has unrestrained elements in compression. The code deals with this effect by limiting the compressive stress to a value depending on the slenderness parameter which is a modified form of the ratio Le/Ry. Le is the effective length governed by the provision of lateral restraints satisfying the requirements of clause 9.12.1. Once the allowable compressive stress is determined then the moment capacity appropriate to the section type can be calculated. STAAD takes the effective length as that provided by the user, defaulting to the length of the member during construction stage and as zero, assuming full restraint throughout, for the composite stage. The program then proceeds to calculate the allowable compressive stress based on appendix G7 from which the moment capacity is then determined.
2C.5 Shear Capacity

The shear capacity, as outlined in clause is a function of the limiting shear strength, l, which is dependant on the slenderness ratio. STAAD follows the iterative procedure of appendix G8 to determine the limiting shear strength of the web panel. The shear capacity is then calculated based on the formula given under clause 9.9.2.2.
2C.6 Design Parameters

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5400 are listed in table 2C.1. Depending on the value assigned to the WET parameter, you can determine the stage under consideration. For a composite design check, taking into consideration the construction stage, two separate analyses are required. In the first, member properties are non-composite and the WET parameter is set to 1.0 . In the second, member properties should be changed to composite and the WET parameter set to 2.0. Member properties for composite or noncomposite sections should be specified from user provided tables (refer to section 5.19 of the manual for specification of user tables). Rolled sections, composite or non-composite, come under WIDE FLANGE section-type and built-up sections under ISECTION. When specifying composite properties the first parameter is assigned a negative value and four additional parameters provided giving details of the concrete section. See user table examples provided.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 2C.1-BS5400 Design Parameters Parameter Name ESTIFF Default Value 0 Description
Specify the criteria used for the design of compression members with moments. 0. Member passes if either Cl. 4.8.3.3.1 or Cl. 4.8.3.3.2 check. 1. Member passes if both Cl. 4.8.3.3.1 and Cl. 4.8.3.3.2 check.
KY
1.0
K value for bending about Y-axis. Usually this is minor axis. K value for bending about Z-axis. Usually this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for bending about Y-axis, in current units of length. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for bending about Z-axis, in current units of length.
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length Member Length
LZ
94 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name MAIN
Default Value 1.0 Grade of concrete: 1. 30 N/mm2 2. 40 N/mm2 3. 50 N/mm2
Description
NSF PY
1.0 *
Net section factor for tension members. Yield stress of steel. Set according to Design Strength of steel SGR
RATIO SBLT
1 0.0
Permissible ratio of actual to allowable stresses. Steel 0.0 = Rolled Section 1.0 = Built up Section
SGR
0.0
Steel Grade per BS4360 0. Grade 43 1. Grade 50 2. Grade 55
TRACK
1.0
Used to control the level of detail in the output 0. Suppress all member capacities 1. Print all member capacities
UNL
Member Length
Unsupported length for calculating allowable compressive bending stress, in current units of length. Used to specify the stage of construction. 0. Wet stage with no data saved for composite stage 1. Wet stage with data saved for composite stage 2. Composite and wet stage combined 3. Composite stage only
WET
0.0
2C.7 Composite Sections

The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the standard sections definition (refer to Section 5.20.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details). This is purely for analysis and for obtaining the right section properties. It uses the American requirement of 18 times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For more control with British sections two new options are available in user provided tables.
2C.7.1 Wide Flange Composite

Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE, 4 additional values can now be provided. The first is the width of concrete to the left of center of the steel web (b1). The second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular ratio. The above values are accepted in the program by adding a '-' at the first position on the first line of data. The program now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described above. If (-) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2 breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate.
2C.7.2 I Section
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.
2C.7.3 Example
UNIT CM WIDE FLANGE C45752 -66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223 150 150 30 10 ISECTION PG9144 -92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730 40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and are available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite design is not available in this portion of STAAD.
96 STAAD.Pro
2D. British Codes - Design per BS8007

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the British code BS8007:1987 Design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. It is recommended that the design of the structure is carried out according to BS8110, unless modified by the recommendations given in BS8007. Design of members per BS8007:1987 requires the STAAD British Specialized Design Codes SELECTCode Pack. It does not come as standard with British versions. The information in this section is to be used in conjunction with the BS8110. See "British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110" on page 51
2D.1 Design Process

The design process is carried out in three stages. 1. Ultimate Limit States The program is structured so that ultimate design is first carried out in accordance with recommendations given in BS8110. All active design load cases are considered in turn and a tabulated output is printed showing possible reinforcement arrangements. 12, 16, and 20 mm bars are considered with possible spacings from 100,125,150,175, and 200 mm. Within these spacings, the layout providing the closest area of steel is printed under each bar size. Longitudinal and transverse moments together with critical load cases for both hogging and sagging moments are also printed. Minimum reinforcement is in any case checked and provided in each direction. Wood & Armer moments may also be included in the design. 2. Serviceability Limit States In the second stage, flexural crack widths under serviceability load cases are calculated. The first and every other occurring design load case is considered as a serviceability load case and crack widths are calculated based on bar sizes and spacings proposed at the ultimate limit state check. Crack widths due to longitudinal and transverse moments are calculated directly under bars, midway between and at corners. A tabulated output indicating critical serviceability load cases and moments for top and bottom of the slab is then produced. 3. Thermal crack widths Finally thermal, crack width calculations are carried out. Through available parameters, the user is able to provide information on the type of slab, temperature range and crack width limits. Surface zone depths are determined based on the type of slab and critical areas of reinforcements are calculated and printed in a tabulated form. Four bar sizes are considered and for each, max crack spacing, Smax and crack widths are calculated for the critical reinforcements and printed under each bar size.
2D. British Codes - Design per BS8007
Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is also printed under each bar size.
2D.2 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to BS8007. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used values for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2D.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 2D.1-BS8007 Design Parameters Parameter Default Name Value FC 30 N/mm 2 20 mm Description
Concrete grade, in current units of length and force. Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar, in current units of length. This is considered the same on both surfaces. Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy - slabs on 500. orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate Wood & Armer moments for design. A* Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer equations. A* is any angle in degrees.
CLEAR
SRA
0.0
SCON
Parameter which indicates the type of slab ee. ground or suspended as defined in BS8007 1 = Suspended Slab 2 = Ground Slab
TEMP
30C
Temperature range to be considered in thermal crack width calculations Limiting thermal crack width, in current units of length.
CRACK *
0.2 mm
* Provided in current unit systems
98 STAAD.Pro
2D.3 Structural Model

Structural slabs that are to be designed to BS8007 must be modeled using finite elements. Refer to Section 1.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for information on the sign convention used in the program for defining elements It is recommended to connect elements in such a way that the positive local z axis points outwards away, from the center of the container. In this manner the "Top" of elements will consistently fall on the outer surface and internal pressure loads will act in the positive direction of the local z axis. An example of a rectangular tank is provided to demonstrate the above procedure. Element properties are based on the thickness given under ELEMENT PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required input for a 300 mm slab modeled with ten elements.
UNIT MM ELEMENT PROPERTIES 1 TO 10 THI 300.0
2D.4 Wood & Armer Moments

This is controlled by the SRA parameter. If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce Wood & Armer moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is given in degrees, measured between the local element x axis anti-clockwise (positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format.
100 STAAD.Pro
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5950-5:1998 Structural use of steelwork in building - Part 5: Code of practice for design of cold formed thin gauge sections . The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as an option. Design of members per BS 5950-1:2000 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
2E.1 Cross-Sectional Properties

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the The Steel Construction Institute, (Design of Structures using Cold Formed Steel Sections). The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:
l
Channel with Lips Channel without Lips Z with Lips Pipe Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the General |Property page of the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file. The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
2E.2 Design Procedure

The following two design modes are available:
2E.2.1 Code Checking

The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with BS 5950-5:1998. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
2E.2.2 Member Selection

The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (BS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command. The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Section 4 of the subject code. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with:
l
Clause 6.2.2, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression Clause 4.2, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
2E.3 Design Equations

2E.3.1 Tensile Strength
The allowable tensile strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 7 is described below. The tensile strength, P of the member should be determined from clause 7.2.1
t
Pt = Aepy Where: A is the net area An determined in accordance with cl.3.5.4

e
p is the design strength

y
2E.3.2 Combined bending and tension

As per clause 7.3 of BS 5950-5:1998 members subjected to both axial tension and bending should be proportioned such that the following relationships are satisfied at the ultimate limit state Ft/Pt +Mz/Mcz +My /Mcy 1
102 STAAD.Pro
Mz/Mcz 1 and My /Mcy 1 Where F is the applies tensile strength

t
P is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause 7.2.1 of the subject t code M ,M ,M ,M
z y cz cy
are as defined in clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
2E.3.3 Compressive Strength

The allowable Compressive strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 6 is described below For sections symmetrical about both principal axes or closed cross-sections which are not subjected to torsional flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following equation as per clause 6.2.3 of the subject code
Pc =
PEPcs + 2 PEPcs
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
P c =
M c Pc
(M c +Pc e s)
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses.
2E.3.4 Torsional flexural buckling

Design of the members which have at least one axis of symmetry, and which are subject to torsional flexural buckling should be done according to the stipulations of the clause 6.3.2 using factored slenderness ratio LE/r in place of actual slenderness ratio while reading Table 10 for the value of Compressive strength(p ).
c
Where: = (PE/PTF) when PE >PTF = 1, otherwise Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause.
2E.3.5 Combined bending and compression

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending should be checked for local capacity and overall buckling Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2 of the subject code Fc/Pcs +Mz/Mcz +My /Mcy 1
2E.3.6 Overall buckling check as per clause 6.4.3 of the subject code
For Beams not subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc Pc My F C by M cy 1 c P Ey
Mz F C bx M cz1 c P Ez
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc Pc
Mz Mb
My F C by M cy 1 c P Ey
F is the applied axial load

c
P is the short strut capacity as per clause 6.2.3

cs z
M is the applied bending moment about z axis M is the applied bending moment about y axis
y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Z axis in the absence of cz F and M , as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Y axis, in the absence of cy F and M ,as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c z
M- is the lateral buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2

b
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Z Ez axis P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Y Ey axis C ,C
bz by
are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user
M , M , and M are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in the manner described cz cy b herein below.
2E.3.7 Calculation of moment capacities

For restrained beams, the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater then
104 STAAD.Pro
the bending moment resistance of the section, M Mcz = Szz x po Mcy = Syy x po
D po = 1.13 0.0019 w t Ys 280
p y
Where M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis

cz cz
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis p is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient and should o not greater then design strength p
y
For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater than the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M , and the buckling c resistance moment of the beam, M
b
Then buckling resistance moment, M may be calculated as follows

b,
Mb =
M EM y
2 B + B M EM y
Mc
B = [My +(1 +)ME]/2 M is the yield moment of the section , product of design strength p and elastic Y y modules of the gross section with respect to the compression flange Zc M is the elastic lateral buckling resistance as per clause 5.6.2.2
E
is the Perry coefficient Please refer clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 of the subject code for a detailed discussion regarding the parameters used in the abovementioned equations.
2E.3.8 Shear Strength

The maximum shear stress should not be greater then 0.7 p as per clause 5.4.2
y
The average shear stress should not exceed the lesser of the shear yield strength, p or the shear v buckling strength, q as stipulated in clause 5.4.3 of the subject code.
cr
The parameters are calculated as follows : pv = 0.6py qcr = (1000t/D)2 N/mm2 Pv = Amin(pv , qcr) Where:
P is the shear capacity in N/mm 2

v
p is the design strength in N/mm 2

y
t is the web thickness in mm D is the web depth in mm
2E.3.9 Combined bending and Shear

For beam webs subjected to both bending and shear stresses the member should be designed to satisfy the following relationship as per the stipulations of clause 5.5.2 of the subject code (Fv /Pv )2 + (M/Mc)2 1 Where: F is the shear force
v
M is the bending moment acting at the same section as F

c
M is the moment capacity determined in accordance with 5.2.2
2E.4 Design Parameters

The design parameters outlined in Table 2E.1 are used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 2E.1-British Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value BS5950 COLD Description Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
106 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name BEAM
Default Value 1.0
Description When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the adequacy of the member is determined by checking a total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location check is not conducted, and instead, checking is done only at the locations specified by the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for details. For TRUSS members only start and end locations are designed. Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending C . See b BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for Combined axial load and bending design. Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending C . See b BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for Combined axial load and bending design. Specifies whether the cold work of forming strengthening effect should be included in resistance computation. See BS:5950-5:1998,3.4 0 effect should not be included 1 effect should be included
CMZ
1.0
CMY
1.0
CWY
1.0
Parameter Name FLX
Default Value 1
Description Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling restraint is provided or is not necessary for the member. See BS:59505:1998, 5.6 Values: 0 Section subject to torsional flexural buckling 1 Section not subject to torsional flexural buckling
FU
430 MPa
Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. Yield strength of steel in current units. Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression.
FYLD
250 MPa
KX
1.0
108 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name KY
Default Value 1.0
Description Effective length factor for overall buckling about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression.
KZ
1.0
LX
Member length
Parameter Name LY
Default Value Member length
Description Effective length for overall buckling in the local Yaxis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length for overall buckling in the local Zaxis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression.
LZ
Member length
110 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name MAIN
Default Value 0
Description Specify the design for slenderness against the maximum slenderness as per Clause 6.2.2: 0 Do not check slenderness ratio 1 Check members resisting normal loads (180) 2 - Check members resisting selfweight and wind loads (250) 3 - Check members resisting reversal of stress (350)
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members Maximum allowable depth. It is input in the current units of length. Permissible ratio of actual to allowable stresses
DMAX
2540.0 cm.
RATIO
1.0
Default Value 0
Description This parameter is used to control the level of detail in which the design output is reported in the output file. The allowable values are: 0 - Prints only the member number, section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL status. 1 - Prints the design summary in addition to that printed by TRACK 1 2 - Prints member and material properties in addition to that printed by TRACK 2.
2E.5 Verification Problem

Shown below is a verification example for reference purposes. In this problem, we have assigned Channel sections with lips to different members. Member numbers 28 to 31 have been assigned section 230CLHS66X16,member numbers 3 TO 6 and 15 TO 19 have been assigned the section 230CLMIL70X30 and member numbers 1, 2, 7 TO 14 have been assigned the section 170CLHS56X18. These members have been designed as per BS 5950 Part 5. Other sections have been assigned from the AISI shapes database (American cold-formed steel) and designed in accordance with that code.
112 STAAD.Pro
2E.5.1 Solution
A. Bending Check As per Clause 5.2.2.2 of BS 5950 Part 5 the limiting compressive stress, p , for stiffened webs is given by the minimum of
o
D po = 1.13 0.0019 w t Ys 280
p y
p0 = Py, where Py = Min ( FYLD, 0.84FU) = 361.2 N/mm2 So that p0 = [1.13 - 0.0019(170/1.8)(279.212/280)1/2 ]361.2 = 332.727 N/mm2 The limiting compressive moments in local Y and Z axes will be given by Mcz = Szzpo = 27,632.4(332.727) = 9.19(10)6 Nmm Mcy = Syy po = 27,632.4(5,427.50) = 3.46(10)6 Nmm Maximum bending moment about local Z = 2159 Nm at node 7 Maximum bending moment about local Y = 19.755 Nm at node 7 Bending Ratio Z = 2.15 X106 / 9.19 X106 = 0.235 Bending Ratio Y = 19755.3 / 3.46 X106 = 0.0057 Biaxial Bending ratio = 0.235 +0.0057 = 0.2407 Buckling resistance moment M
b
As per section 5.6.2, the buckling resistance moment

Mb =
M EM y
2 B + B M EM y
Mc
Where: The Yield moment of section is given by MY = Szz po = 9.19(10)6 Nmm The elastic buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2.2 is calculated to be ME = 4.649(10)6 Nmm And B = [My +(1 +)ME]/2 So that B = [9.19(10)6 + (1 +0.0)4.649(10)6 ]/2 = 2.325(10)10
Which yields
Mb =
4.649(10) 9.19(10)
2 6 6
= 9.98(10)6N mm
2.325(10) 10 + 2.325(10) 10 4.649(10)6 9.19(10)6
B. Compression Check The Axial force induced in member# 1 is 3,436.75 N The elastic flexural buckling load P = 1.185(10)6 N
E
The short strut capacity (Pcs ) is given by Aeffpy = 457.698(344) = 157,448 N Perry Coefficient () = 0.02074 = [Pcs +(1 +)PE]/2 = 683,512.45 N Buckling resistance
Pc =
PEPcs + 2 PEPcs
= 153, 782N
For Channel section (being singly symmetric), Buckling Resistance as per clause 6.2.4 is
P c =
M c Pc
(M c +Pc e s)
Where: The limiting compressive moment, M , in the relevant directionis equal to 9.19(10)6 c Nmm,as calculated above And the distance, e , of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section and that of s the effective cross section is equal to 38.24 m So that,
P c =
9.19(10) 153, 782 9.19(10) + 153, 782 38.24
6 6
= 93, 788.7N
Compression ratio = 3,436.75/93,788.7 = 0.0366 C. Axial Compression and Bending

Fc Pc
Mz Mb
3,436.75/93,788.7 +2.15(10)6/(9.98(10)6 ) +19,755.3/[1.0 *3.46(10)6(1 - 3,436.75/1.185(10)6 )] = 0.2578 Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2
114 STAAD.Pro
Fc Pcs
Mz M cz
My M cy
3, 436.75 457.698(379.212)
2.15(10)6 9.19(10)
6
19, 755.3 1.81(10)

6
= 0.2647
Overall buckling check per 6.4.3

Fc Pc
Mz F C bx M cz1 c P Ez
= 0.2773 D. Shear Check as per clause 5.4.2 and 5.4.3 pv = 0.6py = 0.6(379.212) = 227.52 N/mm2 qcr = (1000t/D)2 = (10001.8/170)2 = 112.11 N/mm2 Pv = Amin(pv , qcr) Shear resistance Y = 33,579.4 N Shear resistance Z = 21,148.6 N Shear Ratio Y = 5,627.72/33,579.4 = 0.1675 Shear Ratio Z = 5,627.72/21,148.6 = 0.0031 E. Shear Check with Bending as per clause 5.5.2 Shear with bending on Z (Fv /Pv )2 + (Mz/Mcz)2 = (5,627.72/33,579.4)2 +[2.15106 /(9.19106 )]2 = 0.08327 Shear with bending on Y (Fv /Pv )2 + (My /Mcy )2 = (67.114/21,148.6)2 +[19,755.3/(3.46106 )]2 = 0.000043
2E.5.2 Comparison
Table 2E.2-Comparison for verification problem Criteria Axial compression ratio Axial compression and bending interaction ratio (overall buckling) Bending Z ratio Bending Y ratio Biaxial bending ratio STAAD.ProResult 0.037 Hand Difference Calculation 0.0366 none
0.278
0.2773
none
0.236 0.006 0.2407
0.235 0.0057 0.241
none none none
Criteria Shear Z ratio Shear Y ratio Bending Z and Shear Y interaction ratio Bending Y and Shear Z interaction ratio
STAAD.ProResult 0.168 0.003 0.084
Hand Difference Calculation 0.1675 0.0031 0.08327 none none none
0.000
0.000043
none
2E.5.3 Input File

STAAD SPACE SET ECHO OFF INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT FEET KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 5 0; 2 0 5 10; 3 10 5 0; 4 10 5 10; 5 5 5 0; 6 5 5 10; 7 0 5 2; 8 0 5 4; 9 0 5 6; 10 0 5 8; 11 10 5 2; 12 10 5 4; 13 10 5 6; 14 10 5 8; 15 5 5 2; 16 5 5 4; 17 5 5 6; 18 5 5 8; 19 10 0 0; 20 10 0 10; 21 0 0 10; 22 0 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 7; 2 3 11; 3 1 5; 4 2 6; 5 5 3; 6 6 4; 7 7 8; 8 8 9; 9 9 10; 10 10 2; 11 11 12; 12 12 13; 13 13 14; 14 14 4; 15 5 15; 16 15 16; 17 16 17; 18 17 18; 19 18 6; 20 7 15; 21 15 11; 22 8 16; 23 16 12; 24 9 17; 25 17 13; 26 10 18; 27 18 14; 28 1 22; 29 2 21; 30 3 19; 31 4 20; 32 1 21; 33 21 4; 34 4 19; 35 19 1; 36 2 20; 37 20 3; 38 3 22; 39 22 2; MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED AMERICAN 32 TO 39 TABLE ST 3LU3X060 20 TO 27 TABLE ST 3HU3X075 MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED BRITISH 28 TO 31 TABLE ST 230CLHS66X16 3 TO 6 15 TO 19 TABLE ST 230CLMIL70X30 1 2 7 TO 14 TABLE ST 170CLHS56X18 UNIT MMS PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES LIST 32 20 28 3 1
116 STAAD.Pro
SUPPORTS 19 TO 22 PINNED UNIT FEET DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 4.176E+006 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 0.489024 ALPHA 6.5E-006 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL CONSTANTS BETA 90 MEMB 20 TO 27 MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 39 MEMBER TENSION 32 TO 39 UNIT FEET KIP LOAD 1 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL MEMBER LOAD 3 TO 6 20 TO 27 UNI GY -0.3 0 5 JOINT LOAD 1 2 FX 0.6 2 4 FZ -0.6 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK UNIT KGS CM PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 1 4 16 PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 3 24 28 UNIT KIP INCH PARAMETER 1 CODE AISI FYLD 55 ALL CWY 1 ALL BEAM 1 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21 PARAMETER 2 CODE BS5950 COLD TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 19 28 TO 31 CHECK CODE MEMB 1 2
FINISH
2E.5.4 Output
The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are as follows:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-5-v1.1) *********************** UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA -----------------------------------------------------------------------------| MEMBER# 1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN: 609.60 LOCATION: 609.60 | | STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.278 GOV.MODE: 6.4-Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD: 1 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| MATERIAL DATA: Yield strength of steel : Ultimate tensile strength : SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm) Section Name : Member Length : Gross Area(Ag) : Moment of inertia (I) Moment of inertia (Ie) Elastic modulus (Zet) Elastic modulus (Zec) DESIGN DATA: z-z axis Compression Capacity (Pc) : 93.70 Moment Capacity (Mc) : 9.17 Shear Capacity (Pv) : 21.00 LTB Capacity (Mb) : 9.17 EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD : CLAUSE COMBINATION BS-6.3 Compression ratio - Axial BS-6.4 Bend-Compression ratio BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Z BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Y y-y axis 3.47 33.50 : : : : 379.21 N/mm2 430.00 N/mm2 170CLHS56X18 60.96 5.45 Net Area (Ae): z-z axis y-y axis 237.27 21.93 235.46 19.42 27.85 5.20 27.55 10.42
4.58
RATIO 0.037 0.278 0.236 0.006
BS-5.1 Biaxial Bending Ratio 0.241 BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Z 0.168 BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Y 0.003 BS-5.5.2 Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio 0.084 BS-5.5.2 Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio 0.000 Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
118 STAAD.Pro
Section 3
Canadian Codes
120 STAAD.Pro
3A. Canadian Codes - Concrete Design per CSA Standard A23.3-94

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Candadian code CSAA23.3 1994 Design of Concrete Structures. Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, the program will calculate the required reinforcement to resist the forces and moments. Design of members per CSAA23.3 1994 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

l l l
For Beams - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square & Tee) For Columns - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular) For Slabs - 4-noded Plate Elements

UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300. 11 14 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and 300mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300mm diameter

STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in CSA STANDARD A23.3-94 Clause 10.13. STAAD accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. After solving for the joint displacements of the structure, the program calculates the additional moments induced in the structure due to the P-Delta effect. Therefore, by performing a P-Delta analysis, member forces are calculated which will require no user modification before beginning member design. Refer to Section 5.37.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on this analysis facility.
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is through user supplied moment magnification factors (see the parameter MMAG in Table 3A.1). Here the user approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before beginning member design. This second procedure allows slenderness to be considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
Note: STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete design. All the proper
factored loads must be provided by the user before the ANALYSIS specification. While performing a P-Delta analysis, all load cases must be defined as primary load cases. If the effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be done either by using the REPEAT LOAD command or by specifying the load information of these individual loading cases under one single load case. Usage of the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield incorrect results for P-Delta Analysis in STAAD.Pro.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design per CSA STANDARD A23.3-94. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, which are commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 3A.1 contains a list of available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 3A.1-Canadian Concrete Design CSA-A23.3-94 Parameters Parameter Name CLB Default Value 40mm Description
Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom of cross section. Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the side of the cross section. Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of cross section. Depth of the concrete member. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
CLS
40mm
CLT
40mm
DEPTH
YD
122 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name EFACE
Default Value 0.0 Face of Support
Description
Distance of face of support from end node of beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must be positive

numbers. FC FYMAIN FYSEC MAXMAIN 30 N/mm 2 400N/mm 2 400 N/mm 2 Number 55 bar Number 10 bar Number 10 bar 1.0 Specified compressive strength of concrete. Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel. Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel. Maximum main reinforcement bar size.
MINMAIN
Minimum main reinforcement bar size
MINSEC
Minimum secondary (stirrup) reinforcement bar size. A factor by which the column design moments will be magnified. Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moments for beam design. Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral. Distance of face of support from start node of beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.
MMAG
NSECTION
12
REINF SFACE
0.0 0.0

numbers. TRACK 0.0 0. Critical Moment will not be printed out with beam design report. 1. Moments will be printed. WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
3A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen (start, end, and 11 intermediate), unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter.

Design for flexure is performed per the rules of Chapter 10 of CSA Standard A23.3-94. Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the thirteen sections. Each of these sections are designed to resist the critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per CSA Standard A23.3-94. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (which finally will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account other practical considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared. The following annotations apply to the output for Beam Design. LEVEL Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group. HEIGHT Height of bar level from the bottom of beam. BAR INFOrmation Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and size. FROM Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the rebar. TO Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the rebar. ANCHOR (STA,END) States whether anchorage, either a hook or continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END) of the bar.
124 STAAD.Pro
3A.5.2 Design for Shear and Torsion

Design for shear and torsion is performed per the rules of Chapter 11 of CSA Standard A23.3-94. Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design is performed at the start and end sections. The location along the member span for design is chosen as the effective depth + SFACE at the start, and effective depth + EFACE at the end. The load case which gives rise to the highest stirrup area for shear & torsion is chosen as the critical one. The calculations are performed assuming 2-legged stirrups will be provided. The additional longitudinal steel area required for torsion is reported. The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subjected to torsion.
3A.5.3 Example of Input

Example of Input Data for Beam Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE CANADA FYMAIN 415 ALL FYSEC 415 ALL FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9 DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9 END CONCRETE DESIGN
3A.6 Column Design

Column design is performed per the rules of Chapters 7 & 8 of the CSA Standard A23.3-94. Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. Example of Input Data for Column Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE CANADIAN FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6 END CONCRETE DESIGN
3A.7 Slab/Wall Design

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The commands for specifying elements are in accordance with the relevant sections of the Technical Reference Manual. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same principles as those for beams in flexure. The width of the beam is assumed to be unity for this purpose. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The effective depth is calculated assuming #10 bars are provided. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLT, and CLB listed in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 3A.1 are not applicable to slab design. The output consists only of area of steel required. Actual bar arrangement is not calculated because an element most likely represents just a fraction of the total slab area.
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE CANADA FYMAIN 415 ALL FC 35 ALL
126 STAAD.Pro
CLB 40 ALL DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20 END CONCRETE DESIGN
128 STAAD.Pro
3B. Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16-01

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Canadian code CAN/CSA-S16-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures. Design of members per CAN/CSA-S16-01 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
3B.1 General Comments

The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification CAN/CSA S16-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures is can be used in STAAD.Pro. This code supercedes the previous edition of the code CAN/CSA S16.1-94. The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-states are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the probability of limits being surpassed is acceptably low. In the STAAD.Pro implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD.Pro implementation of CAN/CSA-S16-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.

The elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the specified primary and combination loading condition. You are allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD.Pro may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the
built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual.

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following is the description of the different types of sections available:
3B.4.1 Welded Wide Flanges (WW shapes)

Welded wide flange shapes listed in the CSA steel tables can be designated using the same scheme used by CSA. The following example illustrates the specification of welded wide flange shapes.
100 TO 150 TA ST WW400X444 34 35 TA ST WW900X347
3B.4.2 Wide Flanges (W shapes)

Designation of wide flanges in STAAD is the same as that in CSA tables. For example,
10 TO 75 95 TO 105 TA ST W460X106 100 TO 200 TA ST W610X101
3B.4.3 S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped sections like S, M and HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is identical to that listed in the CSA tables. While specifying the sections, it should be remembered that the portion after the decimal point should be omitted. Thus, M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and S180X22.8 should be specified as S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes are provided below.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98 45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6 88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79
130 STAAD.Pro
3B.4.4 Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)

C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example. As in S, M and HP sections, the portion after the decimal point must be omitted in section designations. Thus, MC250X42.4 should be designated as MC250X42.
55 TO 90 TA ST C250X30 30 TO 45 TA ST MC200X33

Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified by preceding the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back-to-back double channel section C200X28 without any spacing in between should be specified as:
100 TO 120 TA D C200X28
If a spacing of 2.5 length units is used, the specification should be as follows:

100 TO 120 TA D C200X28 SP 2.5
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing. The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
3B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200 angle with a 25mm thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8 33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20
Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this specification, the local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y-Y axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual.

To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for long leg back-to-back) or SD (short leg back-to-back). For equal angles, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit) after section designation.
25 35 45 TA LD L150X100X16 80 TO 90 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 125X75X6 angles with a spacing of 2.5 length units.
3B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 120 TA T W200X42
will describe a T section cut from a W200X42 section.
3B.4.9 Rectangular Hollow Sections

These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the CSA tables may be specified as follows.
55 TO 75 TA ST TUB80X60X4
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width), and TH(for thickness) specifications. For example:
100 TO 200 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
132 STAAD.Pro
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5 inches. Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
3B.4.10 Circular Hollow Sections

Sections listed in the CSA tables may be provided as follows:
15 TO 25 TA ST PIP33X2.5
In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside diameter of 9.0 length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current length unit. Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes
STAAD SPACE UNIT METER KNS JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 16 UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN * W SHAPES 1 TA ST W250X18 * WW SHAPES 2 TA ST WW700X185 * S SHAPES 3 TA ST S200X27 * M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28 * HP SHAPES 5 TA ST HP310X132 * MC CHANNELS 6 TA ST MC150X17 * C CHANNELS 7 TA ST C180X18 * DOUBLE CHANNELS 8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0 * ANGLES 9 TA ST L55X35X5 * REVERSE ANGLES 10 TA RA L90X75X5 * DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK 11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0 * DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK 12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5 * TUBES 13 TA ST TUB120807 * TUBES 14 TA ST TUBE DT 16.0 WT 8.0 TH 0.8 * PIPES 15 TA ST PIP273X6.3 * PIPES 16 TA ST PIPE OD 16.0 ID 13.0 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES FINISH

The CSA specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic (Class 1), compact (Class 2), noncompact (Class 3), or slender element (Class 4) sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and Table 1 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD.Pro determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes.
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build
2007.07 or higher. Otherwise, design is performed for sections that fall into the category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only.
134 STAAD.Pro

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD.Pro according to the procedures outlined in section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as members unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD.Pro for calculating the member resistances.
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build
2007.07 or higher.
3B.6.1 Nomenclature
A = Area. A = Effective area.
e f
A = Area of flange. A = Area of web.

w
b = Effective Flange width.

e
C = Compressive force in a member or component under factored load.

f
C = Factored compressive resistance. r C = Warping torsional constant.

w y
C = Axial compressive load at yield stress. D = Outside diameter of pipe section. E = Elastic modulus of steel. F = Elastic critical buckling stress.
e
F = Yield strength.
y
ye
= Effective yield stress of section in compression to account for elastic local buckling.
h = Clear depth of web. K = Effective length factor. L = Length or span of member. M = Bending moment in a member or component under factored load.
f
M = Factored moment resistance of a member.

r
M = Yield moment resistance.

y
S = Elastic section modulus.
S = Effective section modulus.

e
W = Web thickness. = Non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula. = Effective non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula considering ye effective yield stress. = Resistance factor
3B.6.2 Members Subject to Axial Forces

Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Cl.13.2 of CAN/CSA-S16-01. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT, KY, KZ, LT, LY, and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations are : 1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this. 2. For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or truss members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling and local buckling of thin legs is calculated using the rules of the AISC - LRFD code, 2nd ed., 1994. The reason for this is that the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this. 3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling into account. The rules of Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-S16-01are used for this purpose. Parameters KT and LT may be used to provide the effective length factor and effective length value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling
136 STAAD.Pro
capacity is computed for single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles. 4. The variable n in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34 for all other shapes. 5. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.) For Class 4 members subjected to axial compression, factored compressive resistance should be determined by either of the following equations. a. Cr= Ae Fy (1+2n )-1n Where: n = 1.34 = (Fy /Fe ) Fe=(2 E)/(KL/r)2 Ae is calculated using reduced element widths meeting the maximum width to thickness ratio specified in Table 1. Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different section shapes are as follows.
l
For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle section be= 200t/(Fy )
For stem of T-section be= 340t/(Fy )
For flanges of HSS rectangular or Tube sections be= 670t/((Fy )
For circular HSS or Pipe section D= 23000t/(Fy
b.
Cr= AFye (1+ye2n )-1n Where: n = 1.34 ye = (Fye/F_e ) Fe=(2 E)/(KL/r)2 With an effective yield stress, F , determined from the maximum width (or diameter)ye to-thickness ratio meeting the limit specified in Table 1. Following are the expressions for effective yield stress for different shaped section.
For I-section, T-section, channel section and angle section Fye= 40000/(b/t)2
For rectangular HSS section Fye= 448900/(b/t)2
For circular HSS section Fye= 23000/(D/t)
3B.6.3 Members Subject to Bending

The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the joints of the member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are : 1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as For Class 1 & 2 sections, Py Fy For Class 3 sections, Sy Fy where = Resistance factor = 0.9 P = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
y
S = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis

y y
F = Yield stress of steel 2. For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the principal axes. The specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed., are used for this purpose because the Canadian code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. 3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such as Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31, that a rational method, such as that given in SSRCs Guide to Stability Design Criteria of Metal Structures, be used. Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed.
138 STAAD.Pro
Laterally Supported Class 4 members subjected to bending

i. When both the web and compressive flange exceed the limits for Class 3 sections, the member should be considered as failed and an error message will be thrown. ii. When flanges meet the requirements of Class 3 but web exceeds the limits for Class 3, resisting moment shall be determined by the following equation.
A h M r = M r1 0.0005 w Af w
1, 900 Mf/ s
Where Mr = factored moment resistance as determined by Clause 13.5 or 13.6 but not to exceed My = factored moment resistance for Class 3 sections = My If axial compressive force is present in addition to the moment, modified moment resistance should be as follows.
1 0.65C f / (Cy ) A h M r = M r1 0.0005 w 1, 900 Af w Mf/s

Cy = A Fy S = Elastic section modulus of steel section. iii. For sections whose webs meet the requirements of Class 3 and whose flanges exceed the limit of Class 3, the moment resistance shall be calculated as Mr = Se Fy Where: S = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.
e
l
For Rectangular HSS section, effective flange width be= 670 t/(Fy )
For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section, effective length width be= 200 t/(Fy ) But shall not exceed 60 t
Laterally Unsupported Class 4 members subjected to bending

As per clause 13.6(b) the moment resistance for class-4 section shall be calculated as follows
i. When Mu > 0.67My

M r = 1.15M y 1
0.28M y Mu
M should not exceed SeFy r ii. When Mu 0.67My Mr=Mu Where, as per clause 13.6(a), Mu =(2 )/L (EIy GJ + (E/L)2 Iy Cw ) For unbraced length subjected to end moments2 =1.75 + 1.05k + 0.3k2 2.5 When bending moment at any point within the unbraced length is larger than the larger end moment or when there is no effective lateral support for the compression flange at one of the ends of unsupported length2 = 1.0 k = Ratio of the smaller factored moment to the larger moment at opposite ends of the unbraced length, positive for double curvature and negative for single curvature. Se = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.
l
For Rectangular HSS section, effective flange width be= 670t/(Fy )
For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section, effective length width be= 200t/(Fy ) But shall not exceed 60t.
This clause is applicable only for I shaped and Channel shaped section as there is no guide line in the code for other sections.
3B.6.4 Members Subject to Combined Forces

Axial compression and bending
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these equations, the additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 141), the member is considered to have failed under the loading condition.
140 STAAD.Pro
Axial tension and bending

Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The actual RATIO is determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical equation.
3B.6.5 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). Checks for safety in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.

The design parameters outlined in Table 3B.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 3B.1-Canadian Steel Design CSA-S16-01 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Parameter Name BEAM
Default Value 1.0
Description 0.0 = design only for end moments and those at locations specified by SECTION command. 1.0 = Perform design for moments at twelfth points along the beam.
CB
1.0
Greater than 0.0 and less than 2.5 : Value of Omega_2 (Cl.13.6) to be used for calculation. Equal to 0.0 : Calculate Omega_2
CMY
1.0
1.0 = Do not calculate Omega1 for local Y axis. 2.0 = Calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis. Used in Cl.13.8.4 of code
CMZ
1.0
1.0 = Do not calculate Omega1 for local Z axis. 2.0 = Calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis. Used in Cl.13.8.4 of code
142 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DFF
Default Value None(Mandatory for deflection check)
Description Deflection Length/Maxm. Allowable local deflection. Joint No. denoting start point for calculation of deflection length Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of deflection length Maximum allowable depth (Applicable for member selection) Minimum required depth (Applicable for member selection) Yield strength of steel. Ultimate strength of steel. K value for flexural torsional buckling.
DJ1
DJ2
End Joint of member
DMAX
45.0 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
FYLD
300.0 MPa
FU
345.0 MPa
KT
1.0
Parameter Name KY
Default Value 1.0
Description K value for general column flexural buckling about the local Yaxis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio. K value for general column flexural buckling about the local Zaxis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio. Length for flexural torsional buckling. Length for general column flexural buckling about the local Yaxis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio. Length for general column flexural buckling about the local Zaxis. Used to calculate slenderness ratio.
KZ
1.0
LT
Member Length
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
144 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name MAIN
Default Value 0.0
Description 0.0 = Check slenderness ratio against the limits. 1.0= Suppress the slenderness ratio check. 2.0 = Check slenderness ratio only for column buckling, not for web (See Section 3B.6, Shear)
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members. Permissible ratio of actual load effect to the design strength. 0.0 = Report only minimum design results. 1.0 = Report design strengths also. 2.0 = Provide full details of design.
RATIO
1.0
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member Length
Parameter Name UNT
Default Value Member Length
Description Unsupported length in bending compression of the top flange for calculating moment resistance.
3B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CAN/CSA-S16-01 requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and end forces only. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter. Example of commands for CODE CHECKING:
UNIT NEWTON METER PARAMETER CODE CANADIAN FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4 NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 UNL 15 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC. Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:
146 STAAD.Pro
UNIT NEWTON METER PARAMETER FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4 NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 UNL 15 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL SELECT MEMB 3 4

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CAN/CSA-S16-01 specification which governed the design. If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, factored member resistances will be printed. Following is a description of some of the items printed. CR Factored compressive resistance TR Factored tensile resistance VR Factored shear resistance MRZ Factored moment resistance (about z-axis) MRY Factored moment resistance (about y-axis) Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. CR1 CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(a)
r
CR2 CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(b)

r
CRZ SEE 13.8.2(b) for uniaxial bending (called C CTORFLX Capacity in accordance with 13.8.2(c)
RX
in that Clause)
3B.11 Verification Problems

In the next few pages are included several verification examples for reference purposes. Since the S16-01 code is similar in many respects to the previous edition of the code (CAN/CSA S16.194), the solved examples of the 1994 edition of the CISC Handbook have been used as reference material for these examples.
3B.11.1 Verification Problem No. 1

Steel beam with uniform load, wide flange section. Static analysis, 3D beam element. This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/can_ver_prob1.std
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Example 1 page 5-91.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam resistance and beam deflection.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL) F = 300 Mpa CSA G40.21-M
y
Simply supported beam has a 8.0 m span; Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, unsupported length 1.0 m Allowable Live Load deflection, L/300 = 8000/300 = 27 mm Factored Uniform Load IS 7 kN/m DEAD, 15 kN/m LIVE. Steel section is W410X54
Comparison
Table 3B.2-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 1 comparison Critera Interaction Ratio Beam Resistance (kNm) Beam Deflection (mm) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 0.88 284 0.883 283.20 none none
21
20.81
none
STAAD Output
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld *
148 STAAD.Pro
* Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91 3. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN, CSA-S16.1-94 4. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD 5. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300 7. UNIT MMS KN 8. JOINT COORDINATES 9. 1 0 0 0; 2 8000 0 0 10. MEMBER INCIDENCES 11. 1 1 2 13. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN 14. 1 TABLE ST W410X54 16. CONSTANTS 17. E STEEL ALL 18. POISSON 0.3 ALL 20. SUPPORTS 21. 1 PINNED 22. 2 FIXED BUT MY MZ 24. UNIT METER KN 25. LOAD 1 DEAD 26. MEMBER LOAD 27. 1 UNI GY -7 29. LOAD 2 LIVE 30. MEMBER LOAD 31. 1 UNI GY -15 33. LOAD COMB 3 1.25DL + 1.5 LL 34. 1 1.25 2 1.5 36. PERFORM ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 5 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.6 MB 37. LOAD LIST 2 38. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS ---------------------------UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI SYSTEM MEMB LOAD GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO END JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS 1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824 0.0000 0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0812 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120 0.0000 0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824 0.0000 0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP = 2.08115 AT 400.00 LOAD 2 L/DISP= 384 ************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS *********** 40. LOAD LIST 3 41. PARAMETER 42. CODE CANADIAN 43. TRACK 2 ALL 44. UNL 1 ALL 45. FYLD 300000 ALL 46. BEAM 1 ALL 47. CHECK CODE ALL STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01) ****************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W410X54 (CANADIAN SECTIONS) PASS CSA-13.8.2+ 0.883 3 0.00 C 0.00 -250.00 4.00 MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 6.84E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 8.00E+02 IZ = 1.86E+04 SZ = 9.26E+02 PZ = 1.05E+03 IY = 1.02E+03 SY = 1.15E+02 PY = 1.77E+02 MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CR1 = 1.846E+03 CR2 = 2.732E+02 CRZ = 1.570E+03 CTORFLX = 2.732E+02 TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.805E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 2.732E+02 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 4.778E+01 MRZ = 2.832E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.379E+02 VRZ = 4.604E+02 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000 KL/RY = 207.170 KL/RZ = 48.447 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 1.000 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01 48. STEEL TAKE OFF ALL STEEL TAKE-OFF -------------PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN ) In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no density. ST W410X54 8.00 4.203 PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000 ---------------TOTAL = 4.203 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 49. FINISH
150 STAAD.Pro

Steel beam/column, wide flange section. Static Analysis, 3D beam element. This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/can_ver_prob2.std
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4_106.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL). F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
Simply supported beam/column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0 factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of 200 kN*m and 300 kN*m Steel section is W310X129
Comparison
Table 3B.3-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem2 comparison Critera Interaction Ratio Beam Resistance (kNm) Column Resistance (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 0.96 583 0.98 584 2% none
3,800
3,820
none
STAAD Output
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld *
* Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-106 2. * 3. * COMPRESSION + MAJOR AXIS BENDING 4. * 5. UNIT METER KN 6. JOINT COORDINATES 7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0 8. * 9. MEMBER INCIDENCES 10. 1 1 2 11. * 12. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN 13. 1 TABLE ST W310X129 14. * 15. CONSTANTS 16. E STEEL ALL 17. POISSON STEEL ALL 18. * 19. SUPPORTS 20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ 21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MY MZ 22. * 23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD 24. JOINT LOAD 25. 2 FY -2000 26. 2 MZ 200 27. 1 MZ 300 28. * 29. PDELTA 3 ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 5 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.2 MB ++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35 ++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35 ++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35 31. PRINT MEMBER FORCES MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z 1 1 1 2000.00 135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 300.00 2 -2000.00 -135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 200.00 ************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************
152 STAAD.Pro
PARAMETER CODE CANADIAN TRACK 2 ALL FYLD 300000 ALL LY 3.7 ALL LZ 3.7 ALL CHECK CODE ALL STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01) ****************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W310X129 (CANADIAN SECTIONS) PASS CSA-13.8.2C 0.980 1 2000.00 C 0.00 300.00 0.00 MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.65E+02 MEMBER LENGTH = 3.70E+02 IZ = 3.08E+04 SZ = 1.94E+03 PZ = 2.16E+03 IY = 1.00E+04 SY = 6.51E+02 PY = 9.90E+02 MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CR1 = 4.459E+03 CR2 = 3.820E+03 CRZ = 4.296E+03 CTORFLX = 3.820E+03 TENSILE CAPACITY = 4.359E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 3.820E+03 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 2.672E+02 MRZ = 5.840E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 7.419E+02 VRZ = 1.505E+03 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000 KL/RY = 47.477 KL/RZ = 27.094 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 2.12E+01 40. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL STEEL TAKE-OFF -------------PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN ) In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no density. ST W310X129 3.70 4.694 PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000 ---------------TOTAL = 4.694 MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT (METE) (KN ) 1 ST W310X129 3.70 4.694 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 42. FINISH
33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39.

Steel beam/column, wide flange section. Static Analysis, 3D beam element. This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/can_ver_prob3.std
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4-108.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL). F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M
y
Simply supported beam/column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, Lu = 3.7 m factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of 200 kN*m and 300 kN*m in the strong axis and 100 kN*m at each end in the weak axis. Steel section is W310X143.
Comparison
Table 3B.4-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 3 comparison Criteria Interaction Ratio Beam Resistance, Weak axis (kNm) Beam Resistance, Strong axis (kNm) Column Resistance (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 0.998 300 1.00 299 none none
630
650
3.2%
4,200
4,222
none
STAAD Output
****************************************************
154 STAAD.Pro
* * * STAAD.Pro * * Version Bld * * Proprietary Program of * * Research Engineers, Intl. * * Date= * * Time= * * * * USER ID: * **************************************************** 1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 4-108 2. * 3. * ( COMPRESSION + BIAXIAL BENDING ) 4. * 5. UNIT METER KN 6. JOINT COORDINATES 7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0 8. * 9. MEMBER INCIDENCES 10. 1 1 2 11. * 12. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN 13. 1 TABLE ST W310X143 14. * 15. CONSTANTS 16. E STEEL ALL 17. POISSON STEEL ALL 18. * 19. SUPPORTS 20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ 21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ 22. * 23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD 24. JOINT LOAD 25. 2 FY -2000 26. 2 MZ 200 27. 2 MX 100 28. 1 MZ 300 29. 1 MX 100 30. * 31. PERFORM ANALYSIS P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2 ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 6 DOF TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 6 SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.2 MB 33. PARAMETER 34. CODE CANADIAN 35. CMY 2 ALL 36. CMZ 2 ALL 37. CB 1 ALL 38. TRACK 2 ALL
39. FYLD 300000 ALL 40. CHECK CODE ALL STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01) ****************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= * 1 ST W310X143 (CANADIAN SECTIONS) FAIL CSA-13.8.2A 1.000 1 2000.00 C -100.00 300.00 0.00 MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 1.82E+02 MEMBER LENGTH = 3.70E+02 IZ = 3.47E+04 SZ = 2.15E+03 PZ = 2.41E+03 IY = 1.12E+04 SY = 7.28E+02 PY = 1.11E+03 MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CR1 = 4.912E+03 CR2 = 4.222E+03 CRZ = 4.737E+03 CTORFLX = 4.222E+03 TENSILE CAPACITY = 4.802E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 4.912E+03 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 2.987E+02 MRZ = 6.504E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 8.037E+02 VRZ = 1.678E+03 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000 KL/RY = 47.077 KL/RZ = 26.802 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 3.700 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 0.40 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 0.40 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 1.351E+02 Z AXIS = 5.405E+01 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 1.98E+01 41. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL STEEL TAKE-OFF -------------PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN ) In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no density. ST W310X143 3.70 5.171 PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000 ---------------TOTAL = 5.171 MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT (METE) (KN ) 1 ST W310X143 3.70 5.171 ************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************ 42. FINISH

A slender, cantilever beam subjected to a uniform load. Static analysis, 3D beam element.
156 STAAD.Pro
Reference
CISC Example 1, page 5-91, Limit State Design, CSA-S16.1-94
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 4 meter is subjected to uniformly distributed load of 3 KN/Meter in both major and minor axis. Axial compression of 8 KN is also applied to the member. User defined steel section Sect_Class-4 from is assigned to the member.
Given
Design forces 8.0 KN (Compression) 6.0 KNm (Bending-Y) 6.0 KNm (Bending-Z) 6.0 KN (Shear-Y) 6.0 KN (Shear-Z) Section Properties(Sect_Class-4): Area = 2766 mm 2 Depth of section, D = 150 mm Thickness of web Tw = 7 mm Width of flange Bf = 150 mm Thickness of flange Tf = 6 mm Moment of inertia about Z axis, Iz = 1086.96X104 mm 4 Moment of inertia about Y axis, Iy = 337.894X104 mm 4 Moment of inertia about X axis, Ix = 3.7378X104 mm 4 Warping constant, Cw = 1.752X1010 mm 6 Member Length L = 2 m, Unbraced length = 100mm. Material FYLD = 300 MPa E = 2.05E+05 MPa G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
Slenderness Ratio
Effective Length factor along Local Y-Axis = KY = 1 Effective Length factor along Local Z-Axis = KZ = 1 Slenderness ratio about Z axis, L/Rz = 31.9 Slenderness ratio about Y axis, L/Ry = 57.22 Maximum Slenderness Ratio, L/Rmax = 57.22
Section Classification
Bf/Tf = 150*0.5/6 = 12.5 > 200/sqrt(Fy) = 11.54 Flange is Class 4. d/Tw = (150-2.0*6)/7 = 19.714 (1100/sqrt(Fy))*(1-0.39*Cf/ *Cy)=(1100/sqrt(300))*(1-0.39*8000/(0.9*2766*300)) = 63.24 Web is Class 1. Overall section is Class 4 section.
Check against axial compression (Clause 13.3.3)

Effective width, Beff = 200*Tf/sqrt(300) = 69.24 Effective area, Aeff = 69.24*6*4+(150-2*6)*7 = 2627.76 mm 4. Effective yield stress, FYLDeff =40000/( 0.5*Bf/Tf)4 =256 MPa. As per Clause 13.3.3(a), Elastic critical buckling, Fe = 4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa. Non-dimensional slenderness ratio, = sqrt(FYLD/Fe) =0.697 Axial compressive resistance, Cr = *Aeff*FYLD*(1+0.697^(2*1.34))^(-1/1.34) = 557886.104 N. As per Clause 13.3.3(b), Elastic critical buckling, Fe = 4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa. Effective non-dimensional slenderness ratio, eff = sqrt(FYLDeff/Fe) = 0.644 Axial compressive resistance, Cr = *Area*FYLDeff*(1+0.644^(2*1.34))^(-1/1.34) = 521726.94 N. Axial compressive resistance Min(557886.104, 521726.94) = 521726.94 N.
158 STAAD.Pro
Check against bending (Clause 13.5(c))

As the web of the section meets the requirement of Class 3 and flange exceeds Class 3 limit, flexural resistance should be calculated as per clause 13.5(c).iii. Effective moment of inertia about Z axis, Izeff =2*(2*69.24*63)/12 + 2*(2*69.24*6)*(150-6)*(150-6)/4 + (7*(150-2*6)3)/12 =10152591.12 mm 4. Effective section modulus about Z axis, Szeff = 10152591.12*2/150 = 135367.88 mm 3. Effective moment of inertia about Y axis, Iyeff =(2*6*(2*69.24)3)/12 +(0.5*(150-6)*73)/12 =2657648.856 mm 4. Effective section modulus about Y axis, Syeff = 2657648.856/69.24 = 38383.144 mm 3. Major axis bending resistance if member is laterally supported, Mrz1 = *Szeff*FYLD= 0.9*135367.88*300 =36549327.6 N-mm. Minor axis bending resistance, Mry = *Syeff*FYLD = 0.9*38383.144*300 = 10363448.88 N-mm. If the member is laterally unsupported major axis bending resistance is determined by clause 13.6(b). As the value of one of the end moments is 0.0, 2 = 1.75. Where, as per clause 13.6(a), Mu = (1.75*3.14/2000)*sqrt(205000*337.894X104*78846.154*3.7378X104 + (3.14*205000/2000)4*337.894X104*1.752X10^10) =2.48X108 My = Sz*FYLD = (1086.96X104X2/150) *300 =43478400. Since Mu > 0.65My, Moment of resistance Mrz2 = 1.15*0.9*43478400*(1-0.28*43478400/2.48X108) =42791153.71 N-mm = 42.79 KN-m. Mrz2 should not be more than Mrz1. Since, Mrz2 > Mrz1 in this example, Mrz2 = Mrz1. Mrz2 = 36549327.6 N-mm = 36.549 KN-m
Comparison
Table 3B.5-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 4 comparison Criteria Hand Calculation 521.73 KN STAAD.Pro Result 5.219X102 KN Comments
Axial compressive resistance Major axis bending resistance Minor axis bending resistance
none
36.549 KNm
36.57 KN-m
none
10.363 KNm
10.38 KN-m
none
STAAD Output
**************************************************** * * * STAAD.Pro V8i SELECTseries2 * * Version 20.07.07.XX * * Proprietary Program of * * Bentley Systems, Inc. * * Date= AUG 17, 2010 * * Time= 17: 6:23 * * * * USER ID: Bentley * ****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91 INPUT FILE: s-16-01 verification example.STD 2. START JOB INFORMATION 3. ENGINEER DATE 16-FEB-10 4. END JOB INFORMATION 5. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN, CSA-S16.1-94 6. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD 7. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300 8. UNIT MMS KN 9. JOINT COORDINATES 10. 1 0 0 0; 2 2000 0 0 11. MEMBER INCIDENCES 12. 1 1 2 13. START USER TABLE 14. TABLE 1 15. UNIT METER KN 16. WIDE FLANGE
160 STAAD.Pro
17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47.
SECT_CLASS-4 0.002766 0.15 0.007 0.15 0.006 1.08696E-005 3.37894E-006 3.7378E-008 0.00105 0.0018 END UNIT METER KN DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1 E 2.05E+008 POISSON 0.3 ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2.05E+008 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY 1 UPTABLE 1 SECT_CLASS-4 UNIT MMS KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 LC1 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -3 1 UNI GZ -3 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -8 PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S ----------------------------------NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 1
SOLVER USED IS THE IN-CORE ADVANCED SOLVER TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 6
48. LOAD LIST 1 49. PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1 VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
-- PAGE NO.
MEMBER END FORCES ----------------ALL UNITS ARE -- KN MEMBER LOAD JT
STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE METE AXIAL (LOCAL ) SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 2
8.00 -8.00
6.00 0.00
6.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
-6.00 0.00
6.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************
50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55.
PARAMETER 1 CODE CANADIAN CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL FYLD 300000 ALL CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01 ) V2.0 ********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE
MET
(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION =======================================================================
1 ST
SECT_CLASS-4 PASS 8.00 C
(UPT) CSA-13.8.3B -6.00
0.760 6.00
1 0.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS IZ = IY = IX = SECTION AREA = 2.77E+01 1.09E+03 SZ = 1.45E+02 3.38E+02 SY = 4.51E+01 3.74E+00 CW = 1.75E+04 MEMBER LENGTH = PZ = 1.63E+02 PY = 6.92E+01 2.00E+02
EFFECTIVE MEMBER PROPERTIES FOR CLASS-4 SECTION(UNIT = CM) ---------------------------------------------------------EFFECTIVE CROSS SECTION AREA = 2.63E+01 EFFECTIVE IZ = 1.02E+03 EFFECTIVE SZ = EFFECTIVE IY = 2.66E+02 EFFECTIVE SY = EFFECTIVE YILED STRESS = 256.0 MPA
1.35E+02 3.85E+01
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITIES FOR CLASS 4 SECTION(UNIT = MPA) ------------------------------------------------------
162 STAAD.Pro
BASED ON EFFECTIVE AREA CR1 = 7.098E+02 CR2 = CTORFLX = 5.582E+02
5.582E+02
CRZ =
6.705E+02
BASED ON EFFECTIVE YIELD STRENGTH CR1 = 6.373E+02 CR2 = 5.219E+02 CTORFLX = 5.219E+02
CRZ =
6.084E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 E = 2.05E+05 G = 7.88E+04
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CR1 = 6.373E+02 CR2 = 5.219E+02 SECTION CLASS 4 CRZ = 6.084E+02 CTORFLX = 5.219E+02 TENSILE CAPACITY = 7.300E+02 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 5.219E+02 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 1.038E+01 MRZ = 3.657E+01 MU = 2.486E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 1.871E+02 VRZ = 3.208E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000 KL/RY = 57.222 KL/RZ = 31.904 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 2.000 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.75 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 6.000E+00 Z AXIS = 6.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 1.97E+01 56. FINISH
*********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN *********** **** DATE= AUG 17,2010 TIME= 17: 6:28 ****
************************************************************ * For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact * * Bentley Systems Offices at the following locations * * * * Telephone Web / Email * * * * USA: +1 (714)974-2500 * * UK +44(1454)207-000 * * SINGAPORE +65 6225-6158 * * EUROPE +31 23 5560560 * * INDIA +91(033)4006-2021 *
* JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 http://www.ctc-g.co.jp * * CHINA +86 10 5929 7000 * * THAILAND +66(0)2645-1018/19 partha.p@reisoftwareth.com * * * * Worldwide http://selectservices.bentley.com/en-US/ * * * ************************************************************
164 STAAD.Pro
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Canadian code S136-94 Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, including revisions dated May, 1995. The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. For laterally supported members in bending, the Initiation of Yielding method has been used. Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as an option. Design of members per S136-94 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
3C.1 Cross-Sectional Properties

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the "Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition. The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:
l
Channel with Lips Channel without Lips Angle with Lips Angle without Lips Z with Lips Z without Lips Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file. The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
3C.2 Design Procedure

3C.2.1 Code Checking

The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with CSA 136. Code checking is carried out for locations specified via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a
RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. You may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
3C.2.2 Member Selection

You may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (AISI standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, present design results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
3C.2.3 Code Sections Implemented

The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clauses 5.6.2.1 through 3 and 5.6.2.6 through 8. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with
l
Clause 5.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression Clause 5.4, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression Clause 5.5, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:
l
Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as applicable. Members in tension - Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.3.1 and 6.3.2. Members in bending and shear
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:

l l
6.4.1 General, 6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress based on Initiation of Yielding, 6.4.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
166 STAAD.Pro
6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened Flanges - additional limitations, 6.4.5 Shear in Webs, 6.4.6 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs. Members in compression Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:
o o o o o
l l
6.6.1.1, 6.6.1.2 (a) and (d), and 6.6.1.3 General, 6.6.2 Sections Not Subject to Torsional-Flexural Buckling, 6.6.3 Singly Symmetric Sections, 6.6.4 Point-Symmetric Sections, 6.6.5 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
Members in compression and bending Resistance calculations are based on Clause 6.7.1, Singly and Doubly Symmetric Sections. Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided.

The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and selection of design options.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 3C.1-Canadian Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified S136. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
Parameter Name BEAM
Default Value
Description
1.0
When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default), the adequacy of the member is determined by checking a total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location check is not conducted, and instead, checking is done only at the locations specified by the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for details). If neither the BEAM parameter nor any SECTION command is specified, STAAD will terminate the run and ask the user to provide one of those 2 commands. This rule is not enforced for TRUSS members. Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending W . See CSA 136, 6.7.2. Used z for Combined axial load and bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending W . See CSA 136, 6.7.2. Used y for Combined axial load and bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. Specifies whether the cold work of forming strengthening effect should be included in resistance computation. See CSA 136, 5.2. 0. effect should not be included 1. effect should be included
CMZ
1.0
CMY
0.0
CWY
DMAX
1000.0
Maximum depth permissible for the section during member selection. This value must be provided in the current units. Minimum depth required for the section during member selection. This value must be provided in the current units.
DMIN
0.0
168 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name FLX
Default Value
Description
Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling restraint is provided or is not necessary for the member. See CSA 136, 6.6.2 0. Section subject to torsional flexural buckling and restraint not provided 1. restraint provided or unnecessary
FU
450 MPa
Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. Yield strength of steel in current units. Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a fraction and is unitless. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall column buckling about the local Yaxis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall column buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression.
FYLD KT
350 MPa 1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter Name LT
Default Value
Description
Member length
Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length for overall column buckling in the local Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length for overall column buckling in the local Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Net section factor for tension members, See CSA 136, 6.3.1. Spacing in the longitudinal direction of shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs. It is input in the current units of length. See section CSA 136, 6.4.5
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
NSF
1.0
STIFF
Member length
170 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
This parameter is used to control the level of detail in which the design output is reported in the output file. The allowable values are: 0. Prints only the member number, section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL status. 1. Prints the design summary in addition to that printed by TRACK 1 2. Prints member and material properties in addition to that printed by TRACK 2.
TSA
Specifies whether bearing and intermediate transverse stiffeners satisfy the requirements of CSA 136, 6.5. If true, the program uses the more liberal set of interaction equations in 6.4.6. 0. stiffeners do not comply with 6.5 1. stiffeners comply with 6.5
172 STAAD.Pro
3D. Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-086-01

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing timber design based on the Canadian code CSA 086-01 Wood Design Standard. Design of members per CSA 086-01 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
3D.1 General Comments

The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for the entire structure under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, the code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of CSA08601. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
3D.2 Analysis Methodology

Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
3D.3 Member Property Specifications

A timber section library consisting of Sawn and Glulam timber is available for member property specification. For specification of member properties, for Sawn timber the timber section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in timber table. For Glulam timber, member properties can be specified using the YD (depth) and ZD (width) specifications and selecting Combination and Species specifications from the built-in table. The assignment is done with the help of the PRISMATIC option (Refer to Section 5.20 of the Technical Reference Manual)
3D.4 Built-in Timber Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in timber tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Following are the description of the different types of species combination available:
3D.4.1 Douglas Fir-Larch

The following example illustrates the specification of Douglas Fir-Larch species combination.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST DFL_SELSTR_2X2_BM
3D.4.2 Hem-Fir
Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST HEM-FIR_SELSTR_2X10_BM
3D.4.3 Northern Species

Designation of Northern species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST NORTHERN_SELSTR_3X12_BM
3D.4.4 Spruce-Pine-Fir
Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_3X8_BM
3D.4.5 Glu Laminated timber

Designation of Glu-lam timber in STAAD involves defining the material, specifying the dimensions, and associating the material with the member through the CONSTANTS command.
174 STAAD.Pro
UNIT CM KN DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC GLT_D.FIR-L-24F-EX E 51611.7 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 2.5E-005 ALPHA 1.2E-011 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN 1 PRIS YD 12 ZD 6 CONSTANTS MATERIAL GLT_D.FIR-L-24F-EX MEMB 1
3D.4.6 Example
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER UNIT FEET POUND JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 12 0 0; 4 18 0 0; 5 24 0 0; 6 6 3 0; 7 12 6 0; 8 18 3 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 4 5; 5 1 6; 6 6 7; 7 7 8; 8 8 5; 9 2 6; 10 3 7; 11 4 8; 12 6 3; 13 3 8; UNIT FEET POUND DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM E 1224 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 25 ALPHA 5.5E-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIM CAN
1 TO 4 9 TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM 5 TO 8 12 13 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM

CONSTANTS MATERIAL SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM MEMB 1 TO 4 9 TO 11 MATERIAL SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM MEMB 5 TO 8 12 13 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES FINISH
3D.5 Member Resistance

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 5 (for sawn lumber) and 6 (for Glulam) of CSA086-01. These depend on several adjustment factors as follows: KD Load duration factor (Clause 4.3.2.2-CSA086-01, Table 4.3.2.2) KH System factor(Clause 5.4.4 and 6.4.3 and Table 5.4.4 -CSA086-01) K_T Treatment factor(Clause 5.4.3 and 6.4.4 -CSA086-01) KSB Service condition factor applicable to Bending at extreme fibre (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 -CSA086-01) KSV Service condition factor applicable to longitudinal shear (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) KSC Service condition factor applicable to Compression parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) K_SCP Service condition factor applicable to Compression perpendicular to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) KSE Service condition factor applicable to modulus of elasticity (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) KST Service condition factor applicable to tension parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01) KZB Size factor applicable to bending (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01) KZV size factor applicable to shear(Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
176 STAAD.Pro
KZT size factor applicable to tension parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 CSA086-01) KZCP size factor applicable to compression perpendicular to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01) K_ZC size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 CSA086-01) CHIX Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01) CV shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01) KN Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01) All of these factors must be specified as input according to the classification of timber and stress grade. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances.
3D.5.1 Axial Tension

i. For Sawn timber The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on one limit state. The limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on this limit state per Clause 5.5.9 of CSA086-01. ii. For Glulam timber The design of glulam tension members differs from sawn timber since CSA 086-01 assigns different specified strength for gross and net section. The specified strength at net section is slightly higher than the strength of the gross section. Therefore, Glulam tension members are designed based on two limit states. The first one is the limit state of yielding in the gross section. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net-section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Clause.6.5.11 of CSA086-01.
3D.5.2 Axial Compression

The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause.5.5.6 and Clause.6.5.8.4 of CSA086-01. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (Kc). The effective length for the
calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY and LZ (see Table 3B.1).
3D.5.3 Bending
The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of CSA086-01 and for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of CSA086-01. The allowable stress in bending is multiplied by Lateral stability factor, KL to take in account whether lateral support is provided at points of bearing to prevent lateral displacement and rotation
3D.5.4 Axial compression and bending

The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uni-axial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and 6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
3D.5.5 Axial tension and bending

The member strength for sections subjected to axial tension and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and 6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
3D.5.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 5.5.5 and 6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear.

The design parameters outlined in Table below may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allows the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
178 STAAD.Pro
Table 3D.1-Canadian Timber Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as TIMBERCANADIAN. Design Code to follow. See section 5.51.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CHIX
1.0
Curvature Factor for Compression [Clause 6.5.6.5.2] Shear Load Coefficient [Table 6.5.7.4A] Load Duration Factor [Clause.4.3.2, Table 4.3.2] System Factor [Clause 5.4.4/6.4.3, Table 5.4.4] Notch Factor [Clause 5.4.7.2.2] Service Condition Factor for Bending at Extreme Fibre Applicable for bending at extreme fibre [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
CV KD
1.0 1.0
KH
1.0
KN KSB
1.0 1.0
KSC
1.0
Service Condition Factor for Compression, Applicable for compression parallel to grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSE
1.0
Service Condition Factor for Modulus of Elasticity, Applicable for modulus of elasticity [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KST
1.0
Service Condition Factor for Tension, Applicable for tension parallel to grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSV
1.0
Service Condition Factor for Shear, Applicable for longitudinal shear [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KX
1.0
K value for flexural torsional buckling
Parameter Name KY
Default Value
Description
1.0
K value in local Y-axis, usually minor axis K value in local Z-axis, usually major axis Size Factor for Bending, Applicable for bending [Clause.5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZ
1.0
KZB
1.0
KZCP
1.0
Size Factor for Compression, Applicable for compression perpendicular to grain [Clause .5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZT
1.0
Size Factor for Tension, Applicable for tension parallel to grain [Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZV
1.0
Size Factor for Shear [Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5] Service Condition Factor for Compression, Applicable for compression perpendicular to grain [Clause 5.4.2 and Table 6.4.2]
K_SCP
1.0
K_T K_ZC
1.0 1.0
Treatment Factor [Clause 5.4.3/6.4.4] Size Factor for Compression, Applicable for compression parallel to grain [Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
LX
Member length Member length Member length 1.0
Length for flexural torsional buckling
LY
Length in local Y axis for slenderness value KL/r Length in local Z axis for slenderness value KL/r Net section factor for tension members
LZ
NSF
180 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name RATIO
Default Value
Description
1.0
Permissible Ratio of Actual to Allowable Value
3D.7 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CSA086-01 requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. Refer to Section 4.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.51.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
PARAMETER CODE TIMBER CAN KD 0.99 ALL KH 0.99 ALL K_T 0.99 ALL KSB 0.99 ALL KSV 0.99 ALL KSC 0.99 ALL KSE 0.99 ALL KST 0.99 ALL KZB 0.99 ALL KZV 0.99 ALL KZT 0.99 ALL KZCP 0.99 ALL K_ZC 0.99 ALL CV 0.99 ALL KN 0.99 ALL K_SCP 0.99 ALL CHIX 0.99 ALL RATIO 0.99 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
3D.8 Member Selection

Member selection based CSA086-2001 is not available.
3D.9 Tabulated Results of Timber Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CSA086-01 specification, which governed the design. Pu Actual Load in Compression Tu Actual Load in Tension Muy Ultimate moment in y direction Muz Ultimate moment in z direction V Ultimate shear force SLENDERNESS_Y Actual Slenderness ratio in y direction SLENDERNESS_Z Actual Slenderness ratio in z direction PY Factored Compressive capacity in y direction PZ Factored Compressive capacity in z direction T Factored tensile capacity MY Factored moment of resistance in y direction MZ Factored moment of resistance in z direction V Factored shear resistance SLENDERNESS Allowable slenderness ratio
3D.10 Verification Problems

These verification examples are included for reference purposes.
182 STAAD.Pro
3D.10.1 Verification Problem No. 1

Determine the Canadian Glulam section column in axial compression, with design per Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01). Column is effectively pinned at both ends and braced at mid-height in all direction. This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_glulamcolumn.std
Reference
Example 4, page 116, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given
Length = 9000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.2-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 1 Criteria Design Strength (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 295 293.793 none
Output for Member Design

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE LOADING/ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 175.00X228.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.728 1 214.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm | | | METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ FX MY RATIO/ MZ
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 | | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | | Pu = 214.000 | | Tu = 0.000 | | Muy = 0.000 | | Muz = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 | | SLENDERNESS_Y = 19.737 | | SLENDERNESS_Z = 25.714 | | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | | PY = 413.943 | | PZ = 293.793 | | T = 0.000 | | MY = 0.000 | | MZ = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 | | SLENDERNESS = 50.000 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
3D.10.2 Verification Problem: 2

Determine the bending capacity of a Canadian Glulam section single span floor beam, with design per Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01). The compression edge assumed fully supported. This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_glulambeam.std
184 STAAD.Pro
Reference
Given
Length = 7,500 mm, Beam Spacing = 5,000 mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.3-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 2 Criteria Design Strength in Bending (kNm) Design Strength in Shear (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 208 208.323 none
101
100.776
none

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 130.00X646.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5. 1.008 1 0.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | LEZ = 7500.000 LEY = 7500.000 LUZ = 7500.000 LUY = 7500.000mm | | | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 | | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | | Pu = 0.000 | | Tu = 0.000 | | Muy = 0.000 | | Muz = 0.000 | | V = 101.625 | | SLENDERNESS_Y = 16.932 | | SLENDERNESS_Z = 1.529 | | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | | PY = 0.000 |
| | | | | | |
PZ = T = MY = MZ = V =
0.000 0.000 41.923 208.323 100.776
| | |
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000 | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Determine the capacity of a Canadian Glulam section in axial tension, with design per the Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01). This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_glulamtension.std
Reference
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.4-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 3 Criteria Design Strength in Tension (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 257 256.636 none

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 80.00X266.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.974 1 250.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm | | | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 |
186 STAAD.Pro
| KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 | | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | | Pu = 0.000 | | Tu = -250.000 | | Muy = 0.000 | | Muz = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 | | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | | PY = 0.000 | | PZ = 0.000 | | T = 256.636 | | MY = 0.000 | | MZ = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Determine the Canadian Sawn section column in axial compression, with design per the Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01). Column is effectively pinned at both ends. This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_sawn_lumber_column.std
Reference
Given
Unbraced Length = 5,000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.5-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 4 Criteria Design Strength (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 130 129.223 none

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION =======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.882 1 114.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm | | | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | | KSC = 0.910 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.050 CHIX = 1.000 | | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | | Pu = 114.000 | | Tu = 0.000 | | Muy = 0.000 | | Muz = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 | | SLENDERNESS_Y = 26.178 | | SLENDERNESS_Z = 26.178 | | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | | PY = 129.223 | | | | T = 0.000 | | MY = 0.000 | | MZ = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 | | SLENDERNESS = 50.000 | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| PZ = 129.223

Determine the bending capacity of a Canadian sawn section single span floor beam, with design per the Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01). This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_sawn_lumber_beam1.std
Reference
Given
Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition, Untreated
188 STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 3D.6-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 5 Criteria Design Strength in Bending (kNm) Design Strength in Shear (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 79.8 79.732 none
46.1
46.170
none

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5.6 1.066 1 0.00 T 0.00 49.20 0.0000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | LEZ = 3000.000 LEY = 3000.000 LUZ = 3000.000 LUY = 3000.000mm | | | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | | KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 0.900 | | KZV = 0.900 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.050 CHIX = 1.000 | | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | | Pu = 0.000 | | Tu = 0.000 | | Muy = 0.000 | | Muz = 49.200 | | V = 49.200 | | SLENDERNESS_Y = 4.511 | | SLENDERNESS_Z = 2.158 | | ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | | PY = 0.000 | | PZ = 0.000 | | T = 0.000 | | MY = 79.800 | | MZ = 79.732 | | V = 46.170 | | SLENDERNESS = 50.000 | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Determine the capacity of a Canadian Sawn section in axial tension, with design per the Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01). This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as /SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_sawn_lumber_tension.std
Reference
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison
Table 3D.7-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 6 Criteria Design Strength in Tension (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 185 184.338 none

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.781 1 144.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm | | | | KD = 1.000 KH = 1.100 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 | | KSC = 0.910 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 | | KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.050 CHIX = 1.000 | | CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 | | | | ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) | | Pu = 0.000 | | Tu = -144.000 | | Muy = 0.000 | | Muz = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 |
190 STAAD.Pro
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) | | PY = 0.000 | | PZ = 0.000 | | T = 184.338 | | MY = 0.000 | | MZ = 0.000 | | V = 0.000 | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
192 STAAD.Pro
Section 4
Cypriot Codes
194 STAAD.Pro
4A. Cypriot Codes - Concrete Design in Cyprus

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Cyrpiot code Seismic code for reinforced concrete structures in Cyprus. Design of members per this code requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
196 STAAD.Pro

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to the concrete code of Cyprus. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 4A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 4B.1-Cypriot Concrete Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as CYPRUS. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BRACE
0.0
Bracing parameter for column design: 0. Column braced in both directions 1. Column braced in only the local Y direction. 2. Column braced in only the local Z direction. 3. Column unbraced in either direction.
CLEAR
20 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0

positive numbers. ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction for column design.
Parameter Name ELZ
Default Value 1.0
Description
Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in current units Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in current units (For slabs, it is for reinforcement in both directions) Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a, in current units. Applicable to shear bars in beams. Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
FC
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
Factor by which column design moments are magnified Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moment for beam design. The upper limit is 23. Serviceability checks: 0. No serviceability check performed. 1. Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were continuous. 2. Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were simply supported. 3. Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were cantilever beams.
NSE CTION
12
SERV
0.0
SFACE
0.0
Face of support location at start of beam, in current units. (Only applicable for shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for bending )
198 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name SRA
Default Value 0.0
Description
Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer equations where A is the angle in degrees. Two special values are also considered: 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy -slabs only -500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate Wood & Armer moments for design.
TRACK
0.0
Controls level of detail in output: 0. Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. Column design gives no detailed results. 1. For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2. Beam design only. Details of reinforcement at sections defined by the NSECTION parameter.
WIDTH
ZD
200 STAAD.Pro
Section 5
Danish Codes
202 STAAD.Pro
5A. Danish Codes - Steel Design per DS412

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Danish code DS412 1998 Code of Practice for the structural use of steel . Design of members per DS412 1998 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
204 STAAD.Pro

The design parameters outlined in Table 5A.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow you to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 5B.1-Danish Steel Design DS412 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as DS412 Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
1.0
1.0 = Calculatevon Mises at twelfth points along the beam. Buckling length coefficient, Beta, about the local Y axis. Buckling length coefficient, Beta, about the local Z axis. Lateral buckling coefficient. Used to calculate the ideal buckling moment. Water depth, in meters, for hydrostatic pressure calculation for pipe members. AlphaT in connection with lateral buckling. Buckling curve coefficient, Alpha, about local Yaxis. Buckling curve coefficient, Alpha, about local Zaxis.
BY
1.0
BZ
1.0
CB
1.0
CMY
1.0
CMZ CY
0.21
CZ
DMAX
1,000 mm
Maximum allowable depth (Applicable for member selection)
Parameter Name DMIN
Default Value 0.0 mm
Description
Minimum required depth (Applicable for member selection) Yield strength of steel.
FYLD
235 N/mm 2 1.15 1.0
MF RATIO
Ratio of material factor to resistance factor. Permissible ratio of actual load effect to the design strength. Equivalent moment factor, BetaM, for local Y-axis. Valid values between 0 and 2.5. Equivalent moment factor, BetaM, for local Z-axis. Valid values between 0 and 2.5.
SSY
SSZ
TRACK
0.0
Used to specify a level of detail in output: 0. Report only minimum design results. 1. Report design strengths also. 2. Provide full details of design.
UNL
Member Length
206 STAAD.Pro
Section 6
Dutch Codes
208 STAAD.Pro

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Dutch code NEN 6770 TGB 1990 - Steel structures - Basic requirements and basic rules for calculation of predominantly staticaly loaded structures . Design of members per NEN 6770 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with NEN 6770 are listed in table 6A.1 along with their default values.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 6A.1-Dutch Steel Design NEN 6770 Parameters Parameter Name Default Value Description Must be specified as DUTCH CODE Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. Used to specify the number of sections to be check along the length of the beam: 0. Check sections with end forces only. BEAM 3.0 1. Check at location of maximum Mz along beam. 2. Check sections with end forces and forces at location of BEAM= 1.0 check. 3. Check at every 1/13th point of the beam and report the maximum.
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Loading type per Tables F.1.1 and F.1.2 1. Pin ended member with uniform loading 2. Fix ended member with uniform loading
CMM
1.0
3. Pin ended member with central point load. 4. Fix ended member with central point load. 5. Pin ended member with point loads at third points. 6. Pin ended member with varying end moments. Used to describe the end restraints: 1.0 = No fixity
CMN
1.0
0.7 = One end fixed, the other free. 0.5 = Both ends fixed.
DFF
None (Mandatory "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable for local deflection deflection See Note 1d in Section 2B.6. check, TRACK 4.0) Start Joint of member End Joint of member 10,000 cm 0.0 cm 1.0 Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" . See Note 1 below. Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length". See Note 1 below. Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth K factor value in local y - axis. Usually, this is the minor axis.
DJ1
DJ2 DMAX DMIN KY
210 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name KZ
Default Value 1.0 Member Length Member Length 1.0 Set according to steel grade (SGR) 1.0
Description K factor value in local z - axis. Usually, this is the major axis. Length in local y - axis (current units) to calculate (KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness ratio. Length in local z - axis (current units) to calculate (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness ratio. Net section factor for tension members.
LY
LZ NSF
PY
Design strength of steel
RATIO
Permissible ratio of the actual capacities. Controls the sections to try during a SELECT process. 0. Try every section of the same type as original
SAME
0.0
1. Try only those sections with a similar name as original (e.g., if the original is an HEA 100, then only HEA sections will be selected, even if there are HEMs in the same table). Identify Section type for section classification
SBLT
0.0
0. Rolled Section 1. Built up Section Steel Grade
SGR
0.0
0. Grade Fe 360 1. Grade Fe 430 2. Grade Fe 510
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Used to control the level output detail: 0. Output summary of results.
TRACK
0.0
1. Output summary of results with member capacities. 2. Output detailed results. 3. Deflection Check (separate check to main select / check code)
UNL
Member Length
Unrestrained member length in lateral torsional buckling checks.
212 STAAD.Pro
Section 7
European Codes
214 STAAD.Pro
7A. European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the European code EC2 ENV 1992-1-1:1991 E Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures - Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings. Design of members per EC2 ENV 1992-1-1:1991 E requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
7A.1 Design Operations

The main steps in performing a design operation are: 1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the design process. 2. Providing appropriate parameter values if different from the default values. 3. Perform the design for the member as appropriate. These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design requirements. The parameters referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members considered in the design operation.
7A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2)

Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures, Part 1, General rules and rules for buildings, provides design rules applicable to plain, reinforced or prestressed concrete used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the limit state philosophy common to modern standards. The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of factors to both the applied loads and the material properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global method of analysis to be used for calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD provides a number of methods for analysis, allowing Geometric Nonlinearity as well as P-Delta effects to be considered.
7A.3 National Application Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Application Documents to be used with EC2. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC2. The current version of EC2 implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided in EC2 and has not been modified by any National Application Documents.
7A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors

Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strengths, as given in table 2.3 of EC2, by the material partial safety factors c for concrete and s for reinforcements. The
magnitude in STAAD is 1.5 for concrete and 1.15 for reinforcements. Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by numerical values provided in the input file. Modulus of Elasticity, E = 21.71 KN/mm 2 Shear Modulus, G = E / 2 (1 + v) Poisson's Ratio, v = 0.25 Unit weight, = 23.56 KN/m 3 The magnitude of design loads is dependent on F, the partial safety factor for the action under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
7A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the ends of the member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being designed that load case is ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message given to that affect. All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are assumed symmetrically arranged in the cross section. The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been considered is then reported as the critical required area of reinforcement. Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make due allowance for the additional moment that has to be considered in the design.
Note: Sway type structures are not directly covered in the current implementation of
EC2. This effect, however, can be accounted for by the P-DELTA analysis option.
7A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load cases are scanned to create appropriate envelopes for the design process. Maximum torsional moment is also identified and incorporated in the design.
7A.6.1 Design for flexure

Reinforcement for both positive and negative moments is calculated on the basis of the section properties provided by the user. If the required reinforcement exceeds the maximum allowable then the section size is inadequate and a massage to that effect is given in the output. Parabolic-rectangular stress distribution for the concrete section is adopted and as moment redistribution is not available in STAAD analysis, the limit for N.A to depth ratio is set according to clause 2.5.3.4.2 (5) of the code.
216 STAAD.Pro
If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to satisfy the above limits. It is important to know that beams are designed for the flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the design at all.

Shear reinforcement design is based on the standard method mentioned in clause 4.3.2.4.3 where it is assumed the notional strut inclination is constant. Depending on the shear distribution within the member it may be possible that nominal shear reinforcement will be sufficient to cater for the design shear forces. If this is not the case an attempt is made to identify regions where nominal reinforcement is insufficient and appropriate reinforcement is then calculated to cover the excess design shear force. The maximum shear force that can be carried without crushing the concrete is also checked and if exceeded, a message to revise the section size is given in the output file.
7A.6.3 Design for Torsion

Torsional moments arising as a result of equilibrium requirements need to be designed for at the ultimate limit state. Reinforcement for torsional moments consists of stirrups combined with longitudinal bars. The combined magnitude of shear stress arising from shear forces and torsional moments are checked in order to establish whether the section size is adequate. If section size is inadequate a massage is given in the output file, otherwise, full design is carried out and both shear links and longitudinal bars required are calculated and, where necessary, links are combined with the shear force links and printed in a tabulated manner in the output file.
7A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the model of the structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for flexure except that shear forces are assumed to be resisted without the provision of shear reinforcements. In cases where this may not be the case users must ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The output for the slab design refers to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the local x direction of the element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local y direction of the element. Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which relates to the element's 'TOP' and 'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of the element. This may not coincide with the slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, you must ensure this through the numbering scheme of the elements. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior faces. Refer to Figure 1.21 in Section 1.61. of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active "unit" specification. Table 8A.1 lists all the relevant EC2 parameters together with description and default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 7A.1-Concrete Design EC2 Parameters Parameter Name BRACE Default Value Description
0.0
0.0 = Column braced in both directions. 1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z direction only 2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y direction only 3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z directions
CLEAR
* 20mm
Clearance of reinforcement measured from concrete surface to closest bar perimeter. Depth of concrete member. This value default is as provided as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. Face of support location at end of beam.
DEPTH
*YD
EFACE
*0.0
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE

must be positive numbers. ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction for column design.
218 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name ELZ
Default Value
Description
1.0 * 30N/mm 2 *460 N/mm 2
Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For slabs, it is for reinforcement in both directions) Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement. Applicable to shear bars in beams Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to shear reinforcement in beams Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above. Factor by which column design moments are magnified Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moment for beam design. The upper limit is 20. 0.0 = No serviceability check performed. 1.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were continuous. 2.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were simply supported. 3.0 = Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were cantilever beams.
FC
FYMAIN
FYSEC
*460N/mm 2
MINMAIN
8mm
MINSEC
8mm
MAXMAIN
50mm
MMAG
1.0
NSECTION
10
SERV
0.0
Parameter Name SFACE
Default Value
Description
*0.0
Face of support location at start of beam. (Only applicable for shear use MEMBER OFFSET for bending ) 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy -slabs only -500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate Wood & Armer moments for design. A = Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer equations where A is the angle in degrees.
SRA
0.0
TRACK
0.0
0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. Column design gives no detailed results. 1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0 List of design sag/hog moments and corresponding required steel area at each section of member
WIDTH
*ZD
Width of concrete member. This value default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
* Provided in current unit system
220 STAAD.Pro
7B. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992]

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the European code EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings. Design of members per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
Note: The DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code has now been officially superseded by EN 1993-11:2005. Hence releases of STAAD.Pro subsequent to version SS3 (20.07.08.xx) will not support this design code. The SS3 build will perform member design to this code for legacy files but has this code removed from the design codes list in the GUI. Users are advised to use the EN 1993-1-1:2005 version for Eurocode 3 design.
Hint: Design per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 is also available in the Steel Design mode in
the Graphical User Interface.
7B.1 General Description

The main steps in performing a design operation are: 1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the design process. 2. Providing appropriate Parameter values if different from the default values. 3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection. These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design requirements. The Parameters referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members or member groups considered in the design operation.
7B.1.1 Eurocode 3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 (EC3 DD)

The DD ENV version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings (EC3 DD) provides design rules applicable to structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern standards. The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both the applied loads and the material properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3. These are Simple, Continuous, and Semi-continuous which reflect the ability of the joints to
developing moments under a specific loading condition. In STAAD only Simple and Continuous joint types can be assumed when carrying out global analysis.
7B.1.2 National Application Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Application Documents to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC3. The current version of EC3 DD implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 and has not been modified by any National Application Document.
Note: National Annex documents are available for EC3 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. See
"European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 237
7B.1.3 Axes convention in STAAD and EC3

By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor axis as YY. A special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is available if the SET Z UP command is used and is discussed in Section 5.5 of the Technical Reference Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction. EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below. Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
Figure 7B.1 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
222 STAAD.Pro
7B.3 Material Properties and Load Factors

The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 DD design is based on table 3.1 of the code. Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strength by the material partial safety factor m. The magnitude of min STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to all section types. A separate safety factor parameter named GB1 is used to check the resistance of a member to buckling and also has a default value of 1.1. Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by users numerical values provided in the input file. Modulus of Elasticity, E = 205000 N/mm2 Shear Modulus, G = E/2(1+ ) Poissons Ratio, = 0.3 Unit weight, = 76.8 KN/m3 The magnitude of design loads is dependent on , the partial safety factor for the action f under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the factors and their use in various load combinations.

The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section prevents the development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to establish this possibility prior to determining the section capacities. Cross sections are classified in accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the design process, STAAD determines the section class and calculates the capacities accordingly. The EC3 DD design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles that are of Class 1 2 or 3 as defined in section 5.3.2 of the code. However, the design of members that have a Class 4 section profile are limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro. Laced and battened members are not considered in the current version of EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.
7B.5 Member Design

7B.5.1 Design of Beams as per DD ENV 1993-11:1992
EC3 DD design in STAAD.Pro considers members that are primarily in bending and/or shear as beams and performs cross section and member capacity checks in accordance with the code. The main requirement for a beam is to have sufficient cross-section resistance to the applied
bending moment and shear force. The possibility of lateral-torsional buckling is also taken into consideration when the full length of the member has not been laterally restrained. The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material yield strength and is determined according to Cl. 5.4.5 of the code. The shear capacity and the corresponding shear checks are done as per section 5.4.6 of the code. There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can both attain full capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain sufficient rotation required for plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic section modulus is used in the design calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local buckling, cannot develop plastic moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to the extreme compression fibre of the section. The elastic section modulus is used to determine the moment capacity for class 3 sections. Class 4 sections do suffer from local buckling and explicit allowance must be made for the reduction in section properties before the moment capacity can be determined. Further, because of interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however, does not occur unless the value of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of the section. In such cases the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section. As mentioned in the previous section, the design of class 4 sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. The effective section properties are worked out as described in Cl. 5.3.5 of the code. Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 5.5.2 of the code. The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the unrestrained length, restraint conditions and type of applied loading. The lateral torsional buckling checks involves the calculation of the Elastic critical moment, Mcr, which is calculated in STAAD as per the method given in Annex F of the code. In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section 5.4.6 of the code. In cases where the members are subject to combined bending and shear, the combined bending and shear checks are done in STAAD as per clause 5.4.7 of the code.
7B.5.2 Design of Axially Loaded Members

The design of members subject to tension loads alone are performed as per Cl 5.4.3 of the code. The tension capacity is calculated based on yield strength, material factor m and crosssectional area of the member with possible reduction due to bolt holes. When bolt holes need to be considered in the capacity calculations the value used for m is 1.2 and the yield strength is replaced with the ultimate tensile strength of the material. The tension capacity is then taken as the smaller of the full section capacity and the reduced section capacity as stated above. The design of members subject to axial compression loads alone are performed as per Cl 5.4.4 of the code. For members with class 1 2 or 3 section profiles, the full section area is considered in calculating the section capacity. However in case of class 4 sections, the effective cross-
224 STAAD.Pro
section is considered to calculate the compressive strength. Also any additional moments induced in the section due to the shift of the centroidal axis of the effective section will also be taken into account as per clause 5.4.8.3 of the code. The effective section properties for class 4 sections will be worked out as given in Cl.5.3.5 of the code. In addition to the cross section checks, buckling resistance will also be checked for such members. This is often the critical case as the buckling strength of the member is influenced by a number of factors including the section type and the unbraced length of the member. The buckling capacity is calculated as per Cl. 5.5 of the code. DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module

Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you must consider four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ KZ. The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or RA specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).
Figure 7B.2 - Axis orientation for single angles
RAangle
7B.5.3 Design of members with combined axial load and bending

The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-existent axial load. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling resistance of the section. The EC3 DD design module in STAAD takes such a scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as per Cl. 5.4.8 of the code. Class 1 and class 2 sections are checked as per cl. 5.4.8.1 and Class 3 and Class 4 sections are checked as per clauses 5.4.8.2 and 5.4.8.3 respectively. The effective section properties for class 4 sections are worked out as given in Cl. 5.3.5 of the code. Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 5.5.3 of the code. In case of a combined axial compressive load and bending moment, the member will be checked as per the rules in section 5.5.4 of the code. The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the section under consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction in bending resistance, then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into account before calculating the effect of the axial load on the bending resistance of the section. If the member is subject to a combined shear, axial load and bending moment then the section capacity checks will be done as per Cl. 5.4.9 of the code. As stated in the previous section, DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module. Please refer to the note in section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications. Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current version of EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active unit specification. Table 8B.1 lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and default values.
226 STAAD.Pro
Table 7B.1-Steel Design Parameters EC3 DD Parameter Name CODE Undefined You must specify EC3 or EUROPE. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. BEAM 3 Parameter to control the number of sections to checked along the length of a beam: 0. Check sections with end forces only 1. Check at location of maximum Mz along beam 2. Check sections with end forces and forces at location of BEAM1.0 check. 3. Check at every 1/13th point along the beam and report the maximum Refer to Note 2 below. CAN 0 Member will be considered as a cantilever type member for deflection checks. 0 indicates that member will not be treated as a cantilever member 1 indicates that the member will be treated as a cantilever member CMM 1.0 Indicates type of loading on member. Valid values range from 1 to 6. Refer to Table 5B.2 for more information on its use. Default Value Description
Parameter Name CMN
Default Value
Description
1.0
Indicates the level of End-Restraint. 1.0 = No fixity 0.5 = Full fixity 0.7 = One end free and other end fixed
DMAX
100.0 cm
Maximum allowable depth for the member.
DMIN
Minimum required depth for the member.
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check)
Deflection limit
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length". Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length". Ultimate tensile strength of steel
DJ2
End Joint of member
FU GB1 1.1
Partial safety factor used in buckling checks for compression members
GM0
1.1
Corresponds to the ENV 1993-1-1:1992
m0
factor in DD
GM1
1.1
m1
factor in DD
GM2
1.1
m2
factor in DD
KY KZ
1.0 1.0
K factor in local y axis. K factor in local z axis.
228 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name LEG
Default Value
Description
0.0
Connection type Refer to Note 1 below.
LVV
Maximum of Lyy and Lzz (Lyy is a term used by BS5950)
Buckling length for angle about its principle axis
LY
Member Length
Compression length in local y axis, Slenderness ratio = (KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ
Member Length
Compression length in local z axis, Slenderness ratio = (KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
PLG
(Polish NA only) Perform additional checks per Cl. 6.3.3 0. Ignore additional PNEN checks 1. Include additional PN EN checks See "Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz" on page 330
PY
Yield Strength
The yield strength default value is set based on the default value of the "SGR" parameter.
NSF
1.0
Net tension factor for tension capacity calculation.
RATIO
Permissible ratio of loading to capacity.
SBLT
0.0
Indicates if the section is rolled or built-up. 0.0 = Rolled 1.0 = Built-up
Parameter Name SGR
Default Value
Description
0.0
Steel grade as per table 3.1 in EC3. 0.0 = Fe 360 1.0 = Fe 430 2.0 = Fe 510
TRACK
Controls the level of detail of output. 0 = minimum 1 = intermediate 2 = maximum 4 = perform a deflection check See note 3 below.
UNF
1.0
Unsupported buckling length as a factor of the beam length
UNL
Member Length
Unrestraint length of member used in calculating the lateral-torsional resistance moment of the member.
ZIV
0.8
Specifies a reduction factor for vectoral effects to be used in axial tension checks [Cl 5.5.3(2)]
Notes: 1. LEG (Ref: Table 25 BS5950) The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member (Refer to section 5B.5(A).2). To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member. The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950 connection definition:
230 STAAD.Pro
Table 7B.2-LEG Parameter values Clause Bold Configuration (a) - 2 bolts Leg LEG Parameter 1.0
4.7.10.2 Single Angle
short leg long leg
3.0
(b) - 1 bolts
short leg long leg
0.0
2.0
4.7.10.3 Double Angles
(a) - 2 bolts
short leg long leg
3.0
7.0
(b) - 1 bolts
short leg long leg
2.0
6.0
(c) - 2 bolts
long leg short leg
1.0
5.0
(d) - 1 bolts
long leg short leg
0.0
4.0
4.7.10.4 Channels
(a) - 2 or more rows of bolts (b) - 1 row of bolts
1.0
0.0 1.0
4.7.10.5 Tee Sections
(a) - 2 or more rows of bolts (b) - 1 row of bolts
0.0
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as: La = KY * KY Lb = KZ * LZ The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength pc for the stronger principal axis. Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used. For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Refer to Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair. 2. BEAM Ensure that this parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing code checking for members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling. Table 7B.3-Values for the CMM Parameter CMM Value 1 Loading and Support Conditions
232 STAAD.Pro
CMM Value 5
Loading and Support Conditions
3. Checking beam deflection With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a CHECK CODE command will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the stress capacity using the current LOAD LIST. If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter blocks with code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one with a TRACK 0, 1, or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10 PARAMETER 1 CODE EN 1993 TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE MEMBER 1 *************************** LOAD LIST 100 TO 110 PARAMETER 2 TRACK 4 ALL DFF 300 MEMB 1 DJ1 1 MEMB 1 DJ2 4 MEMB 1 CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the
last code check results are reported in the GUI.
7B.7 CodeChecking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition ; the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition occurs). Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with two exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 DD design module does not consider these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
7B.8 MemberSelection
STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as defined in section 5B.7(A) Code Checking. Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7(A).
7B.9 TabulatedResultsofSteelDesign
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is performed. TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. CRITICAL COND refers to the clause in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code which governs the design.
234 STAAD.Pro
RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. LOADING provides the load case number, which governed the design. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks
that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the various design data used for the calculations such as the section modulii, section class, section capacity etc.
236 STAAD.Pro
7C. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the European code EC3 BS EN 19931-1:2005 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings. Design of members per EC3 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
7C.1 General Description

The main steps in performing a design operation are: 1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the design process. 2. Providing appropriate Parameter values if different from the default values. 3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection. These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design requirements. The Parameters referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members or member groups considered in the design operation.
7C.1.1 Eurocode 3 - EN 1993-1-1:2005 (EN 1993)

The EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings (EN 1993) provides design rules applicable to structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern standards. The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both the applied loads and the material properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3. These are Simple, Continuous, and Semi-continuous which reflect the ability of the joints to developing moments under a specific loading condition. In STAAD only Simple and Continuous joint types can be assumed when carrying out global analysis.
7C.1.2 National Annex Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Annex Documents to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC3. The current version of EC3 (EN 1993)implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided in EN 1993-1-1:2005. The current version of STAAD.Pro includes the following National Annexes viz.
a. British National Annex [NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005] b. The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] and c. Norwegian National Annex [NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/NA2008] d. French National Annex [Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005] e. Finnish National Annex [SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005] f. Polish National Annex [PN EN 1993-1-1:2005] g. Singaporean National Annex [SS EN 1993-1-1:2005] h. Belgian National Annex [NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005] The choice of a particular National Annex is based on the value of a new NA parameter that is set by the user when specifying the EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3. See "European Codes National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 283 for a description of the NA parameter.
7C.1.3 Axes convention in STAAD and EC3

By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor axis as YY. A special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is available if the SET Z UP command is used and is discussed in Section 5.5 of the Technical Reference Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction. EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below. Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
Figure 7C.1 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3
See "Example of a TRACK 2 output" on page 281 for an example of how this appears when Y is up (default).
7C.2 AnalysisMethodology
238 STAAD.Pro
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
7C.3 Material Properties and Load Factors

The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 (EN 1993) design is based on table 3.1 of the code. Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic value of a particular resistance by the global partial safety factor for the resistance, . The magnitude of is m m based on Cl. 6.1 of EN1993-1-1:2005 and can change depending on the selected National Annex. Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by users numerical values provided in the input file. Modulus of Elasticity, E = 205000 N/mm 2 Shear Modulus, G = E/2(1+ ) Poissons Ratio, = 0.3 Unit weight, = 76.8 KN/m 3 The magnitude of design loads is dependent on , the partial safety factor for the action under f consideration. You are allowed total control in providing applicable values for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
7C.4 Section Classification

The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section prevents the development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to establish this possibility prior to determining the section capacities. Cross sections are classified in accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the design process, the program determines the section class and calculates the capacities accordingly. It is worth noting that the section class reported in the design output corresponds to the most critical loadcase among those being considered for design. The EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles that are of Class 1, 2, or 3 as defined in section 5.5 of the code. However, the design of members that have a Class 4 section profile are limited to:
l l l l l l
wide flange tee single channel single angle rectangular hollow sections circular hollow sections
Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro, unless they are defined as any of the section types given above. The design of laced and battened members is not considered in the current version of EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro. The current version also does not support the design of tapered section profiles or I-Sections with top and/or bottom plates.
7C.5 Member Design

EN 1993-1-1:2005, together with any specified National Annex, is used for code check or selection of all cross sections and shapes listed in Section 7C.4. However, where EN 1993 or the National Annex has not specified a method or values for a specific clause or parameter, STAAD.Pro uses Non-Contradictory Complimentary Information (NCCI) documents as explained in the following corresponding sections. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l l
failure by overstressing failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or capacities. Member selection is done on the basis of selecting the most economic section on the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that you (the engineer) will take care of the detailing requirements, such as the provision of stiffeners, and check the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
Note: The design of class 4 (slender) sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR & CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. The effective section properties are evaluated as described in Cl. 6.2.2.5 of the code. You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters listed in Table 7C.4. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most circumstances. However, you should control the design and verify results through the use of the design parameters.
7C.5.1 Members Subject to Axial Loads

The cross section capacity of tension only members is checked for ultimate limit state as given in Cl. 6.2.3 of the code. Compression members will be checked for axial capacity of the cross section in addition to lateral buckling/stability. The cross section capacity will be checked as given in section 6.2.4 of the code. Lateral stability of a pure compression member will be checked as per the method given in Cl. 6.3 of the code. The compression member stability will be verified as:
240 STAAD.Pro
N Ed N b ,Rd
1.0
Where N
b,Rd
is the design buckling resistance given by:

A f y M1
Nb, Rd = Nb, Rd =
for Class 1, 2, or 3 cross-sections for Class 4 cross-sections
A efff y M1
Where: is the reduction factor as given in section 6.3.12 of the code. The buckling curves used to evaluate the reduction factor are selected from Table 6.2 of the code based on the cross section type and the steel grade.
Note: Only the five grades of steel given in table 6.2 will be used when selecting the
buckling curve. The steel grade used for this selection is based on the SGR design input parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 264). Even if you have specified a custom yield strength (using the PY parameter), the choice of a buckling curve will be based on the value of SGR parameter. Compression members that are susceptible to torsional or torsional flexural buckling are checked for these modes of failure as well. The non-dimensional slenderness for these T members is evaluated per Cl. 6.3.1.4 of the EN 1993 code. The maximum slenderness among the flexural buckling slenderness, torsional slenderness, and torsional-flexural slenderness is used to evaluate the reduction factor, , for such members. The elastic torsional buckling load, N , and the elastic torsional-flexural buckling load, N , are evaluated based on the cr,T cr,TF method given in the NCCI SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes (unless otherwise specified by a particular National Annex). The effective length for the members can be controlled using the KZ, KY, LZ and LY parameters. If these parameters are specified, the effective length will be calculated as KZ*LZ for length about the Z-Z axis and KY*LY for length about the Y-Y axis. By default, the effective length will be taken as the member length. EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels, or Tee sections and does not provide a method to evaluate the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 (EN 1993) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and Table 25 of BS 59501:2000 are used in the current version of the Eurocode 3 design module.

Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you must consider four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG
parameter. The effective length in the a-a axis is taken as LY KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ KZ. The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or RA specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).
Figure 7C.2 - Axis orientation for single angles
RAangle
7C.5.2 Members Subject to Bending Moments

The cross section capacity of a member subject to bending is checked as per Cl .6.2.5 of the code. The condition to be satisfied is:
M Ed M c ,Rd
1.0
Where M
c,Rd
is the is the design resistance given by:

W plf y M0
M c, Rd = M pl, Rd = M c, Rd = M el, Rd = M c, Rd =
W eff ,m inf y M0
for class 1 and 2 cross-sections for class 3 cross-sections
W el ,minf y M0
for class 4 cross-sections
Cross sectional bending capacity checks will be done for both major and minor axis bending moments. Members subject to major axis bending will also be checked for Lateral Torsional Buckling resistance as per Section 6.3.2 of the code. The design buckling resistance moment M will b,Rd be calculated as:
242 STAAD.Pro
M b, Rd = LT Wy
fy M1
Where: is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling. This reduction factor is LT evaluated per Cl. 6.3.2.2 or Cl 6.3.2.3 of the EN 1993 code depending on the section type. For I sections, the program will by default use Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evalute and for all other sections the program will resort to Cl 6.3.2.2. However, if a LT particular National Annex has been specified, the program will check if the National Annex expands on Cl.6.3.2.3 (Table 6.5) to include sections other than I sections. If so, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 for the cross-section(s) included in Cl. 6.2.2.3 (or Table 6.5). For all other cases the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2.
Note: You have the option to choose the clause to be used to calculate LT
through the MTH design parameter. Setting MTH to 0 (default value) will cause the program to choose Cl.6.3.2.3 for I Sections and Cl 6.2.3.2 for all other section types. As mentioned above, if the National Annex expands on Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include sections other than I Sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 by default.
When using Cl. 6.3.2.3 to calculate , the program will consider the correction LT factor kc (Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2006) based on the value of the KC parameter in the design input. By default the value of KC will be taken as 1.0. If you want the program to calculate kc, you must explicitly set the value of the KC parameter to zero.
Note: If the National Annex specifies a different method to calculate kc (e.g.

the British, Singapore & Polish NAs), the program will use that method by default even if the KC parameter has not been explicitly set to zero. If the NA method does not deal with a specific condition while working out kc, the program will then fall back to table 6.6 of the code, thus ensuring that kc is considered for the particular NA. The non-dimensional slenderness (used to evaluate ) for both the above cases is LT LT evaluated as:
LT =
W yf y M cr
Where: M is the elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling. EN 1993-1-1 does cr not however specify a method to evaluate M . Hence, the program will make use cr of the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1 to evaluate M by cr default.
Note: The method specified in Annex F will be used only when the raw EN
1993-1-1:2005 code is used without any National Annex. If a National Annex has been specified, the calculation of M (and ) will be cr LT done based on the specific National Annex. (See "European Codes National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 283 for specific details). If the National Annex does not specify a particular method or specify a reference document, the program will use the NCCI document SN-003a-EN-EU for doubly symmetric sections and SN030a-EN-EU for mono-symmetric sections that are symmetric about their weak axis. For all other sections types the program will use Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1 to calculate M . In cases where cr Annex F does not provide an adequate method to evaluate Mcr, such as for Channel sections, the program will resort to the method as per Cl.4.3.6 of BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment (Mb,Rd) for the member.
7C.5.3 Members Subject to Shear

The cross section capacity of a member subject to shear is checked as per Cl. 6.2.6 of the code. The condition to be satisfied is:
VEd Vc ,Rd
1.0
Where: V
c,Rd
is the is the shear design resistance given by:

Vc, Rd = Vpl, Rd =
Av fy / M0
A is the shear area and is worked out for the various section types as given in v Cl. 6.2.6(3) of the code.
Shear Buckling
For sections that are susceptible to shear buckling, the program will perform the shear buckling checks as given in Section 5 of EN 1993-1-5. The shear buckling checks will be done only for I Sections and Channel sections. Shear stresses induced from torsional loads are taken into account while performing torsion checks.
Note: Web shear buckling is checked in STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release

20.07.08) and later. The susceptibility of a section to shear buckling will be based on the criteria given in Cl 5.1(2) of EN 1993-1-5 as is as given as follows:
244 STAAD.Pro
a. For unstiffened webs, if hw/t > 72/, the section must be checked for shear buckling. The design resistance is calculated as:
Vb, Rd = Vbw, Rd Vbw , Rd =
wf ywh wt 3 M1 f yw wt 3 M1
Where: h = distance between flanges of an I Section (i.e., depth - 2x flange w thickness). t = thickness of the web = (235/fy ), where fy is the yield stress = 1.2 for steel grades up to and including S 460 and = 1.0 for other steel grades k as defined in sections below
is the web contribution factor obtained from Table 5.1 of the EC3 code w and is evaluated per the following table: Table 7C.1-Evaluate of Slenderness Parameter w < 0.83/ 0.83/ w < 1.08 w > 1.08
w =
hw 86.4 t
Rigid End Post 0.83/w 1.37/(0.7 +w)
Non-rigid End Post 0.83/w 0.83/w
b. For stiffened webs, if hw/t > 31Ek/, the section must be checked for shear buckling. The design resistances considers tension field action of the web and flanges acting as struts in a truss model. This is calculated as:
Vb, Rd = Vbw, Rd + Vbf , Rd
f yw wt 3 M1
Where: V is the flange resistance per Cl.5.4 for a flange not completely bf,Rd utilized by bending moment.
Vbf , Rd =
h ft f2f yf c M 1
M 1 Ed M f ,Rd
b is the width of the flange which provides the least axial resistance, not f to be taken greater than 15tf on each side of the web. t is the thickness of the flange which provides the least axial resistance.
f
Mf,Rd = Mf,k /M0 , the moment of resistance of the cross section consisting of the effective area of the flanges only. For a typical I Section or PFD, this is evaluated as btfhw. When an axial load, N , is present, Ed the value of M is reduced by multiplying by the following factor:
f,Rd
N Ed A + A f f 2 f1 yf M0
A and A are the areas of the top and bottom flanges, respectively.
f1 f2
c = a 0.25 +
1.6b ft f f yf
2 2 th w f yw
a = transverse stiffener spacing. The equation of c is likewise used to solve for a sufficient stiffener spacing in the case of demand from loads exceeding the calculated capacity for a specified stiffener spacing. The following equation must be satisfied for the web shear buckling check to pass:
3 =
VEd Vb ,Rd
1.0
Where: V
Ed
is the design shear force.
Note: The shear forces due to any applied torsion will not be accounted for if the TOR
parameter has been specifically set to a value of 0 (i.e., ignore torsion option). If the stiffener spacing has not been provided (using the STIFFparameter), then the program assumes that the member end forms a non-rigid post (case c) and proceeds to evaluate the minimum stiffener spacing required.
7C.5.4 Members Subject to Torsion

Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or later.
246 STAAD.Pro
General
Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) gives very limited guidance for the analysis and design of torsion members. While both elastic and plastic analyses are permitted generally, the design analysis methods for torsion discussed within EC3 are primarily based on elastic methods. Also, only the first yield design resistance is specifically discussed for torsion members. Furthermore, there is no guidance on section classification nor on how to allow for the effects of local buckling on the design resistance for combined torsional effects. EC3 also does not specifically deal with members subject to combined bending and torsion and loosely states that the yield criteria (Eqn 6.1 in the code) can be used for elastic verification. The method used by STAAD.Pro is therefore based on the SCI publication P057: Design of members subject to combined bending and torsion. Though this publication is based on the British standard BS 5950-1, the principles from this document are applied in the context of Eurocode 3.
Note: At the time this feature has been implemented in STAAD.Pro, SCI are in the
process of updating document P057 to be in accordance with Eurocode 3. Hence this method might be subject to modifications subject to the publication of a newer version of P057. The NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU: Torsion will also be referenced where appropriate.
Code Basis
Torsion design in EC3 is given in Cl. 6.2.7 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Therefore, this clause is used primarily for this implementation. EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not deal with members subject to the combined effects of torsion and lateral torsional buckling. However, EN 1993-1-6 considers such a condition in Appendix A. Therefore, STAAD.pro uses Appendix A of EN 1993-1-6 to check for members subject to combined torsion and LTB. The following clauses from EC3 are then considered:
l l l l
Cl. 6.2.7(1) Cl. 6.2.7(9) Cl. 6.2.7(5) EC-3 -6 App A
Note: STAAD.Pro does, however, use this clause (6.2.7) to report the output for all torsion
checks. Also any distortional deformations and any amplification in the torsional or shear stresses due to distortions will be neglected by the program.
Clause 6.2.7(1) States that for members subject to torsion, the design torsional moment T at each Ed cross section should satisfy: TEd / RRd 1.0 Where: T
Rd
is the design torsional resistance of the cross section.
This is the primary condition that will need to be satisfied for members subject to torsion. The method for working out the torsional resistance T , for the various cases Rd is dealt in the following sections.
l
Cl. 6.2.7(9) States that: For combined shear force and torsional moment, the plastic shear resistance accounting for torsional effects should be reduced from V pl,Rd to V and the design shear force should satisfy:
pl,T,Rd
VEd / Vpl,T,Rd 1.0 The code also gives means to evaluate V in equations 6.26 to 6.28. These pl,T,Rd equations, however, only deal with I/H sections, Channel sections, and structural hollow sections (RHS, SHS, CHS). Therefore, the application of Cl. 6.2.7(9) is only performed for these section profiles.
l
Cl 6.2.7(5) States that the yield criteria given in Cl. 6.2.1(5) of EN 1993-1-1:2005 may be used for elastic verification. STAAD.Pro evaluates the stresses due to the various actions on the cross section and applies this yield criterion.
The program allows for two types of checks for members subject to torsion for EC3 design: I. Basic Stress Check: This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional effects. This method will produce the output corresponding to Cl. 6.2.7(5) of EN 1993-1-1. II. Detailed Checks: This method will perform a full torsional analysis of the member. All four of the clause checks mentioned earlier will be performed. The details of these checks are as described below. You have the option to choose the method to be used for a specific member or group of members. This will be facilitated by setting the value of the TORSION. The TORSION parameter set to zero by default, which results in torsion checks only being performed if the member is subject to torsional moments (i.e., for this default setting, the program will ignore torsion checks if there is no torsional moment in the member). Setting the value of the TORSION parameter to three (3) will cause the program to ignore all torsional moments. The detailed output (i.e., TRACK 2) will indicate that torsion has been ignored for that particular member.
248 STAAD.Pro
The details of setting the values to one (1) or two (2) and the corresponding checks performed are as described below. See "Design Parameters" on page 264 for additional details.
Note: If the TORSION parameter is set to 1 or 2, the program will perform the appropriate
checks even if the member is not subject to torsional moments. In such cases, the program will perform the checks with a value of zero for the torsional moment.
Basic stress check

This method is used when the TORSIONparameter is specified as one (1). This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional effects per Cl. 6.2.7(5). Any warping stresses that may develop due to the end conditions will be ignored for this option. The program will consider the forces (including torsion) at various sections along the length of the member and for each section, will calculate the resultant stress (Von Mieses) at various points on the cross section. The location and number of points checked for a cross section will depend on the cross section type and will be as described below. The stress check will be performed using equation 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 as given below:
2 2 2 x ,Ed z,Ed x ,Ed z,Ed Ed + + 3 f y / M0 f y / M 0 f y / M0 f y / M 0 f y / M 0 1
Where:
x,Ed z,Ed
is the longitudinal stress is the transverse stress and
Ed
is the resultant shear stress.
Note: Since transverse stresses are very small under normal loading conditions (excluding
hydrostatic forces), the term will be negligible and hence is taken as zero. x,Ed = x + bz + by = Fx /Ax + Mz/Zz + My /Zy Ed = T/J t + Vy Q/(Izt) + VzQ/(Iy *t) Where: T is the torsion at the particular section along the length of the member J is the torsion constant t is the thickness of the web/flange V is the shear force Q is the statical moment about the relevant axis I is the second moment of area about the relevant axis
The stress check as per equation 6.1 is performed at various stress points of a cross section as shown in figures below: Shape Doubly symmetric wide flange profile Section Sketch
Pipe profiles = tan1 (M /M ) z y
250 STAAD.Pro
Shape Tube profiles
Section Sketch
Channel profiles
The resultant ratio will be reported under Cl. 6.2.7(5) in the detailed design output.
Detailed stress check

This method is used when the TORSIONparameter is specified as two (2). This method performs a detailed torsional analysis of a member depending on the torsion loading conditions and the support conditions at the member ends. This method is based on the SCI publication P057 and includes any warping stresses (direct warping stresses and
warping shear stresses) depending on the end conditions of the member. This implementation considers seven different cases of loading and end conditions as given in publication P057 Section 6. The loading/end conditions for a member are specified by the use of the CMT design parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 264 for parameter values and descriptions). All the equations used to evaluate the torsional moments and associated stresses are as given in Appendix B of P057. The resultant stresses are evaluated at various sections along the length of the member and the following checks will be performed:
Clause 6.2.7(1) Torsional resistance of the section.

In general, the torsion at any section T
Ed
is resolved into two components, viz.

t,Ed
The pure torsional (St. Venants) moment (T The warping torsional moment(T Therefore,
w,Ed
) and
TEd = Tt,Ed +Tw,Ed = GJ = EH [Ref SCI pub. P057] Where: and are the first and third derivates of twist ( ), respectively, and depend on the end conditions and loading. These are evaluated from the equations in Annex B of P057 and are based the specified CMT parameter.
Note: Although the equation given the NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU can be used to
evaluate T , the NCCI does not give the eqn. to evaluate . Therefore, Annex B wrd of P057 is used. The torsional resistance of the section is also considered as the sum of the pure torsion resistance and the warping torsion resistance. The pure torsion resistance (T ) and the t,Rd warping torsional resistance (T ) are evaluated as:
w,Rd
For closed sections: Tt,Rd = 2 Ac t max Where: A is the area enclosed by the mean perimeter
c
t is the max thickness

max
is the max. allowable shear stress = (fy/3)/ m0
For open sections (I & channel): Tt,Rd = max J / t
252 STAAD.Pro
Where: J is the torsion const t is the max thickness. Tw,Rd = (fy / m0 ) t b2 / 6 Where: b is the width of the section t is the thickness of the flange for I- sections; minimum of flange or web thickness channel sections The check according to Cl 6.2.7(1) will then be performed to ensure that the following conditions are satisfied: Tt,Ed / Tt,Rd 1 Tw,Ed / Tw,Rd 1 TEd / TRd 1
Clause 6.2.7(9) Plastic shear resistance due to torsion

STAAD.Pro checks for shear resistance of a section based on Cl. 6.2.6 for EC3 and the plastic shear resistance (in the absence of torsion) is evaluated as:
Vpl, Rd =
Av f y / M0
Where: A is as pre Cl.6.2.6 (3) for the various sections

v
When torsion is present, along with the shear force, the design shear resistance will be reduced to V , where V is evaluated as follows:
pl,T,Rd pl,T,Rd
i. For I or H Sections:
Vpl, T , Rd = 1
,Ed 1.25 f y /
3 / M0
Vpl, Rd
ii. For Channel Sections:

Vpl, T , Rd = 1
,Ed 1.25 f y /
3 / M0
w ,Ed
(f y /
Vpl, Rd 3 ) / M0
iii. For Structural Hollow Sections:

Vpl, T , Rd = 1
,Ed 1.25 f y /
3 / M0
w ,Ed
(f y /
Vpl, Rd 3 ) / M0
Where
t,Ed
is the shear stress due to direct (St. Venants) torsion and is the shear stress due to warping torsion.
t,Ed
w,Ed
The various shear stresses due to torsion i. For Closed sections:
and
w,Ed
are evaluated as follows:
The shear stresses due to warping can be ignored as they will be insignificant and hence: t,Ed = TEd /(2Act) [Ref NCCI Sn007b-EN-EU] Where: T
Ed c
is the applied torsion,
A is the area delimited by the mean perimeter and t is the thickness of the cross section
w,Ed
= 0, since warping is ignored
ii. For Open sections [I, H, Channel] sections: For I and H sections, the web will not be subject to warping stresses and therefore warping shear can be ignored ( =0).
w,Ed
The stress due to pure torsion is evaluated as: t,Ed = Gt [Ref SCI pub. P057] Where: G is the shear modulus is a function depending on the end condition and loading(T). This will be taken from section 6 and Annex B of P057.
Note: Although the maximum stress is at the thickest section of the profile, the
program uses the web thickness for this clause (since the shear capacity is based on the web area) unless the load is parallel to the flanges, in which case the flange thickness is used. For channel sections that are free to warp at the supports and, thus, are not subject to warping stresses: The warping shear stress is evaluated as: w,Ed = ESw / t [Ref SCI pub. P057]
254 STAAD.Pro
Where: E is the elastic modulus, S is the warping statistical moment and

w
is a function depending on the end condition and loading(T). This will be taken from section 6 and Annex B of P057. t is the thickness of the element.
Clause 6.2.7(5) Check for elastic verification of yield

Eurocode 3 gives yield criterion as per eqn. 6.1 and STAAD.Pro uses the yield criterion given in EC-3. When a member is subject to combined bending and torsion, some degree of interaction occurs between the two effects. The angle of twist caused by torsion is amplified by the bending moments and will induce additional warping moments and torsional shears. Account must also be taken of the additional minor axis moments produced by the major axis moments acting through the torsional deformations, including the amplifications mentioned earlier. For members subject to bending and torsion, the stresses are evaluated as follows: Direct bending stress (major axis): bz = Mz / Zz Direct bending stress (minor axis): by = My / Zy Direct stress due to warping: w = EW ns Direct stress due to twist (min. axis): byt = Myt / Zy Direct stress due to axial load (if any): c = P/ A Where: M is the major axis moment & My is the minor axis moment.
z
is the differential function based on twist (ref P057 Annex B. & Table 6) W
ns
is the normalized warping function.
Myt = Mz (see Appendix B of P057 to evaluate ) Shear stresses due to torsion and/or warping is evaluated as described above for Clause 6.2.7(9). Check for yield (capacity checks) is then done according to Eqn 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, as described for the Basic Stress Check (TORSION = 1):
2 2 2 x ,Ed z,Ed x ,Ed z,Ed Ed + + 3 f y / M0 f y / M 0 f y / M0 f y / M 0 f y / M 0 1
Clause EC-3:6 App A Check for combined Torsion and Lateral Torsional buckling
The interaction check due to the combined effects of bending (including lateral torsional buckling) and torsion will be checked using Annex A of EN 1993-6: 2007. Note that this interaction equation does not include the effects of any axial load.
Warning: At present, SCI advises that no significant work has been published for this
case and work is still ongoing. So at present is advisable not to allow for torsion in a member with large axial load. Members subject to combined bending and torsion will be checked to satisfy:
M y ,ED LTM y ,RK / M1
C MZM z,Ed M z,RK / M1
k wk zwk T w ,Ed T w ,Rk / M1
Where: C is the equivalent uniform moment factor for bending about the z-z axis, mz according to EN 1993-1-1 Table B.3.
k w = 0.7 k zw = 1 k =
0.2T w ,Ed T w ,Rk / M 1 M z,Ed M z,Rk / M1 1 1 M y ,Ed / M y ,cr
M and M are the design values of the maximum moment about the y-y y,Ed z,Ed and z-z axis, respectively. M and M are the characteristic values of the resistance moment of the y,Rk z,Rk cross-section about it y-y and z-z axis, respectively, from EN 1993-1-1, Table 6.7. M T T
y,cr
is the elastic critical lateral-torsional buckling moment about the y-y axis. is the design value of the warping torsional moment. is the characteristic value of the warping torsional resistance moment.
w,Ed w,Rk
is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling according to 6.3.2 of EN LT 1993-1-1.
Note: For all of the above checks the effective length of the member to be used for
torsion can be set by using the EFT design parameter.
7C.5.5 Members Subject to Combined Forces
256 STAAD.Pro
Members subject to Bending and Axial Force

When a member is subject to a combined axial load and a bending moment, the program evaluates a reduced moment capacity based on Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. For Class 1, 2, and 3 sections, the program evaluates the reduced moment from the equations given in Cl. 6.2.9.1 of the code. For class 4 sections, the interaction equation given by equation 6.44 are checked. In the case of members subject to axial load and biaxial bending, the program will consider the interaction equation 6.41 of the code.
Note: By default, the program will use the values of the constants and as given in
the code for the different sections types. However, you can override these values using the ALPHA and BETA design parameters (See "Design Parameters" on page 264).
Note: The program uses the parameter ELB (See "Design Parameters" on page 264) to
override the Cl.6.2.9 checks for combined axial load and bending case. When specfied as 1, the program uses the more general equation 6.2 of EN 1993-1-1, instead.
Members subject to Bending, Shear, and Axial Force

When a member is subject to a combined axial load, shear force, and a bending moment, the program evaluates the reduced yield strength as given in Cl 6.2.10 (3) of the code. The reduction in the yield strength is done only when the applied shear force exceeds 50% of the design shear resistance V . This reduced yield strength is then used to evaluate the reduced pl,Rd moment capacity of the section.
Members subject to Bending and Axial Compression

The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-existent axial load. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling resistance of the section. The EN 1993 design module in STAAD takes such a scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as per Cl. 6.3.3 of the code. Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. In case of a combined axial compressive load and bending moment, the member is checked per the rules in section 6.3.3 of the code. The program checks to ensure that both the interaction equations 6.61 and 6.62 of the code are satisfied. The interaction factors kzz, kyy, kzy & kyz will be evaluated using Annex B of EN 1993-1-1 by default. Hence for the EN 1993-1-1 code in STAAD.Pro (without National Annexes), uses Annex B. The choice between using Annex A and Annex B will be based on the choice specified by a particular National Annex, if
used. If the National Annex itself gives a choice between Annex A and Annex B, the program uses Annex B to evaluate the interaction factors.
Note: EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double
channels or Tee sections and does give a method to evaluate the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 design module. See "Single Angel Sections"for ST and RA angle specifications.
Note: Laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current version
of EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
7C.5.6 Design of Slender pipe sections to EN 1993-16

The design of Slender CHS sections is performed per EN 1993-1-6:2007 (hereafter, EC3-6). EC3-6 does not specify additional or modified safety factors. Therefore, the program uses the default safety factors from EN 1993-1-1.
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters.
EC3-6 deals with four types of ultimate limits states: plastic limit state, cyclic capacity limit state, buckling limit state, and fatigue. The following are considered by STAAD.Pro:
l
LS1 Plastic limit state: Deals with the condition when the capacity of the structure is exhausted by yielding of the material. LS3 Buckling Limit state: Deals with the condition in which the structure (or shell) develops large displacements normal to the shell surface, caused by loss of stability under compressive and/or shear membrane stresses.
The limit state verification is made based on the Stress design method described in EC3-6. The stress design approach takes into account three categories of stresses:
l
Primary stresses: Stresses that are generated for the member to be in equilibrium with the direct imposed loads. Secondary stresses: Those that are generated for internal compatibility or for compatibility at supports due to imposed loads or displacements (e.g., temperature, settlement etc.) Local stresses: Local stresses generated due to cyclic loading (or fatigue).
Only the primary stresses are considered the program. The primary stresses considered are those generated due to axial loads, bending, shear and /or a combination of these conditions.
258 STAAD.Pro
Note: In the context of slender pipe section design for the Eurocode 3 module, the
secondary and local stresses can be neglected since the loads and corresponding stresses dealt with in the design engine are largely direct and shear stresses. The local axis coordinate system for a CHS is defined as: circumferential around the circumference of the circular cross section () meridional along the length of the member (x) normal perpendicular to the tangential plane formed by the circumferential and meridional directions (n) and the corresponding membrane stresses will follow the convention given below:
Figure 7C.3 - Nomenclature for membrane and transverse stresses in Slender CHS sections
Membrane stresses
Transverse stresses
Stress Design
Stress checks are made based on the Stress design method as per Section 8.5 of the code. This section deals with the buckling strength of the member (LS3). The principle is to evaluate the membrane stresses due to the applied loads and then compare that to the buckling strength, which is evaluated giving due consideration for local buckling effects. The membrane stresses are evaluated as given in Annex A of the code. The pipe section is considered as an unstiffened cylindrical shell. i. Meridional Stresses: 1. Axial load Fx = 2rPx x = -Fx /(2rt) 2. Axial stress from bending
M = r2 Px,max x = M/(2 rt) ii. Shear Stress: 1. Transverse force, V V = rP,max max = V/(rt) 2. Shear from torsional moment, M Mt = 2r2 P = Mt/(22 r2 t) Where: r is the radius of the middle surface of the shell wall. t is the wall thickness of the cylinder
Calculation of Axial Buckling Stress

The buckling strength of A slender pipe section is evaluated using the method given in section 8.5.2 ofEC3-6. The design buckling stresses (buckling resistance) are calculated separately for axial, circumferential, and shear. The circumferential stresses are ignored in STAAD.Pro. The naming convention and the coordinate axis used will be as given in the following diagram:
Figure 7C.4 - Naming convention and coordinate system used for the buckling stress of a slender CSH section
The axial buckling resistance is given by: x,Rd = x,Rk /M1
260 STAAD.Pro
Note: M1 will have the same default value of 1.0 as in EN 1993-1-1.
x,Rk
is the characteristic buckling strength given by: x,Rk = x fyk
Where: is the meridional buckling reduction factor. is evaluated per Section x x 8.5.2(4) of EC3-6 and is determined as a function of the relative shell slenderness given by:
x =
f yk x ,cr
Where:
x,cr
is the elastic buckling critical stress.
Once the relative slenderness is evaluated, the reduction factor is calculated as follows: = 1 when
0 = 1 P 0 when < <
= Where:
/2
when
P
is the plastic limit for slenderness given by:

p
P =
The meridional buckling parameters the factors and are evaluated per section D.1.2.2 of EC3-6.
Note: A Normal fabrication quality will be assumed when evaluating the fabrication
quality parameter as given in table D.2 of the code, unless the fabrication quality is set using the FAB design parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 264 The elastic critical buckling stress, and the factors and are evaluated per Annex D of x,cr EC3-6. The details are as given below: The CHS section is classified based on the following criteria: CHS Length Classification Short Medium Long Criteria 1.7 1.7 < 0.5 r/t > 0.5 r/t
Where:
=
l rt
The elastic critical buckling critical stress is evaluated as: x,Rcr = 0.605ECx (t/r) Where: C is a factor dependant upon the CHS length classification as described in x section D.1.2.1 of EC-3-6.
Note: For a long cylinder, there are two separate methods that can be used
to evaluate the C factor: Eqns D.9/10 and Eqn D.12. Initially the x program evaluates C based on the maximum from equations D.9 x and D.10. However, for long cylinders that satisfy the conditions in equation D.11, the program will also work out Cx based on equation D.12 and then choose the minimum obtained from D.12 and D.9/10.
Calculation of Shear Buckling Stress

The shear buckling resistance is given by: x,Rd = x,Rk /M1
Note: M1 will have the same default value of 1.0 as in EN 1993-1-1.
x,Rk
is the characteristic buckling shear strength given by: x,Rk = fyk
Where: is the shear buckling reduction factor. will be worked out as given in section 8.5.2(4) of En 1993-1-6 and is determined as a function of the relative shell slenderness given by:
=
f yk x ,cr
Where:
x,Rk
is the elastic buckling critical stress.
The reduction factor, , is then evaluated as described for the axial buckling stress, based on the same , , and parameters given in Annex D of EC3-6.
p
The CHS section is classified based on the following criteria:
262 STAAD.Pro
CHS Length Classification Short Medium Long Where:

=
l rt
Criteria 10 10 < 8.7 r/t > 8.7 r/t
The elastic critical buckling critical stress is evaluated as:

x, Rcr = 0.75EC
1
Where: C is a factor dependant upon whether the CHS length classification as described in section D.1.4.1 of EC-3-6.
Note: A Normal fabrication quality will be assumed when working out the
fabrication quality parameter as given in table D.6 of the code, unless the fabrication quality is set using the FAB design parameter.
Buckling Strength Verification

The buckling strength verification will be performed so as to satisfy the following conditions: For axial stresses: x,Ed x,Rd For shear stresses: x,Ed x,Rd For a combined case of axial and shear stresses acting together, an interaction check will be done according to equation 8.19 of the code as below:
x ,Ed x ,Rd
kx
+ x ,Ed x ,Rd
Where: k and k are the interaction factors as given in section D.1.6 of EN 1993-1-6:
x
kx = 1.25 + 0.75 x k = 1.75 +0.25

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model being designed, you may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the n setting must be compatible with the active unit specification. Table 7C.4 lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and default values. Table 7C.2-Steel Design Parameters EC3 EN Parameter Name CODE Default Value Must be specified as EN 1993-11:2005 to invoke design per Eurocode 3:2005 (EN 1993). Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. ALH 0.5 The ratio of the distance of the point torque (from the start of the member) to the length of the member. The default value of 0.5 represents torque acting at the midspan of a symmetrically loaded member. Values can range from 0 to 1. ALPHA 1.0 Used to input a user defined value for the factor in equation 6.41 for combined bending and axial force checks. Description
264 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name BEAM
Default Value 3
Description
Parameter to control the number of sections to checked along the length of a beam: 1. Check at location of maximum Mz along beam 2. Check sections with end forces and forces at location of BEAM1.0 check. 3. Check at every 1/13th point along the beam and report the maximum
BETA
1.0
Used to input a user defined value for the factor in equation 6.41 for combined bending and axial force checks.
C1
1.132
Corresponds to the C1 factor to be used to calculate Elastic critical moment M as per Clause 6.3.2.2
cr
C2
0.459
cr
C3
cr
Parameter Name CAN
Default Value 0
Description
Member will be considered as a cantilever type member for deflection checks. 0 indicates that member will not be treated as a cantilever member 1 indicates that the member will be treated as a cantilever member
CMM
1.0
Indicates type of loading and support conditions on member. Used to calculate the C1, C2, and C3 factors to be used in the M calculations.
cr
Can take a value from 1 to 8. Refer to Table 7C.5 for more information on its use. CMN 1.0 Indicates the level of End-Restraint. 1.0 = No fixity 0.5 = Full fixity 0.7 = One end free and other end fixed CMT 1 Used to indicate the loading and support condition for torsion (ref. SCI publication P-057). Can take a value of 1-7. The values correspond to the various cases defined in section 6 and App. B of SCI-P-057. Refer to Table 7C.6 for more information
266 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DFF
Default Value 0 (Mandatory for deflection check, TRACK 4.0)
Description
"Deflection Length" / Max.. allowable local deflection See Note 1d below.
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" . See Note 1 below.
DJ2
End Joint of member
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length". See Note 1 below.
DMAX
100.0 cm
Maximum allowable depth for the member.
DMIN
Minimum required depth for the member.
EFT
Member Length
Effective length for torsion. A value of 0 defaults to the member length. Used to specify the method for combined axial load + bending checks 0. Uses Cl. 6.2.9 of EN 1993-11:2005 1. Uses Cl. 6.2.1(7) - Eqn. 6.2 of EN 1993-1-1:2005
ELB
Parameter Name ESTIFF
Default Value 0
Description
(For use with the Dutch NA only) Method for checking columns forming part of (non)/buttressed framework: 0. Checks per Cl 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN 6770: Section 1 1. Checks per Cl 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN 6770: Section 2 See "Clause 12.3.1.2.3 (NEN 6770): Rotation/bending capacity" on page 295 for additional description on this parameter.
FAB
Used to specify the fabrication class to be used to check for slender (Class 4) CHS/pipe sections (EN 1993-16:2007) 1. Class A Excellent 2. Class B High 3. Class C Normal
FU GM0
0 1.0
Ultimate tensile strength of steel. Corresponds to the 1993-1-1:2005

m0
factor in EN
GM1
1.0
Corresponds to the 1993-1-1:2005
m1
factor in EN
GM2
1.25
Corresponds to the 1993-1-1:2005
m2
factor in EN
268 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name GST
Default Value 0
Description
Used to specify the section type to be used for designing a General Section from the user table. The member will be considered as the specified type with the user defined properties. The available options and corresponding values are as below: 0. I-Section 1. Single Channel 2. Rectangular Hollow Section 3. Circular Hollow Section 4. Angle Section 5. Tee Section
Note: This parameter will be

ignored if it has been assigned to any section other than a General Section. KC 1.0 Corresponds to the correction factor as per Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Program will calculate kc automatically if this parameter is set to 0.
Note: For the British, Singapore,

& Polish NAs, kc will be calculated as given in the NA by default.
Parameter Name KY
Default Value 1.0
Description
K factor in local y axis. Used to calculate the effective length for slenderness and buckling calculations.
KZ
1.0
K factor in local z axis. Used to calculate the effective length for slenderness and buckling calculations.
LEG
Slenderness values for angles as determined from BS 5950-2000 Table 25. See "Design Parameters" on page 74
LVV
Max. value of Lyy
Leg length for Lvv (length about v-vaxis of single angle section), as per Lyy. Used for slenderness calculations.
LY
Member Length
Compression length in local y axis, Slenderness ratio = (KY)*(LY)/(Ryy) Compression length in local z axis, Slenderness ratio = (KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
LZ
Member Length
270 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name MTH
Default Value 0
Description
Used to select the clause to be used to calculate the LTB reduction factor,
LT
. The available options and
corresponding values are as below: 0. Use default method based on section type (default) 1. Use Cl.6.3.2.2 2. Use Cl.6.3.2.3 By default, the program will use Cl 6.3.2.3 for rolled & built-up I-sections and Cl. 6.3.2.2 for all other sections. If, however, the specified National Annex expands on Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include other section types (e.g., the UK NA), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 by default for that particular section type. See "European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-11:2005]" on page 283 for additional details on NAdocuments. MU 0 To be used with CMM values of 7 and 8. See Table 7C.4.
Note: Currently valid only with

the French & Belgian NAs. NA 0 Choice of National Annex to be used for EC3 design. See "European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 283 for values allowed for this parameter. (See "National Annex Documents" on page 237 for more information)
Parameter Name NSF
Default Value 1.0
Description
Net tension factor for tension capacity calculation.
PLG
To be used to determine whether to include the additional interaction checks as per CL. NA.20(2) and NA.20(3) of the Polish National Annex.
Note: This parameter will be

applicable only to the Polish NA PY Yield Strength The yield strength default value is set based on the default value of the SGR parameter. RATIO 1 Permissible ratio of loading to capacity. SBLT 0.0 Indicates if the section is rolled or built-up. 0.0 = Rolled 1.0 = Built-up
272 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name SGR
Default Value 0
Description
Steel grade as in table 3.1 of EN 19931-1:2005 0.0 - indicates S 235 grade steel 1.0 - indicates S 275 grade steel 2.0 - indicates S 355 grade steel 3.0 - indicates S 420 grade steel 4.0 - indicates S 460 grade steel
Note: As EN 1993-1-1:2005 does

not provide a buckling curve in table 6.2 for grade S 450 steel (in Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005), the program will use the same buckling curves as for grade S 460 when calculating the buckling resistance as per clause 6.3. STIFF Member Length or depth of beam, whichever is lesser TOM 0 Total torsion for design used for torsion checks. Can be used to override the total torsional moment to be used for member design. Distance between transverse stiffener plates, used to prevent web shear buckling. If not specified or if a value of 0 is provided, the program will assume the web is unstiffened.
Parameter Name TORSION
Default Value 0
Description
Method to be used for a specific member or group of members: 0. Perform basic torsion checks if member is subject to torsion. 1. Perform basic stress check (Ignore warping effects). 2. Perform detailed checks (including warping effects). 3. Ignore all torsion checks
Note: For options 1 or 2, the

program will perform the torsion related checked even if torsional moment is absent and will use a value of zero for the torsional moment. TRACK 0 Specify level of detail in output. 0. Summary of results only. 1. Summary with member capacities. 2. Detailed results. 4. Deflection check results only. UNF 1 Unsupported length as a fraction of the actual member length. UNL Member Length Unrestrained length of member used in calculating the lateral-torsional resistance moment of the member.
274 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name ZG
Default Value +Section Depth/2
Description
Distance of transverse load from shear center. Used to calculate M .

cr
Note: For Tee sections, ZG will

have a default value of (+Flange thickness/2)
Notes: 1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 Deflection a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual. If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member. Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2) Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as the case may be. Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the Deflection Length will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the Deflection Length may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.

c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local deflections will be measured from original member line. d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no default value for DFF (see Table 2B.1). e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel design. 2. CMM Parameter The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below: Table 7C.3-Values for the CMM Parameter CMM Value 1 Loading and Support Conditions
276 STAAD.Pro
CMM Value 5
Loading and Support Conditions
varying end moments and uniform loading 8
varying end moments and central point load 3. Checking beam deflection With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a BEAM CHECK command will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the stress capacity using the current LOAD LIST. If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter blocks with code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one with a TRACK 0, 1 or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10 PARAMETER 1 CODE EN 1993 TRACK 2 ALL CODE CHECK MEMBER 1 *************************** LOAD LIST 100 TO 110 PARAMETER 2 TRACK 4 ALL DFF 300 MEMB 1 DJ1 1 MEMB 1 DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the
last code check results are reported in the STAAD.Pro graphical interface. 4. CMT Parameter The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below: Table 7C.4-Loading and Support Conditions represented by CMT Parameter Values CMT Value 1 Description Diagram
(Default) : Concentrated Torque at Ends. Ends Torsion fixed and Warping fixed Concentrated Torque along length of member. Ends Torsion fixed and Warping free Concentrated Torque along length of member. Ends Torsion fixed and Warping fixed Uniform Torque in member. Ends Torsion fixed and Warping free
Uniform Torque in member. Ends Torsion fixed and Warping fixed
Concentrated Torque in cantilever. End Torsion fixed and Warping fixed
278 STAAD.Pro
CMT Value 7
Description
Diagram
Uniform Torque in cantilever. End Torsion fixed and Warping fixed
Note: For CMT = 2 and CMT = 3, you have the option of specifying the distance at
which the concentrated torque acts, measured from the start of the member. This can be done by using the ALH design parameter. The ALH parameter indicates the ratio of the distance of the point torque (from the start of the member) to the length of the member. This parameter will have a default value of 0.5 (i.e., the torque acts at the center of the span) and will accept values ranging from 0 to 1.
Note: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding
this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and you will be required to substitute GB1 with GM1, in accordance with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7C.7 CodeChecking
The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per EN 1993-1-1:2005 and a corresponding National Annex (if specified). Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition; the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition occurs). Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with the exception of ISECTION. ISECTION has been currently excluded since the option of Tapered section design is currently not supported in the EC3 module. The EC3 (EN 1993) design module does not consider these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Note: Checks for slender sections to EN 1993-1-1 are limited to I-SECTIONS, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE and CIRCULAR & RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS.
Code checking for GENERAL sections can be also done using the EN1993 module. The program will design GENERAL sections as I sections by default. However, you are given the option to choose a section type to be considered while designing the member. Refer to the description of the GST design parameter in Section 7C.6 for details.
7C.8 Member Selection

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members. Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as defined in Section 7C.7. Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic or as the limitations specified in Section 7C.7.
7C.9 TabulatedResultsofSteelDesign
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is performed. TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. CRITICAL COND refers to the clause in EN 1993-1-1:2005 code which governs the design. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. LOADING provides the load case number, which governed the design. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
280 STAAD.Pro
LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks that
have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the various design data used for the calculations such as the section modulii, section class, section capacity etc. If an NA parameter (other than 0) has been specified and if the particular National Annex requires additional checks outside those specified in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (e.g., The Dutch National Annex), the respective NA clauses and any associated code clauses will be listed along with the critical ratios and the forces that were used for these clause checks.
7C.9.1 Example of a TRACK 2 output

Documentation notes appear in red.
Note: The results and output follow the axis convention as described in Section 7C.1.3
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - BS EN 1993- Code title & version 1-1:2005 ******************************************** NATIONAL ANNEX - NA to BS EN National Annex used, if any 1993-1-1:2005 PROGRAM CODE REVISION V1.9 BS_EC3_2005/1 ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE
Design engine version
METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST 6.3.3-662 HD320X127 0.045 (EUROPEAN SECTIONS) Member number, section profile & table PASS EC- Design status, critical code clause, & critical ratio 1
25.00 C 5.00 Section forces & critical section location -10.00 0.00 ======================================================================= MATERIAL DATA Grade of steel = USER Modulus of elasticity = 205 kN/mm2 Design Strength (py) = 275 N/mm2 SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm) Member Length = 500.00 Gross Area = 161.30 Net Area = 161.30
"z-axis" here refers to bending about Z-Z (when Y is Up), where as EC3 uses the Y-Y axis convention.
z-axis 30820.004 y-axis 9239.001
Moment of inertia
Plastic modulus Elastic modulus Shear Area Radius of gyration Effective Length DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) Section Class
: 2149.000 : 1926.250 : 81.998 : 13.823 : 500.000 EUROCODE NO.3 /2005 : CLASS 1 4435.75 0.006 1.00 z-axis 36.2 4078.2 4435.8 591.0 591.0 1301.9 MB =
939.100 615.933 51.728 7.568 500.000
Section class as per Table 5.2

y
Squash Load : Axial force/Squash load : GM0 : 1.00 GM1 : 1.10 Slenderness ratio (KL/r) Compression Capacity Tension Capacity Moment Capacity Reduced Moment Capacity Shear Capacity : : : : : :
Max. cross section capacity (A f /GM0

GM2 :
Partial safety factors used

y-axis 66.1 3045.5 4435.8 258.3 258.3 821.3
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m) Lateral Torsional Buckling Moment co-
591.0
Factor C1 used in M calculations and End restraint factor (corresponds to the CMN design cr parameters
efficients
C1 & K : C1 =2.578 K =1.0, Effective Length= 5.000 Elastic Critical Moment for LTB, Mcr = 1541.5 Critical Load For Torsional Buckling, NcrT = 13898.0 Critical Load For Torsional-Flexural Buckling, NcrTF = 13898.0 ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m): CLAUSE RATIO LOAD Max. ratio, loadcase, & section forces for each clause check FX VY VZ MZ MY EC-6.3.1.1 0.008 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0 EC-6.2.9.1 0.020 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0 EC-6.3.3-661 0.035 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0 EC-6.3.3-662 0.045 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0 EC-6.3.2 LTB 0.017 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0 Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design. _________________________ ************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
282 STAAD.Pro
7D. European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]

A number of countries that have signed up to the replace their current steel design standards with the Eurocode, EN 1993-1-1:2005, known commonly as Eurocode 3, have published their National Annex documents. These documents make small changes to thebase document and STAAD.Pro has been updated to incorporate some of these NationalAnnex documents. The parameter NA sets the default material gamma factors and any additionalchanges outlined in the country specific National Annex such as specific equations ormethods. These are described for each National Annex document in the following sections. The output file printout has been updated to indicate which National Annex (if any) hasbeen used in a code check / select process (For all TRACK settings). Design of members per EC3 National Annexes requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
7D.1 General Format

The format of the EN 1993-1-1:2005 National Annex is as follows:
CODE EN 1993 NA f1
{Code parameters: See "Design Parameters" on page 264 } Where: f1 represents the number designation for a specific country's National Annex: Table 7D.1-Table 5B1.2(B) - Numerical Code for Eurocode National Annex NAValue 0 Country None Uses the base EN 1993-1-1:2005 code, with no national annex changes or additions. The default values specified in En 1993-1-1:2005 will be used for the partial safety factors and various parameter values where applicable (default). United Kingdom (British NA) Uses the BS EN 19931-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the UK National Annex. Netherlands (Dutch NA) Uses the NEN EN 1993-11:2005 version of the code. The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] has been added in this module. Please note that the Dutch National requires additional checks as per NEN 6770 and NEN 6771 which will also be performed during design checks with this parameter value
7D. European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]
NAValue 3
Country Norway (Norwegian NA) Uses the NS-EN 1993-11:2005 version of the code. The Norwegian National Annexe [ NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/Na 2008] has been added to this implementation. France (French NA) Uses the Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 version of the code along with the French National Annex.. Finland (Finnish NA) - Uses the SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the Finnish National Annex. Poland (Polish NA) - Uses the PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the Polish National Annex. Singapore (Singaporean NA) - Uses the SS EN1993-11:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the Singaporean National Annex. Belgium (Belgian NA) - Uses the NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the Belgian National Annex.
7D.2 Specifying the design engine to use a national annex

Use the following procedure to include additional check specified by a National Annex: 1. In the Modeling mode, select the Design |Steel tab. The Steel Design - Whole Structure dialog box opens. 2. In the Current Code drop-down menu, select EN 1993-1-1:2005. 3. Click Define Parameters. The Design Parameters dialog box opens.
284 STAAD.Pro
4. Select the NAparameter in the list box. 5. Select the option corresponding to the National Annex document you want to use . 6. Click Add. This will insert the following commands into the STAAD input file: CODE EN 1993-1-1:2005 NA 8 Refer to EC3 steel design for additional information on steel design per EC3. A design performed to the new Eurocode 3 National Annex is displayed in the outputfile (*.ANL) with the following header, in addition to the base EC3 output.
7D.1 Dutch National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the Dutch National Annextitled NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NBfor use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that require additional clauses from the Dutch National Annex (hereafter referred to as D-NA) are described in the following sections. Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the D-NA.
Note: Clause 6.3.2.4 deals with a simplified assessment method for beams. STAAD.Pro only
uses the more accurate method (6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 in EC-3) and therefore this section is ignored.
7D.1.1 Axis Convention

The local axis convention in the Dutch codes is: Y major axis & Z minor axis (as opposed to the convention followed in STAAD.Pro).
Figure 7D.1 - Local axis convention used in the Dutch NA to EC-3
7D.1.2 Clause 6.1 General

The partial safety factors will use the following values:
l l
Resistance of cross-sections,
M0
= 1.0
M1
Resistance of members to instability,
= 1.0
Resistance of cross sections to tension,
M2
= 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the D-NA (NA 3 is specified)..
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See
"Design Parameters" on page 264
7D.1.3 Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear

The D-NA requires the implementation of causes 11.3.1.1 and 11.3.1.3 of NEN 6770.
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and Class 2 I-section profiles

Class 1 and class 2 I section profiles must satisfy the interaction formulae given in tables 10 & 11 of NEN 6770. Table 10 Provides interaction checks for bending about the major axis (All necessary terms and formulae are described below): 1. If Vz;s;d 0.5Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 a1 Npl;d , check equation 11.3.1 2. If Vz;s;d 0.5Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 a1 Npl;d , check equation 11.3.2 3. If Vz;s;d > 0.5Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 a2 Nv;u;d , check equation 11.3-3 4. If Vz;s;d > 0.5Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 a2 Nv;u;d , check equation 11.3-4 Where: V V
z;s;d
= Actual Shear force in the section along Z- axis = Shear capacity of section along Z - axis
y;d
z;pl;d w
=A f f
y;d
/ 3
= yield stress
287 STAAD.Pro
Figure 7D.2 - Definition of A
Aw = A - 2 (bf - tw - 2r) tf N N
s;d
= Axial force in the section = Axial capacity of section = A f

y;d
pl;d
M M
y;s;d
= Bending moment about major axis = Plastic moment capacity of section = f

y;d
y;pl;d y;pl
y;pl
W
1
= Plastic section modulus
a = min( A-2bfx tf)/A , 0.5)- used in tables 10 & 11 a = see eqn 11.3-10- used in tables 10 & 11
2
M N
v;y;ud
= see eqn 11.3.12
;v;u;d
= see eqn 11.3-13
Table 11: Provides interaction formulae for bending about the minor axis 1. If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 a1 Npl;d check equation 11.3-5 2. If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 a1 Npl;d check equation 11.3-6 3. IfVy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 a1 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-7 4. If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 a1 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-8 Where: V V
y;s;d
= Actual Shear force in the section along Y-axis = Shear capacity of sectionalong Y-axis
f y ;d 3
y;pl;d
Vy ; pl ; d = 2btf
Mv;z;u;d = q Mz;pld = q fy;d W pl;z;d W

pl;z;d
= plastic section modulus about minor axis) & q as per eqn 11.3-14
Nv;u;d = Npl;d 2(1 - q)bf tf fy;d
Clause 11.3.1.3 ( NEN 6770) : Class 1 and Class 2 Square and rectangular hollow sections
This clause requires class 1 and class 2 square and rectangular tube profiles to satisfy the interaction equations in Table 13. 1. If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 a3 Npl;d check equation 11.3.22 2. If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 a3 Npl;d check equation 11.3.23 3. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 a4 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-24 4. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 a4 Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-25 Where V V
z;s;d
= Actual Shear force in the section along Z-axis = Shear capacity of section along Z-axis
z;pl;d
b = breadth of section h = height of section A = area of section

Vz ; pl ; d = Vz ; cl ; d =
3
f y ;d h A b +h 3
a = min{ (A - 2 b t)/A or 0.5} a = from equation 11.3.27

4
7D.1.4 Clause 6.2.10 Bending shear and axial force

Requires the implementation of clauses 11.3.1.1 to 11.3.1.3 and 11.3.2.1 to 11.3.2.3 of NEN 6770 and clause 11.3 of NEN 6771
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770) and Clause 11.3.1.3 ( NEN 6770)

See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 287
289 STAAD.Pro
Clause 11.3.1.2 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and class 2 circular hollow (CHS) profiles
Class 1 and class 2 sections with circular hollow profiles should satisfy the interaction equations given in table 12.
l l
Check #1 If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.17 Check #2 If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.18.
See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 287 of this document for equations to derive Vz;s;d Vz;pl;d = Shear capacity of CHS sections
Vpl ; d = 2
A f y ;d 3
See equations 11.3-19 and 11.3-20 to evaluate Mv;y;u;d and N;v;u;d. To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index z in the above equations with y (should be the same of CHS sections).
Clause 11.3.2 ( NEN 6770)

Section 11.3.2 in general deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear. The general condition to be satisfied in this case is given by equation 11.3-31 of NEN 6770
M y ;s ;d 0 M N ;V ;y ;u ;d
a1
M z;s ;d + 1 M N ;V ;z;u ;d
a2
Clause 11.3.2.1 : Class 1 and class2 I-sections with biaxial bending + shear + axial force
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d are to be taken from tables 14 and 15 of NEN 6770 respectively. Checks for table 14: 1. Check #1 If Vz;s;d 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.32 2. Check #2 If Vz;s;d 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.33 3. Check #3 If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-34 4. Check #4 If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-35 See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vz;s;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vz;pl;d. Checks for table 15:
1. Check #1 If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.36 2. Check #2 If Vy;s;d 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.37 3. Check #3 If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-38 4. Check #4 If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-39 See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vy;s;d, Mz;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;z;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vy;pl;d. See table 16 for 1, 1, 0 and 1 use in tables 14 and 15.
Clause 11.3.2.2 : Class 1 and Class 2 Circular hollow tubes

The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-3-31, see description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 17 of NEN 6770. 1. Check #1 If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.44 2. Check #2 If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.45. See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, and Npl;d use in equations 11.3.44 & 11.3.45. For values to be used for 1, 2, 1 and 2 in this case refer to table 18 of NEN 6770.
Clause 11.3.2.3 : Class 1 and class2 Rectangular and square hollow tubes
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-3-31, see description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 19 of NEN 6770. 1. Check #1 If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3-48 2. Check #2 If Vz;s;d 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.49 3. Check #3 If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-50 4. Check #4 If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-51 See "Clause 6.2.8 Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a3, a4 and Vz;pl;d to be used in the above equations. For values to be used for 1, 2, 1 and 2 in this case refer to table 20 of NEN 6770. To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index z in the above equations with y.
Clause 11.3 ( NEN 6771)

In general, this section deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear for class 3 and class 4 sections.
291 STAAD.Pro
Check for class 3 sections: For class 3 sections use the method in section 11.3 NEN 6770. For class 3 sections the methods and equations discussed above can be used with the plastic section modulus being substituted with the elastic modulus. Check for class 4 sections: Class 4 sections can be treated as class 3 sections if the effective section properties are used as given in clause 10.2.4.2.3 of NEN 6771. Working out the effective section properties for slender sections has already been done in STAAD.Pro. For I- section profiles and tubular sections, the following cases are checked: 1. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d 1 check equation 11.2-7 ( given below) Vz;s;d /Vz;u;d 1 Where V V
z;s;d z;u;d
is the shear for in the Z direction is the shear capacity in the Z direction for ultimate limit state.
For an I section,
Vz ; u ; d = A w; et
2 3 f y ;d 3
Where Aw,ef = effective web area as given in section 10.2.4.2.3. MN;y;f;u;d is the moment capacity about the Y axis for the effective section. = ( fyW,eff) 2. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d > 1 and M;y;s;d / M;y;f;u;d 1 check equation 11.2-13 (given below):
M y ;s ;d
2 2Vz;s ;d M N ;y ;f ;u ;d + M N ;y ;u ;d M N ;y ;f ;u ;d1 1 Vz;u ;d
7D.1.5 Clause 6.3 Buckling resistance of members

The D-NA introduces a new clause 6.3.0, which in turns requires the checks as per clauses 12.1.2.2, 12.13.2 and 12.1.4.2 of NEN 6771 to be applied.
Clause 12.1.2.2 (NEN 6771)

This clause in NEN 6771 determines the relative torsional slenderness and is given as:
, re =
N c ;u ;d FE ;
Where: Nc;u;d = Afy;d
A = area of section f
y;d E;
= the yield stress is the Euler-torsion formula
This value of slenderness is to be used to calculate the modification factors used in section 6.3 of EC-3.
Clause 12.1.3.2 (NEN 6771)

This clause works out the relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness for compression members. The relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness is given as:
tk , re =
N c ;u ;d FE ;tk
Where Nc;u;d = Afy;d A = area of section f

y;d
= yield stress is the Euler torsional buckling strength
E;tk
Clause 12.1.4.2 (NEN 6771)

Buckling lengths of rotationally restrained bars with intermediate spring supports.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not allow for these end conditions, specifically. The effective
length factors may be used to accommodate this requirement.
7D.1.6 Clause 6.3.1.3 Slenderness for flexural buckling

The Dutch NA requires the implementation of clause 12.1.1.3 and 12.1.5.3.2 of NEN 6770 and clause 12.1.1.3 of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6770)

This clause gives the equations to evaluate the effective lengths for various support conditions. STAAD.Pro uses the effective length factor K which allows the user to set/modify the effective lengths for a member.
293 STAAD.Pro
Clause 12.1.5.3.2 (NEN 6770)

This clause gives methods to evaluate the buckling length of lattice sections. We do not deal with latticed section in the current version of STAAD.Pro. In any case the buckling length can be adjusted using the K factor.
Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6771)

This clause again deals with working out the effective lengths of prismatic and non-prismatic rods. Again, the K factor in the current implementation of STAAD.Pro is adequate to cater for adjusting the effective lengths as necessary.
7D.1.7 Clause 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling

The D-NA requires the implementation of clauses 12.1.2 and 12.1.3 of NEN 6770
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6770): Torsional stability

IPE, HEA, HEB & HEM sections and pipe sections do not need to be checked for torsional instability. If torsional checks need to be performed, they should be done according to 12.1.2 of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6771)

This clause gives the condition to check for torsion instability. The condition being:
N c ;s ;d N c ;u ;d
Where: N N
c;s;d
= the applied axial load = the axial capacity = A f .

y
;d fu ;d
C;u;d
Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6770): Torsional flexural stability

Doubly symmetric sections need not be checked for torsional flexural instability. However, for I sections that have rigid supports that is not along the axis of the section and any other sections will need to be checked as per clause 12.1.3 of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6771)

This clause gives the condition to check for torsional flexural instability. The condition being:
N c ;s ;d t ;k N c ;u ;d
Where: N
c;s;d
and N
c;u;d
as in clause 12.1.2 above.
7D.1.8 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Lateral torsional buckling curves

Clause 6.3.2.2 Lateral torsional buckling curves general
The D-NA states that the values for the imperfection factor, LT, to be used in equation 6.56 of EC-3 are to be obtained from sTable 6.3 of EC-3. These are the values used by STAAD.Pro.
Clause 6.3.2.3 Lateral torsional buckling curves for rolled sections or equivalent welded sections
The D-NA states that: 1. The values for the:
l l
Imperfection factor LT0 = 0.4 (used in equation 6.57 of EC-3) = 0.75 (used in equation 6.57 of EC-3)
These are the default values used by the program. 2. The buckling curves shall be selected as per Table 6.5. 3. The reduction factor, f, is given by F = 1 0.5(1 - kc)[1 - 2x (LT -0.8)2 ]. kc is a correction factor for moment distribution determined from Table 6.6. This value can be specified or calculated by the program using the KC parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 264 The current implementation of STAAD.Pro conservatively uses a value of f = 1.0.
7D.1.9 Clause 6.33 Uniform members in bending and axial compression

The D-NA recommends the use of the method in Annex B of EC-3 to determine the values of kyy, kyz, kzy and kzz to be used in 6.3.3 ( EC-3) checks. STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B.
Clause 12.3.1.2.3 (NEN 6770): Rotation/bending capacity

The Dutch NA also requires additional checks as per clause 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN 6770.
295 STAAD.Pro
The checks given in this clause deals with additional checks for columns that form part of a buttressed or non-butressed framework. The program uses the ESTIFF parameter with two different values to identify the framework type: Table 7D.1-Framework parameter ESTIFF values for the Dutch NA ESTIFF value Description (default) Column part of a buttressed framework. Selecting this value will internally perform the checks as per section 1 of clause 12.3.1.2.3 Column is not part of a buttressed framework. Selecting this value will internally perform the checks as per section 2 of clause 12.3.1.2.3
These checks are described below: 1. For columns in buttressed frameworks the buckling length is to be taken based on either
l l
the system length or the distance between adjacent lateral supports
The following conditions should also be satisfied: If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
N c ;s ;d N p ;d
y 120
Where: N N
c;s;d pl;d
is the axial load in the section = Axial capacity of section = Af

y;d
= Slenderness of the section about the major axis ( Y-axis)

y
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then

N c ;s ;d N p ;d
y 100
Where: N
c;s;d
= the axial load in the section
pl;d
= Axial capacity of section = Af
y;d

y
2. For columns that are not part of buttressed frameworks the following additional checks need to be done: If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
N c ;s ;d N p ;d
y 100
Where: N N
c;s;d pl;d
= the axial load in the section and = Axial capacity of section = Af

y;d

y
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then

N c ;s ;d N p ;d
y 80
297 STAAD.Pro
7D.1 Norwegian National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the Norwegian National Annextitled NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that require additional clauses from the Norwegian National Annex are:
7D.1.1 Clause 6.1(1) General: Partial Safety Factors for buildings

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are , , and . EN 1993 provides default values for M0 M1 M2 these factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values. The partial safety factors will use the following values:
l l l
Resistance of cross-sections -
M0
= 1.05
M1
Resistance of members to instability -
= 1.05 = 1.25
Resistance of cross sections to tension -
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the NorwegianNA (NA 3 is specified).
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above. Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the Norwegian -NA.
7D.1 UK National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the UK National Annex - titled NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below
refer to the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA. The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro: Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling The UK NA specifies the value of c0 for I, H channel or box section to be used in equation 6.59 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4. However, STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the UK National Annex. Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl The value of the modification factor kfl to be used in equation 6.60 of BS EN 1993-11. However, STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the UK National Annex. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 that have been dealt with in the UK National Annex (hereafter referred to as the UK-NA) are:
7D.1.1 Clause 6.1(1) General: Partial Safety Factors for buildings

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are , , and . EN 1993 provides default values for M0 M1 M2 these factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values. The partial safety factors will use the following values for the UK National Annex:
l l l
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0 = 1.1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the UK-NA (NA 1 is specified).
specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7D.1.2 Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks
The UK-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks. The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic LT Critical Buckling Moment, Mcr. The UK National Annex does not specify a particular method to calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI cr cr documents:
SN003a-EN-EU Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling:

This document provides a method to calculate Mcr specifically for doubly symmetric sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in the proposed implementation. The equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s
2 k Iw + (kL ) 2 k w I s
2
(kL ) GI t 2EI s
+ (C2z s)2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the 1 2 member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables 1 2 below:
300 STAAD.Pro
This NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:

l l l
Members with end moments Members with transverse loading Members with end moments and transverse loading.
The implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter. The first two loading conditions mentioned above and its variants can be dealt with by using the existing values of the CMM parameter (i.e., 1 to 6). Hence the appropriate values from this NCCI will be used for C1 and C2 coefficients depending on the value of CMM specified. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C and C using the C1 and C2 parameters in the 1 2 design input mode. See "Design Parameters" on page 264 However, for cases with end moments and transverse loading, the NCCI provides graphs to evaluate the C1 and C2 coefficients. It does not however, provide a set of equations for these graphs. However the end moments and transverse loading condition cannot be currently specified in the design input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for the CMM parameter viz. CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading. CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load. For these two conditions, the UK National Annex (nor the NCCI) does not provide equations to evaluate C1 and C2. Hence in STAAD.Pro the user will have to use the new C1 & C2 parameters to input the required values for C1 & C2 to be used in calculating Mcr. For values of 7 or 8 for the CMM parameter, the program will issue a warning if C1 and C2 have not been specified.
Note: If the NA parameter has not been specified, the program obtains the values of C1
and C2 from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
SN030a-EN-EU Mono-symmetrical uniform members under bending and axial compression:

This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (Mcr) for uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this implementation the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections will be worked out using the method in this NCCI. Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections. In any case, the actual LTB capacity will still be worked out as per BS 5950-1 as in the current EC3 implementation. The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as :
cr
M cr = C1
EI s (k x L )2
kx k w
Iw Is
(k x L )2GI T
2EI x
2 + (C 2z e C3z 1) C2z e C 3z 1
302 STAAD.Pro
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This 1 2 3 implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter (see section (i) above) specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr. As described in section (i) above, the user must use C1, C2 and C3 parameters along with CMM values of 7 and 8. Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints, i.e., CMN = 1.0. For members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), the proposed implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F. For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) the proposed implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of zg is considered positive if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The user will be allowed to modify this value by using the new ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
7D.1.3 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section
The UK-NA specifies different values for the and factors to be used in equation 6.57 of LT,0 BS EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. The current implementation in STAAD.pro does not differentiate between rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in BS EN 1993-1-1 for LT,0 and . The values specified in the UK-NA are:
l
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections: LT,0 = 0.4 = 0.75
For welded sections: LT,0 = 0.2 = 1.00
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The UK-NA specifies different limits and buckling curves to be used in this clause as given below: Table 7D.1-Buckling curves to use with BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 Cross Section Limits Buckling Curve b c d d d h/b 2 2.0 < h/b 3.1 c d
Rolled doubly symmetric I and H sections and hot-finished hollow sections
h/b 2 2.0 < h/b 3.1 h/b > 3.1
Angles (for moments in the major principle plane) All other hot-rolled sections Welded, doubly symmetric sections and cold-formed hollow sections
304 STAAD.Pro
This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for these cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per clause 6.3.2.2(2).
7D.1.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, as per UK NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I LT Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections. Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 LT (and the UK Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. LT 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the UK National Annex states that Table 6.5 in BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the UK NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves from the UK National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the UK NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the UK NA for choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the UK NA has been specified):
l l l l l
Rolled doubly symmetric I & H Sections Rolled doubly symmetric hollow sections (SHS, RHS, CHS) Angle Sections Any other rolled section Welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b < 3.1
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate LT
l
Welded I & H Sections with h/b 3.1.
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate LT . In any case the Elastic critical moment Mcr (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness) will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this document. Since the UK National Annex uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, this implementation will
only consider end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section 4.2 above). For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
7D.1.5 Clause 6.3.2.3(2) Modification factor, f, for LTB checks

The UK NA specifies the use of eqn. 6.58 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate the modification factor f for the LTB reduction factor . To evaluate the modification factor BS EN 1993-1LT 1:2005 uses a correction factor kc given by Table 6.6 in the code. The UK-NA however, specifies that the correction factor kc is to be obtained as below: Kc = 1 / C1, where C1 is to be obtained from the NCCI documents given in section 4.2 of this document. The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the values of C1 to be used in table 3.1 as shown below. This proposed implementation will allow for the reduction factor based on the UK-NA.
306 STAAD.Pro
These values are for an end restraint factor of k=1 (ie CMN=1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN (ie 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C1 from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F. The program will use a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom value of kc by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. The user can also get
the program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate a value of C1 corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the member and in turn calculate kc as given in the NA. To evaluate C1, the program will use the NCCI documents mentioned in section 4.2 of this document.
7D.1.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The UK-NA recommends that the method in Annex A or Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 can be used to calculate the interaction factors for Cl. 6.3.3 checks in the case of doubly symmetric sections. The proposed implementation will hence use equations in Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these interaction factors for doubly symmetric sections. The current implementation of EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B. However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the UK NA gives the option of using Annex B with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the UK NA). The UK NA requires additional checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of and X to be used in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. As per the UK NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis (y in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor y should be taken as the values from the highest values of slenderness () among the flexural buckling slenderness (y), torsional slenderness ( ) and torsional-flexural slenderness ( ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 T TF of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical non-dimensional slenderness as: = the maximum of either from Cl. 6.3.1.3 or from Cl. 6.3.1.4
y T
T =
A fy N cr
Where: N = min (N
cr CrT
,N
crTF
).
The UK NA or EC3 does not however specify a method to evaluate NCrT or NcrTF. Hence this implementation will use the method specified in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes to calculate these. See section 4.9 below for details.
Note: The UK National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific and
hence this implementation will use the method used in the current EC3 implementation to deal with slenderness of angle sections. In the current implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950. This proposed implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle sections to evaluate the slenderness.
308 STAAD.Pro
Clause NA 3.2 of the UK NA also requires that Where the section is not an I Section or a hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the purposes of this clause. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are NOT I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
7D.1.7 Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling

Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional slenderness , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. BS EN 1993-1T 1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer cr,T,F cr,T 6.3.14 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005). The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore cr,TF cr,T these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the UK NA. The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
1
2 io
GI t +
EI w I T2
2
Where:
2 2 2 2 2 io = iy + iz + yo + zo
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong y z axis) respectively. The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, TF =
2 io 2 2 2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
2 iy + i z2 2 io
For details on these equations, refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.
7D.2 French National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the French National Annex - titled Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-11:2005 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document. The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro: Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the French National Annex. Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the French National Annex.
refer to the corresponding clauses in the French-NA. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt with in the French National Annex (hereafter referred to as FR-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:
7D.2.1 Clause 3.2.1(1)- Material Properties

The material strengths (i.e., - steel grade strengths) to be used with NF EN 1993-1-1 are given in Table 3.1 of the code. The French National Annex however, specifies a separate table (Table 3.1 NF) for the yield and tensile strengths of steel grades. This new table replaces Table 3.1 in NF EN 1993-1-1:2005. Table 3.1 NF excludes steel grades from standards EN 10210-1 and EN 10219-1 that are given in EC-3. STAAD.Pro uses the steel grades and values from the table given in the National Annex (i.e., Table 3.1 NF). Table 3.1 NF is similar to table 3.1 in EC3, apart from the f values for S 355 and u S355 W grade steel. Table 7D.2-Material strengths specified for use with the NF-NA Nominal thickness, t, of the element (mm) Standard and grade of steel t 40 mm f y (N/mm 2) S 235 EN 100252 S 275 S 355 S 450 S 275 N/NL EN 100253 S 355 N/NL S 420 N/NL S 460 N/NL 235 275 355 440 275 355 420 460 f u (N/mm 2) 360 430 490 550 390 490 520 540 40 mm < t <= 80 mm f y (N/mm 2) 215 255 335 410 255 335 390 430 f u (N/mm 2) 360 410 470 550 370 470 520 540
310 STAAD.Pro
Nominal thickness, t, of the element (mm) Standard and grade of steel t 40 mm f y (N/mm 2) S 275 M/ML EN 100254 S 355 M/ML S 420 M/ML S 460 M/ML EN 100255 EN 100256 S 235 W S 355 W S 460 Q/QL/QL 1 275 355 420 460 235 355 460 f u (N/mm 2) 370 470 520 540 360 490 570 40 mm < t <= 80 mm f y (N/mm 2) 255 335 390 430 215 335 440 f u (N/mm 2) 360 450 500 530 340 490 550
If you specify a steel grade that is not given in the Annex Table 3.1 (NF) but is present in Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, the program uses the values from Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. The appropriate yield strength (f ) used is shown in the design output file.
y
7D.2.2 Clause 6.1(1) General

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are , , and . EN 1993 provides default values for M0 M1 M2 these factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values. The partial safety factors will use the following values for the French National Annex:
l l l
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0 = 1.25
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the NF-NA (NA 4 is specified).
The French NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks. The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic LT Critical Buckling Moment, M . The French NA gives a method to evaluate M in its Annex cr cr MCR. This implementation will make use of this method to evaluate Mcr. Annex MCR however deals with the calculation of Mcr for doubly symmetric sections. Hence this implementation will use this method only for doubly symmetric sections. For mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the minor axis (i.e Tee sections) this implementation will use the method from the NCCI document SN030a-EN-EU as given in the section below. For any other type of section that is not dealt with by the Annex, this implementation will use the method and tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Annex MCR
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections cr only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in this implementation. The equation to evaluate M is given as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s (kL )
2
k k w
Iw Is
(kL ) GI t EI s
2
+ (C2z s)2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The 1 2 NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the 1 2 Annex. Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). 1 Clause 3.2 of the National Annex however gives a formula to evaluate C as:
1
C1 =
1 0.325 + 0.423 + 0.252

2
312 STAAD.Pro
This formula however does not match the values given in Table 1 of the NA. Hence this implementation will use the values of C1 from Table 1 if the end moment ration () is exactly equal to the values of in the table. For all other cases this implementation will calculate the value of C1 from equation (6) in the Annex. The value of C2 will be determined from Table 2 of the Annex based on the loading and end conditions (i.e the CMM parameter in STAAD). The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C and C using the C1 and C2 1 2 parameters in the design input mode. See "Design Parameters" on page 264 The French NA considers three separate loading conditions:
l l l
The first two cases and its variants can be defined using with the existing CMM parameter values in STAAD.Pro. However the third condition cannot be currently specified in the design input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for CMM viz. CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading. CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load. The load to moment ratio () will then be used in the calculations will then be used to calculate C1 and C2 as given in section 3.5 of Annex MCR (See Annex MCR in the NA for details). This implementation will also introduce a new parameter MU to be specified when using CMM = 7 or 8. The load to moment ratio () to be used in the calculations is to be input using the new MU parameter. This implementation will require that for the French National Annex if CMM = 7 or 8 has been specified, the user should also either specify a value for MU or input the values for C1 and C2 using the C1 and/or C2 parameters directly.
Note: The new parameter MU will currently be applicable only in the context of the
French NA.

This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (Mcr) for uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this implementation the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up

sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a monosymmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections. The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s (k x L )2
kx k w
Iw Is
(k x L )2GI T
2EI x
2 + (C 2z e C3z 1) C2z e C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This 1 2 3 implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
314 STAAD.Pro
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992. Also, the NCCI document and Annex MCR of the FR-NA assume that the member under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member( k = kw=1 .i.e., CMN parameter =1.0). Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints. For members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992. For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code. The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document SN006a-EN-EU to

calculate Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give any specific formulae to evaluate the coefficients. Hence, this has not been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
The FR-NA provides equations to evaluate the For rolled doubly symmetric sections use:
LT , 0 = 0.2 + 0.1
b h
LT,0
and
LT
factors given in clause 6.3.2.3
LT = 0.4 0.2 LT 0
b 2 h
Note: Since EN 1993-1-1:2005 limits the value of LT,0 to 0.4, STAAD.Pro limits LT,0 to a
maximum value of 0.4.
For welded doubly symmetric sections use:

LT , 0 = 0.3
b h
LT = 0.5 0.25 LT 0
b 2 h
For other sections: LT,0 = 0.2 LT = 0.76 And for all sections, = 1.0 These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NF EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT

The French NA specifies that the modification factor is to be obtained as per the default method given in EC-3. Hence this implementation will use the existing functionality to evaluate the correction factor kc to be used in the modification factor f. The program uses a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom value of kc by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. You may instruct the program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate kc from Table 6.6 of NF EN 1993-11:2005. This will correspond to the end conditions and the bending moment of the member (i.e., the value of CMM parameter specified). For CMM = 7, the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the end moment ratio. For CMM = 8, the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the end moment ratio. An additional check will also be performed as given below:
LT , mod
1 LT
2
The French Annex specifies that the modification factor is applicable only to members that are free to rotate on plan (i.e., CMN 1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN, this implementation will ignore f and hence will use = .
LT,mod LT
The French NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these interaction factors. STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B for design per EC3 (without National Annex). Therefore, the method in Annex A has been added into the program.
316 STAAD.Pro
Note: The NA mentions that this method can be extended to singly symmetric I-Sections
(symmetric about the minor axis) if the elastic properties are used instead of the plastic properties. However, since STAAD does not have a provision to specify such sections, this case will not be considered for this implementation. The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case of mono symmetric sections. This is taken into account based on the method given in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes. See "Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling" on page 317 The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C in Table A.2 of mi,0 Annex A:
Cmi, 0 1
N Ed N cr ,i

Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional slenderness , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. NF EN 1993-1T 1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer cr,T,F cr,T 6.3.14 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005). The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore cr,TF cr,T these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the French NA. The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
1
2 io
GI t +
EI w
2
I T2
Where:
2 2 2 2 2 io = iy + iz + yo + zo
Ncr, TF =
2 io 2 2 2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
2 iy + i z2 2 io
7D.3 Finnish National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the Finnish National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard SFS-EN 1993-1-1 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document. The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro: Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Finnish National Annex. Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Finnish National Annex.
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Finnish-NA. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt with in the Finnish National Annex (hereafter referred to as SFS-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:

The material strengths (i.e., steel grade strengths) to be used with SFS-EN 1993-1-1 are given in Table 3.1 of the code. These steel grade values are specified using the SGRparameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 264). The Finnish National Annex states in Cl. 3.1(2) that, apart from the steel grades specified in Table 3.1 of SFS EN 1993-1-1, the following steel grades can also be used:
l l
Steel grades S315MC, S355MC, S420MC and S460MC according to SFS-EN 10149-2 Steel grades S260NC, S315NC, S355NC and S420NC according to SFS-EN 10149-3
These grades of steel can be specified by using the PY(Yield Strength) and FU (Ultimate Strength)parameters in STAAD.Pro. Set these parameters to the respective values as given in SFS-EN 10149-2/3 for the steel grades specified above. The choice of the buckling curve to be used is based on the value of the SGR parameter specified. The output will include the appropriate yield strength used for design.

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are , , and . EN 1993 provides default values for M0 M1 M2 these factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values. The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Finnish National Annex:
318 STAAD.Pro
l l l
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0 = 1.25
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SFS-NA (NA 5 is specified).
The Finnish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks. The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical LT Buckling Moment, M . The Finnish National Annex does not specify a particular method to cr calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr cr
1.

This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric cr sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method. The equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s (kL )
2
2 k Iw k I + w s
(kL ) GI t EI s
2
+ (C2z s)2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of 1 2 the member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in 1 2 the tables below:
Table 7D.3-Values of C for end 1 moment loading (for k=1) +1,00 +0,75 +0,50 +0,25 0,00 -0,25 -0,50 -0,75 C
1
1,00 1,14 1,31 1,52 1,77 2,05 2,33 2,57

l l l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter. 2.

This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (M ) for cr uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.

sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections. The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as :
cr
320 STAAD.Pro
M cr = C1
EI s (k x L )2
kx k w
Iw Is
(k x L )2GI T
EI x
2
2 + (C 2z e C3z 1) C2z e C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. 1 2 3 This implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C , 1 2 and C . The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended 3 member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters to input the required values for C , C , and C to be used in calculating M .
1 2 3 cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU
and use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992. Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no
warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F. For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code. The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.

The Finnish-NA provides the values for the terms and factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) LT,0 as follows: For rolled doubly symmetric sections and hollow sections, use:
LT,0
=0.4 and = 0.75
For welded doubly symmetric sections and hollow sections use:

LT,0
= 0.2 and = 1.0
The Finnish NA specifies the following limits for choosing the buckling curves: Table 7D.4-Selection of lateral torsional buckling curve for cross sections using equation (6.57) Cross-section (constant cross-section) Rolled double symmetric I- and H- sections and hot finished hollow sections. Limits Buckling Curve h/b 2 2< h/b <3.1 b c
322 STAAD.Pro
Cross-section (constant cross-section) Welded double symmetric I- section and H- sections and cold-formed hollow sections
Limits Buckling Curve h/b 2 2< h/b < 3.1 c d
The NA says that for all other cases the rules given in Cl 6.3.2.2 should be used. Hence even for rolled or welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ratio 3.1, this implementation will resort to checks as per clause 6.3.2.2. These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT
7D.3.5 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, as per Finnish NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I LT Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections. Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 LT (and the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. LT 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 319 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the Finnish NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness) will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 319 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input =
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).

STAAD.Pro uses the value of the modification factor f = 1.0 as given in the Finnish NA.
The Finnish NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A or Annex B of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to calculate these interaction factors. STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B by default. This implementation of the Finnish NA will also use Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.

Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the nondimensional slenderness , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. T SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N cr,T,F and N (refer 6.3.14 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005).
cr,T
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore cr,TF cr,T these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the Finnish NA. The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
1
2 io
GI t +
EI w
2
I T2
Where:
2 2 2 2 2 io = iy + iz + yo + zo
Ncr, TF =
2 io 2 2 2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
2 iy + i z2 2 io
324 STAAD.Pro
7D.4 Polish National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the Polish National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard PN-EN 19931-1 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document. The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro: Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Polish National Annex. Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Polish National Annex.
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Polish-NA. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt with in the Polish National Annex (hereafter referred to as PN-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:

The material strengths (i.e., steel grade strengths) to be used with PN-EN 1993-1-1 are given in Table 3.1 of the code. The Polish National Annex states in Cl. 3.1(2) that the steel grades to be used will be based on Table 3.1 of PN EN 1993-1-1. These steel grade values are specified using the SGRparameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 264).

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are , , and . EN 1993 provides default values for M0 M1 M2 these factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values. The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Polish National Annex:
l l l
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0 = minimum of 1.1 or 0.9 x f /f

u y
M2
Where: f is the ultimate steel strength

u y
f is the yield strength of steel
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA 6 is specified).
The Polish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks. The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic LT Critical Buckling Moment, M . The Polish National Annex does not specify a particular cr method to calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI cr cr documents: 1.

This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric cr sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method. The equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI s
2 k Iw + (kL ) 2 k w I s
2
(kL ) GI t 2EI s
+ (C2z s)2 C2z s
C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of 1 2 the member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in 1 2 the tables below:
326 STAAD.Pro
Table 7D.5-Values of C for end 1 moment loading (for k=1) +1,00 +0,75 +0,50 +0,25 0,00 -0,25 -0,50 -0,75 C
1
1,00 1,14 1,31 1,52 1,77 2,05 2,33 2,57

l l l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter. 2.

This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (M ) for cr uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.

sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections. The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as :
cr
M cr = C1
EI s (k x L )2
kx k w
Iw Is
(k x L )2GI T
EI x
2
2 + (C 2z e C3z 1) C2z e C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. 1 2 3 This implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C , 1 2 and C . The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended 3 member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters to input the required values for C , C , and C to be used in calculating 1 2 3 M .
cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore
MU and use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992. Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5
328 STAAD.Pro
or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F. For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code. The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.

The Polish-NA provides the values for the terms and factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) as LT,0 follows: For all sections, use:
LT,0
=0.4 and = 0.75
The Polish NA specifies the use of uses table 6.5 to work out the buckling curves for use in Cl. 6.3.2.3. Hence table 6.5 in PN-EN 1993-1-1 will be used for this. These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT
7D.4.5 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, as per Finnish NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I LT Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 LT (and the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. LT 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 319 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the Finnish NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional cr slenderness) will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 319 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).

STAAD.Pro uses the value of the modification factor f as per eqn 6.58 of PN-EN 1993-1-1. The correction factor kc will be evaluated as: kc = (CmLT) Where: C is the equivalent uniform moment factor from table B.3 of PN-EN 1993-1mLT 1. C is evaluated based on the end conditions of the member and the shape mLT of the bending moment diagram. However, if the KC parameter has been used, then the program will use the specified value.
The Polish NA recommends the equations in Annex B of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to calculate these
330 STAAD.Pro
interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B by default. The proposed implementation of the Polish NA will also use Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks. The Polish NA also gives two additional simplified checks. This implementation will provide for these additional checks as well. However as they are intended as optional checks, by default, the program will not perform these checks. However, the user can invoke these checks by using the PLG parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 264 If the value of the PLG parameter is set to 1, the following two checks will be performed as per Cl. NA.20.(2) and NA.20(3) respectively:
l
Cl. NA.20.(2): The following condition will be checked n/ and + C Where: n = N /N

Ed y Rd y,Ed my
m /
y
LT
+ C mz m with 1- (I = y or z)
0
m = max M
(+ M
y, Ed
)/M
y, Rd
; m = max M
z
,Z Ed
(+ M
, Ed
)/M
Z Rd,
and buckling factor,

LT m
- LTB factor
C - moment factor from table B 3 of PN EN 1993-1-1, -correction factor (estimation of maximum reduction) and will be 0 worked out as: = 0,1 + 0,2 (w 1), przy czym w = W
0 0 i i pl,i
/W
el,i
, or
= 0,1 in case of class 3 and 4 sections.

l
Cl. NA.20.(3): This condition will only be checked for circular hollow sections. n/ + [(k m )2 + (C
i ii i mj
m )2] 1/2 1 (i,j =y,z)

j
Where: k - the interaction factor from table B.1 of PN-EN 1993-1-1 and n, m, Cmj are as above. If the PLG parameter has been set to 1, the maximum among the following ratios will be taken as being critical for Cl 6.3.3: 6.3.3: Eqn6.61 6.3.3: Eqn6.62 NA.20(2) and NA.20(3)
If however PLG has been set to 0 (or not specified at all), the program will ignore the last two checks in the list above.

Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the nondimensional slenderness , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. T PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N cr,T,F and N (refer 6.3.14 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005).
cr,T
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore cr,TF cr,T these methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the Polish NA. The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T = 2 GI t + io
1 EI w I T2
2
Where:
2 2 2 2 2 io = iy + iz + yo + zo
Ncr, TF =
2 io 2 2 2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
2 iy + i z2 2 io
7D.5 Singaporean National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the Singaporean National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard SS-EN 1993-1-1 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document.
refer to the corresponding clauses in the Singaporean-NA. The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro: Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling The SINGAPORE NA specifies the value of c0 for I, H channel or box section to be used in equation 6.59 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4. However, STAAD.Pro does not
332 STAAD.Pro
use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Singaporean National Annex. Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl The value of the modification factor kfl to be used in equation 6.60 of SS EN 1993-11. However, STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Singaporean National Annex. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt with in the Singaporean National Annex (hereafter referred to as SS-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:
7D.5.1 Clause 6.1 General

The partial safety factors will use the following values:
l l l
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0 = 1.1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SS-NA (NA 7 is specified)..
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as 0, STAAD.Pro will
ignore the specified value and use the default values as given above.
The Singaporean NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks. The calculation of the LTB reduction factor X , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical LT Buckling Moment, Mcr. The Singaporean National Annex does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:
SN003a-EN-EU Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling

This document provides a method to calculate Mcr specifically for doubly symmetric sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method. The equation to evaluate Mcr is given in the NCCI as:
M cr = C1
EI (kL )
2
k 2 I w k I + w
(kL ) GI t 2EI
2 + (C 2Zg) C 2Zg
C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the member. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the different cases as given in the tables below:
Table 7D.6-Values of C for end 1 moment loading (for k=1) +1,00 +0,75 +0,50 +0,25 0,00 -0,25 -0,50 -0,75 This NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
l l l
1,00 1,14 1,31 1,52 1,77 2,05 2,33 2,57
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter.

This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (Mcr) for uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections will be evaluated using the method in this NCCI.
334 STAAD.Pro
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for TeeSections. The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as :
cr
M cr = C1
EI z (k x L )2
2
kx k w
Iw I
(k x L )2GI T
2EI z
2 + (C2zg C 3z 1) C2zg C 3z 1
The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992. Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F. For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code. The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.

The Singaporean NA specifies different values for the and factors to be used in LT,0 equation 6.57 of SS EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. STAAD.Pro does not differentiate between rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in SS EN 1993-1-1 for and . The values specified in the Singapore NA are:
LT,0
l
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections: LT,0 = 0.4 = 0.75
For welded sections:
336 STAAD.Pro
LT,0 = 0.2 = 1.00 STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The Singaporean-NA provides the values for the terms and factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) LT0 as follows: Table 7D.7-Buckling curves to use with SS-EN 1993-1-1:2005 Cross Section Limits Buckling Curve b c d d d h/b 2 2.0 < h/b 3.1 c d
Rolled doubly symmetric I and H sections and hot-finished hollow sections
h/b 2 2.0 < h/b 3.1 h/b > 3.1
Angles (for moments in the major principle plane) All other hot-rolled sections Welded, doubly symmetric sections and cold-formed hollow sections
Note: This table does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded
doubly symmetric sections with h/b 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for these cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per clause 6.3.2.2(2).
7D.5.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, as per Singaporean NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I LT Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections. Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 LT (and the Singaporean Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will LT consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Singaporean National Annex states that Table 6.5 in SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the Singaporean NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves from the Singaporean National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the Singaporean NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. For the following cross sections, the program will use the Table in the Singaporean NA for choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the SS EN has been specified):
l l l l l
Rolled doubly symmetric I & H Sections Rolled doubly symmetric hollow sections (SHS, RHS, CHS) Angle Sections Any other rolled section Welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b < 3.1
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate
LT
l
Welded I & H Sections with h/b 3.1.
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional cr slenderness) will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section above) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input
= 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).

The Singaporean NA specifies the use of Equation 6.58 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate the modification factor f for the LTB reduction factor . To evaluate the modification factor SS LT EN 1993-1-1:2005 uses a correction factor kc given by Table 6.6 in the code. The Singaporean-NA however, specifies that the correction factor kc is to be obtained as below:
338 STAAD.Pro
Kc = 1 / C1 Where: C is to be obtained from the NCCI documents as previously described (See 1 "Clause 6.3.2.2 Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 333). The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the values of C1 to be used in table 3.1 as shown below. The current implementation does not account for the K factor and conservatively uses a reduction factor equal to 1. The c program allows for the reduction factor based on the Singaporean-NA. These values are for an end restraint factor of k = 1 (i.e., design parameter CMN = 1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN (i.e., 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C from DD 1 ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F. The program will use a default value of 1.0 for K . However, you can also input a custom value c of K by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. If the KC parameter in the design c input is set to 0, then the program will automatically calculate its value. This will cause the program to evaluate a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending 1 moment of the member and in turn calculate K as given in the NA. To evaluate C , the c 1 program will use the NCCI documents as previously described.
The Singaporean NA recommends the methods in either Annex A or Annex B of SS-EN 1993-11 to calculate these interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B by default. The proposed implementation of the Singaporean NA will also use Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks. However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the Singaporean NA gives the option of using Annex B with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the Singaporean NA). The Singaporean NA requires additional checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of and X to be used in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. As per the Singaporean NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis (y in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor y should be taken as the values from the highest values of slenderness () among the flexural buckling slenderness (y), torsional slenderness (T) and torsional-flexural slenderness (TF) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical non-dimensional slenderness as: = the maximum of either from Cl 6.3.1.3 or from Cl 6.3.1.4
y T
Where:
T =
A f y N cr
Ncr = min (NCrT, NcrTF).
The Singaporean NA or EC3 does not, however, specify a method to evaluate N or N . CrT crTF Therefore, the program uses the method specified in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes to calculate these. See "Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling" on page 340.
Note: The Singaporean National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in
specific and hence this implementation will use the method used in the current EC3 implementation to deal with slenderness of angle sections. In the current implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950. This proposed implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle sections to evaluate the slenderness. Clause NA 3.2 of the Singaporean NA also requires that Where the section is not an I Section or a hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the purposes of this clause. Hence, for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are not I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.

Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the nondimensional slenderness parameter, , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural T buckling checks. The SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005). Therefore, the NCCI cr,T,F cr,T document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and hence will to be cr,T,F cr,T included in this implementation of the Singaporean NA. The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T = 2 GI t + io
1 EI w I T2
2
Where:
2 2 2 2 2 io = iy + iz + yo + zo
Ncr, TF =
2 io 2 2 2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
2 iy + i z2 2 io
For details on these equations, refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU. The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working out the critical torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.
340 STAAD.Pro
7D.6 Belgian National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the Belgian National Annextitled National Annex to Standard NBN-EN 1993-1-1for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document. The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro: Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness for flexural buckling STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Belgian National Annex. Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor kfl STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Belgian National Annex.
refer to the corresponding clauses in the NBN-NA. The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt with in the Belgian National Annex (hereafter referred to as NBN-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are , , and . EN 1993 provides default values for M0 M1 M2 these factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values. The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Belgian National Annex:
l l l
M0
= 1.0
M1
= 1.0 = 1.25
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA 8 is specified).
The NBN-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks. The calculation of the LTB reduction factor , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical LT Buckling Moment, M . The NBN-NA gives a method to calculate M in Annex D, which is cr cr used by STAAD.Pro. Annex D, however, only deals with the calculation of M for doubly cr symmetric sections and mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the minor axis (i.e, Tee sections). For any other type of section that is not dealt with by Annex D, STAAD.Pro uses the method and tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992:
Doubly symmetric sections

Annex D of NBN-NA provides equation used to calculate M specifically for doubly cr symmetric sections:
M cr = C1
EI (kL )
2 2
k 2 I w k I + w
(kL ) GI t 2EI
2 + (C 2Zg) C 2Zg
C & C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The Annex 1 2 provides values for C & C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex. 1 2 Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2 of 1 the National Annex however gives a formula to calculate C as:
1
C1 = 1.77 - 1.04
+0.272
2.60
The value of C2 is determined based on the Table 2 of the Annex, based on the loading and end conditions as specified using the CMM parameter. This NBN-NA considers three separate loading conditions:
l l l
STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter.
Mono-symmetric sections with symmetry about their weak axis

Annex D of NBN-NA also provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment, M , for cr uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this
342 STAAD.Pro
implementation the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections is evaluated using the method in this Annex.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for TeeSections. The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as:
cr
M cr = C1
EI z (k x L )2
2
kx k w
Iw I
(k x L )2GI T
EI z
2
2 + (C2zg C 3z 1) C2zg C 3z 1
The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This 1 2 3 implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
Table 7D.8-Critical moment coefficients for singly symmetric sections with end moments End Moments and Support Conditions Bending moment diagram k
z
Value of coefficients C
1
C f 0
> f 0
= +1
1.0 0.5
1.00 1.05 1.14 1.19 1.31 1.37 1.52 1.60 1.77 1.86 2.06 2.15 2.35
1.000 1.019 1.000 1.017 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.650 1.000 1.3 1.2 0.77 - 0.55 - 0.35 - -
f
= +3/4
1.0 0.5
= +1/2
1.0 0.5
= +1/4
1.0 0.5
=0
1.0 0.5
= -1/4
1.0 0.5
= -1/2
1.0
0.5 2.42
0.950
= -3/4
1.0
2.60
1.000
0.5 2.45
0.850
= -1
1.0
2.60
0.5 2.45
0.125 0.7
0.125 f 0.7
344 STAAD.Pro
Note: According to Section 3(1): C2 zg = 0

Table 7D.9-Value of coefficients Load and support conditions Bending moment diagram k
z
Value of coefficients C
1
1.0
1.12
0.45
0.525 0.478 0.411
0.5 0.97 0.36 1.0 0.5 1.0 1.35 1.05 1.04 0.59
0.48 0.338 0.42 0.31 0.562 0.539
0.5 0.95
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2, and C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with uniformly distributed load (UDL)along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the end moments and transverse loading condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992. Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F. For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code. The term zg in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of zg is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The
use will be allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term zg in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: The program does not consider the case of cantilevers.
The NBN-NA recommends the use of the values specified in EN 1993-1-1 for the LTB factors and . However it gives two different sets of values for & based on two different LT0 LT0 conditions as give below: 1. If M is determined by considering the properties of the gross cross section and the cr lateral restraints, the following values are used:
LT0
=0.2 and = 1.0
2. If M is determined by ignoring the lateral restraints, the following values are used:
cr
LT0
=0.4 and = 0.75
The program evaluates which factors to use based on the CMN parameter. If CMN= 1.0 (default), then the program assumes the restraints are ignored and the second set of values is used for and . If CMN = 0.5, then the first set of and values is used.
LT0 LT0
These factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NBN-EN to evaluate the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor .
LT
7D.6.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, as per Belgium NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction factor to be used in eqn. 6.55 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be used for calculating . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for Rolled I LT Sections, Welded I Sections and Any other sections. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with Rolled I Sections and Welded I Sections. Cl. 6.3.2.2 states Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross section the value of should be determined from.... Hence in the implementation of EC3 LT (and the Belgian Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. LT 6.3.2.2 to evaluate .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Belgian National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be used for various section types. (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or
346 STAAD.Pro
equivalent welded section" on page 346 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the NBN-NA, this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate .
LT
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment,Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness) will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section" on page 346 ) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992. You can override the default behavior and specify the clause that is to be used for LTB checks. This can be specified using the MTH design parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 264).
0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of NBN-EN 1993-11:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section (i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).

The Belgian NA specifies that the modification factor is to be obtained as per the default method given in EC-3. Hence the proposed implementation will use the existing functionality to work out the correction factor kc to be used in the modification factor f. The program uses a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom value of kc by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. The user can also get the program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to work out kc from table 6.6 of NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005. This will correspond to the end conditions and the bending moment of the member (i.e the value of CMM parameter specified).
l
For CMM = 7 the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the end moment ratio. For CMM = 8 the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the end moment ratio.
An additional check will also be performed as given below:

LT , mod
1 LT
2
The NBN-NA recommends the equations in Annex A of NBN-EN 1993-1-1 to calculate these interaction factors. The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case of mono symmetric sections. Torsional flexural buckling will need to be taken into account based on the method given in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes. See section below for details. The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C in table A.2 of mi,0 Annex A:
Cmi, 0 1
N Ed N cr ,i

Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the nondimensional slenderness parameter, , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural T buckling checks. The NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005). Therefore, the NCCI cr,T,F cr,T document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and hence will to be cr,T,F cr,T included in this implementation of the Belgian NA. The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
Ncr, T =
1
2 io
GI t +
EI w I T2
2
Where:
2 2 2 2 2 io = iy + iz + yo + zo
Ncr, TF =
2 io
2 iy +iz
Ncr, y + Ncr, T
(Ncr, y + Ncr, T)
4Ncr, yN cr, T
2 iy + i z2
io
For details on these equations, refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU. The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working out the critical torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.
348 STAAD.Pro
7E. Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing timber design based on the European code EC5 Part 1-1 Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures - Part 1.1: General-Common rules and rules for buildings. Design of members per EC5 Part 1-1 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
7E.1 General Comments

Principles of Limit States Design of Timber Structures are used as specified in the code. Design per EC5 is limited to the prismatic, rectangular shapes only. There is no Eurocodespecific timber section database / library consisting of pre-defined shapes for analysis or for design. The feature of member selection is thus not applicable to this code. The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all timber structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of EC 5. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
7E.1.1 Axes convention in STAAD and EC5

STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as zz and the minor axis as yy. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as x and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction. EC5, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule.
Figure 7E.1 - Axis conventions per STAAD and Eurocode 5
STAAD
EC5
7E.1.2 Determination of Factors

A. Kmod Modification factor taking into account of Load-duration (LDC) and Moisture-content (Service Class - SCL). Reference Table 3.1 of EC-5-2004. For Solid Timber, the values are incorporated in the program. B.
m
Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-2004.
m
For Solid Timber, the value of C. Kh Size Factor.
= 1.3 is incorporated in the program.
For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less than the reference width in tension the characteristic strength in tension (ft0k) is to be increased by the factor Kh. For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth in bending, the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by the factor Kh. As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a characteristic timber density 700 kg/m 3 the reference depth in bending or the reference width k (maximum cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm. The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is incorporated in the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the value of Kh for Glued laminated timber and Laminated veneer lumber respectively. D. KC90 Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and degree of compressive deformation. For members, subjected to compression, perpendicular to the direction of grain alignment, this factor should be taken into account. Default value of 1 is used in STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.5 of EC-5-2004 in this regard. E. Km Factor considering re-distribution of bending stress in cross section.
350 STAAD.Pro
For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress checking. For rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is incorporated in STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.6 of EC-5-2004 in this regard. F. Kshape Factor depending on shape of cross section. For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be less than equal design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This factor is determined by STAAD.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause 6.1.8 of EC-5-2004.
7E.2 Analysis Methodology

Table 7E.1-EC5 Nomenclature Symbol S S S S S S S
t0d
Description Design tensile stress parallel (at zero degree) to grain alignment. Design tensile stress perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to grain alignment. Design compressive stress parallel to grain alignment. Design compressive stress perpendicular to grain alignment. Design bending stress about zz axis. Design bending stress about yy axis. Design shear stress. Design torsional stress. Design tensile strength - parallel to the grain alignment. Design tensile strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment. Design compressive strength - parallel to the grain alignment. Design compressive strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment. Design bending strength - about zz-axis. Design bending strength - about yy-axis. Design shear strength about yy axis. Permissible ratio of stresses as input using the RATIOparameter. The default value is 1.
t90d c0d
c90d mzd myd vd
S F F F F F F
tor_d t0d
t90d c0d
c90d mzd myd vd
RATIO
l ,l l ,l E G
z rel,z y rel,y 0,05 0,05
Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about zz axis. Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about yy axis. Fifth percentile value of modulus of elasticity parallel to grain. Fifth percentile value of shear modulus parallel to grain. Second moment of area about the strong z-axis. Second moment of area about the weak y-axis. Torsional moment of inertia. Characteristic bending strength. Width and depth of beam.
I I I f
z y
tor
mk
b, h
Equations for Characteristic Values of Timber Species as per Annex-A of EN 338:2003 The following equations were used to determine the characteristic values: For a particular Timber Strength Class (TSC), the following characteristic strength values are required to compute the other related characteristic values.
352 STAAD.Pro
i. Bending Strength f
m,k 0, mean
ii. Mean Modulus of Elasticity in bending E iii. Density - SI No.

k
Property
Symbol
Wood Type Softwood Hardwood (C) (D)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Tensile Strength parallel to grain Tensile Strength perpendicular to grain Compressive Strength parallel to grain Compressive Strength perpendicular to grain Shear Strength Modulus of Elasticity parallel to grain Mean Modulus of Elasticity perpendicular to grain Mean Shear Modulus Shear Modulus E
f f
t,0,k
0.6 * f
m,k
t,90,k c,0,k
Minimum of {0.6 and (0.0015*r )} 5 * (f 0.007*r

m,k
f f
) 0.45 0.0015*r
c,90,k
f E
v,k
Minimum of {3.8 and 0.8)} (0.2*f

m,k
0,05
0.67* E E
0,mean
0,mean
0.84* E
0,mean
0,mean
90,mean mean 0,05
/30 E
/15
0,mean
/16
0,05
/16
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations, may differ with the tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all such cases, the values obtained from the provided equations are treated as actual and is used by the program, as the values of Table-1 are based on these equations.
7E.2.1 Design values of Characteristic Strength

As per clause 2.4.1, Design values of a strength property shall be calculated as: Xd = K mod(Xk /m) Where: X is design value of strength property
d k
X characteristic value of strength property m is partial factor for material properties. The member resistance in timber structure is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in EC5. This depends on several factors such as cross sectional properties,
different load and material factors, timber strength class, load duration class, service class and so on. The methodology adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistance is explained here.
7E.2.2 Check for Tension stresses

If the direction of applied axial tension is parallel to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.1 of EC-5 2004: St0d /Ft0d RATIO If the direction of applied axial tension is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked: St90d /Ft90d RATIO
7E.2.3 Check for Compression stresses

If the direction of applied axial compression is parallel to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.2 of EC-5 2004: Sc0d /Fc0d RATIO If the direction of applied axial compression is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.3 of EC-5 2004: St0d /(Ft0d Kc90) RATIO
7E.2.4 Check for Bending stresses

If members are under bending stresses, the following conditions should be satisfied per Equations 6.11 and 6.12 of EC-5 2004.
Note: In STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis.

(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
7E.2.5 Check for Shear stresses

Horizontal stresses are calculated and checked against allowable values per Equation 6.13 of EC-5 2004: Svd /Fvd RATIO
7E.2.6 Check for Torsional stresses

Members subjected to torsional stress should satisfy Equation 6.14 of EC-5 2004: Stor_d /(KshapeFtor_d ) RATIO
354 STAAD.Pro
7E.2.7 Check for combined Bending and Axial tension

Members subjected to combined action of bending and axial tension stress should satisfy Equations 6.17 and 6.18 of EC-5 2004:

(St0d /Ft0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO (St0d /Ft0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
7E.2.8 Check for combined Bending and axial Compression

If members are subjected to bending and axial compression stress, Equations 6.19 and 6.20 of EC-5 2004 should be satisfied:

(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO (Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO
7E.2.9 Stability check

A. Column Stability check The relative slenderness ratios should be calculated per Equations 6.21 and 6.22 of EC-5 2004.

rel,z = z/(Sc0k /E0,05 )1/2 rel,y = y /(Sc0k /E0,05 )1/2 If both and are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions should be rel,z rel,y satisfied: (Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO (Sc0d /Fc0d )2 +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO In other cases, the conditions in Equations 6.23 and 6.24 of EC-5 2004 should be satisfied.
Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO Sc0d /(KcyFc0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO Where (Equations 6.25 through 6.28 of EC-5 2004): Kcz = 1/{Kz +[(Kz)2 - (rel,z)2 ]1/2 } Kcy = 1/{Ky +[(Kzy )2 - (rel,y )2 ]1/2 } Kz = 0.5[1 +c(rel,z - 0.3) +(rel,z)2 ] Ky = 0.5[1 +c(rel,y - 0.3) +(rel,y )2 ] The value of incorporated in the software is the one for solid timber (i.e., 0.2).
c
B. Beam Stability check If members are subjected to only a moment about the strong axis z, the stresses should satisfy Equation 6.33 of EC-5 2004: Smzd /(KcritFmzd ) RATIO Where a combination of moment about the strong z-axis and compressive force exists, the stresses should satisfy Equation 6.35 of EC-5 2004 (ref. to Equations 6.32 and 6.34 of the same): [Smzd /(KcritFmzd )]2 +Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) RATIO Where: Kcrit = 1.0 when rel,m 0.75 Kcrit = 1.56 - 0.75rel,m when 0.75 < rel,m 1.4 Kcrit = 1/( rel,m)2 when 1.4 <rel,m rel,m = (fmk /Sm,crit)1/2 For hardwood, use Equation 6.30 of EC-5 2004: Sm,crit = (E0,05 Iy G0,05 Itor)1/2 /(lefW z) For softwood, use Equation 6.31 of EC-5 2004: Sm,crit = 0.78b2 E0,05 /(hlef)

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active unit specification.
356 STAAD.Pro
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 7E.2-Timber Design EC 5: Part 1-1 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description Must be specified as TIMBER EC5 Design Code to follow. See section 5.51.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. ALPHA 0.0 Angle of inclination of load to the grain alignment. (Ref. Cl.6.1.1, Cl.6.1.2, Cl.6.1.3, Cl.6.1.4) 0.0 = Load parallel to grain 90.0 = Load Perpendicular to grain DFF None Deflection Length / Max. Allowable Net Final Local Deflection. In this case, deflection check will be performed, if both the parameters SERV and DFF are present with specific values. For appropriate range of values, please refer Cl.7.2 (Table 7.2) DJ1 Start node number for a physical member under consideration for Deflection Check. DJ2 End node number for a physical member under consideration for Deflection Check.
Parameter Name KC90
Default Value 1.0
Description Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and degree of compressive deformation. (Ref. Cl.6.1.5-(2))
l
Range: 1.0 KC90 4.0 Other than the default value, user may specify any value within the range, depending on load-position, loaddispersion, contact length at support locations etc.
KLEF
1.0 (Member Length)
Effective Length Factor to check Lateral Torsional Buckling (Ref. Table 6.1). Factor multiplied by the span of the beam and depends on the support conditions and load configurations. The user will put the appropriate value from the Table 6.1. Required only for MTYP value of 1 (Beam).
KY
1.0 (Member Length)
Effective Length Factor for Local-y-axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the computation of the relative slenderness ratios. Effective Length Factor for Local-z-axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the computation of the relative slenderness ratios.
KZ
1.0 (Member Length)
358 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name LDC
Default Value 1
Description Load Duration Class (Ref. Cl.2.3.1.2), required to get the K-MOD value from Table 3.1. 1.0 = Permanent action 2.0 = Long term action 3.0 = Medium term action 4.0 = Short term action 5.0 = Instantaneous action
MTYP
Member Type: Beam/Column. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2, Cl.6.3.3) 0.0 = Not defined; both clauses are checked (Default) 1.0 = Beam Member 2.0 = Column Member This information is required to find which stability check will be performed as per the Cl 6.3 according to the Member Type.
RATIO SCL
1.0 3
Permissible ratio of actual to allowable value. Service Class (Ref. Cl.2.3.1.3) 1.0 = Class 1, Moisture content 12% 2.0 = Class 2, Moisture content 20% 3.0 = Class 3, Moisture content > 20%
Default Value 0
Description Degree/Level of Details of design output results. 1.0 = Print the design output at the minimal detail level 2.0 = Print the design output at the intermediate detail level 3.0 = Print the design output that the maximum detail level
TSC
6 (C24)
Timber Strength Class (Ref. Reference EN338 2003)

l
Softwood: 1 = C14, 2 = C16, 3 = C18, 4 = C20, 5 = C22, 6 = C24, 7 = C27, 8 = C30, 9 = C35, 10 = C40, 11 = C45, 12 = C50.
Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14 = D35, 15 = D40, 16 = D50, 17 = D60, 18 = D70.
This TSC definition will calculate the corresponding characteristic strength values using the equations as given in BS-EN-338, Annex - A.
7E.4 Verification Problems

7E.4.1 Verification Problem No.1 - Timber Column
A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is subjected to an axial compressive force of 50.0 kN. Design the member for the ultimate limit state. Material properties: Timber class: C24 Service classes: Class 2, moisture content 20%
360 STAAD.Pro
Load duration classes: Medium-term Cross section properties: Length of the member is 1 m. Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm, Effective cross sectional area A = 14,454 mm, Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,
y z
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm, Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm
z
Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm

y
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber: Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 from table 3.1 Material factors m = 1.30 from table 2.3 fc0k = 21.00 N/mm Fc0d = (Kmodfc0k )/m = (0.8021.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm [Cl 2.4.1(1)P] Cross section loads: Fx = 50.000 kN Compression parallel to the grain: Sc0d = (1000xFx )/A = (1000x50.000)/14454 = 3.46N/mm < 12.92N/mm (Fc0d ) The ratio of actual compressive stress to allowable compressive strength: Sc0d /Fc0d = 3.46 / 12.92 = 0.268 < 1.0 [Cl. 6.1.4.(1)P] Check for Slenderness: Slenderness ratios: z = (1000/57) = 17.54 y = (1000/21) = 47.62 E0,mean = 1.1031 kN/m2 As timber grade is C24 (i.e., Soft Wood) E0,05 = 0.67E0,mean = 0.739 kN/m2 [Annex A,EN 338:2003] rel,z = z/(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 17.54/(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.298
rel,y = y /(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 47.62/(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.809 Since,

rel,y
is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied:
Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO Sc0d /(KcyFc0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO Where: Kz = 0.5[1 +c(rel,z - 0.3) +(rel,z)2 ] = 0.50[1 +0.2(0.298 - 0.3) +(0.298)2 ] = 0.541 Ky = 0.5[1 +c(rel,y - 0.3) +(rel,y )2 ] = 0.50[1 +0.2(0.809 - 0.3) +(0.809)2 ] = 0.878 Kcz = 1/{Kz +[(Kz)2 - (rel,z)2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.541 +[(0.541)2 - (0.298)2 ]1/2 }= 1.008 Kcy = 1/{Ky +[(Kzy )2 - (rel,y )2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.878 +[(0.878)2 - (0.809)2 ]1/2 } = 0.820 For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. The member is subjected to Compression only, so actual bending stress is zero. Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46/(1.00812.92) +0.0 +0.0 = 0.268 +0.0 + 0.0 = 0.266 Sc0d /(KcyFc0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46 /(0.82012.92) +0.0 +0.0 = 0.326 ++0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326 Hence the critical ratio is 0.326 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Table 7E.3-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 1 Criteria Critical Ratio (Cl. 6.3.2) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 0.326 0.327 none
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 1.std.
STAAD SPACE INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC WOOD
362 STAAD.Pro
E 1.10316E+007 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 0.00231749 ALPHA 5.5E-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL CONSTANTS MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1 MEMBER PROPERTY 1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073 SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -50 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE TIMBER EC5 ALPHA 0 ALL LDC 3 ALL SCL 2 ALL TSC 6 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 ) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE LOADING/ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198 PASS CL.6.3.2 0.327 1 50.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000 METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ FX MY RATIO/ MZ
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00 | | LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00 | | | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS) | | FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769 | | FC = 12.859 | | ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS) | | fby = 0.000 fbz = 0.000 | | fc = 3.459 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
7E.4.2 Verification Problem No. 2

A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is subjected to an axial compressive force of 5.0 kN and moments of 2.0 kN.m and 1.0 kN.m about its major and minor axes respectively. Design the member for the ultimate limit state. Material properties: Timber Strength Class: C24 Service classes: Class 2, moisture content <=20% Load duration: Medium-term Cross section properties: Length of the member is 1 m. Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm, Effective cross sectional area A = 14454 mm, Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,
y z
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm, Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm
z
Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm

y
364 STAAD.Pro
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber: Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 from table 3.1 Material factors m = 1.30 from table 2.3 fc0k = 21.00 N/mm E0,05 = 7370 N/mm2 Fc0d = (Kmodfc0k )/m = (0.8021.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm [Cl 2.4.1(1)P] fmyk = 24.00 N/mm Fmyd = Kmodfmyk /m = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm fmzk = 24.00 N/mm Fmzd = Kmodfmzk /m = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm Cross section loads: Fx = 5.000 kN Mz = 2.000 kNm My = 1.000 kNm Check for Slenderness: Slenderness ratios: z = (1000/57) = 17.54 y = (1000/21) = 47.62 rel,z = z/(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 17.54/(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.298 rel,y = y /(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 47.62/(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.809 Since,
rel,y
is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied [Cl 6.3.2.3]:
Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO Sc0d /(KcyFc0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) RATIO Where: Kz = 0.5[1 +c(rel,z - 0.3) +(rel,z)2 ] = 0.50[1 +0.2(0.298 - 0.3) +(0.298)2 ] = 0.541 Ky = 0.5[1 +c(rel,y - 0.3) +(rel,y )2 ] = 0.50[1 +0.2(0.809 - 0.3) +(0.809)2 ] = 0.878 Kcz = 1/{Kz +[(Kz)2 - (rel,z)2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.541 +[(0.541)2 - (0.298)2 ]1/2 }= 1.008 Kcy = 1/{Ky +[(Kzy )2 - (rel,y )2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.878 +[(0.878)2 - (0.809)2 ]1/2 } = 0.820 For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. Sc0d = (1000Fx /A) = (10005.000)/14454 = 0.35 N/mm International Design Codes Manual 365
Smzd = (106 Mz)/W z = (106 2.000)/(4.770x105 ) = 4.19 N/mm Smyd = (106 My )/W y = (106 1.000)/(1.759x105 ) = 5.69 N/mm Combined stress ratio: Sc0d /(KczFc0d ) +(Smzd /Fmzd ) +Km(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 0.35/(1.00812.92) +4.19/14.77 +0.70(5.69/14.77) = 0.027 +0.283 +0.269 = 0.266 Sc0d /(KcyFc0d ) +Km(Smzd /Fmzd ) +(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 0.35 /(0.82012.92) +0.70(4.19/14.77) +5.69/14.77 = 0.033 +0.385 +0.198 = 0.616 Hence the critical ratio is 0.616 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Table 7E.4-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 2 Criteria Critical Ratio (Cl. 6.3.2) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 0.616 0.616 none
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 2.std.
STAAD SPACE INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC WOOD E 1.10316E+007 POISSON 0.15 DENSITY 0.00231749 ALPHA 5.5E-006 END DEFINE MATERIAL CONSTANTS MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1 MEMBER PROPERTY 1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073 SUPPORTS
366 STAAD.Pro
1 FIXED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FY -5.0 MX 1.0 MZ 2.0 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE TIMBER EC5 ALPHA 0 ALL LDC 3 ALL SCL 2 ALL TSC 6 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 ) *********************** ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE LOADING/ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198 PASS CL.6.3.2 0.616 1 5.00 C 1.00 -2.00 0.0000 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00 | | LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00 | | | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS) | | FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769 | METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ FX MY RATIO/ MZ
FC = 12.859 | | ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS) | | fby = 5.686 fbz = 4.193 | | fc = 0.346 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
368 STAAD.Pro
Section 8
Finnish Codes
370 STAAD.Pro
8A. Finnish Codes - Concrete Design per B4

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Finnish code B4 Suomen rakentamismryskokoelma, B4 Betonirakenteet (National Building Code of Finland, B4 Concrete structures). Design of members per B4 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
372 STAAD.Pro

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to the B4 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. The following table contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 8A.1-Finnish Concrete Design per B4 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as FINNISH. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
ACTAGE BRACE
70 0.0
Actual age of concrete, in years. Bracing parameter for design: 0. Beam or column braced in both directions 1. One-way plate or column braced in only the local Zdirection. 2. Column braced in only the local Y direction. 3. Column unbraced in either direction.
CLEAR
25 mm
Clearance of reinforcement measured from concrete surface to closest bar perimeter, in current units. Drying exposure, in percent.
DRYCIR
100
EFACE
0.0
Face of support location at end of beam, in current units.

positive numbers.
Parameter Name ELY
Default Value 1.0
Description
Member length factor about local Y direction for column design. Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Environment class 1. LA Least aggressive 2. NA Aggressive 3. MA Very aggressive
ELZ
1.0
ENVIR
FC FYMAIN LAGE MAX MAIN MINMAIN
35 N/mm 2
Compressive strength of concrete.
500 N/mm 2 Yield strength of main reinforcing steel. 7 days 32 Age when loaded, in days. Maximum size permitted for main reinforcement bar. Minimum size permitted for main reinforcement bar. moy factor moz factor nmag factor 0 40 1 Reinforcement angle, in degrees. Relative humidity, in percent. Column bar arrangement 1. Four longitudinal bars. 2. Two faced distribution about minor axis. 3. Two faced distribution about major axis. 4. Faced symmetric distribution
10
MOY MOZ NMAG REIANG RELHUM RFACE
374 STAAD.Pro
Default Value 0
Description
Distance from the start node of the beam to face of support for shear design.

positive numbers. STIRANG STIRDIA TORANG TRACK 90 10 mm 45 10 Stirrup angle, in degrees. Stirrup diameter Torsion angle, in degrees. Track parameter to control output detail 10. Beam Ultimate limit state and Service limit state design & Slab Two-way plate design 11. Beam Ultimate limit state and Service limit statedesign with tension stiffening. 12. Beam Ultimate limit statedesign only 20. Slab Plane stress design. 30. Slab Simplified membrane design.
8A. Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Finnish code B7 Suomen rakentamismryskokoelma, B4 Betonirakenteet, Liite 3: Kansallinen liite standardiin SFS-EN 206-1 (The National Building Code of Finland - B Strength of Structures, B7 Steel Structures Guidelines). Design of members per B7 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure.
8A. Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7
Table 8A.2-Design Parameters for Finnish B7 Steel design code Parameter Name CODE Default Value none Description
Must be specified as B7. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
0.0
Parameter BEAM 1.0 ALL tells the program to calculate von Mises at 13 sections along each member, and up to 8 points at each section. (Depending on what kind of shape is used.)
Note: Must be set to 1.0

BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, for weak axis buckling (y-y) (NOTE: BY > 0.0) Buckling length coefficient, , for strong axis buckling (z-z) (NOTE: BZ > 0.0) Lateral buckling coefficient, Y. Used to calculate the ideal buckling moments, M
vi
BZ
1.0
CB
1.0
CMZ
1.5
n for built up section in connection with lateral buckling Buckling curve coefficient, a about local z-axis (strong axis). Represent the a, a0, b, c, d curve.
CY CZ DMAX
Default see NS 3472 100.0 [cm] 0.0 [cm] 235 1.0 1.0
Maximum allowable depth of steel section.
DMIN
Minimum allowable depth of steel section.
FYLD MF RATIO
Yield strength of steel, fy [N/mm2 ] Ratio of material factor / resistance factor Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. 0.0 = No sidesway. calculated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis =SSY
M
SSY
0.0
376 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name SSZ
Default Value 0.0
Description
0.0 = No sidesway. calculated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis
M
TRACK
0.0
Specifies the level of detail in the output. 0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses 1.0 = Print all critical member stresses, i.e., design values 2.0 = Print von Mises stresses 3.0 = Member results, printed by member number 9.0 = Print detailed report each member.
UNL
Member length
Effective length for lateral buckling calculations (specify buckling length). Distance between fork supports or between effective side supports for the beam
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters. The parameter CB defines the value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
378 STAAD.Pro
Section 9
French Codes
380 STAAD.Pro
9A. French Codes - ConcreteDesign per B.A.E.L

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the French code BAEL1991 E Bton Arm aux tats Limites: Regles techniques de conception et de calcul des ouvrages et constructions en beton arme, suivant la methode des etats limites (Reinforced Concrete Limit States:Technical rules for design and costing and reinforced concrete, according to the method of limit states). Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcing to resist the various input loads. Design of members per BAEL1991 E requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design per B.A.E.L. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, of commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 7A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters and their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 9A.1-French Concrete Design B.A.E.L. Parameters Parameter Default Name Value CODE BAEL Description
Must be specified as BAEL. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CLEAR
* 20 mm YD
Clearance of reinforcing bar. Value is automatically set to 20 mm for C35 and higher. Depth of concrete member. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. Face of Support Location at end of beam.
DEPTH
EFACE
*0.0
Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are input as

positive numbers.
Parameter Default Name Value FC * 30 N/ mm 2 * 300 N/mm 2 * 300 N/mm 2 50 mm
Description
Concrete Yield Stress.
FYMAIN
Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FYSEC
Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel.
MAX MAIN
Maximum main reinforcement bar size. (8mm 60mm). Minimum main reinforcement bar size. (8mm 60mm). Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. (8mm - 60mm). A factor by which the design moments will be magnified. Face of support location at start of beam. Only considers shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for bending. Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moments for beam design. Critical Moment will not be printed out with beam design report. A value of 1.0 will mean a print out. Width of the concrete member. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
MINMAIN 8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
SFACE
*0.0
NSE CTION
10
TRACK
0.0
WIDTH
ZD
* These values must be provided in the units currently being used for input.

STAAD provides the user two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is a procedure which takes into account second order effects. Here, STAAD accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. STAAD, after solving for the joint displacements of the structure, calculates the additional moments induced in the
382 STAAD.Pro
structure. Therefore, by using PDELTA ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will require no user modification before beginning member design. The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is through user supplied moment magnification factors. Here the user approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before beginning member design.

UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450 ZD 300. 11 13 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 300 mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear areas (AY & AZ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not provided, the program will calculate values from YD and ZD.
9A.4 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total number of sections considered is twelve, unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed, with cut-off lengths calculated to include required development length. Shear design includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion. Example of Input Data for Beam Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE BAEL FYMAIN 415 ALL FYSEC 415 ALL FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 SFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9 EFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9 TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 6 TRACK 2.0 MEMB 7 TO 9 DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9 END CONCRETE DESIGN
9A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular, and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. Example of Input Data for Column Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE BAEL FYMAIN 415 ALL FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6 MMAG 1.5 MEMB 4 5 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6 END CONCRETE DESIGN

Slab and walls are designed per BAEL 1983 specifications. To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter II, section 6.40. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLEAR listed in Table 7A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 7A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
384 STAAD.Pro
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design:

UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE BAEL FYMAIN 415 ALL FC 25 ALL CLEAR 40 ALL DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20 END CONCRETE DESIGN
386 STAAD.Pro
9B. French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the French code CM66, 1977 edition Centre Technique Industriel de la Construction Metallique (Industrial Technical Center of Metal Construction) publication entitled Design Rules for Structural Steelwork . Design of members per CM66 requires the STAAD NEurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned according to the limit states of which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-states are recognized: ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability; that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria, as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other related parameters. The code checking portion of the program verifies that code requirements for each selected section are met and also identifies the governing criteria. The next few sections describe the salient features of STAAD implementation of "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork." A detailed description of the design process, along with its underlying concepts and assumptions, is available in the specification document.
9B.2 Basis of Methodology

The "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork (Revision 80)" permits the usage of elastic analysis. Thus, in STAAD, linear elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments in the members. However, strength and stability considerations are based on the principles of plastic behavior. Axial compression buckling and lateral torsional buckling are taken into consideration for calculation of axial compression resistance and flexural resistance of members. Slenderness calculations are made and overall geometric stability is checked for all members.

The member strengths are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 4 of this specification. Note that the program automatically considers co-existence of axial force, shear and bending in calculating section capacities.
For axial tension capacity, procedures of section 4.2 are followed. For axial compression capacity, formulas of section 5.3 are used. Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections 4.5 and 4.6. Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate twisting moment per section 5.22 of the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 7B.1) must be used to specify the unsupported length of the compression flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note that this length is also referred to as twisting length.
9B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending

The procedures of sections 4.55 and 5.32 are implemented for interaction of axial forces and bending. Appropriate interaction equations are used and the governing criterion is determined.

The design parameters outlined in Table 7B.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program, thus allowing the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected as frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 9B.1-French Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
FRENCH
Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
0.0
0.0 = design only for end moments and those at locations specified by SECTION command. 1.0 = calculate moments at tenth points long the beam, and use maximum Mz for design.
388 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name C1
Default Value
Description
1.0
Parameter used in clause 5.21 in the calculation of M(D), the critical twisting moment and as shown in CM 66 Addendum 80, table 5, usual range from 0.71 to 4.10 Parameter used in clause 5.21 in the calculation of M(D), the critical twisting moment and as shown in CM 66 Addendum 80, table 5, usual range from 0.0 to 1.56 "Deflection Length" divided by the Maximum allowable local deflection
C2
1.0
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note 1) Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note 1) Maximum allowable depth (used in member selection). Minimum allowable depth (used in member selection). Yield strength of steel. K value for axial compression buckling about local Y-axis. Usually, this is the minor axis. K value for axial compression buckling about local Z-axis. Usually, this is the major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio about Y-axis for axial compression. Length to calculate slenderness ratio about Z-axis for axial compression.
DJ2
End Joint of member
DMAX
100.0 cm.
DMIN
0.0 cm.
FYLD KY
250.0 MPa 1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length Member Length
LZ
Parameter Name NSF
Default Value
Description
1.0
Net section factor for tension members. Permissible ratio of actual load effect and design strength. Controls the sections to try during a SELECT process. 0.0 = Try every section of the same type as original 1.0 = Try only those sections with a similar name as original, e.g., if the original is an HEA 100, then only HEA sections will be selected, even if there are HEMs in the same table.
RATIO
1.0
SAME*
0.0
TRACK
0.0
0.0 = Suppress printing of all design strengths. 1.0 = Print all design strengths.
UNF
1.0
Same as above provided as a fraction of member length. Unsupported length of compression flange for calculating moment resistance.
UNL
Member Length
*For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
9B.6 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the STAAD.Pro implementation of CM 66 (Revn. 80). Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
390 STAAD.Pro
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in the output file in a tabular format.
Note: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66 (Revn. 80) specification which
governed the design. If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed. The following is a detailed description of printed items: PC = Member Compression Capacity TR = Member Tension Capacity MUZ = Member Moment Capacity (about z-axis) MUY = Member Moment Capacity (about y-axis) VPZ = Member Shear Capacity (z-axis) VPY = Member Shear Capacity (y-axis) STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection. Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements. Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle, double angle, channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams and code checking of prismatic properties. Sample Input data for Steel Design:
UNIT METER PARAMETER CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7 KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL TRACK 1.0 ALL CHECK CODE ALL
9B.8 Built-in French Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members. An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
9B.8.1 IPE Shapes

These shapes are designated in the following way.
10 15 TA ST IPE140 20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120 33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER180
9B.8.2 HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.
3 5 TA ST HEA120A 7 10 TA ST HEM140 13 14 TA ST HEB100
9B.8.3 IPN Shapes

The designation for the IPN shapes is similar to that for the IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST IPN200 23 56 TA ST IPN380
392 STAAD.Pro
9B.8.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T IPE140 2 8 TA T HEM120
9B.8.5 U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST UAP100 6 TO 10 TA ST UPN220 11 TO 15 TA ST UPN240A 16 TO 20 TA ST UAP250A
9B.8.6 Double U Channels

Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
11 TA D UAP150 17 TA D UAP250A SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel UAP150 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels.
9B.8.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST L30X30X2.7
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness of 2.7mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) should be used instead of ST.
17 21 TA RA L25X25X4 22 24 TA RA L100X100X6.5
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4 appears in the section name, the decimal part is not part of the section name.

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by means of input of the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
33 35 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6 37 39 TA LD L80X40X6 43 TO 47 TA LD L80X80X6.5 SP 0.75

Section names of tubes, just like angles, consist of the depth, width and wall thickness as shown below.
64 78 TA ST TUB50252.7 66 73 TA ST TUB2001008.0
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall thickness of 2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width of 100mm and a wall thickness of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is part of the section name. Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations. For example,
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections specified in this way.

To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal portion of the value provided for the diameter. The following example illustrates the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP422.6 3 64 78 TA ST PIP21912.5
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm. Members 3, 64 and 78 are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 12.5mm.
394 STAAD.Pro
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
9B.8.11 Example
SAMPLE FILE CONTAINING FRENCH SHAPES STAAD SPACE UNIT METER KN JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0 MEMB INCI 1 1 2 14 UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH * IPE SHAPES 1 TA ST IPEA120 * IPN SHAPES 2 TA ST IPN380 *HE SHAPES 3 TA ST HEA200 * T SHAPES 4 TA T HEM120 * U CHANNELS 5 TA ST UAP100 * DOUBLE U CHANNELS 6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5 * ANGLES 7 TA ST L30X30X2.7 * REVERSE ANGLES 8 TA RA L25X25X4 * DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK * TO BACK 9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25 * DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK * TO BACK 10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE * HOLLOW SECTIONS) 11 TA ST TUB50252.7 * TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE * HOLLOW SECTIONS) 12 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5 * PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS) 13 TA ST PIP422.6 * PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS) 14 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 PRINT MEMB PROP FINI
396 STAAD.Pro
Section 10
German Codes
398 STAAD.Pro
10A. German Codes - ConcreteDesign Per DIN 1045

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the German code DIN 10451:2001-07 Plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete structures. Part 1: Design and construction. Design for a member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are also reported in the output. Slab design is also available and this follows the requirements of Baumann, Munich, which is the basis for Eurocode 2. Design of members per DIN1045 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

l l
For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in DIN 1045 17.4.3/17.4.4 which is used as the basis for commonly used design charts considering e/d and sk/d for conditions where the slenderness moment exceeds 70. This method has been adopted in the column design in STAAD per the DIN code.
The second option is to compute the secondary moments through an analysis. Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The column is designed for the total moment which is the sum of the primary and secondary forces. The secondary moments can be compared to those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
10A.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes.

Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexural design is performed again in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per the DIN code. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
10A.4.2 Design for Shear and Torsion

Shear design in STAAD conforms to the specifications of section 17.5 of DIN 1045. Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear and torsional design is performed at the start and end sections of the member at a distance "d"
400 STAAD.Pro
away from the node of the member where "d" is the effective depth calculated from flexural design. The maximum shear forces from amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments are used in the design. The capacity of the concrete in shear and torsion is determined at the location of design and the balance, if any, is carried by reinforcement. It is assumed that no bent-up bars are available from the flexural reinforcement to carry and "balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
10A.4.3 Example of Input Data for Beam Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE GERMAN FYMAIN 415 ALL FYSEC 415 ALL FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9 DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9 END CONCRETE DESIGN
10A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. The requirements of DIN 1045-figure 13, for calculating the equilibrium equations for rectangular and circular sections from first principles, is implemented in the design. The user has control of the effective length (sk) in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as described on Table 8A.1. This means that the slenderness will be evaluated along with e/d to meet the requirements of DIN 1045 section 17.4.3 and 17.4.4. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. Square and rectangular columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on all four sides equally. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. The TRACK parameter may be used to obtain the design details in various levels of detail. Example of Input Data for Column Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE GERMAN FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6 MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6 DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6 END CONCRETE DESIGN
10A.6 Slab Design

To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite elements and analyzed. The command specifications are in accordance with Section 5.52 of the Technical Reference Manual. Slabs are designed to specifications as described by BAUMANN of MUNICH which is the basis for Eurocode 2. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The following parameters are those applicable to slab design: FYMAIN Yield stress for all reinforcing steel FC Concrete grade CLEAR Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element. SRA Parameter which denotes the angle of direction of the required transverse reinforcement relative to the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of BAUMANN design forces. The other parameters shown in Table 10A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
10A.6.1 BAUMANN equations

If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on Mx and My forces which are obtained from the STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce resolved BAUMANN forces into the design replacing the pure Mx and My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section, resolved as an axial force. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. If SRA is set to -500, an orthogonal layout will be assumed. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is given in degrees measured from the local element X axis anticlockwise (positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format.
402 STAAD.Pro
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 10 mm in the longitudinal direction and 8 mm in the transverse. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the slab exterior face.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 10A.1-German Concrete Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as DIN1045. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CLEAR
25 mm
Clear cover for reinforcement measured from concrete surface to closest bar perimeter. Depth of concrete member. The default value is provided as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. Face of support location at end of beam, measured from the end joint.
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must

be positive numbers. ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction for column design. Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength
ELZ
1.0 25 N/mm 2
FC
Parameter Name FYMAIN
Description
Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For slabs, it is 500 N/mm 2 for both directions) Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a. Applicable to shear and torsion reinforcement in beams Maximum required reinforcement bar size. Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above. Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 25 32 40 50 Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. Applicable to shear and torsion reinforcement in beams. Factor by which column design moments are magnified for column design Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moment for beam design. The upper limit is 20. Face of support location at start of beam, measured from the start joint. (Only applicable for shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for bending) 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy -slabs only -500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout considering Mxy A = Skew angle considered in BAUMANN equations. A is the angle in degrees.
FYSEC
420 N/mm 2
MAXMAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
16 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
NSECTION
10
SFACE
0.0
SRA
0.0
404 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
0.0
Level of detail in output 0. Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. 1. For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2. For beams gives area of steel required at intermediate sections. (see NSECTION)
WIDTH
ZD
Width of concrete member. This value default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
406 STAAD.Pro
10B. German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the German code DIN 18800, Parts 1 & 2: Stahlbauten - Teil 1: Bemessung und Konstruktion (Steel structures - Part 1: Design and construction) and Stahlbauten - Teil 2: Stabilittsflle - Knicken von Stben und Stabwerken (Steel structures - Part 2: Analysis of safety against buckling of linear members and frames) Design of members per DIN 18800 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
10B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the DIN code. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. It is recommended that you use the following steps in performing the steel design: 1. Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis. 2. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values. 3. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
10B.2 AnalysisMethodology
Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.

For specification of member properties of standard German steel sections, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
10B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members during the analysis. An example of member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface. Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
10B.4.1 IPE Shapes

These shapes are designated in the following way:
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120 33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER140
10B.4.2 HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300 23 56 TA ST HEA160
10B.4.3 I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example illustrates the designation.
14 15 TA ST I200 (INDICATES AN I-SECTION WITH 200MM DEPTH)
10B.4.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T HEA220 2 8 TA T IPE120
408 STAAD.Pro
10B.4.5 U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections. The former (U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter (U260) has a depth of 260mm.
11 TA D U70X40 27 TA D U260

Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel, e.g., D U180. The spacing between the double channels is provided following the expression SP.
11 TA D U180 27 TA D U280 SP 0.5 (INDICATES 2 CHANNELS BACK-TO-BACK SPACED AT 0.5 LENGTH UNITS)
10B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 20mm and a leg thickness of 2.5mm. The above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA L40X20X5

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by using the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between the angles is provided by using the word SP and the spacing value following the section name.
14 TO 20 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5 21 TO 27 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5

To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP602.9 (60.3MM DIA, 2.9MM WALL THICKNESS) 3 64 67 TA ST PIP40612.5 (406.4MM DIA, 12.5MM WALL THICKNESS)
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.

Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB100603.6
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mm x 60mm and the wall thickness of 3.6mm. Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) instead of by their table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current length units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for TUBE sections specified this way.
10B.4.11 Example
SAMPLE INPUT FILE CONTAINING GERMAN SHAPES STAAD SPACE UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 14
410 STAAD.Pro
UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTIES GERMAN * IPE SHAPES 1 TA ST IPEA120 * HE SHAPES 2 TA ST HEB300 * I SHAPES 3 TA ST I200 * T SHAPES 4 TA T HEA220 * U CHANNELS 5 TA ST U70X40 * DOUBLE U CHANNELS 6 TA D U260 * ANGLES 7 TA ST L20X20X2.5 * REVERSE ANGLES 8 TA RA L40X20X5 * DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK 9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5 * DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK 10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5 * PIPES 11 TA ST PIP602.9 * PIPES 12 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0 * TUBES 13 TA ST TUB100603.6 * TUBES 14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5 * PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES FINISH

The allowable stresses used in the implementation are based on DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 7. The procedures of DIN 18800 Part 2 are used for stability analysis. The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to
thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.
10B.5.1 Checks for Axial Tension

In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF -a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and proceeds with member selection or code checking.
10B.5.2 Checks for Axial Compression

The compression capacity for members in compression is determined according to the procedure of DIN 18800- Part 2. Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ.
10B.5.3 Checks for Bending and Shear

The bending compressive and tensile capacities are dependent on such factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0 or 2.0 for the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear capacities.
10B.6 Combined Loading

For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending, and shear), applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for all modeled loading situations. Members subjected to axial force and bending are checked using the criteria of DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 6.1.6. In addition, for members with axial loads and bending, the criteria of DIN 18800(Part 2) - Sections 3.4 and 3.5 are used.

You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters described in the following table. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
412 STAAD.Pro
Table 10B.1-German Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as DIN18800. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
0.0
Number of sections to be checked per member: 0. Design only for end sections. 1. Check at location of maximum MZ along member. 2. Check ends plus location of beam 1.0 check. 3. Check at every 1/13th of the member length and report the maximum.
CB
Beam coefficient n, defined in Table 9: If Cb = 0, program will use n = 2.5 for rolled sections and 2.0 for welded sections. Moment factor, Zeta, defined in Table 10: 1. fixed ended member with constant moment, Zeta = 1.0 2. pin ended member with UDL, Zeta = 1.12 3. pin ended member with central point load, Zeta = 1.35 4. fixed ended member, Zeta calculated from end moments.
CMM
1.0
DMAX
1.0 m
Maximum allowable depth during member selection Minimum required depth during member selection K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is the minor axis.
DMIN
0.0 m
KY
1.0
Parameter Name KZ
Default Value
Description
1.0
K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is the major axis. Length in local y-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Length in local z-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Strength of steel. Net section factor for tension members. Permissible ratio of actual to allowable stresses Control of sections to try during a SELECT process: 0. Try every section of the same type as the original. 1. Try only those with a similar name.
LY
Member Length Member Length 240 N/sq.mm 1.0
LZ
PY NSF
RATIO
1.0
SAME
0.0
SBLT
Specify section as either rolled or builtup: 0. Rolled 1. Built-up
SGR
0.0
Grade of steel: 0. St 37-2 1. St 52-3 2. St E 355
TRACK
0.0
Level of detail in output file: 0. Output summary of results 1. Output summary of results plus member capacities 2. Output detailed results
UNF
1.0
Same as above provided as a factor of actual member length.
414 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name UNL
Default Value
Description
Member Length
Unrestrained member length in lateral torsional buckling checks.
10B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is checked per the DIN requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES, or members listed as PRISMATIC. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command. Sample Input data for Steel Design
UNIT METER PARAMETER CODE GERMAN NSF 0.85 ALL UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7 KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
416 STAAD.Pro
Section 11
Indian Codes
418 STAAD.Pro
11A. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 456

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Indian code IS 456 2000 Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete. Design of members per IS 456 requires the STAAD India Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

l l
For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), T-Beams, and L-shapes For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTY 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250. 11 13 PR YD 350. 14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set numbers in the above example represents a T-shape with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design as per IS:456(2000). Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 9A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
Table 11A.1-Indian Concrete Design IS456 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as INDIAN. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BRACING
0.0
Beam Design: A value of 1.0 means the effect of axial force will be taken into account for beam design. Column Design: correspond to the terms "Braced" and "Unbraced" described in Notes 1, 2, and 3 of Clause 39.7.1 of IS456:2000. 1. The column is unbraced about major axis. 2. The column is unbraced about minor axis. 3. The column is unbraced about both axis.
CLEAR
25 mm 40 mm
For beam members. For column members Total depth to be used for design. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. Face of support location at end of beam. The parameter can also be used to check against shear at any point from the end of the member.
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0
Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are

input as positive numbers.
420 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name ELZ
Default Value
Description
1.0
Ratio of effective length to actual length of column about major axis. See Note b below. Ratio of effective length to actual length of column about minor axis. See Note b below. Perform shear check against enhanced shear strength as per Cl. 40.5 of IS456:2000.
l
ELY
1.0
ENSH
0.0
ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary shear check to be performed ( no enhancement of shear strength at sections close to support) For ENSH = a positive value(say x ), shear strength will be enhanced up to a distance x from the start of the member. This is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. (Refer note ) For ENSH = a negative value(say y), shear strength will be enhanced up to a distance y from the end of the member. This is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts.(Refer note)
If default value (0.0) is used the program will calculate Length to Overall Depth ratio. If this ratio is greater than 2.5, shear strength will be enhanced at sections (<2d) close to support otherwise ordinary shear check will be performed. FC FYMAIN 30 N/mm 2 415 N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress. Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
Parameter Name FYSEC
Description
Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel. Minimum main reinforcement bar size. Maximum main reinforcement bar size. Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. Maximum secondary reinforcement bar size. Maximum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement in columns. Tied column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral reinforcement. Distance of the start or end point of the member from its nearest support. This parameter is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. (Refer note) 2. Two faced distribution about major axis. 3. Two faced distribution about minor axis. 4. Longitudinal reinforcement in column is arranged equally along 4 faces.
MINMAIN
10 mm
MAXMAIN
60 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MAXSEC
12 mm
RATIO
4.0
REINF
0.0
RENSH
0.0
RFACE
4.0
SFACE
0.0
Face of support location at start of beam. It is used to check against shear at the face of the support in beam design. The parameter can also be used to check against shear at any point from the start of the member. Minimum clear distance between main reinforcing bars in beam and column. For column center to center distance between main bars cannot exceed 300 mm.
SPSMAIN
25 mm
422 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name TORSION
Default Value
Description
0.0
0. torsion to be considered in beam design. 1. torsion to be neglected in beam design.
TRACK
0.0
Beam Design: 0. output consists of reinforcement details at START, MIDDLE, and END. 1. critical moments are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output. 2. required steel for intermediate sections defined by NSECTION are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output. Column Design: 0. reinforcement details are printed. 1. column interaction analysis results are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output. 2. a schematic interaction diagram and intermediate interaction values are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output. 9. the details of section capacity calculations are printed.
ULY
1.0
Ratio of unsupported length to actual length of column about minor axis. See Note c below. Ratio of unsupported length to actual length of column about major axis. See Note c below. Width to be used for design. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
ULZ
1.0
WIDTH
ZD
11A.3.1 Notes
a. You may specify reinforcing bar combinations through the BARCOMBINATIONcommand. Refer to Section 9A.8 for details. b. ELY and ELZ parameters are used to calculate effective length of column to find whether it is a short or long column. Please refer CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000. In CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, you will find two term, l and l , which STAAD calculates ex ey as:
l
l = ELZ multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of ex the member) l = ELY multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of ey the member)
For the term "D" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the YD dimension of the column. For the term "b" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the ZD dimension of the column. c. ULY and ULZ parameters are used to calculate unsupported length of column to find minimum eccentricity. Please refer CL 25.4 of IS456:2000. In CL 25.4 of IS456:2000, you will find an expression "unsupported length of column". This term is calculated as
l l
ULZ multiplied by the member length for the Z axis ULY multiplied by the member length for the Y axis
d. The value of the ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when the span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition occurs, the RENSH parameter is also to be used.
The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L meter. The shear strength will be enhanced up to X meter from both supports. The input should be the following: Steps:
424 STAAD.Pro
1. ENSH L MEMB 1 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the member 1, positive sign indicates length measured from start of the member 2. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of the member 2, length measured from the start of the member 3. ENSH L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the member 4, negative sign indicates length measured from end of the member 4. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of the member 3, length measured from the end of the member 5. RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from both the members 2 and 3. 6. DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4=> This will enhance the shear strength up to length X from both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and gives spacing accordingly. At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1 At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4 where tc, enhanced = 2d tc/av At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become infinity. However for any section shear stress cannot exceed tc, max. Hence enhanced shear strength is limited to a maximum value of tc, max.

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. The IS:456 code specifies two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated (Clause 39.7). One option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design moments. STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The P-Delta analysis will accommodate all requirements of the second- order analysis described by IS:456, except for the effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must be realized that the approximate evaluation of slenderness effects is also an approximate method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway (Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS: 456 - 2000). The rules of Clause 39.7.1 have been implemented in STAAD.Pro. They will be checked if the ELY and ELZ parameters are specified. Considering all these information, a P-Delta analysis, as performed by STAAD may be used for the design of concrete members.
Note: To take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be
provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments (i.e., analysis results), whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Loads can be combined prior to analysis using the REPEATLOADcommand.
Note: You must specify the appropriate load factors (e.g., 1.5 for dead load, etc.) as STAAD
does not factor the loads automatically.
11A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9, and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes.

Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section, doubly reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section is designed only as singly reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account of the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the
426 STAAD.Pro
curtailment of reinforcements as per IS:456-2000 (Clause 26.2.3). Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which the final detail drawing can be prepared.

Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.0 to 1.0) for the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d where d is the effective depth) close to support has been enhanced, subjected to a maximum value of .
cmax
11A.5.3 Beam Design Output

The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced (0, .25, .5, .75 and 1.) sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with TRACK 2.0 output is presented below:
B E A M S M20 (Sec.) LENGTH: COVER: 25.0 mm 6400.0 mm SIZE: 300.0 mm X 400.0 mm Fe415 (Main) Fe250 N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET) --------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR (in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX Load Case --------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 60.61 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 533.3 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | 50.51 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 1066.7 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | 40.41 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1600.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | 30.31 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 2133.3 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | 20.20 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 2666.7 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | 10.10 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 3200.0 | 0.00 96.98 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 3733.3 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | -10.10 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 4266.7 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | -20.20 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 4800.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | -30.31 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 5333.3 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | -40.41 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 5866.7 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | -50.51 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 6400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | -60.61 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | --------------------------------------------------------------------------SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA (Sq.mm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM | STIRRUPS (in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2 legged) --------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 533.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 1066.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 1600.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 2133.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 2666.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm
428 STAAD.Pro
3200.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25 )| @ 180 mm 3733.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 4266.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm --------------------------------------------------------------------------8
11A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the sections under biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 8A.1). Depending upon the member lengths, section dimensions and effective length coefficients specified by the user STAAD automatically determine the criterion (short or long) of the column design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. Default clear spacing between main reinforcing bars is taken to be 25 mm while arrangement of longitudinal bars.
11A.6.1 Column Design Output

Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. All design output is given in SI units. An example of a TRACK 2.0 output follows:
C O L U M N M20 N O. 1 D E S I G N Fe415 (Main) R E S U L T S Fe250
(Sec.) LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 400.0 mm X 600.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm ** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 1 END JOINT: 1 SHORT COLUMN DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET) ----------------------DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu)
2000.00
About Z About Y INITIAL MOMENTS : 160.00 120.00 MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 52.00 40.00 SLENDERNESS RATIOS : MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 160.00 120.00 REQD. STEEL AREA : 3587.44 Sq.mm. REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 236412.56 Sq.mm. MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 32 - 12 dia. (1.51%, 3619.11 Sq.mm.) (Equally distributed) TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 190 mm c/c SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET) ---------------------------------------------------------Puz : 3244.31 Muz1 : 269.59 Muy1 : 168.42 INTERACTION RATIO: 0.98 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000) SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT PROVIDED (KNS-MET) ---------------------------------------------------------WORST LOAD CASE: 1 END JOINT: 1 Puz : 3253.88 Muz : 271.48 Muy : 170.09 IR: 0.96 ============================================================================
11A.7 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. You may use the BARCOMBINATIONcommand to specify two bar diameters to calculate a combination of each bar to be provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below. START BAR COMBINATION MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> MD2 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> END BAR COMBINATION
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar
diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter). The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section. The typical output for bar combination is shown below:
430 STAAD.Pro
OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION --------------------------------------------------------------------------| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T | --------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION | 0.0- 1600.0 | 1600.0- 4800.0 | 4800.06400.0 | | mm | mm | mm | --------------------------------------------------------------------------TOP | 2-16 | 2-16 | 216 | | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | Ast Reqd| 0.00 | 0.00 | 0.00 | Prov| 402.29 | 402.29 | 402.29 | Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 | --------------------------------------------------------------------------BOTTOM | 4-16 | 2-16 + 2-25 | 416 | | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | Ast Reqd| 632.82 | 894.99 | 632.82 | Prov| 804.57 | 1384.43 | 804.57 | Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 | --------------------------------------------------------------------------============================================================================
11A.8 Wall Design in accordance with IS 4562000

The design of walls in accordance with IS 456-2000 is available in STAAD.Pro. The design is performed for in-plane shear, in-plane & out-of-plane bending, and out-of-plane shear. The wall has to be modeled using STAADs Surface elements (Refer to Section 5.13.3 of the Technical Reference Manual). The use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for the specified number of sections given in the SURFACE DIVISION command (default value is 10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) edge reinforcing and the link required for out-of-plane shear. Refer to Section 5.54 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on shear wall design.
11A.8.1 Design Parameters

START SHEARWALL DESIGN CODE INDIAN shearwall-parameters DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list END The following table explains the parameters used in the shear wall design.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 11A.2-Shear Wall Design Parameters Parameter Name CLEAR Default Value Description
25 mm
Clear concrete cover, in current units. Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars located in edge zones (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
EMAX
36
EMIN
432 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name FYMAIN
Default Value
Description
415 Mpa
Yield strength of steel, in current units. Compressive strength of concrete, in current units. Minimum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Maximum size of horizontal reinforcing bars (range 6 mm 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Slenderness factor for finding effective height. Maximum size of links (range 6mm 16mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Minimum size of links (range 6mm 16mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
FC
30 Mpa
HMIN
HMAX
36
KSLENDER
1.0
LMAX
16
LMIN
Parameter Name TWOLAYERED
Default Value
Description
Reinforcement placement mode: 0. single layer, each direction 1. two layers, each direction
VMAX
36
Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar. Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range 6mm 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number) the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
VMIN
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation. 2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command. 3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the line 2 to 5 gen pin assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints. 4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively. 5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For Indian code the parameter is INDIAN. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear wall components.
434 STAAD.Pro
11A.8.2 Technical Overview

The program implements provisions of section 32 of IS 456-2000 and relevant provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The following steps are performed for each of the horizontal sections of the wall.
Checking of slenderness limit

The slenderness checking is done as per clause no. 32.2.3. The default effective height is the height of the wall. User can change the effective height. The limit for slenderness is taken as 30.
Design for in-plane bending and vertical load

(denoted by Mz & Fy in the shear wall force output) Walls when subjected to combined in-plane horizontal and vertical forces produce in-plane bending in conjunction with vertical load. According to clause no. 32.3.1, in-plane bending may be neglected in case a horizontal cross section of the wall is always under compression due combined effect of horizontal and vertical loads. Otherwise, the section is checked for combined vertical load and in-plane moment as column with axial load and uni-axial bending. For this purpose, the depth is taken as 0.8 x horizontal length of wall and breadth is the thickness of the wall. The reinforcement is concentrated at both ends (edges) of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal length on each side. Minimum reinforcements are according to clause no. 32.5.(a). Maximum 4% reinforcement is allowed.
Design for in-plane shear

(denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output) By default, the program does not design only at the critical section but at all the horizontal sections. By suitable use of the surface division command, design at critical section as per clause no. 32.4.1 can be performed. The design for in-plane shear is done as per clause no. 32.4. The nominal shear stress is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.2 and it is checked with the maximum allowable shear stress as per clause no. 32.4.2.1. The design shear strength of concrete is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.3. Design of shear reinforcement is done as per clause no. 32.4.4. Minimum reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5.
Design for vertical load and out-of-plane vertical bending

(denoted by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force output) Apart from the in-plane bending and horizontal shear force, the wall is also subjected to outof-plane bending in the vertical and horizontal directions. The part of the wall which is not having edge reinforcements (i.e., a zone of depth 0.6 x Length of the wall), is designed again as
column under axial load (i.e., vertical load) and out-of-plane vertical bending. The minimum reinforcements and maximum allowable spacings of reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending

(denoted by Mx in the shear wall force output) The horizontal reinforcement which is already provided for in-plane shear is checked against out-of-plane horizontal bending. The wall is assumed as a slab for this purpose.
Design for out-of-plane shears

(denoted by Qx and Qy in the shear wall force output) The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The nominal shear stresses are calculated as per clause no. 40.1. Maximum allowable shear stresses are as per table 20. For shear force in the vertical direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per section 4.1 of SP 16 : 1980 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Similarly, for shear force in the horizontal direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated considering horizontal reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per the provisions of clause no. 40.4.
11A.8.3 Example
The following example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and design of the wall.
SET DIVISION 12 SURFACE INCIDENCES 2 5 37 34 SUR 1 19 16 65 68 SUR 2 11 15 186 165 SUR 3 10 6 138 159 SUR 4 SURFACE PROPERTY 1 TO 4 THI 18 SUPPORTS 1 7 14 20 PINNED 2 TO 5 GEN PIN 6 TO 10 GEN PIN 11 TO 15 GEN PIN 19 TO 16 GEN PIN SURFACE CONSTANTS
436 STAAD.Pro
E 2.17185E+007 POISSON 0.17 DENSITY 23.5616 ALPHA 1E-005 START SHEARWALL DES CODE INDIAN UNIT NEW MMS FC 25 FYMAIN 415 TWO 1 VMIN 12 HMIN 12 EMIN 12 DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4 END
11A.8.4 Shear Wall Design With Opening

The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are available for user selected locations. Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the presence of openings, the wall may be comprise of different wall panels of varying types. 1. Shear wall set-up Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of four edges of the opening(s). SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1, ..., sdj RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION od1, ..., odk Where: n1, , ni node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall, s surface ordinal number, sd1, , sdj number of divisions for each of the node-to-node distance on the surface perimeter, x1 y1 z1 () coordinates of the corners of the opening, od1, , odk divisions along edges of the opening.
Note: If the sd1, , sdj or the od1, , odk list does not include all node-to-node
segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the SET DIVISION command). Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows: SURFACE DIVISION X xd SURFACE DIVISION Y yd Where: xd number of divisions along X axis, yd number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the
surface where output is requested. The output is provided for sections located between division segments. For example, if the number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the center of the edge). 2. Stress/force output printing Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall. The general format of the command is as follows: PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, ,si Where: local axis of the surface element (X or Y), a distance along the axis from start of the member to the full cross-section of the wall, d1, d2 coordinates in the direction orthogonal to , delineating a fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is desired. ** s1, ,si list of surfaces for output generation ** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If

command AT is omitted, output is provided for all sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number of sections will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. If the BETWEEN
438 STAAD.Pro
command is omitted, the output is generated based on full cross-section width.
3. Definition of wall panels Input syntax for panel definition is as follows: START PANEL DEFINITION SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 END PANEL DEFINITION Where: i = ordinal surface number, j = ordinal panel number, ptype = panel type, one of: WALL, COLUMN, BEAM x1 y1 z1 () = coordinates of the corners of the panel, 4. Shear wall design The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows: START SHEARWALL DESIGN () DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT f2) LIST s ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Note: If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of
the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. a. No panel definition. Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted bars. b. Panels have been defined. Only wall panel design is supported in Indian code.
440 STAAD.Pro
11B. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 13920

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Indian code IS 13920 Code of Practice for Ductile Detailing of Reinforced Concrete Structures Subjected to Seismic Forces. Designs per IS 13920 satisfy all provisions of IS 456 2000 and IS 13920 for beams and columns (See "Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 456" on page 419). Design of members per IS 1320 requires the STAAD India Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
11B.1 Design Operations

Earthquake motion often induces force large enough to cause inelastic deformations in the structure. If the structure is brittle, sudden failure could occur. But if the structure is made to behave ductile, it will be able to sustain the earthquake effects better with some deflection larger than the yield deflection by absorption of energy. Therefore ductility is also required as an essential element for safety from sudden collapse during severe shocks.
11B.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

l l
For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) and T-shape For Columns:Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

The program contains a number of parameters that are needed to perform design as per IS 13920. It accepts all parameters that are needed to perform design as per IS:456. Over and above it has some other parameters that are required only when designed is performed as per IS:13920. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A1.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
Table 11B.1-Indian Concrete Design IS 13920 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as IS13920 Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BRACING
0.0
Beam Design 1.0 = the effect of axial force will be taken into account for beam design. Column Design: Correspond to the terms "Braced" and "Unbraced" described in Notes 1, 2, and 3 of Clause 39.7.1 of IS456:2000. 1.0 = the column is unbraced about major axis. 2.0 = the column is unbraced about minor axis. 3.0 = the column is unbraced about both axis.
DEPTH
YD
Total depth to be used for design. This value defaults to YD (depth of section in Y direction) as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. For beam members. For column members
CLEAR
25 mm 40 mm
442 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name COMBINE
Default Value
Description
0.0
Default value means there will be no member combination. 1.0 = no printout of sectional force and critical load for combined member in the output. 2.0 = printout of sectional force for combined member in the output. 3.0 = printout of both sectional force and critical load for combined member in the output. ***
EFACE
0.0
Face of support location at end of beam. The parameter can also be used to check against shear at any point from the end of the member.

input as positive numbers.* ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of column about major axis. Ratio of effective length to actual length of column about minor axis.
ELY
1.0
Parameter Name ENSH
Default Value
Description
0.0
Perform shear check against enhanced shear strength as per Cl. 40.5 of IS456:2000. 1.0 = ordinary shear check to be performed ( no enhancement of shear strength at sections close to support) a positive value(say x ) = shear strength will be enhanced up to a distance x from the start of the member. This is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. (Refer note after Table 8A.1 ) a negative value(say y) = shear strength will be enhanced up to a distance y from the end of the member. This is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts.(Refer note after Table 8A.1) 0.0 = the program will calculate Length to Overall Depth ratio. If this ratio is greater than 2.5, shear strength will be enhanced at sections (<2d) close to support otherwise ordinary shear check will be performed.
444 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name EUDL
Default Value
Description
None
Equivalent u.d.l on span of the beam. This load value must be the unfactored load on span. During design the load value is multiplied by a factor 1.2. If no u.d.l is defined factored shear force due to gravity load on span will be taken as zero. No elastic or plastic moment will be calculated. Shear design will be performed based on analysis result.(Refer note) Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel. Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel. Concrete Yield Stress.
FYMAIN FYSEC
415 N/mm 2 415 N/mm 2 30 N/mm 2
FC
Parameter Name GLD
Default Value
Description
None
Gravity load number to be considered for calculating equivalent u.d.l on span of the beam, in case no EUDL is mentioned in the input. This loadcase can be any static loadcase containing MEMBER LOAD on the beam which includes UNI, CON, LIN and TRAP member loading. CMOM member loading is considered only when it is specified in local direction. FLOOR LOAD is also considered. The load can be primary or combination load. For combination load only load numbers included in load combination is considered. The load factors are ignored. Internally the unfactored load is multiplied by a factor 1.2 during design. If both EUDL and GLD parameters are mentioned in the input mentioned EUDL will be considered in design
Note: No dynamic (Response

spectrum, 1893, Time History) and moving load cases are considered. CMOM member loading in global direction is not considered. UMOM member loading is not considered. HLINK Spacing of longitudinal bars measured to the outer face Longer dimension of the rectangular confining hoop measured to its outer face. It shall not exceed 300 mm as per Cl. 7.4.8. If the HLINK value as provided in the input file does not satisfy the clause the value will be internally assumed as the default one. This parameter is valid for rectangular column.
446 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name IPLM
Default Value
Description
0.0
Default value calculates elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam at its ends. 1.0 = calculation of elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam to be ignored at start node of beam. This implies no support exists at start node. -1.0 = calculation of elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam to be considered at start node of beam. . This implies support exists at start node. 2.0 = calculation of elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam to be ignored at end node of beam. This implies no support exists at end node. -2.0 = calculation of elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam to be considered at end node of beam. . This implies support exists at end node. **
Parameter Name IMB
Default Value
Description
0.0
Default value calculates elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam at its ends. 1.0 = calculation of elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam to be ignored at both ends of beam. This implies no support exist at either end of the member. -1.0 = calculation of elastic/plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam to be considered at both ends of beam. This implies support exist at both ends of the member.**
MINMAIN
10 mm
Minimum main reinforcement bar size. Maximum main reinforcement bar size. Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. Maximum secondary reinforcement bar size. Default value calculates elastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam at its ends. 1.0 = plastic hogging and sagging moments of resistance of beam to be calculated at its ends.
MAXMAIN
60 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MAXSEC
12 mm
PLASTIC
0.0
RATIO
4.0
Maximum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement in columns.
448 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name REINF
Default Value
Description
0.0
0.0 = Tied column (default) 1.0 = spiral reinforcement
RENSH
0.0
Distance of the start or end point of the member from its nearest support. This parameter is used only when a span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. Refer note after Table 9A.1
RFACE
4.0
4.0 = longitudinal reinforcement in column is arranged equally along four faces. 2.0 invokes two faced distribution about major axis. 3.0 invokes two faced distribution about minor axis.
SFACE
0.0
Face of support location at start of beam. It is used to check against shear at the face of the support in beam design. The parameter can also be used to check against shear at any point from the start of the member.*

input as positive numbers.* SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between main reinforcing bars in beam and column. For column center to center distance between main bars cannot exceed 300 mm. 0.0 = torsion to be considered in beam design. 1.0 = torsion to be neglected in beam design.
TORISION
0.0
Default Value
Description
0.0
Beam Design: 0.0 = output consists of reinforcement details at START, MIDDLE and END. 1.0 = critical moments are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output. 2.0 = required steel for intermediate sections defined by NSECTION are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output. Column Design: 0.0 = reinforcement details are printed. 1.0 = column interaction analysis results are printed in addition to TRACK 0.0 output. 2.0 = a schematic interaction diagram and intermediate interaction values are printed in addition to TRACK 1.0 output.
ULY
1.0
Ratio of unsupported length to actual length of column about minor axis. Ratio of unsupported length to actual length of column about major axis. Width to be used for design. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
ULZ
1.0
WIDTH
ZD
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 9A1.6 for details. * EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination.
450 STAAD.Pro
** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These commands are ignored for members forming physical member. *** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following: 1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-beams this parameter will combine them into one member. It can also be used to combine members to form one continuous beam spanning over more than two supports. 2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic moments will be calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate nodes (if any) this calculation will be ignored.
Note: Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle to the
beam. Inclined column support is ignored. 3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the combined member. 4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all active load cases during design. Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is issued. The following lines should be satisfied during combination of members: 1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single span between two column supports of a continuous beam is subdivided into several members. 2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha, density, and beta angle) 3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line. 4. Members to be combined should be continuous. 5. Vertical members (i.e., columns) cannot be combined. 6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different combined members. 7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is 299.
Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only be available
when all the members combined are successfully designed in both flexure and shear. ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary) even if physical member has been formed.
11B.3.1 Example
The following lines show a standard example for design to be performed in IS 13920.
STAAD SPACE UNIT METER MTON JOINT COORDINATES MEMBER INCIDENCES MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN CONSTANTS SUPPORTS DEFINE 1893 LOAD ZONE 0.05 I 1 K 1 B 1 SELFWEIGHT JOINT WEIGHT LOAD 1 SEISMIC LOAD IN X DIR 1893 LOAD X 1 LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOAD IN Z DIR 1893 LOAD Z 1 LOAD 3 DL MEMBER LOAD UNI GY -5 LOAD 4 LL MEMBER LOAD . UNI GY -3 LOAD COMB 5 1.5(DL+LL) 3 1.5 4 1.5 LOAD COMB 6 1.2(DL+LL+SLX) 1 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2 LOAD COMB 7 1.2(DL+LL-SLX) 1 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2 LOAD COMB 8 1.2(DL+LL+SLZ) 2 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2 LOAD COMB 9 1.2(DL+LL-SLZ)
452 STAAD.Pro
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2 PDELTA ANALYSIS LOAD LIST 5 TO 9 START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE IS13920 UNIT MMS NEWTON FYMAIN 415 ALL FC 20 ALL MINMAIN 12 ALL MAXMAIN 25 ALL TRACK 2.0 ALL *** UNFACTORED GRAVITY LOAD ON MEMBERS 110 TO 112 IS 8 T/M (DL+LL) I.E., 78.46 NEW/MM EUDL 78.46 MEMB 110 TO 112 ** MEMBERS TO BE COMBINED INTO ONE PHYSICAL MEMBER COMBINE 3.0 MEMB 110 TO 112 *** PLASTIC MOMENT CONSIDERED PLASTIC 1.0 MEMB 110 TO 112 DESIGN BEAM 110 TO 112 DESIGN COLUMN END CONCRETE DESIGN FINISH
11B.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect of the axial force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13. All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes. For design to be performed as per IS:13920 the width of the member shall not be less than 200 mm(Clause 6.1.3). Also the member shall preferably have a width-to depth ratio of more than 0.3 (Clause 6.1.2). The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck (Clause 6.1.1) for all active load cases. If it exceeds allowable axial stress no design will be performed.
11B.4.1 Design for Flexure

Design procedure is same as that for IS 456. However while designing following criteria are satisfied as per IS-13920:
1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2) 2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3) 3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.1b) min = 0.24fck/fy The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.2) max = 0.025 4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the negative steel at that face. (Clause 6.2.3) 5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at least be equal to one-fourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided at the face of either joint. (Clause 6.2.4)
11B.4.2 Design for Shear

The shear force to be resisted by vertical hoops is guided by the Clause 6.3.3 of IS 13920:1993 revision. Elastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance of the beam section at ends are considered while calculating shear force. Plastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance can also be considered for shear design if PLASTIC parameter is mentioned in the input file. (Refer Table 8A1.1) Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Procedure is same as that of IS 456. The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for shear as per Cl. 6.3.5 of IS13920: The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of the beam shall not exceed a. d/4 b. 8 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars In no case this spacing is less than 100 mm. The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated from IS 456 consideration is provided.
11B.4.3 Beam Design Output

The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement provided at 5 equally spaced sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with the TRACK 2.0 is presented below:
B E A M S N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T
454 STAAD.Pro
M20 (Sec.) LENGTH: COVER: 25.0 mm 6400.0 mm
Fe415 (Main) SIZE: 300.0 mm X
Fe250 400.0 mm
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET) --------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR (in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX Load Case --------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 60.61 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 533.3 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | 50.51 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 1066.7 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | 40.41 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 1600.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | 30.31 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 2133.3 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | 20.20 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 2666.7 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | 10.10 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 3200.0 | 0.00 96.98 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 3733.3 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | -10.10 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 4266.7 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | -20.20 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 4800.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | -30.31 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 5333.3 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | -40.41 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 5866.7 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | -50.51 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 6400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | -60.61 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | *** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 0.0 IS 60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-13920 *** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 6400.0 IS 60.61 KN. - CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF
IS-13920 NOTE : MOMENT OF RESISTANCE IS CALCULATED BASED ON THE AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED. IF AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED IS MUCH HIGHER COMPARED TO AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED MOMENT OF RESISTANCE WILL INCREASE WHICH MAY INCREASE DESIGN SHEAR FORCE. --------------------------------------------------------------------------STAAD SPACE -PAGE NO. 7 0.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )| 8 @ 100 mm 533.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 1066.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 1600.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 2133.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 2666.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 3200.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 3733.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 4266.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25 )| 8 @ 180 mm 6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16 )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25 )| 8 @ 100 mm ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
11B.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments per IS 456:2000. Columns are also designed for shear forces as per Clause 7.3.4. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. However following clauses have been satisfied to incorporate provisions of IS 13920:
456 STAAD.Pro
The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2) Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3) The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm. For columns having unsupported length exceeding 4m, the shortest dimension of column shall not be less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2) The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular dimension shall preferably be not less than 0.4. (Clause 7.1.3) The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the column, except where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause 7.3.3) Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length l from each joint face, o towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where flexural yielding may occur. The length l shall not be less than a) larger lateral dimension of the member at the o section where yielding occurs, b) 1/6 of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm. (Clause 7.4.1) The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not exceed of minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm nor more than 100 mm. (Clause 7.4.6) The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the provisions for minimum area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular, circular or spiral hoops, to be used as special confining reinforcement. (Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
11B.5.1 Column Design Output

Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced to obtain the details of section capacity calculations. All design output is given in SI units. An example of a column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
============================================================================ C O L U M N N O. 3 D E S I G N R E S U L T S M20 Fe415 (Main) Fe415 (Sec.) LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 350.0 mm X 400.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm ** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 END JOINT: 2 SHORT COLUMN DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET) ----------------------DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) : 226.7
About Z About Y INITIAL MOMENTS : 0.64 146.28 MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 4.53 4.53 SLENDERNESS RATIOS : - MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : - MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : - ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : - TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 4.53 146.28 ** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 Along Z Along Y DESIGN SHEAR FORCES : 43.31 76.08 REQD. STEEL AREA : 3313.56 Sq.mm. MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 12 - 20 dia. (2.69%, 3769.91 Sq.mm.) (Equally distributed) CONFINING REINFORCEMENT : Provide 10 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 85 mm c/c over a length 500.0 mm from each joint face towards midspan as per Cl. 7.4.6 of IS-13920. TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 10 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 175 mm c/c SECTION CAPACITY (KNS-MET) -------------------------Puz : 2261.52 Muz1 : 178.71 Muy1 : 150.75 INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000) ============================================================================ ********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN RESULTS********************
11B.6 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. You may use the
458 STAAD.Pro
BARCOMBINATIONcommand to specify two bar diameters to calculate a combination of each bar to be provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below. START BAR COMBINATION MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> MD2 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list> ENDBAR COMBINATION
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar
diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter). The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section. The typical output for bar combination is shown below:
OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION --------------------------------------------------------------------------| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T | --------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION | 0.0- 1600.0 | 1600.0- 4800.0 | 4800.06400.0 | | mm | mm | mm | --------------------------------------------------------------------------TOP | 2-16 | 2-16 | 216 | | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | Ast Reqd| 0.00 | 0.00 | 0.00 | Prov| 402.29 | 402.29 | 402.29 | Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 | --------------------------------------------------------------------------BOTTOM | 4-16 | 2-16 + 2-25 | 416 | | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | Ast Reqd| 632.82 | 894.99 | 632.82 | Prov| 804.57 | 1384.43 | 804.57 |
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 | --------------------------------------------------------------------------============================================================================
11B.7 Verification Example

Sample example showing calculation of design shear force as per Clause 6.3.3
Figure 11B.1 - Example problem
11B.7.1 For Beam No. 1 and 2

Section width, b = 250 mm and depth, D = 500 mm Characteristic strength of steel, fy = 415 N/mm 2 Characteristic strength of concrete, fck = 20 N/mm 2 Clear cover = 25 mm Bar diameter = 12 mm Effective depth, d = 469 mm Eudl, w = 6.5 N/mm 2 Length, L = 4,000 mm A A A A Steps Calculation of Simple Shear Simple shear from gravity load on span = Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 15600N
st_Top_A st_Bot_A st_Top_B st_Bot_B
= 339.29 mm 2 = 226.19 mm 2 = 226.19 mm 2 = 339.29 mm 2
460 STAAD.Pro
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided Sagging Moment Of Resistance of End A Mu, as = Hogging Moment Of Resistance of End A Micah = Sagging Moment Of Resistance of End A Mu, bs = Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * ( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck) 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck) 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck) 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_B* fy = 36768130.05 N = 54003057.45 N = 54003057.45 N = 36768130.05 N
Resistance of End A Mob = / b * d * fck) Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam plus the factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 11B.2 - Sway to right
FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT Vur,a = Vur,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] =
Figure 11B.3 - Sway to left
-10137.69104 N 41337.69104 N
Vul,a = Vul,b =
Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] =
53402.14022 N - 22202.14022 N
Design Shear Force

Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) = 11.56 N 53402.14022 N -6.44 N 41337.69104 N
11B.7.2 For Beam No. 3

Section Characteristic Strength of Steel fy Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck Clear Cover Bar Diameter Effective Depth d Eudl w Length L Ast_Top_A Ast_Bot_A Ast_Top_B Ast_Bot_B Calculation of Simple Shear Simple shear from gravity Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 load on span = Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided Sagging Moment Of Resistance of End A Mu,as = Hogging Moment Of Resistance of End A Mu,ah = Sagging Moment Of Resistance of End A Mu,bs = Hogging Moment Of Resistance of End A Mu,bh = 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * ( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck) 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck) 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck) 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_B* fy / b * = 63326721.3 N d * fck) = 32940364.5 N = 32940364.5 N = 48452983 N = 11700N Width b Depth D 300 mm 450 mm 415 N/sq. mm 20 N/sq. mm 25 mm 12 mm 419 mm 6.5 N/sq. mm 3000 mm 226.19 sq. mm 339.29 sq. mm 452.39 sq. mm 226.19 sq. mm
462 STAAD.Pro
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam plus the factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 11B.4 - Sway to right
Vur,a = Vur,b =
Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = Sway to left
-40463.862 N 63863.862 N
Vul,a = Vul,b =
Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] =
42444.3402 N -15144.34 N
Design Shear Force

Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) = -23.81 N 63863.862 N -10.31 N 42444.3402 N
464 STAAD.Pro
11C. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800 1984

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 800 - 1984 General construction in steel - Code of practice. Design of members per IS 800 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
Note: Steel design per the limit state method in IS 800 is also available in the Steel
Design mode in the Graphical User Interface.
11C.1 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection. Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values. Specify whether to perform member selection by optimization.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported. Section 11C.13 describes the specification of steel sections.
11C.2 General Comments

This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of Indian Standard code of practice (IS:800-1984) for structural steel design in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical loading condition and the governing code criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects such as flange buckling and web crippling.
11C. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800 - 1984
11C.3 Allowable Stresses

The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design method as per IS:800 (1984). It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. It would not be possible to describe every aspect of IS:800 in this manual. This section, however, will discuss the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:800 and implemented in STAAD. Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during the discussion of various types of allowable stresses.
11C.3.1 Axial Stress

Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:800 is described below. The permissible stress in axial tension, in MPa on the net effective area of the sections at shall not exceed at = 0.6fy Where: f = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa
y
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members shall not exceed 0.6f nor the permissible stress s calculated based on the following equation (per y ac Clause: 5.1.1): ac = 0.6{( fcc fy )/[( fcc)n +(fy )n ]1/n } Where:
ac
= Permissible stress in axial compression, in Mpa
f = Yield stress of steel, in Mpa

y
cc
= Elastic critical stress in compression = 2 E/2
E = Modulus of elasticity of steel, 2 X 105 Mpa =l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective length to appropriate radius of gyration n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
11C.3.2 Bending Stress

The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is calculated based on the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.1)
466 STAAD.Pro
bt or bc = 0.66 fy Where: f
bt bc
= Bending stress in tension = Bending stress in compression = Yield stress of steel, in MPa
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum strength (z-z axis), the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the effective section shall not exceed the values of maximum permissible bending compressive stress. The maximum permissible bending compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.2)
bc = 0.66
fcbf y (f ) + f n y cb
n
()
1/n
Clause 6.2.3 Where: f

y
= Yield stress of steel, in Mpa
n = A factor assumed as 1.4. f

cb
= Elastic critical stress in bending, calculated by the following formula:
c2 fcb = k 1 X + k 2Y c 1
Where:
X = Y 1+ Y=
26.5(10)
5
1 20 ry D
in MPa
(1 / ry)
k = a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or breadth of flanges 1 between points of effective lateral restraint and depends on y, the ratio of the total area of both flanges at the point of least bending moment to the corresponding area at the point of greatest bending moment between such points of restraint. k = a coefficient to allow for the inequality of flanges, and depends on w, 2 the ratio of the moment of inertia of the compression flange alone to that of the sum of the moment of the flanges each calculated about its own axis parallel to the y-yaxis of the girder, at the point of maximum bending moment. 1 =effective length of compression flange
r = radius of gyration of the section about its axis of minimum y strength (y-y axis) T = mean thickness of the compression flange, is equal to the area of horizontal portion of flange divided by width. D = overall depth of beam c ,c =respectively the lesser and greater distances from the section neutral 1 2 axis to the extreme fibres.
11C.3.3 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 6.4 of IS:800. For shear on the web, the gross section taken into consideration consist of the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear parallel to the flanges, the gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange area.
11C.3.4 Combined Stress

Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are proportioned accordingly to section 7 of IS:800. All members subject to bending and axial compression are required to satisfy the equation of Section 7.1.1.(a) for intermediate points, and equation of Section 7.1.1.(b) for support points. For combined axial tension and bending the equation of Section 7.1.2. is required to be satisfied. Cm coefficients are calculated according to the specifications of Section 7.1.3. information regarding occurrence of sidesway can be provided through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. In the absence of any user provided information, sidesway will be assumed.

In STAAD implementation of IS:800, the user is allowed complete control of the design process through the use of design parameters. Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with IS:800 are listed in Table 7B.1 of this section along with their default values and applicable restrictions. Users should note that when the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 and use in conjunction with this code, allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ), tension (FTY & FTZ), and allowable shear stress (FV) will be printed out in Member Selection and Code Check output in Mpa. When TRACK is set to 2.0, detailed design output will be provided.
468 STAAD.Pro
Table 11C.1-Indian Steel Design IS 800:1984 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description Must be specified as INDIAN Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. BEAM 3.0 0.0 = design only for end moments and those at locations specified by the SECTION command. 1.0 = calculate section forces at twelfth points along the beam, design at each intermediate location and report the critical location where ratio is maximum. CMY CMZ 0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member Cm value in local y & z axes
DFF
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local deflection Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note 1) Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note 1) Maximum allowable depth. Minimum allowable depth. Yield strength of steel.
DJ1
DJ2
End Joint of member
DMAX DMIN FYLD
100.0 cm. 0.0 cm. 250 MPA (36.25 KSI)
Parameter Name KY 1.0
Default Value
Description K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length in local y-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Same as above except in local z-axis (major). Allowable Kl/r for slenderness calculations for compression members. Net section factor for tension members. Used to search for the lightest section for the profile(s) specified for member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. 0.0 = Sidesway in local yaxis. 1.0 = No sidesway
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
180 (Comp. Memb.)
NSF
1.0
PROFILE
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
Same as above except in local z-axis. Allowable Kl/r for slenderness calculations for tension members.
TMAIN
400 (Tension Memb)
470 STAAD.Pro
Default Value 0.0
Description 0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses 1.0 = Print all critical member stresses 2.0 = Print expanded output. If there is deflection check it will also print the governing load case number for deflection check whenever critical condition for design is not DEFLECTION. (see fig.8B.1)
UNF
1.0
Same as above provided as a fraction of actual member length. Unsupported length for calculating allowable bending stress.
UNL
Member Length
11C.4.1 Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.

PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL DJ1 1 ALL DJ2 4 ALL
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local deflections will be measured from original member line. c. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel design.
11C.5 Stability Requirements

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the appropriate maximum values. Section 3.7 of IS:800 summarizes the maximum slenderness ratios for different types of members. In STAAD implementation of IS:800, appropriate maximum slenderness ratio can be provided for each member. If no maximum slenderness ratio is provided, compression members will be checked against a maximum value of 180 and tension members will be checked against a maximum value of 400.
11C.6 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only axial forces. So in design no time is wasted in calculating bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
11C.7 Deflection Check

This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in the CODE CHECK and MEMBER SELECTION processes. The deflection check may be controlled using three parameters which are described in Table 11C.1. Note that deflection is used in addition to other strength and stability related criteria. The local deflection calculation is based on the latest analysis results.
11C.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:800 (1984) requirements. Forces and moments at specified sections of the members are utilized for the code checking calculations. Sections may be specified using the BEAM parameter or the
472 STAAD.Pro
SECTION command. If no sections are specified, the code checking is based on forces and moments at the member ends. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition (applicable IS:800 clause no.), governing load case, location (distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed out. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, that is, the lightest section, which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section selected will be of the same type (I-Section, Channel etc.) as originally specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all types of steel sections listed in Section 11C.12 and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user provided table. Member selection can not be performed on members whose cross sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC. The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table 11C.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each one. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
11C.10 Member Selection By Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The user may start without a specifically designated section. However, the section profile type (BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, ANGLE etc.) must be specified using the ASSIGN command (see Chapter 6). The optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions. An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design iterations. This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be used with caution. Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.
11C.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the result in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows:
MEMBER the member number for which the design is performed TABLE the INDIAN steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. RESULT prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark in front of the member number. CRITICAL COND the section of the IS:800 code which governs the design. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. LOADING provides the load case number which governs the design. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local y-axis and moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX,MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV). When the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0 for all members parameter code values are as shown in the following example.
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( 800) v1.0 IS-
******************************************** |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN CM UNIT | | * |=============================| ===|=== ----------- | |MEMBER 7 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | AX = 85.0 | | * | ST ISWB400 | | --Z AY = 34.4 |
474 STAAD.Pro
|DESIGN CODE * | | | 34.7 | | IS-800 * =============================== ===|=== = 138.8 | | * = 1171.3 | | * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.00 --->| = 4.0 | |************* = 16.6 | | | | 112.1( KN-METR) | |PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES | |IN NEWT MM | NEWT MM| |--------------- + ----------| | KL/R-Y= 74.2 | = 150.0 | | KL/R-Z= 18.1 + = 1.0 | | UNL = 3000.0 | = 139.9 | | C = 400.0 + = 165.0 | | CMY = 0.60 | = 165.0 | | CMZ = 0.40 + = 165.0 | | FYLD = 249.9 | L3 = 95.7 | | NSF = 0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| = 0.0 | | DFF = 0.0 90.5 = 100.0 | | dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE = 17.1 | | (WITH LOAD NO.) | | | | MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR) | | ------------------------| | | | AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z | | | =
AZ SY SZ RY RZ
IN --FA fa FCZ FTZ FCY FTY fbz fby FV fv
| VALUE 112.1 | | LOCATION 0.0 | | LOADING 1 | | |
-23.9 0.0 3
60.6 3.0 1
0.0 0.0 0
0.0 0.0 0
|**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR) *| |* -------------*| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS 7.1.2 BEND C 0.684 1 | | 7.39 T 0.0 -112.1 0.00 | |* *| |**************************************************************************|
11C.12 Indian Steel Table

This is an important feature of the program since the program will read section properties of a steel member directly from the latest ISI steel tables (as published in ISI-800). These properties are stored in memory corresponding to the section designation (e.g., ISMB250, etc.). If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built in to these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members. Almost all ISI steel tables are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of all the types of sections available:
11C.12.1 Rolled Steel Beams (ISJB, ISLB, ISMB and ISHB)

All rolled steel beam sections are available the way they are designated in the ISI handbook (e.g., ISJB225, ISWB400, etc.)
476 STAAD.Pro
20 TO 30 TA ST ISLB325
Note: In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an A on the
end (e.g., ISHB400 A, etc.).
1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A
11C.12.2 Rolled Steel Channels (ISJC, ISLC and ISMC)

All these shapes are available as listed in ISI section handbook. Designation of the channels are per the scheme used by ISI.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST ISMC125 12 TA ST ISLC300
11C.12.3 Double Channels

Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel (e.g., D ISJC125, D ISMC75, etc.).
21 22 24 TA D ISLC225
11C.12.4 Rolled Steel Angles

Both rolled steel equal angles and unequal angles are available for use in the STAAD implementation of ISI steel tables. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure:
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle section. The standard section has local axis system as illustrated in Fig.2.4 of this manual. The standard angle is specified as:
51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6
This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-V axis specified in the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD provides for this convention by accepting the command:
54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6
Hint: RA denotes reverse angle
11C.12.5 Double Angles

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD ISA50X30X5 SP 1.5 23 27 TA SD ISA75X50X6
11C.12.6 Rolled Tees (ISHT, ISST, ISLT and ISJT)

All the rolled tee sections are available for input as they are specified in the ISI handbook. The following example illustrates the designated method.
1 2 5 8 TA ST ISNT100 67 68 TA ST ISST250
11C.12.7 Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)

To designate circular hollow sections from ISI tables, use PIP followed by the numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP 213.2
specifies a 213 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness Circular pipe sections can also be specified by providing the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
478 STAAD.Pro
11C.12.8 Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)

Designation of tubes from the ISI steel table is illustrated below.
For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by any table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5.
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections
specified this way.
11C.12.9 Plate And Angle Girders (With Flange Plates)

All plate and angle grinders (with flange plates) are available as listed in ISI section handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.
A. Plate and angle girder symbol. B. Web plate width in mm. C. Web plate thickness in mm.
D. Flange angle, A X BX t, all in mm. Table 11C.2-Flange angle key Symbol A B C E E. Flange plate width in mm. F. Flange plate thickness in mm. Angle 150X150X18 200X100X15 200X150X18 200X200X18
11C.12.10 Single Joist with Channels and Plates on the Flanges to be Used as Girders
All single joist with channel and plates on the flanges to be used as girders are available as listed in ISI section handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.
A. Joist Designation IW450 = ISWB450 B. Top flange channel designation: 350 = ISMC350 C. Constant (always X). D. Top flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: D = 0 for no plate.

E. Bottom flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is more
efficient.
480 STAAD.Pro
11C.13 Column With Lacings And Battens

For columns with large loads it is desirable to build rolled sections at a distance and interconnect them. The joining of element sections is done by two ways: a. Lacing b. Batten Double channel sections (back-to-back and face-to-face) can be joined either by lacing or by batten plates having riveted or welded connection. Table 11C.3 gives the parameters that are required for Lacing or batten design. These parameters will have to be provided in unit NEW MMS along with parameters defined in Table 11C.1.
Table 11C.3-Parameters used in Indian Lacing or Batten steel member design. Parameter Name CTYPE Default Value Description
Type of joining 1. implies single lacing with riveted connection 2. implies double lacing with riveted connection 3. implies single lacing with welded connection 4. implies double lacing with welded connection 5. implies batten with riveted connection 6. implies batten with welded connection
COG
0.0 mm
Center of gravity of the channel. This parameter is used when member properties are defined through user provided table using GENERAL option. Nominal diameter of rivet
DBL
20 mm
Parameter Name DCFR
Default Value
Description
0.0
Used when member properties are defined through user provided table using GENERAL option. 0. double channel back-to-back. 1. double channel face-to-face.
EDIST
32 mm (Rivetted Connection) 25 mm (Welded Connection)
Edge Distance.
FVB FYB SPA
100 N/mm 2 300 N/mm 2 0.0 mm
Allowable shear stress in rivet Allowable bearing stress in rivet Spacing between double channels. This parameter is used when member properties are defined through user provided table using GENERAL option. Angle of inclination of lacing bars. It should lie between 40 degree and 70 degree. Minimum thickness of weld Allowable welding stress
THETA
50 degree
WMIN WSTR
6 mm 108 N/mm 2
482 STAAD.Pro
11D. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 802

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 802 1995 Use of Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers - Code of Practice. Design of members per IS 802 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
11D.1 General Comments

This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of Indian Standard code of practice (IS:802-1995 Part 1) for structural steel design for overhead transmission line towers in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical loading condition and the governing code criteria.
11D.2 Allowable Stresses

The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design method as per IS:802 (1995). It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. This section discusses the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:802 and implemented in STAAD.
11D.2.1 Axial Stress

Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:802 is described below. The estimated tensile stresses on the net effective sectional area in various members, multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material. Thus, the permissible stress in axial tension, in MPa on the net effective area of the sections at shall not exceed at = Fy Where: F = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa
y
Compressive Stress
The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed the value given by the formulae described below. I. Condition: when (b/t) [ (b/t)lim = 210/Fy ]: i. When KL/r Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2) Fa = Fy {1 - 0.5[(KL/r)/Cc]2 } ii. When KL/r > Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2) Fa = 2 E/(KL/r)2 II. Condition: when (b/t)lim < (b/t) 378/Fy : The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y cr
Fcr = Fy [1.677 - 0.677(b/t)/(b/t)lim] III. Condition: when (b/t) > 378/Fy The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y cr
Fcr = 65,550/(b/t) Where: F = allowable unit stress in compression, Mpa

a
F = minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material, Mpa

y
K = restraint factor, L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and R = appropriate radius of gyration in cm. E = modulus of elasticity of steel in N/mm 2 KL/r = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment of the member, b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and t = thickness of flange in mm.
Note: The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not exceed 25.
11D.3 Stability Requirements

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the appropriate maximum values. Following are the default values used in STAAD:
484 STAAD.Pro
11D.3.1 Compression Member

Table 11D.1-Slenderness ratio limits of compression members Type of Member Slenderness Limit 120
Leg Members, ground wire peak member and lower members of cross arms in compression Other members carrying computed stress Redundant members and those carrying nominal stresses
200
250
Slenderness ratios of compression members are determined as follows: Table 11D.2-Compression slenderness ratio calculation depending on ELA parameter ELA Value 1 Type of Member Calculation of KL/r L/r
Leg sections or joint members bolted at connections in both faces Members with concentric loading at both ends of the unsupported panel with values of L/r up to and including 120 Member with concentric loading at one end and normal eccentricities at the other end of the unsupported panel for value of L/r up to and including 120 Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the unsupported panel for values of L/r up to and including 120 Member unrestrained against rotation at both ends of the unsupported panel for value of L/r from 120 to 200 Members partially restrained against rotation at one end of the unsupported panel for values of L/r over 120 and up to and including 225
L/r
30 + 0.75L/r
60 + 0.5L/r
L/r
28.6 + 0.762L/r
ELA Value 7
Type of Member
Calculation of KL/r 46.2 + 0.615L/r
Members partially restrained against rotation at both ends of the unsupported panel for values of L/r over 120 and up to and including 250
If the value for ELA is given in the input for any particular member is such that condition for L/r ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the usual way of finding slenderness ratio using KL/r formula.
11D.3.2 Tension Members

Slenderness ratio KL/r of a member carrying axial tension only, shall not exceed 400.
11D.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement

As per Clause7.1 of IS: 802-1995 minimum thickness of different tower members shall be as follows: Members Minimum Thickness (mm) Galvanized Leg Members, ground wire peak member and lower members of cross arms in compression Other members 5 Painted 6
11D.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:802 (1995) requirements. Axial forces at two ends of the members are utilized for the code checking calculations. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing forces are also printed out. Using TRACK 9 option calculation steps are also printed. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
11D.5.1 Design Steps

The following are the steps used by the program in member design:
486 STAAD.Pro
1. Thickness of the member (maximum of web and flange thicknesses) is checked against minimum allowable thickness, depending upon whether the member is painted or galvanized. 2. If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program determines whether the member is under compression or tension for the load case under consideration. Depending upon whether the member is under tension or compression the slenderness ratio of the member is calculated. This calculated ratio is checked against allowable slenderness ratio. 3. If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is performed. Allowable axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is under tension and there is no user defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is calculated by the program itself (See "Calculation of Net Section Factor" on page 493). Actual axial stress in the member is calculated. The ratio for actual stress to allowable stress, if less than 1.0 or user defined value, the member has passed the check. 4. Number of bolts required for the critical load case is calculated.
11D.6 Member Selection

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, that is, the lightest section, which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section selected will be of the same type (either angle or channel) as originally specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all angle or channel sections and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user provided table. The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table 9C.3. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each one. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
11D.7 Member Selection by Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions. An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design iterations. This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be used with caution. Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.
11D.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

An example of a TRACK2.0 output for a compression member is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( 802) v1.0 IS-
******************************************** |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN CM UNIT | | * |=============================| ==| |== ----------- | |MEMBER 8 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX = 17.0 | | * | ST ISA125x95x8 | | | --Z AY = 6.7 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ = 5.1 | | IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY = 38.8 | | * SZ = 16.6 | | * |<---LENGTH (ME= 1.80 --->| RY = 4.4 | |************* RZ = 2.0 | | | | | |PARAMETER BOLTING STRESSES | |IN NEWT MM IN NEWT MM| |--------------------------------------| | L/R-Y = 40.5 BOLT DIA = 12 MM FA = 188.4 | | L/R-Z = 87.9 BOLT CAP = 24.66 KN fa = 80.7 | | KL/R = 87.9 # BOLT = 6 FYB = 436.0 | | FYLD = 250.0 FVB = 218.0 | | GALVA = 0.0 | | C = 1.0 | | LEG = 1.0 |
488 STAAD.Pro
| ELA | NSF |
= | = | |
1.0 1.0
|**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR) *| |* -------------*| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS COMPRESSION 0.428 1 | | 137.13 C 0.0 0.0 0.00 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Using TRACK 9.0 also adds the following set of calculation details:
DETAILS OF CALCULATION ---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS --------------------------TYPE : PAINTED MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM ACTUAL THICKNESS : 8.0 MM RESULT : PASS CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO --------------------------VALUE OF L/r : 87.94 EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : L/r ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 87.94 ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00 RESULT : PASS CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
--------------------------------CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.53 b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS : 125.0 - 8.0 9.0 : 108.0 MM (b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28 (b/t)cal : 13.50 (b/t)cal > (b/t)lim (b/t)lim (modified) : 378/sqrt(fy) : 23.91 (b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim (modified) AND KL/r <= Cc Fcr : (1.677 - (0.677*(b/t)cal/(b/t)lim))*fy : 247.18 MPA ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*Fcr : 188.41 MPA CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS -------------------------------LOAD NO. : 1 DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 137131.16 N ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS : 137131.16 / 1700.0 : 80.67 MPA RESULT : PASS EXAMPLE PROBLEM NO.1 -PAGE NO. 24 BOLTING ------BOLT DIA : 12 MM SHEARING CAP : 24.66 KN BEARING CAP : 41.86 KN BOLT CAP : 24.66 KN NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 6 ************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************

specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 11D.3-Indian Steel Design IS 802 Parameters Parameter Name CNSF Default Value Description
0.0
This parameter indicates whether user has defined the net section factor or the program will calculate it. 0. Use specified NSF value 1. Net section factor will be calculated.
490 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DANGLE
Default Value
Description
0.0
This parameter indicates how the pair of angles are connected to each other. This is required to find whether the angle is in single or double shear and the net section factor. 0. Double angle placed back-toback and connected to each side of a gusset plate 1. Pair of angle placed back-toback connected by only one leg of each angle to the same side of a gusset plate
DBL
12 mm
Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts and net section factor. Maximum allowable depth. Minimum allowable depth. This parameter indicates what type of end conditions is to be used. Refer Section 9C.3. Allowable shear stress in bolt Allowable bearing stress in bolt Yield Strength of steel Thickness of gusset plate. Minimum of the thicknesses of the gusset plate and the leg is used for calculation of the capacity of bolt in bearing
DMAX DMIN ELA
100.0 cm. 0.0 cm. 1.0
FVB FYB FYLD GUSSET
218 MPA 436 MPA 250 MPA 5 mm
KY
1.0
K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis.
KZ
1.0
Parameter Name LEG
Default Value
Description
1.0
This parameter is meant for plain angles. 0. The angle is connected by shorter leg 1. The angle is connected by longer leg
LY
Member Length Member Length 1.0
Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Type of member to find allowable Kl/r for slenderness calculations for members. 1. Leg, Ground wire peak and lower members of cross arms in compression (KL/r = 120) 2. Members carrying computed stress (KL/r = 200) 3. Redundant members and members carrying nominal stresses (KL/r = 250) 4. Tension members (KL/r = 400) 10. Do not perform KL/r check Any value greater than 10.0 indicates user defined allowable KL/r ratio. For this case KY and KZ values are must to find actual KL/r ratio of the member.
LZ
MAIN
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members
492 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name NHL
Default Value
Description
0.0 mm
Deduction for holes. Default value is one bolt width plus 1.5 mm. If the area of holes cut by any straight, diagonal or zigzag line across the member is different from the default value, this parameter is to be defined.
TRACK
0.0
Level of output detail: 0. Suppress critical member stresses 1. Print all critical member stresses 2. Print expanded output. 9. Print design calculations along with expanded output (not available in GUI input).
11D.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor

The procedure for calculating the net section factor for an angle section is as follows:
l
For a channel section, net section factor is taken to be 1.0. For an angle section, it is the ratio of the net effective area, A , to the gross area, net where: a. Single angle connected by only one leg Anet = A1 + A2 K1 Where: A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg
1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg

2
K1 = 3A1 /(3A1 +A2 ) The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg 0.5x thickness of leg) b. Pair of angles placed back-to-back connected by only one leg of each angle to the same side of a gusset plate
Anet = A1 + A2 K1 Where: A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg

1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg

2
K1 = 5A1 /(5A1 +A2 ) The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg 0.5x thickness of leg) c. Double angles placed back-to-back and connected to each side of a gusset plate A
net
= gross area minus the deduction for holes
11D.11 Example Problem No. 28

A transmission line tower is subjected to different loading conditions. Design some members as per IS-802 and show detailed calculation steps for the critical loading condition.
494 STAAD.Pro
11D.11.1 Given
End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the unsupported panel for values of L/r up to and including 120 Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm Net Section Factor is to be calculated.
11D.11.2 STAADInput File

This input file is included with the program as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Ind\Examp28.std.
STAAD TRUSS INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 3 0 3; 2 1.2 27 1.2; 3 2.8 3 2.8; 4 2.6 6 2.6; 5 2.4 9 2.4; 6 2.2 12 2.2; 7 2 15 2; 8 1.8 18 1.8; 9 1.6 21 1.6; 10 1.4 24 1.4; 11 -3 0 3; 12 -1.2 27 1.2; 13 -2.8 3 2.8; 14 -2.6 6 2.6; 15 -2.4 9 2.4; 16 -2.2 12 2.2; 17 -2 15 2; 18 -1.8 18 1.8; 19 -1.6 21 1.6; 20 1.4 24 1.4; 21 3 0 -3; 22 1.2 27 -1.2; 23 2.8 3 -2.8; 24 2.6 6 -2.6; 25 2.4 9 -2.4; 26 2.2 12 -2.2; 27 2 15 -2; 28 1.8 18 -1.8; 29 1.6 21 -1.6; 30 1.4 24 -1.4; 31 -3 0 -3; 32 -1.2 27 -1.2; 33 -2.8 3 -2.8; 34 -2.6 6 -2.6; 35 2.4 9 -2.4; 36 -2.2 12 -2.2; 37 -2 15 -2; 38 -1.8 18 -1.8; 39 -1.6 21 -1.6; 40 -1.4 24 -1.4; 41 1.2 30 1.2; 42 -1.2 30 1.2; 43 1.2 30 -1.2; 44 -1.2 30 -1.2; 45 4.2 27 1.2; 46 7.2 27 1.2; 47 4.2 30 1.2; 48 4.2 27 -1.2; 49 7.2 27 -1.2; 50 4.2 30 -1.2; 51 -4.2 27 1.2; 52 -7.2 27 1.2; 53 -4.2 30 1.2; 54 -4.2 27 -1.2; 55 -7.2 27 -1.2; 56 -4.2 30 -1.2; 57 1.2 33 1.2; 58 -1.2 33 1.2; 59 1.2 33 -1.2; 60 -1.2 33 -1.2; 61 0 35 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3; 2 3 4; 3 4 5; 4 5 6; 5 6 7; 6 7 8; 7 8 9; 8 9 10; 9 10 2; 10 11 13; 11 13 14; 12 14 15; 13 15 16; 14 16 17; 15 17 18; 16 18 19; 17 19 20; 18 20 12; 19 13 3; 20 14 4; 21 15 5; 22 16 6; 23 17 7; 24 18 8; 25 19 9; 26 20 10;
27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34 15 6; 35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42 19 10; 43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25 26; 50 26 27; 51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5 25; 58 6 26; 59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3; 66 3 24; 67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74 7 28; 75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30; 82 31 33; 83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39 40; 90 40 32; 91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29 39; 98 30 40; 99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35; 105 25 34; 106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37; 112 28 39; 113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13; 119 34 14; 120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20; 126 32 12; 127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14; 133 35 16; 134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19; 140 39 18; 141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42; 147 2 41; 148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41; 154 42 2; 155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42; 161 41 47; 162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50; 168 50 48; 169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49; 175 45 48; 176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47; 182 22 45; 183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53; 189 53 51; 190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54; 196 54 32; 197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54; 203 42 56;
496 STAAD.Pro
204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51; 210 12 54; 211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58; 217 41 57; 218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58; 224 42 60; 225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59; 231 60 57; 232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240 15 25; 241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247 39 9; 248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41; 254 43 42; 255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61; MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN 1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD ISA200X150X18 SP 0.01 19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144 155 156 159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10 27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228 231 232 251 252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6 CONSTANTS E 2.05E+008 ALL POISSON 0.3 ALL DENSITY 76.8195 ALL ALPHA 6.5E-006 ALL SUPPORTS 1 11 21 31 FIXED UNIT METER KG LOAD 1 VERT SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 732 46 49 52 55 FX 153 61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160 46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968 2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968 LOAD 2 GWBC SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148 61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342 46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906 2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953 LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 549 46 49 52 55 FX 1148 61 FX 960 FY -762 46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906 52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293 2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953 LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC SELFWEIGHT Y -1 JOINT LOAD 61 FX 549 46 49 52 55 FX 1148 61 FX 960 FY -762 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906 46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293 2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953 PERFORM ANALYSIS UNIT NEW MMS PARAMETER CODE IS802 LY 2800 MEMB 28 LZ 2800 MEMB 28 MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1 ELA 4 MEMB 1 CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28 DBL 16 ALL GUSSET 8 ALL TRACK 9 ALL CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28 FINISH
11D.11.3 Output
A portion of the output for the TRACK9.0 member code check follows:
498 STAAD.Pro
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( v1.0
IS-802)
******************************************** |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN CM UNIT | | * |=============================| ==||== ----------- | |MEMBER 1 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | || AX = 120.0 | | * | LD ISA200X150X18 | || --Z AY = 48.0 | |DESIGN CODE * | | || AZ = 36.0 | | IS-802 * |-----------------------------| || SY = 297.3 | | * SZ = 350.6 | | * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.01 --->| RY = 6.2 | |************* RZ = 6.3 | | | | | |PARAMETER BOLTING STRESSES | |IN NEWT MM IN NEWT MM| |--------------------------------------| | L/R-Y = 48.6 BOLT DIA = 16 MM FA = 195.1 | | L/R-Z = 47.7 BOLT CAP = 55.81 KN fa = 145.2 | | KL/R = 84.3 # BOLT = 32 FYB = 436.0 | | FYLD = 250.0 FVB = 218.0 | | GALVA = 0.0 | | C = 1.0 | | LEG = 1.0 | | ELA = 4.0 | | NSF = 1.0 |
| | |**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR) *| |* -------------*| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS COMPRESSION 0.744 1 | | 1742.26 C 0.0 0.0 0.00 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| STAAD TRUSS -PAGE NO. 5 DETAILS OF CALCULATION ---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS --------------------------TYPE : PAINTED MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM ACTUAL THICKNESS : 18.0 MM RESULT : PASS CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO --------------------------VALUE OF L/r : 48.63 EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 84.31 ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00 RESULT : PASS CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS --------------------------------CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.24 b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
500 STAAD.Pro
: 200.0 - 18.0 - 15.0 : 167.0 MM (b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28 (b/t)cal : 9.28 (b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy : 195.07 MPA CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS -------------------------------LOAD NO. : 1 DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 1742259.75 N ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS :1742259.75 / 12000.0 : 145.19 MPA RESULT : PASS STAAD TRUSS -PAGE NO. 6 BOLTING ------BOLT DIA : 16 MM SHEARING CAP : 87.66 KN BEARING CAP : 55.81 KN BOLT CAP : 55.81 KN NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 32 STAAD TRUSS -PAGE NO. 7 STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( IS-802) v1.0 ******************************************** |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN CM UNIT | | * |=============================| ==| |== ----------- | |MEMBER 28 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX = 29.2 | | * | ST ISA150X150X10 | | | --Z AY = 10.0 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ = 10.0 | | IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY = 95.7 | | * SZ = 44.8 | | * |<---LENGTH (ME= 6.53 --->| RY = 5.9 | |************* RZ = 3.0 | | |
| | |PARAMETER STRESSES | |IN NEWT MM NEWT MM| |-------------------------| | L/R-Y = 47.5 = 249.9 | | L/R-Z = 94.0 = 48.5 | | KL/R = 94.0 FYB = 436.0 | | FYLD = 250.0 FVB = 218.0 | | GALVA = 0.0 | | C = 1.0 | | LEG = 1.0 | | ELA = 1.0 | | NSF = 0.8 | | | BOLTING IN ------------BOLT DIA = 16 MM BOLT CAP = # BOLT = 43.83 KN 3 -FA fa
|**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR) *| |* -------------*| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS TENSION 0.194 3 | | 112.86 T 0.0 0.0 6.53 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | |
502 STAAD.Pro
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------| STAAD TRUSS -PAGE NO. 8 DETAILS OF CALCULATION ---------------------CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS --------------------------TYPE : PAINTED MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM ACTUAL THICKNESS : 10.0 MM RESULT : PASS CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO --------------------------VALUE OF L/r : 93.96 EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : K*L/r ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 93.96 ALLOWABLE KL/r : 400.00 RESULT : PASS CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS --------------------------------CRITICAL CONDITION : TENSION ALLOWABLE AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 249.94 MPA CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS -------------------------------LOAD NO. : 3 DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 112855.91 N ACTUAL AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 112855.91 / ( 2920.0*0.797 ) : 48.51 MPA RESULT : PASS BOLTING ------BOLT DIA : 16 MM SHEARING CAP : 43.83 KN BEARING CAP : 55.81 KN BOLT CAP : 43.83 KN NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 3 STAAD TRUSS -PAGE NO. 9 ************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
504 STAAD.Pro
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 801 1975 Code of practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural members in general building construction, including revisions dated May, 1988. The program allows design of single (noncomposite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening effects has been included as an option. Design of members per IS 801 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
11E.1 Cross-Sectional Properties

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables from IS:811-1987 (Specification for cold formed light gauge structural steel sections). The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:
l
Channel with Lips Channel without Lips Angle without Lips Z with Lips Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file. The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
11E.2 Design Procedure

The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clause 5.2.1.1. Crosssectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with
l
Clause 6.6.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression Clause 5.2.3, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression Clause 5.2.4, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:
11E.2.1 Members in tension

Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.1
11E.2.2 Members in bending and shear

l l l
Clause 6.4.1 Shear stress in webs, Clause 6.4.2 Bending stress in webs Clause 6.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
11E.2.3 Members in compression

l l l
Clause 6.2 Compression on flat unstiffened element, Clause 6.6.1.1 Shapes not subject to torsional-flexural buckling, Clause 6.6.1.2 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes of open cross section or intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q = 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling, Clause 6.6.1.3 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes or intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q < 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling, Clause 6.8 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
11E.2.4 Members in compression and bending

l l l
All clauses for members in compression Clause 6.3 Laterally Unsupported Members, Clause 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected to torsional or torsionalflexural buckling Clause 6.7.2. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric components of built-up shapes having Q=1.0 which may be subjected to torsionalflexural buckling Clause 6.7.3. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric components of built-up shapes having Q<1.0 which may be subjected to torsionalflexural buckling.
11E.3 Code Checking and Member Selection

506 STAAD.Pro
11E.3.1 Code Checking

The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with IS:801-1975. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
11E.3.2 Member Selection

The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (IS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.

Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be specified. The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and selection of design options.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 11E.1-Indian cold formed steel design parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as IS801 Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
1.0 BEAM
When this parameter is set to 0. the 13 location check is not conducted, and instead, checking is done only at the locations specified by the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for details. For TRUSS members only start and end locations are designed. 1. the adequacy of the member is determined by checking a total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length of the member.
CMY
0.85
Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending . See IS:801-1975, 6.7. Used y for Combined axial load and bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending . See IS:801-1975, 6.7. Used z for Combined axial load and bending design. Values range from 0.4 to 1.0. Specifies whether the cold work of forming strengthening effect should be included in resistance computation. See IS:801-1975, 6.1.1 0. effect should not be included 1. effect should be included
CMZ
1.0
CWY
0.85
FLX
Specifies whether torsional-flexural buckling restraint is provided or is not necessary for the member. See IS:8011975, 6.6.1 0. Section not subject to torsional flexural buckling 1. Section subject to torsional flexural buckling
508 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name FU
Default Value
Description
450 MPa (4588.72 kg/cm 2)
Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units.
FYLD
353.04 MPa (3600.0 kg/cm 2)
Yield strength of steel in current units.
KX
1.0
Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a fraction and is unitless. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall buckling about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression.
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
Parameter Name LX
Default Value
Description
Member length
Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length for overall buckling in the local Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. Effective length for overall buckling in the local Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a member completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the capacity in axial compression. 0 Check slenderness ratio 0 Do not check slenderness ratio
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
MAIN
NSF DMAX
1.0 2540.0 cm.
Net section factor for tension members Maximum allowable depth, in the current units. Permissible ratio of actual to allowable stresses Spacing of shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs, in current units.
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
Member Length
510 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
This parameter is used to control the level of detail in which the design output is reported in the output file. The allowable values are: 0. Prints only the member number, section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL status. 1. Prints the design summary in addition to that printed by TRACK 0 2. Prints member and material properties in addition to that printed by TRACK 1.
TSA
Specifies whether webs of flexural members are adequately stiffened to satisfy the requirements of IS:801-1975, 5.2.4. 0. Do not comply with 5.2.4 1. Comply with 5.2.4
512 STAAD.Pro
11F. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800:2007

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 800 - 2007 General construction in steel - Code of practice. Design of members per IS 800 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
11F.1 General Comments

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual design forces with the capacities as defined by the Indian Standard Code. The IS 800: 2007 Code is used as the basis of this design. A brief description of some of the major capacities is described herein. The following commands should be used to initiate design per Limit State Method of this code: PARAMETER n CODE IS800 LSD The following commands should be used to initiate design per Working Stress Method of this code: PARAMETER n CODEIS800 WSD
Note: STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher are required for design
per WSD. Where: n = optional integer (i.e., - 1, 2) which signifies the numerical order of parameter command block (if multiple blocks are specified).
11F.2 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks. 1. Slenderness 2. Section Classification 3. Tension 4. Compression 5. Shear
6. Bending 7. Combined Interaction Check All of the design check criteria are described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file reports the maximum utilization ratio from all the above mentioned checks.
11F.2.1 Slenderness
As per Section 3.8 Table 3, the slenderness ratio (KL/r) of compression members shall not exceed 180, and the slenderness ratio (L/r) of tension members shall not exceed 400. You can edit the default values through MAIN and TMAIN parameters, as defined in Table 11F.1.
11F.2.2 Section Classification

The IS 800: 2007 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as Plastic, Compact, Semi-Compact, or Slender element sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics. This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section as well as nature of the load applied to the member. The design procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the standard shapes and design the section for the critical load case accordingly. The Section Classification is done as per section 3.7 of IS 800:2007 and Table B2, for Outstanding and Internal Elements of a section. For the criteria for being included in those classes, refer to section 3.7.2-(a) (d) of the code.
Slender Sections
STAAD.Pro is capable of designing I-Sections with slender webs for IS 800:2007.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher.
The IS:800-2007 code does not provide any clear guidelines about what method should be adopted for the design of slender section. The "Flange Only" methodology is used where it is assumed that flexure is taken by the flanges alone and the web will resist shear with adequate shear buckling resistance. This method requires that the flanges be non-slender elements (i.e., on the web is a slender element) to qualify for a valid section for design. If any of the flange elements become slender, the design will not be performed and a warning message is displayed in the output.
514 STAAD.Pro
11F.2.3 Tension
Limit State Method
The criteria governing the capacity of Tension members are based on:
l
Design Strength due to Yielding in Gross Section Design Strength due to Rupture of Critical Section Design Strength due to Block Shear
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these three limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member, and the corresponding check is done as per section 6.2 of the code. The Design strength, involving rupture at the section with the net effective area, is evaluated as per section 6.3 of the code. Here, the number of bolts in the connection may be specified through the use of the design parameter ALPHA. The Design strength, involving block shear at an end connection, is evaluated as per section 6.4 of the code. This criteria is made optional by the parameter DBS. If the value of DBS is specified as 1, additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to the program for that member. The Net Section Area may be specified through the use of the parameter NSF.
Working Stress Method

The criteria governing the allowable stress from tension in members are based on Section 11.2.1 of the code:
l
Yielding of Gross Section - to prevent excessive elongation of the member due to material yielding. Rupture of Net Section - to prevent rupture of the net effective section area. The number of bolts in the connection may be specified through the use of the design parameter ALPHA. The code parameter, , is taken as 1.25 per Table 5, Clause 5.4.1 of the M1 code. Block Shear to prevent block shearing at the end connection. This check is made option through use of the DBS parameter. Additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to the program for any member which is to be checked for block shear. The code parameters,, and , are taken as 1.10 and 1.25, respectively, M0 M1 per Table 5, Clause 5.4.1 of the code.
Note: Block shear is not checked by default.
These criteria are dependant on the steel material yield stress parameter, FYLD , and ultimate tensile strength parameter, FU.
11F.2.4 Compression
The design capacity of the section against Compressive Force, the guiding phenomenon is the flexural buckling.
Limit State Method

The buckling strength of the member is affected by residual stress, initial bow and accidental eccentricities of load. To account for all these factors, the strength of the members subjected to axial compression is defined by buckling class a, b, c or d as per clause 7.1.2.2 and Table 7 of IS 800:2007. Imperfection factor, obtained from buckling class, and Eulers Buckling Stress ultimately govern compressive force capacity of the section as per clause 7.1.2 of IS 800:2007.

The actual compressive stress is given by: fc = FX/Ae Where: A = The effective section area as per Clause 7.3.2 of the code. This is equal to e the gross cross sectional area, AX, for any non-slender (plastic, compact, or semi-compact) section class. In the case of slender sections, this is limited to value of Ae as described below. The permissive compressive stress is calculated by first determining the Buckling Class of the section per Table 10 of the code and & based on Table 7.
YY ZZ
Fac = 0.6Fcd Where: F

cd
= the minimum of the values of Fcd calculated for the local Y and Z axis.
Fcd = (FYLD/mo )/ [ + (2 + 2 ] = the non-dimensional slenderness factor is evaluated for each local Y and Z axis. = (FYLD/Fcc)1/2 = 0.5[ 1 + a( - 0.2) + 2 ] F
cc
= the Euler Buckling Stress.
Fcc = 2 E/(Kl/r)2
516 STAAD.Pro
K = the effective length factor for bending about either the local Y or Z axis, as provided in the KY and KZ parameters, respectively. r = radius of gyration about the local Y or Z axis for the section. FYLD = The yield strength of steel specified in the FYLDparameter.
Slender Sections
For member with slender section under axial compression, design compressive strength should be calculated on area ignoring depth thickness ratio of web in excess of the class 3 (semicompact) limit. Refer to clause 7.3.2 and Table 2 of IS 800:2007, (corresponding to Internal Element of Compression Flange) Ae= Ag - (d/tw - 42) tw2 Where: A = Effective area of section.
e
A = Gross area of section.

g
d = Depth of web. t = thickness of web.

w
11F.2.5 Shear
The design capacities of the section against Shear Force in major- and minor-axis directions are evaluated as per section 8.4 of the code, taking care of the following phenomena:
l
Nominal Plastic Shear Resistance Resistance to Shear Buckling
Shear area of the sections are calculated as per sec. 8.4.1.1. Nominal plastic shear resistance is calculated as per sec. 8.4.1. Among shear buckling design methods, Simple post-critical method is adopted as per sec. 8.4.2.2(a).
Working Stress Design

The actual shear stress is determined about the major and minor axes, respectively: bY = FY / AY bZ = FZ / AZ The permissible shear stress is determined as:
a. When subjected to pure shear: ab = 0.40 FYLD b. When subjected to shear buckling: ab = 0.70 Vn Av Where: V = Nominal Shear Strength as per Clause 8.4.2.2.(a)
n
Vn = Vcr = b Av A = AY or AZ, whichever is appropriate, with reference to Clause 8.4.1.1.

v
Shear buckling must be checked when (d/ tw) > 67 w for webs without stiffener or (d/tw) > 67 w (Kv /5.35) for webs with stiffeners. d = Clear Depth of Web between Flanges. t = Thickness of Web.
w
FYLD = Yield Strength of Web.

w v
= ( 250 / FYLD )
K = Shear Buckling Coefficient: = 5.35, when transverse stiffeners are provided only at supports. = 4.0 + 5.35 / (c/d)2 for (c/d) < 1.0 = 5.35 + 4.0 / (c/d)2 for (c/d) 1.0 c = Spacing of Transverse Stiffeners = Poissons Ratio = Shear Stress corresponding to Web-buckling:
b
= FYLD / 3, when, w 0.8 = ( 1 0.8 (w - 0.8) ) (FYLD / 3) when, 0.8 < w < 1.2 = FYLD / (3 w2 ) when, w 1.2
cr,e
= The Elastic Critical Shear Stress of the Web
cr,e = (Kv 2 E) / (12 (1 2 ) (d/tw)2 ) = Non-dimensional Web Slenderness Ratio for Shear Buckling Stress.
w
w = [FYLD / (3 cr,e)]1/2
518 STAAD.Pro
Slender Sections
Slender sections should be verified against shear buckling resistance if d/tw > 67 for web without stiffeners or if it exceeds 67 (Kv 5.35) for a web with stiffeners. Design methods for resistance to shear buckling are described in clause 8.4.2.2 of IS:800-2007 code. Vn = Vcr Where: V = shear force corresponding to web buckling
cr
= Av b = shear stress corresponding to web buckling, determined as follows:

b
i. When w 0.8 b = fyw3 ii. When 0.8 < w < 1.2 b = [1 - 0.8(w - 0.8) ](fyw3) iii. When w 1.2 b = fyw((3 w2 ) ) w = non-dimensional web slenderness ratio or shear buckling stress, given by: w= [ fyw(3 cr,e )]1/2
cr,e
= elastic critical shear stress of the web = (kv 2 E)/[12(1 - 2 ) (dtw)2 ]
= Poissons ratio and K =

v
l l l
5.35 when transverse stiffeners are provided only at supports 4.0 + 5.35/(c/d)2 for c/d < 1.0 5.35 + 4.0/(c/d)2 for c/d 1.0
c = spacing of transverse stiffeners d = depth of the web
11F.2.6 Bending
The design bending moment capacity of a section is primarily dependent on whether the member is laterally supported or unsupported. You can control the lateral support condition of the member by the use of LAT parameter.
If the member is laterally supported, then the design strength is calculated as per the provisions of the section 8.2.1 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
l
Whether section with webs susceptible to shear buckling before yielding Shear Force to Design Shear Strength Ratio Section Classification
If the member is laterally unsupported, then the design strength is calculated as per the provisions of the section 8.2.2 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
l
Lateral Torsional Buckling Section Classification
Working Stress Design

Actual bending stress values are given by, about major (Z) and minor (Y) axes, respectively: fbcz = Mz/Zecz fbtz = Mz/Zetz fbcy = My /Zecy fbty = My /Zety The permissible bending stress is given as follows: a. For laterally supported beams: Fabc = Fabt = 0.66FYLD for Plastic or Compact sections Fabc = Fabt = 0.60FYLD for Semi-compact sections b. For laterally unsupported beams: i. About the major axis: fabcz = 0.60Md /Zecz fabtz = 0.60Md /Zetz Where: M = Design Bending Strength as per Clause 8.2.2
d
Md = b Zpz fbd fbd = LT FYLD / mo Z Z

ez pz
= Elastic Section Modulus of the Section. = Plastic Section Modulus of the Section.
520 STAAD.Pro
= 0.21 for Rolled Steel Section and 0.49 for Welded Steel LT Section = 1.0 for Plastic and Compact Section or Zez/Zpz for Semib Compact Section.
LT
= Non-dimensional slenderness ratio
LT = (b Zpz FYLD / Mcr)1/2 (1.2 Zez FYLD / Mcr )1/2 LT = 0.5 ( 1 + LT ( LT 0.2 ) + LT2 ) = The Bending Stress Reduction Factor to account for Lateral LT Torsional Buckling.
LTZ =
1
2 2 LTZ + LTZ LTZ
Z = Elastic Section Modulus of the section about Major Axis for ecz the compression side. Z = Elastic Section Modulus of the section about Major Axis for etz the tension side.
M cr =
2EI y
2 L LT
GI t +
2EI w L LT
2
Iy = Moment of inertia about the minor axis. L = Effective length for lateral torsional buckling as determined LT using either the KX or LX parameters. It = Torsional constant of the section. It = Warping constant of the section. G = Shear modulus of the material. ii. About the minor axis, the permissible bending stress is calculated as for a laterally supported section.
Slender Sections
For member with slender section subjected to bending, moment is taken by flanges alone. Design bending strength should be calculated with effective elastic modulus disregarding the contribution of web of the section. Zez = 2[Bf tf3 /12 + (Bf tf) (D/2 - tf/2)2 )] (0.5 D) Zey = 2(Bf tf3 /12) (0.5 Bf) Where: Z
ez
= Elastic Section modulus about major principal axis.
ey f f
= Elastic Section modulus about minor principal axis.
B = Width of flange. T = thickness of flange. D = Overall depth of section. The Moment Capacity will be Md = Ze fy /m0 for Laterally Supported condition. The Moment Capacity will be Md = Ze fbd /m0 for Laterally Un-Supported condition. Where, f is defined in clause 8.2.2 of IS:800-2007 (described in previous Working Stress bd Design section).
Note: Slender section can only attain elastic moment capacity and cannot reach to plastic
moment capacity.
11F.2.7 Combined Interaction Check

Members subjected to various forces axial, shear, moment, torsion - are checked against combined interaction check.
Limit State Method

This interaction check is done taking care of two aspects:
l
Section Strength Overall Member Strength
Section Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.1 of the code. Overall Member Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.2, taking care of the design parameters PSI, CMX, CMY and CMZ.

The following interactions are considered: a. Combined Bending and Shear No reduction in allowable stresses for the interaction of bending and shear is considered. b. Combined Axial Compression and Bending The following formulas are intended to require member stability: fc/facy + 0.6Ky (Cmy fbcy /fabcy ) +KLTfbcz/fabcz 1.0 fc/facz + 0.6Ky (Cmy fbcy /fabcy ) +Kzfbcz/fabcz 1.0 fc/(0.6fy ) + fbcy /fabcy +fbcz/fabcz 1.0
522 STAAD.Pro
Where: f = Actual axial compressive stress.

c
f , f = Allowable compressive stress, governed by buckling, about the acy acz local Y and Z axis, respectively. f , f = Actual bending compressive stress about minor and major axes, bcy bcz respectively. f ,f = Allowable bending compressive stress about minor and major abcy abcz axes, respectively. Ky = 1 +(y - 0.2)ny 1 +0.8ny Kz = 1 +(z - 0.2)nz 1 +0.8nz KLT = 1 - 0.1LTny /(CmLT - 0.25) 0.1ny /(CmLT - 0.25) c. Combined Axial Tension and Bending The following formulas are intended to require member stability: ft/fat + fbty /fabty +fbtz/fabtz 1.0 Where: f = Actual axial tensile stress.
t
f = Allowable axial tensile stress.

at
f , f = Actual bending tensile stress about minor and major axes, bty btz respectively. f ,f = Allowable bending tensile stress about minor and major axes, abty abtz respectively.
11F.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel Section Library of STAAD may be used (namely: I-shaped section, Channel, Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, or Double Channel section). Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General and Prismatic member types. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
11F.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table.
Table 11F.1-Indian Steel Design IS 800:2007 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as IS800 LSD Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
ALPHA
0.8
A Factor, based on the endconnection type, controlling the Rupture Strength of the Net Section, as per Section 6.3.3: 0.6 = For one or two bolts 0.7 = For three bolts 0.8 = For four or more bolts
ATG
None (Mandatory for Block Shear check)
Minimum Gross Area in Tension from the bolt hole to the toe of the angle, end bolt line, perpendicular to the line of the force. This parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as per Section 6.4.1).
ATN
None (Mandatory for Block Shear check)
Minimum Net Area in Tension from the bolt hole to the toe of the angle, end bolt line, perpendicular to the line of the force. This parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as per Section 6.4.1).
AVG
None (Mandatory for Block Shear check) None (Mandatory for Block Shear check)
Minimum Gross Area in shear along bolt line parallel to external force. This parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as per Section 6.4.1). Minimum Net Area in shear along bolt line parallel to external force. This parameter is applicable only when DBS = 1.0 (as per Section 6.4.1).
AVN
524 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name BEAM
Default Value
Description
1.0
0.0 = design at ends and those locations specified by the SECTIONcommand. 1.0 = design at ends and at every 1/12th point along member length (default). 0 = Minimum detail 1 = Intermediate detail level 2 = Maximum detail
CAN
0.0
Beam Type, as per section 8.2.1.2: 0 = non-cantilever beams for bending check and deflection check 1 = cantilever beam
CMX
0.9
Equivalent uniform moment factor for Lateral Torsional Buckling(as per Table 18, section 9.3.2.2) Cm value in local Y & Z axes, as per Section 9.3.2.2. Check for Design against Block Shear: 0 = Design against Block Shear will not be performed 1 = Design against Block Shear will be performed If DBS = 1.0, Non-Zero Positive values of AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to calculate Block Shear Strength, Tdb.
CMY CMZ DBS
0.9
0.0
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member 1000 in.
"Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection.
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length". Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length". Maximum allowable depth.
DJ2
DMAX
Parameter Name DMIN FU
Default Value
Description
0.0 in. 420 MPA
Minimum allowable depth. Ultimate Tensile Strength of Steel in current units. Yield Strength of Steel in current units. Effective Length Factor for Lateral Torsional Buckling (as per Table-15, Section 8.3.1) K value in local Y-axis. Usually, the Minor Axis. K value in local Z-axis. Usually, the Major Axis. Specifies lateral support of beam, as per Section 8.2.1 and 8.2.2, respectively: 0 = Beam is laterally unsupported 1 = Beam is laterally supported
FYLD
250 MPA
KX
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LAT
0.0
LST
Defines the number of longitudinal stiffeners used: 0 = No longitudinal stiffener 1 = Longitudinal stiffener is provided at 0.2D of web from the compression flange 2 = Longitudinal stiffeners are provided at 0.2D and 0.5D of the web from the compression flange
LX
Member Length
Effective Length for Lateral Torsional Buckling (as per Table-15, Section 8.3.1) Length to calculate Slenderness Ratio for buckling about local Y axis. Same as above except in Z-axis (Major). Allowable Slenderness Limit for Compression Member (as per Section 3.8)
LY
Member Length Member Length 180
LZ
MAIN
526 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name NSF
Default Value
Description
1.0
Net Section Factor for Tension Member. Allowable Slenderness Limit for Tension Member (as per Section 3.8) Used to search for the lightest section for the profile(s) specified for member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details. Ratio of the Moments at the ends of the laterally unsupported length of the beam, as per Section 9.3.2.1: 0.8 = where Factored Applied Moment and Tension can vary independently 1.0 = For any other case
TMAIN
400
PROFILE
None
PSI
1.0
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Specifies the section type per 8.6.1.1(c): 1 = Hot rolled section 2 = Welded section
STP
TRACK
Controls the levels of detail to which results are reported. 0 = Minimum detail 1 = Intermediate detail level 2 = Maximum detail
TSP TST
0 0
Spacing of transverse stiffeners. Used to control transverse stiffeners in design: 0 = No Transverse Stiffener is provided 1 = Transverse Stiffener is provided
11F.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both Code Checking and Member Selection options are available for the IS 800: 2007 code.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
11F.5.1 Example 1
Commands for code checking
UNIT NEWTON METER PARAMETER 1 CODE IS800 LSD ALPHA 0.7 ALL DBS 1 ALL CAN 1 MEMB 2 PSI 0.8 MEMB 2 TMAIN 350 MEMB 2 TRACK 2 MEMB 2 CHECK CODE MEMB 2
11F.5.2 Example 2
Commands for member selection
UNIT NEWTON METER PARAMETER 1 CODE IS800 LSD MAIN 160 MEMB 7 KY 0.8 MEMB 7 KZ 0.9 MEMB 7 FYLD 350 ALL SELECT ALL
11F.6 Verification Example

Calculate compressive strength, bending strength, and shear strength of laterally supported plate girder 800-6-200-10 given F = 250 MPa and F = 420 MPa. Check per the IS800: 2007 y u Limit State Design methodology.
11F.6.1 Solution
Material properties:
528 STAAD.Pro
E = 2.05(10)5 MPa
Note: This is the default value of the modulus of elasticity for steel used by STAAD.Pro. IS
800:2007 specifies that a modulus of 2.0(10)5 MPa should be used. = 0.3 G = E/2.0(1 + ) = 78,846 MPa Cross sectional properties: Ag = 8006 + 2(20010) = 8,800 mm2 Izz = 912.1(10)6 mm4 Iyy =13.35(10)6 mm4 Ryy = (Iyy Area) = 38.95 mm Rzz = (IzzArea) = 321.95 mm Force: F = 19.644 kN (Compression)
x
F = 1.2 kN
y z
F = 2.0 kN M = 0.0 kNm

x
M = 10.0 kNm
y z
M = 51.659 kNm
Section Classification
Flange: b = (bf - tw)/2 = (200 - 6)/2 = 97 mm f = (250/fy ) = (250/250) = 1.0 b/tf = 97/10 = 9.7 > 9.4, < 13.6 Thus, the flange is considered semi-compact. Web: r2 = (Fx /Area)/fy = (19,644 / 8,800)/250 = 0.0089
126 1 + 2r 2
126(1.0) 1 + 2(0.0089)
= 123.8
> 42 = 42(1.0) = 42 d/tw = 800/6 = 133.33 >123.8 Thus, the web is considered slender. International Design Codes Manual 529
The overall section is classified as slender.
Calculation of compressive strength

Net area of section: Ae= Ag - (d/tw - 42.0) tw2 = 8,800 - [133.33 - 42.0(1.0)](6)2 = 5,512. mm2 Slenderness ratio: (ky L/Ry ) = 0.33(5,000) / 38.95 = 42.36 (kzL/Rz) = 1.0(5,000) / 321.95 = 15.53 Euler buckling stress (per Cl.7.1.2.1 of IS 800:2007):
Fcc =
E (KL / R )
2 2
2.05(10) (42.36)
2
= 1, 127 MPa
Non-dimensional effective slenderness ratio:

=
Fy Fcc
250 1, 127
= 0.471
Imperfection factor, , is equal to 0.49 and buckling class is c as T < 40.0 mm and buckling is f about YY axis (per Table 7 and Table 10 in IS 800:2007). Partial factor of safety mo = 1.10 Per Cl.7.1.2.1 of IS 800:2007: = 0.5[1 +( - 0.2) + 2 ] = 0.5[1 +0.49(0.471 - 0.2) +(0.471)2 ] = 0.677 Stress reduction factor,
= =
1 +
2 2
1.0 = 0.86 < 1.0
1 0.677 + 0.677 0.471

2 2
fcd = (fy /mo ) = 0.86(250 / 1.1) = 195.5 MPa Design compressive strength (per Cl.7.1.2 of IS 800:2007): Pd = Aefcd = 5,512.(195.5) = 1,077 kN
Calculation of bending strength

The web is slender and hence it is disregarded in bending strength calculation.
200(10) 3 I z = 2 + 200 10 12
800 2
10 2 2
) = 656.1(10)
mm4
Zez = Iz/(820/2) =656.1(10)6 /410 = 1.60(10)6 mm3 Iy =2(10)(200)3 12 = 13.33(10)6 mm4
530 STAAD.Pro
Zey = Iy (0.5Bf) = 13.33(10)6 /(0.5200) = 133,333 mm3 Ixx = 2(Bf Tf3 /3.0) = 2.0[(200)(10)3 /3.0] = 133.333(10)3 mm4 For laterally supported beam: Mdz = Zez Fy /mo = 1.60(10)6 (250)/1.10 = 364 kNm Mdy = Zey Fy /mo =133,333(250)/1.1 = 30.3 kNm For laterally unsupported beam: Warping constant: Iw = (d + Tf)2 Bf3 Tf/24.0 = (800 + 10)2 2003 10/24.0 = 2.187(10)12 mm6 Elastic lateral torsional buckling moment (per Cl.8.2.2.1 of IS 800:2007): LLT = 5,000 mm
M cr = =
2EI y L LT
2
GIxx +
2
2EI w L LT
2

22.05(10) 52.187(10) 12 5, 000
2
22.05(10) 513.33(10)6 5, 000
78, 846133, 333 +
= 449.8 kN m
LTZ =
Z ezF y M cr
1.60(10)6 250 449.8(10)

6
( )
= 0.943
LT
= 0.49 for welded steel section per Cl.8.2.2 of IS 800:2007 LTZ = 0.5[1 + LT (LTZ - 0.2) + LTZ2 ] = 1.13
LTZ =
1 LTZ +
2 2 LTZ LTZ
1 1.13 + 1.13 2 0.943 2
= 0.574
fbdz = (LTZ Fy ) mo = 0.574(250)/1.1 = 130.4 MPa Mdz = Zez fbdz = 1.6(10)6 (130.4) = 208.6 kNm MdY = (Zey Fy ) / mo = 133,333(250)/1.1 = 30.30 kNm
Calculation of shear strength

c = spacing of stiffener = 1000 mm d = depth of web = 800 mm c/d = 1000/800 = 1.25 > 1.0 Hence, per Cl.8.4.2.2.(a): kv = 5.35 + 4.0/(c/d)2 = 7.91 d/Tw = 800/6 = 133.33
67 k v / 5.35 = 81.47
Since, d/Tw > 67(kv 5.35), shear strength is governed by shear buckling. Elastic critical stress of the web
tcr, e =
k v E 12 1 2 d / T w
2 2
7.91 2.05(10)
5 2
12 1 0.3 2 133.33
= 82.44
Non-dimensional web slenderness ratio for shear buckling stress:

w =
f yw 3 t cr ,e
410 3 82.44
= 1.323 > 1.2
Hence
b =
f yw 3 w
2
250 3 (1.323)
2
= 82.46
Shear force corresponding to shear buckling = A

v
VcrY = VcrY =
A WY b m0 A WZ b m0
= =
800(6)(82.46) 1.1 200(10)(82.46) 1.1
= 359.5 kN = 300.0 kN
11F.6.2 Comparison
Table 11F.2-IS 800:2007 Verification Problem 1 Item Compressive Strength, P (kN)
d
Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 1,077 1.076(10)3 Negligible
Major Axis Bending Strength, M dz (kNm) (Laterally unsupported) Minor Axis Bending Strength, M dy (kNm) (Laterally unsupported) Major Axis Shear Strength, V (kN)
crY
208.6
208.681
Negligible
30.30
30.303
Negligible
359.5
359.732
Negligible
MInor Axis Shear Strength, V (kN)

crZ
300.0
299.776
Negligible
532 STAAD.Pro
11F.6.3 STAAD Input File

STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 22-OCT-08 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 5 0; 3 5 5 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; 2 2 3; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2.05E+008 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL START USER TABLE TABLE 1 UNIT METER KN WIDE FLANGE SLEND 0.0088 0.82 0.006 0.2 0.01 0.000912133 1.33477E-005 1.90933E-007 0.00492 0.004 END MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 UPTABLE 1 SLEND MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN 2 TABLE ST ISMB500 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 3 FY -2 MEMBER LOAD
2 UNI GY -2 JOINT LOAD 2 FX 1.2 2 FZ -2 SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT SUPPORT REACTION PRINT MEMBER FORCES PARAMETER 1 CODE IS800 LSD CAN 0 MEMB 1 KY 0.33 ALL STP 2 ALL TST 1 MEMB 1 TSP 1 MEMB 1 ***LATERALLY UNSUPPORTED**** *LAT 1 ALL TRACK 2 MEMB 1 CHECK CODE MEMB 1 PARAMETER 2 CODE IS800 LSD CAN 0 MEMB 1 KY 0.33 ALL STP 2 ALL TST 1 MEMB 1 TSP 1 MEMB 1 ***LATERALLY SUPPORTED**** LAT 1 ALL TRACK 2 MEMB 1 CHECK CODE MEMB 1 FINISH
11F.6.4 Output
TRACK 2.0 output for the Laterally unsupported check
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0) ************************************************
534 STAAD.Pro
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Member Number: 1 | | Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT) | | Status: PASS Ratio: 0.401 Critical Load Case: 1 Location: 0.00 | | Critical Condition: Sec. 9.3.1.1 | | Critical Design Forces: (Unit: KN METE) | | FX: 19.644E+00 C FY: -1.200E+00 FZ: -2.000E+00 | | MX: 0.000E+00 MY: -10.000E+00 MZ: 51.659E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Section Properties: (Unit: CM ) | | AXX: 88.000E+00 IZZ: 91.213E+03 RZZ: 32.195E+00| | AYY: 48.000E+00 IYY: 1.335E+03 RYY: 3.895E+00| | AZZ: 40.000E+00 IXX: 19.093E+00 CW: 2.187E+06| | ZEZ: 2.225E+03 ZPZ: 2.580E+03 | | ZEY: 133.477E+00 ZPY: 207.200E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Slenderness Check: (Unit: METE) | | Actual Length: 5.000E+00 | | Parameters: LZ: 5.000E+00 LY: 5.000E+00 | | KZ: 1.000 KY: 0.330 | | Actual Ratio: 42.37 Allowable Ratio: 180.00 LOAD: 1 FX: 19.644E+00 C | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Section Class: Slender; Flange Class: Semi-Compact; Web Class: Slender | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0) ************************************************ |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Member Number: 1 | | Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT) | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Tension: (Unit:KN METE) | | Parameters: FYLD: 250.000E+03 FU: 420.000E+03 | | NSF: 1.000 ALPHA: 0.800 DBS: 0 | | Capacity: 2.000E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2 | | Actual Design Force: 0.000E+00 LC: 0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Compression: (Unit:KN METE) | | Buckling Class: Major: b Minor: c As per Sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2.2 | | Capacity: 1.076E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2 | | Actual Design Force: 19.644E+00 LC: 1 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Shear: (Unit:KN ) | | Major Axis: Actual Design Force: -1.200E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 359.732E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.4.2 | | Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -2.000E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 299.776E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.4.2 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Bending: (Unit:KN METE) | | Parameters: Laterally Unsupported KX: 1.00 LX: 5.000E+00 General | | Major Axis: Actual Design Force: 51.659E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 208.681E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.2.2 | | Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -10.000E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 30.303E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.2.1.1 |
536 STAAD.Pro
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Combined Interaction: | | Parameters: PSI: 1.00 CMX: 0.900 CMY: 0.900 CMZ: 0.900 | | Interaction Ratio: 0.401 As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1 | | LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Checks Ratio Load Case No. Location from Start | | | | Tension 0.000 0 0.000E+00 | | Compression 0.018 1 0.000E+00 | | Shear Major 0.003 1 0.000E+00 | | Shear Minor 0.007 1 0.000E+00 | | Bend Major 0.248 1 0.000E+00 | | Bend Minor 0.340 1 0.000E+00 | | Sec. 9.3.1.1 0.401 1 0.000E+00 | | Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Z) 0.210 1 5.000E+00 | | Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Y) 0.233 1 5.000E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
TRACK 2.0 output for the laterally supported check

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0) ************************************************ |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Member Number: 1 | | Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT) | | Status: PASS Ratio: 0.360 Critical Load Case: 1 Location: 0.00 | | Critical Condition: Sec. 9.3.1.1 | | Critical Design Forces: (Unit: KN METE) |
| FX: 19.644E+00 C FY: -1.200E+00 FZ: -2.000E+00 | | MX: 0.000E+00 MY: -10.000E+00 MZ: 51.659E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Section Properties: (Unit: CM ) | | AXX: 88.000E+00 IZZ: 91.213E+03 RZZ: 32.195E+00| | AYY: 48.000E+00 IYY: 1.335E+03 RYY: 3.895E+00| | AZZ: 40.000E+00 IXX: 19.093E+00 CW: 2.187E+06| | ZEZ: 2.225E+03 ZPZ: 2.580E+03 | | ZEY: 133.477E+00 ZPY: 207.200E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Slenderness Check: (Unit: METE) | | Actual Length: 5.000E+00 | | Parameters: LZ: 5.000E+00 LY: 5.000E+00 | | KZ: 1.000 KY: 0.330 | | Actual Ratio: 42.37 Allowable Ratio: 180.00 LOAD: 1 FX: 19.644E+00 C | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Section Class: Slender; Flange Class: Semi-Compact; Web Class: Slender | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0) ************************************************ |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Member Number: 1 | | Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT) | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Tension: (Unit:KN METE) | | Parameters: FYLD: 250.000E+03 FU: 420.000E+03 | | NSF: 1.000 ALPHA: 0.800 DBS: 0 |
538 STAAD.Pro
2.000E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2 | | Actual Design Force: 0.000E+00 LC: 0 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Compression: (Unit:KN METE) | | Buckling Class: Major: b Minor: c As per Sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2.2 | | Capacity: 1.076E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2 | | Actual Design Force: 19.644E+00 LC: 1 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Shear: (Unit:KN ) | | Major Axis: Actual Design Force: -1.200E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 359.732E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.4.2 | | Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -2.000E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 299.776E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.4.2 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Bending: (Unit:KN METE) | | Parameters: Laterally Supported KX: 1.00 LX: 5.000E+00 General | | Major Axis: Actual Design Force: 51.659E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 363.710E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.2.1.1 | | Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -10.000E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00| | Capacity: 30.303E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.2.1.1 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Combined Interaction: | | Parameters: PSI: 1.00 CMX: 0.900 CMY: 0.900 CMZ: 0.900 | | Interaction Ratio: 0.360 As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1 | | LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Checks Ratio Load Case No. Location from Start |
Capacity:
| | | Tension 0.000 0 0.000E+00 | | Compression 0.018 1 0.000E+00 | | Shear Major 0.003 1 0.000E+00 | | Shear Minor 0.007 1 0.000E+00 | | Bend Major 0.142 1 0.000E+00 | | Bend Minor 0.340 1 0.000E+00 | | Sec. 9.3.1.1 0.360 1 0.000E+00 | | Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Z) 0.126 1 5.000E+00 | | Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Y) 0.141 1 5.000E+00 | |---------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
540 STAAD.Pro
Section 12
Japanese Codes
542 STAAD.Pro

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Japan code AIJ2002 Architectural Institute of Japan Standards for StructuralCalculation of Steel Reinforced Concrete Structures. Design for a member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are also reported in the output. Design of members per AIJ requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed:
l
For Beams Prismatic (Rectangular andSquare) For Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

Concrete members which will be designed by the program must have certain section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. These are the D (YD) and b (ZD) dimensions for rectangular or square cross sections and the D (YD) for circular cross sections. The following is an example the required input:
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250 mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 350 mm diameter.
Warning: It is absolutely imperative that you do not provide the cross section area (AX) as
an input.

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. Slenderness effects result in additional forces being exerted on the column over and above those obtained from the elastic analysis. There are two options by which the slenderness effects can be accommodated.
The first option is to compute the secondary moments through an exact analysis. Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated. The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic analysis and design the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the magnified moment is equivalent to the total moment comprised of the sum of primary and secondary moments. STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To utilize the first method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The second method mentioned above is utilized by providing the magnification factor as a concrete design parameter (See the parameter MMAG in Table 10A.1). The column is designed for the axial load and total of primary and secondary biaxial moments if the first method is used and for the axial load and magnified biaxial moments if the second method is used.
12A.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. The program considers 12 equally spaced divisions of the beam member. However this number can be redefined by NSECTION parameter. All these sections are designed for flexure, shear and torsion for all load cases. The results include design results for most critical load case. Example
UNIT KG CM START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE JAPAN FYMAIN SRR295 ALL FYSEC SRR295 ALL FC 350 ALL CLEAR 2.5 MEM 2 TO 6 TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9 DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9 END CONCRETE DESIGN

Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of section properties provided by the user. Program first try to design the section for g = 0 and pt =
544 STAAD.Pro
balanced reinforcement ratio. If allowable moment is lower than the actual moment program increases g value for same pt and checks the satisfactory conditions. If conditions are not satisfied this procedure continues until g reaches to 1.0 and then pt value is increased keeping g = 1.0. This procedure continues until pt reaches to its maximum value( 2 % ). But if the allowable moment for pt = maximum value and g = 1.0 is lower than the actual moment the program gives message that the section fails. This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design the section. It arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the effective depth and redesign the sections for this effective depth. Notes: a. Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in flexure design b. MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment c. 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for flexure design. d. STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and considering the fact that Japan is a high seismic zone area.

The Design Shear value, Q , is evaluated for the beam. The update effective depth is used to D then calculate the allowable shear stress. The allowable shear stress of concrete, f , is s automatically calculated from design load type (permanent or temporary) and given density of concrete. The program then calculates the required bar size, aw, and spacing of stirrups. The reinforcement ratio for the stirrup, p , is calculated for design Bar size and stirrup pitch and w all the necessary checking is done. For seismic loading it is needed to increase shear force 1.5 times the actual value and this can be done utilizing the Design Shear Modification factor, k (SMAG parameter) without changing the Design Moment. Notes: a. Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged b. Governing density to determine Light weight or Normal Weight Concrete is 2.3 kg/sq. cm
12A.4.3 Design for Torsion

Torsion design for beam is optional. If the TORSION parameter value is 1.0, the program will design the assigned beam(s) for torsion. The program first checks whether extra reinforcement is needed for torsion or not. If additional reinforcement is needed, this additional pt is added to flexure pt and additional Pw is added to shear design Pw.
12A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force, MZ moment, MY moment, and shear force. Both the ends of the members are designed for all the load cases and the loading which produces largest amount of reinforcement is called as critical load. If Track 0 or Track 1 is used, design results will be printed for critical load only. But if Track 2 is used, you can get detailed design results of that member. The value of Pt needed for minimum axial force, maximum axial force, maximum MZ, maximum MY among all the load cases for both the ends will be printed. If the MMAG parameter is used, the column moments will be multiplied by that value. If the SMAG parameter is used, column shear force will be multiplied by that value. Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular sections. For rectangular and square sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY, while for circular sections Pg value is calculated for MZ and MY separately. Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If the BIAXIAL parameter value is 1.0, the program will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column design is always uniaxial. Steps involved: 1. Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 . 2. If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by increasing Pt and checking allowable load for that known Pt and known actual eccentricity of the column. 3. If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt and checking is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than the actual moment, program increases Pt and this procedure continues until the column design conditions are satisfied or the column fails as the required Pt is higher than Pt maximum value. 4. If the column is in tension, design is done by considering allowable tensile stress of steel only. 5. If biaxial design is requested program solve the following interaction equation 6. where, a = 1.0+1.66666666 (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap & 1.0 a 2.0, Mycap, Mzcap & Pcap represents section capacity 7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and calculates Pcap, Mycap and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again and this process continues until the eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds its maximum limit. 8. If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation is satisfied (if uniaxial design is performed successfully). 9. If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and calculates no. of bars and details output is written.
546 STAAD.Pro
12A.5.1 Example
UNIT KGS CMS START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE JAPAN FYMAIN SRR295 ALL FC 210 ALL CLEAR 2.5 MEMB 2 TO 6 DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6 END CONCRETE DESIGN

To design a slab or a wall, it must first be modeled using finite elements and analyzed. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual. Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the exterior face of the slab or wall. The following parameters are those applicable to slab and wall design: 1. FYMAIN Yield stress for reinforcing steel - transverse and longitudinal.
2. FC Concrete grade 3. CLEAR Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element. 4. MINMAIN Minimum required size of longitudinal/transverse reinforcing bar The other parameters shown in Table 12A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall design.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 10A.1 contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as centimeters and Kilograms before performing the concrete design.
Table 12A.1-Japanese Concrete Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as JAPAN. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BIAXIAL
0.0
Value to define biaxial or uniaxial design type for Column 0. uniaxial design only 1. design for biaxial moments
CLEAR
3.0 cm (beam) 4.0 cm (Column)
Clear cover for Beam or clear side cover for column.
DEPTH
YD
Depth of concrete member. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. Face of support location at end of beam. (Note: Both SFACE & EFACE are input as positive numbers). Compressive Strength of Concrete. Steel grade. Acceptable values for steel grade and their associated yield stress values are shown in the following table. Program automatically calculates yield stress value depending on design load type (permanent or temporary). Same as FYMAIN except this is for secondary steel. Value to define design load type 0. Permanent Loading 1. Temporary Loading
EFACE
0.0
FC FYMAIN
210 Kg/cm2 SR235
FYSEC
SR235
LONG
0.0
MAXMAIN
41.0 cm
Maximum main reinforcement bar size
548 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name MAXSEC
Default Value
Description
41.0 cm
Maximum secondary reinforcement bar size. Minimum main reinforcement bar size. Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. Design moment magnification factor Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moments for beam design. Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral. Face of support location at start of beam. Design shear magnification factor Value to request for torsion design for beam 0. torsion design not needed 1. torsion design needed
MINMAIN
10 mm
MINSEC
10 mm
MMAG NSECTION
1.0 12
REINF
0.0
SFACE
0.0
SMAG TORSION
1.0 0.0
TRACK
0.0
Beam Design: 0. Critical section design results. 1. Five section design results & design forces. 2. 12 section design results & design forces. Column Design: 1. Detail design results for critical load case only. 2. Design results for minimum P, maximum P, maximum MZ and maximum MY among all load cases for both ends.
Parameter Name WIDTH
Default Value
Description
ZD
Width of concrete member. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
Table 12A.2-Table of permissible Steel Grades and associated Yield Stresses for FYMAIN and FYSEC parameters Steel Grade Long Term Loading Tension &Compression 1600 Shear Reinforcement 1600 Short Term Loading Tension &Compression 2400 Shear Reinforcement 2400
SR235 SRR235 SDR235 SR295 SRR295 SD295A SD295B SDR295 SDR345 SD345 SD390
1600
2000
3000
3000
2000
2000
3000
3000
2200 (2000)
2000
3500
3500
2200 (2000)
2000
4000
4000
550 STAAD.Pro
12B. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Japanese code AIJ2005 Specifications for structural steel design. Design of members per AIJ2005 requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
12B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the Architectural Institute of Japan (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design (2005 edition) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l
Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
The method for calculating allowable bending stress was updated for the AIJ 2005 from the AIJ 2002 code. All other allowable limit states, analysis and design methods, etc., remain unchanged. Refer to the AIJ 2002 documentation for additional details.

Member design and code checking per AIJ 2005 are based upon the allowable stress design method. It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.
12B.2.1 Design Capabilities

All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE, TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will automatically adopt
the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested. STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used for member property.
12B.2.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps. 1. Calculation of sectional properties The program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( I , I ) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Z , yy zz z Z , i , i using appropriate formula. For calculation of i ( radius of gyration needed for y y z bending ), program calculates moment of inertia ( I )and sectional area ( A ) for 1/6th i i section and then uses following formula: i = (Ii/Ai)
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape,
H shape and Channel sections. 2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods: i. Axial Stress: Actual tensile stresses ( F ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),
T
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension Actual compressive stress ( F ) = Force / A
C
Allowable tensile stress ( f )

t
= F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case) = F ( For Temporary Case ) Allowable compressive stress (fc) = {1 - .4x(/ 2 )} x F/v when = 2.77 x F/ ( = f x 1.5 (for Temporary case)
c
Where: = (2 E/(.6 x F)) =F v = 3/2 + 2/3x(/ 2 )
552 STAAD.Pro
ii. Bending Stress: Actual bending stress for My for compression: ( Fbcy ) = My / Zcy Actual bending stress for Mz for compression ( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz Actual bending stress for My for tension ( Fbty ) = My / Zty Actual bending stress for Mz for tension ( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz Where: Z
cy ty
,Z
cz
are section modulus for compression
Z , Z are section modulus for tension

tz
Allowable bending stress for M (fbcy ) = ft Allowable bending stress for M When b p b , fb = F/ When p b <b eb ,
fb =
b p b F 1 0.4 b p e b
When eb <b ,
fb =
1
2 b
F 2.17
Where:
b = My / Me
e b
= 1 / 0.6
bcz
For Temporary case, f Where:
= 1.5 x (f
bcz
for Permanent case)
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) +0.3 (M2 / M1)2 Allowable bending stress for M , f Allowable bending stress for M , f
y bty z btz
=f =f
t bcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C directly.

iii. Shear Stress Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula: qy = Qy / Aww Where: A
ww
= web shear area = product of depth and web thickness
qz = Qz / Aff Where: A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area
ff
Allowable shear stress, fs = Fs / 1.5, Fs = F / (3) 3. Checking design requirements: User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements: The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that the section fails. Conditions: i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC / fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty -FC) / ft v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty ) / ft vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy - FT/ft vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked)= fm/(k ft)
Note: All other member capacities (axial tension, axial compression, and shear) are
calculated as for AIJ 2002. See "Member Capacities" on page 570

You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 10B.3 of this chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions
554 STAAD.Pro
from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 12B.1-Japanese Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as JAPANESE 2005 to invoke the AIJ 2005. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
0.0
0.0 = design only for end moments or those at locations specified by the SECTION command. 1.0 = calculate moments at twelfth points along the beam, and use the maximum Mz location for design.
CB
C value from the AIJ code. See "Member Capacities" on page 570 Bending Stress for how C is calculated and applied. Use 0.0 to direct the program to calculated Cb. Any other value be used in lieu of the program calculated value.
DFF
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local deflection
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note a)
Parameter Name DJ2
Default Value
Description
End Joint of member
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note a) Maximum allowable depth for member. Minimum allowable depth for member. Yield strength of steel in Megapascal. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is the minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is the major axis. Length in local y-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Same as above except in z-axis
DMAX
100 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
FYLD KY
235 MPA 1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
LZ
MAIN
0.0 = check for slenderness 1.0 = suppress slenderness check
MISES
Option to include check for von Mises stresses 0 = Do not include check. 1 = Perform Von Mises stress check.
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis. 1.0 = No sidesway
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
Same as above except in local z-axis.
556 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name TMAIN
Default Value
Description
400
Allowable Slenderness Limit for Tension Member 1.0 = suppress slenderness check . Any value greater than 1 = Allowable KL/r in tension.
TMP
0 = Permanent Loading 1 = Temporary Loading
TRACK
0.0
Level of output detail: 0. = Suppress critical member stresses 1. = Print all critical member stresses 2. = Print expanded output 3. = Print maximum details.
Note: Only produces results

when BEAM0 is used. 4. = Perform and print deflection check. UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a fraction of actual member length. Unsupported length for calculating allowable bending stress.
UNL
Member Length
12B.3.1 Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to
model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.

12B.4 Von Mises Stresses Check

The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements based on the corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005 editions of AIJ), indicates that the left-hand side in the equation should be less than unity. These checks are performed at locations indicated by the BEAMparameter. The default is set that this check is not performed. The MISESparameter must be set to 1 to initiate the checks.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the
RATIO parameter. The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
x + 3 xy f
2 2
< 1.0
Where: Longitudinal stress in beam element:

x =
Fx Ax
My Zy
Mz Zz
F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis

y
558 STAAD.Pro
M = Bending moment about z-axis

z
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis

y z
Z = Section modulus about z-axis

xy =
Mx Zx
Fy Ay
Fz Az
M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction

y z
F = shear stress in z direction Z = Torsional section modulus = 2I /D

x x x
D = Depth of the member

x
I = Torsional constant
x
A = Effective shear area in the y direction

y z
A = Effective shear area in the z direction f = Allowable tensile stress

t
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation) is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as RATIO and VON MISES is printed as CRITICAL COND.

In the next few pages are included verification examples for reference purposes.

A slender, cantilever beam subjected to a load at the end. Static analysis, 3D beam element.
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 2 meter is subjected to a permanent joint load of 3 kN in the Y direction and 2 kN in the Z direction as well as a 0.008 kNm torque applied at the end. Axial tension of 10 kN is also applied to the member. An H100x50x5 section is used from the Japanese steel tables.
Given
Section properties
D = 100 mm
x
I = 15,000 mm 4
x
A = 1185 mm 2, A = 500 mm 2, A = 467 mm 2

x y z
Z = 2I /D = 215000/100 = 300 mm 3, Z = 5920 mm 3, Z = 37400 mm 3

x x x y z
The maximum of the left hand side of the von Mises stress equation apparently occurs at the fixed end of the beam. Section forces at the fixed end are ass follow: 10.0 kN (Tension) 6.0 kNm (Bending-Y) 6.0 kNm (Bending-Z) 3.0 kN (Shear-Y) 2.0 kN (Shear-Z) -0.008 kNm (Torsion Member Length L = 2 m, Unbraced length = 100mm. Material FYLD = 300 MPa E = 2.05E+05 MPa G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
From these section forces, and
x xy
at the section of the fixed end are calculated as follows:

+
600, 000 5, 920
x =
Fx Ax
My Zy
Mz Zz
10, 000 1, 185
900, 000 37, 400
= 8.44 + 101.35 + 24.06 = 133.85
N/mm2
xy =
Mx Zx
Fy Ay
Fz Az
8, 000 300
3, 000 2 500
2, 000 2 467
= 26.67 + (62 + 4.282 ) =
33.04
x
N/mm2
xy m
From and , f
is calculated:
2 fm = x2 + 3xy = (133.85)2 + 3(33.04)2 = 146.26 N / mm 2
Since ft = FYLD/1.5 = 300.0 MPa/15 = 200.0 N/mm2 and k = 1 for permanent loading, Ratio = 146.26/(200.0 1) = 0.731 < 1, So OK.
560 STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 12B.2-Comparison of results for a AIJ 2005 verification problem Hand Calculation von Mises Stress, f (N/mm 2)
m
STAAD.Pro Result 146.3
Comments
146.26
None
STAAD Input File

STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION EXAMPLE NO.1 START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-AUG-10 END JOB INFORMATION * VERIFICATION FOR VON MISES STRESSES IN AIJ 2005 UNIT MMS KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 300 0 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 UNIT METER KN DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2.05E+008 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE 1 TABLE ST H100X50X5 UNIT MMS KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED UNIT METER KN LOAD 1 LC1 JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10 FY 3 FZ 2 MX 0.008 PERFORM ANALYSIS LOAD LIST 1 PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1 PARAMETER 1 CODE JAPANESE 2005 TMP 0 ALL UNL 0.002 ALL MISES 1 ALL TRACK 2 ALL FYLD 300000 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2.0 output portion is as follows:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AIJ 2005) ******************************************** |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN CM UNIT | | * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ | |MEMBER 1 * | JAPANESE SECTIONS | | AX = 11.85 | | * | ST H100X50X5 | | --Z AY = 5.00 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 4.67 | | AIJ-2005 * =============================== ===|=== ZY = 5.92 | | * ZZ = 37.40 | | * |<---LENGTH (ME= 0.30 --->| iY = 1.12 | |************* iZ = 3.97 | | ZX = 0.30 | | 0.90(KN-MET) | |PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES | |IN N MM | L1 L1 IN N MM| |--------------- + L1 L1 -------------| | KL/R-Y= 26.8 | L1 FA = 189.5 | | KL/R-Z= 7.6 + L1 fa = 8.4 | | UNL = 2.5 | L1 L1 FCZ = 200.0 | | CB = 1.75 + FTZ = 200.0 | | CMY = 0.85 | L1 L1 FCY = 200.0 | | CMZ = 0.85 + L1 L1 FTY = 200.0 | | FYLD = 300.0 | L0 fbz = 24.1 | | NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 101.4 | | DFF = 0.0 -0.05 FV = 115.5 | | dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE fv = 6.0 | | (WITH LOAD NO.) FT = 200.0 |
562 STAAD.Pro
| fm = 146.3 | | MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KN-MET) Sx = 133.9 | | ------------------------Tou = 34.0 | | | | AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z | | | | VALUE -10.00 3.00 2.00 0.60 0.90 | | LOCATION 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 | | LOADING 1 1 1 1 1 | | | |**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY (KN-MET) *| |* -------------*| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS VON MISES 0.731 1 | | 10.00 T 0.60 -0.90 0.000 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
564 STAAD.Pro
12C. Japanese Codes - SteelDesign Per 2002 AIJ

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Japanese code AIJ2002 Specifications for structural steel design. Design of members per AIJ2002 requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
12C.1 General
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l
Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
12C.2 Analysis Methodology

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
12C.3 MemberPropertySpecifications
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
12C.4 Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If
called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered for these members during the analysis. An example of member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section. A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface. Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
12C.4.1 I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11 12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9
12C.4.2 H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:
excluded.
1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4 13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12
566 STAAD.Pro
12C.4.3 T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:
excluded.
20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19
12C.4.4 Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.
25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6 46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8
12C.4.5 Double Channels

Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing in between them, are available. The letter D in front of the section name is used to specify a double channel. Front-to-front double channels are similarly added by adding FR in front of the section name.
17 TO 27 TA D C300X90X10 45 TO 76 TA D C250X90X11 SP 2.0 28 TO 30 TA FR C200X90X8 SP 2.5
In the above commands, members 17 to 27 are a back-to-back double channels C300X90X10 with no spacing in between. Members 45 to 76 are a double channels C250X90X11 with a
spacing of 2 length units. Members 28 to 30 are front-to-front double channels C200X90X8 with a spacing of 2.5 length units.
12C.4.6 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle specification is as follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the legs and then the thickness of the leg, all in millimeters. The word ST signifies that the section is a standard angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 1 of Section 1.5.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
1 4 TA ST L150X90X9
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of the User's Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as shown below.
7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9
12C.4.7 Double angles

Short leg back-to-back and long leg back-to-back double angles may be specified by using the words SD or LD in front of the angle size. In the case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. The spacing between the angles may be specified by using the word SP after the angle size followed by the value of the spacing.
8 TO 25 TA SD L100X65X7 SP 2.0 36 TO 45 TA LD L300X90X11 SP 3.0
The first example indicates a short legs back-to-back double angle comprised of 100X65X7 angles separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back-to-back double angle comprised of 300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.
12C.4.8 Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
568 STAAD.Pro
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be performed on TUBE sections.
12C.4.9 Pipes (General Pipe sections)

Circular hollow sections defined by JIS G3444:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures Based on Allowable Stress Concept as general pipe sections are specified as shown in the following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE PIP267.4X7.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 267.0 mm and a thickness of 7.0 mm. Only code checking, no member selection, can be performed on PIPE sections.
12C.4.10 Circular Hollow sections

Circular hollow sections defined by JIS G3475:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures Based on Allowable Stress Concept as Architectural pipe sections are specified as shown in the following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE CHS660.4X16
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 660.4 mm and a thickness of 16.0 mm. Only code checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
12C.4.11 Rectangular Hollow sections

Rectangular hollow sections defined by JIS G3466:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures Based on Allowable Stress Concept are specified as shown in the following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE RHS200X100X12
specifies a tube with a depth of 200 mm, a width of 100 mm, and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
12C.4.12 Square Hollow sections

Square hollow sections defined by JIS G3466:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures - Based on Allowable Stress Concept are specified as shown in the following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE SHS200XS00X12
specifies a square tube with a width of 200 mm and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections. Sample Input file containing Japanese shapes
STAAD SPACE UNIT KIP FEET JOINT COORD 1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0 MEMB INCIDENCE 1 1 2 11 UNIT INCH MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE * H-SHAPE 1 TA ST H200X100X4 * I SHAPE 2 TA ST I250X125X10 * T SHAPE 3 TA ST T200X19 * CHANNEL 4 TA ST C125X65X6 * DOUBLE CHANNEL 5 TA D C200X90X8 * REGULAR ANGLE 6 TA ST L100X75X7 * REVERSE ANGLE 7 TA RA L90X75X9 * DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK 8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0 * DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK 9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5 * TUBE 10 TA ST TUBE DT 3.0 WT 2.5 TH 0.25 * PIPE 11 TA ST PIPE OD 3.0 ID 2.5 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES FINISH
12C.5 Member Capacities

Member design and code checking per AIJ 2002 are based upon the allowable stress design method. It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties,
570 STAAD.Pro
slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.
12C.5.1 Design Capabilities

All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE, TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will automatically adopt the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested. STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used for member property.
12C.5.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps. 1. Calculation of sectional properties The program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using appropriate formula. For calculation of i ( radius of gyration needed for bending ), program calculates moment of inertia ( Ii )and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses following formula: i = (Ii/Ai)
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape,
H shape and Channel sections. 2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses Allowable stresses for structural steel under permanent loading shall be determined on the basis of the values of F given in the following table. Table 12C.1-Table: Values of F (N/mm 2) Steel for Construction Structures Thickness SN400 SNR400 STKN400 SN490 SNR490 STKN490 Steel for General Structures
Steel for Welded Structu
SN490 SNR490 STKN490
SS400 STK400 STKR400
SS490
SS540
SM400 SMA400
SM520
SSC400 t 40 235 325 235 275 375 235 325 355
Steel for Construction Structures Thickness SN400 SNR400 STKN400 SN490 SNR490 STKN490
Steel for General Structures
Steel for Welded Structu
SN490 SNR490 STKN490
SS400 STK400 STKR400
SS490
SS540
SM400 SMA400
SM520
SSC400 40< t 100 215 295 215 255 215 295 335
Note: In checking members for temporary loading be the combination of stresses

described in Chap.3, allowable stresses specified in this chapter may be increases by 50% Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods: i. Axial Stress: Actual tensile stresses ( F ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),
T
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension Actual compressive stress ( F ) = Force / A
C
Allowable tensile stress ( f )

t
= F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case) = F ( For Temporary Case ) Allowable compressive stress (fc) = {1 - 0.4x(/ 2 )} x F/v when = 2.77 x F/ (/ 2 ) when > = fc x 1.5 (for Temporary case) where: = (2 E/(.6 x F)) =F v = 3/2 + 2/3x(/ 2 ) ii. Bending Stress:
572 STAAD.Pro
Actual bending stress for My for compression ( Fbcy ) = My / Zcy Actual bending stress for Mz for compression ( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz Actual bending stress for My for tension ( Fbty ) = My / Zty Actual bending stress for Mz for tension ( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz Where: Z
cy ty
,Z
cz
are section modulus for compression
Z , Z are section modulus for tension

tz
Allowable bending stress for M (fbcy ) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz (fbcz) = { 1 - .4 x (lb / i)2 / (C 2 )} ft max = 900/ (lb x h / Af) For Temporary case, f Where: C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) +0.3 (M2 / M1)2 Allowable bending stress for M , f Allowable bending stress for M , f
y bty z btz bcz
= 1.5 x (f
bcz
for Permanent case)
=f =f
t bcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C directly.

iii. Shear Stress Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula: qy = Qy / Aww Where: A
ww
= web shear area = product of depth and web thickness
qz = Qz / Aff Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area

ff
Allowable shear stress, f = F / 1.5, F = F / (3)

s s s
3. Checking design requirements: User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that the section fails. 1. Checking design requirements: User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that the section fails. Conditions: i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC / fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty -FC) / ft v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty ) / ft vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy - FT/ft vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked)= f /(k f )
m t
12C.5.3 Output Format ( TRACK 3 )

One new output format has been introduced which provides details step by step information of Steel Design for guiding load case only. If Section command is used before Parameter command this output will provide details information for all the sections specified by Section Command.
Note: This output format is available only when the BEAMparameter value is 0 and the
TRACK parameter value is 3. If section command is not used design information will be printed for two ends only. If Member Truss option is used no Shear Design information will be printed. Example:
574 STAAD.Pro
SECTION 0.0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 ALL PARAMETER CODE JAPANESE 2002 BEAM 0.0 ALL TMP 0.0 MEMB 1 TO 4 TMP 1.0 MEMB 5 TO 8 TRACK 3 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
12C.5.4 Allowable stress for Axial Tension

Allowable axial stress in tension is calculated per section 5.1 (1) of the AIJ code. In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and proceeds with member selection or code checking.
12C.5.5 Allowable stress for Axial Compression

The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to the procedure of section 5.1 (3). Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. In the absence of user provided values for effective length, the actual member length will be used. The slenderness ratios are checked against the permissible values specified in Chapter 11 of the AIJ code.
12C.5.6 Allowable stress for Bending

The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. The allowable stresses in bending (compressive and tensile) are calculated as per the criteria of Clause 5.1 (4) of the code.
12C.5.7 Allowable stress for Shear

Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. The allowable stresses in shear are computed according to Clause 5.1 (2) of the code.
12C.6 Combined Loading

For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending and shear), applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for all modeled loading
situations. Members subjected to axial tension and bending are checked using the criteria of clause 6.2. For members with axial compression and bending, the criteria of clause 6.1 is used.

The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters mentioned in Table 9B.1 of this chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 12C.2-Japanese Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as JAPANESE 2002 to invoke the AIJ 2002. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
0.0
Locations of design: 0. Design only for end moments or those at locations specified by the SECTION command. 1. Calculate moments at twelfth points along the beam, and use the maximum Mz location for design.
CB
C value from the AIJ code. See "Member Capacities" on page 570 Bending Stress for how C is calculated and applied. Use 0.0 to direct the program to calculated Cb. Any other value be used in lieu of the program calculated value.
576 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DFF
Default Value
Description
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local deflection
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note a) Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" (See Note a) Maximum allowable depth for member. Minimum allowable depth for member. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is the minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is the major axis. Length in local y-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Same as above except in z-axis
DJ2
End Joint of member
DMAX
100 cm
DMIN
0.0 cm
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length Member Length 235 MPA 0.0
LZ
FYLD MAIN
Yield strength of steel in Megapascal. Check for slenderness: 0. Perform check for slenderness 1. Suppress slenderness check
MISES
Option to include check for von Mises stresses 0. Do not include check. 1. Perform Von Mises stress check.
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members.
Parameter Name RATIO
Default Value
Description
1.0
Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Sidesway: 0. Sidesway in local y-axis. 1. No sidesway
SSY
0.0
SSZ TMAIN
0.0 400
Same as above except in local z-axis. Allowable Slenderness Limit for Tension Member 1.0 = suppress slenderness check . Any value greater than 1 = Allowable KL/r in tension.
TMP
Loading condition: 0. Permanent Loading 1. Temporary Loading
TRACK
0.0
Level of output detail: 0. = Suppress critical member stresses 1. = Print all critical member stresses 2. = Print expanded output 3. = Print maximum details.
Note: Only produces

results when BEAM0 is used. 4. = Perform and print deflection check. UNL Member Length 1.0 Unsupported length for calculating allowable bending stress. Same as above provided as a fraction of actual member length.
UNF
578 STAAD.Pro
12C.7.1 Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured. For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and three members. The Deflection Length for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.

12C.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is checked per the AIJ requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam, and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on the forces at the start and end joints of the member. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments obtained from the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Note: Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES, or members listed as

PRISMATIC. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command. Sample Input data for Steel Design
UNIT METER PARAMETER CODE JAPANESE 2002 NSF 0.85 ALL UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7 KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4 RATIO 0.9 ALL TRACK 1.0 ALL CHECK CODE ALL SELECT ALL
12C.10 Von Mises Stresses Check

The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements based on the corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005 editions of AIJ), indicates that the left-hand side in the equation should be less than unity. These checks are performed at locations indicated by the BEAMparameter. The default is set that this check is not performed. The MISESparameter must be set to 1 to initiate the checks.
580 STAAD.Pro
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the
RATIO parameter. The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
x + 3 xy f
2 2
< 1.0
Where: Longitudinal stress in beam element:

x =
Fx Ax
My Zy
Mz Zz
F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis

y z
M = Bending moment about z-axis A = Cross-sectional area,

x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis

y z
Z = Section modulus about z-axis

xy =
Mx Zx
Fy Ay
Fz Az
M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction

y z
F = shear stress in z direction Z = Torsional section modulus = 2I /D

x x x
D = Depth of the member

x
I = Torsional constant
x
A = Effective shear area in the y direction

y z
A = Effective shear area in the z direction f = Allowable tensile stress

t
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation) is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as RATIO and VON MISES is printed as CRITICAL COND.
582 STAAD.Pro
Section 13
Mexican Codes
584 STAAD.Pro
13A. Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Mexican code NTC 1987 Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para Diseo y construccin de Estructuras de Concreto (Complementary Technical Norms for Design and Construction of Concrete Structures). Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD Latin American Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design. It will calculate the reinforcement needed for the specified concrete section. All the concrete design calculations are based on the current: Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Concrete Structures Nov. 1987. (Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para Diseo y construccin de Estructuras de Concreto) of the Mexican Construction Code for the Federal District Aug. 1993 (Reglamento de Construcciones para el Distrito Federal).

The following types of cross sections can be defined for concrete design.
l l l
Columns Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular) Beams Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), Trapezoidal, and T-shapes Walls Finite element with a specified thickness
Figure 13A.1 - Concrete shape nomenclature for beams and columns

UNIT CM MEMBER PROPERTY 13 TO 79 PRISM YD 40. ZD 20. IZ 53333 IY 13333
11 13 PR YD 20. 14 TO 16 PRIS YD 24. ZD 48. YB 18. ZB 12. 17 TO 19 PR YD 24. ZD 18. ZB 12.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20 cm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these members. For concrete design, this property must not be provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the above example the IZ and IY values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using YD and ZD. This is a conventional practice which takes into consideration revised section parameters due to cracking of section. Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent a T-shape and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.) provided, the program will determine whether the section is rectangular, trapezoidal or Tshaped and the BEAM design will be done accordingly.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design by the Mexican code. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 3.1 is a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. The manual describes the commands required to provide these parameters in the input file. For example, the values of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used in shear design), the distances of the face of supports from the end nodes of a beam, are assigned values of zero by default but may be changed depending on the actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns are designed for moments directly obtained from the analyses without any magnification. The factors MMY and MMZ may be used for magnification of column moments. For beams, the user may generate load cases which contain loads magnified by the appropriate load factors.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 13A.1-Mexican Concrete Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Parameters
Must be specified as MEXICAN. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
586 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name BTP
Default Value
Parameters
Bar type to use: 0. IMPERIAL (No 3 to 18) 1. METRIC (4.2 to 60mm) 2. MEXICAN (No 2 to 18)
CCL
Concrete class according to 1.4.1d) to define Modulus of Elasticity 1. Class 1 Concrete 2. Class 2 Concrete
CFB
FALSE
Cold formed Barclassification to define development multipliers according to table 3.1 NTC
l l
FALSE - Not cold formed bar TRUE - Cold formed bar
CLB CLS CLT DAG
3 cm 3 cm 3 cm 2 cm
Clear cover for bottom reinforcement Clear cover for side reinforcement Clear cover for top reinforcement Maximum diameter of aggregate, in current units. Beam Loads and reactions in direct compressionCl-2.1.5.a.I 2nd paragraph
l l
DCP
TRUE
FALSE - Loads applied indirectly TRUE - Direct compression
DEPTH
YD
Depth of concrete member, in current units. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
l
DIM
TRUE
FALSE: Not precautions taken Section reduction to section 1.5 NTC Concrete TRUE: Precautions are taken to assure dimensions
Parameter Name DSD
Default Value
Parameters
TRUE
Ductile frames in accordance with Section 5 of the code. Some design conditions are considered (not including, for the time being, geometric or confinement ones)
l l
FALSE - Non-Ductile frames TRUE - Ductile Frames
EFACE
Face to support location of end of beam. If specified, for shear force at start is computed at a distance of EFACE+d from the start joint of the member. Positive number. Exposition to soil or weather to define cover and min Steel reinforcement
l
EXP
FALSE
FALSE - Not exposed to soil or weather TRUE - Exposed to soil or weather
FC FYMAIN FYSEC
200 Kg/cm 2 4,200 Kg/cm 2 4,200 Kg/cm 2
Compressive Strength of Concrete Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel Yield Stress for secondary (stirrup) reinforcing steel Part of the longitudinal steel considered to reduce shear. 0 (zero) is conservative. Value between 1 and 0. Light Concrete to define development multipliers according to table 3.1 NTC
l l
LSS
LTC
FALSE
FALSE - Regular concrete TRUE - Lightweight concrete
MAXMAIN
12
Maximum main reinforcement bar size (Number 2 -18) Minimum main reinforcement bar size (Number 2 -18)
MINMAIN
2.5
588 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name MINSEC
Default Value
Parameters
2.5
Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size(Number 2 -18) Moment magnification factor for columns, about My. Moment magnification factor for columns, about Mz. Concrete modulus of elasticiy.
MMY
1.0
MMZ
1.0
MOE
198,000 Kg/cm 2 12
NSECTION
Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moments for beam design Stirrups angle with the axis of the element Slab beared perimeter. To calculate min steel required according to 2.1.2 Tied Column. A value of 1 will mean spiral. Face to support location of start of beam. If specified, for shear force at start is computed at a distance of SFACE+d from the start joint of the member. Positive number Beam needed for torsional equilibrium Cl.2.1.6a) 2nd paragraph
l l
PHI
90 degrees
PSS
TRUE
REINF
SFACE
TEQ
FALSE
FALSE - No TRUE - Yes
Default Value
Parameters
Beam Design 0. Critical Moment will not be printed out with beam design report. 1. Will mean a print out. 2. Will print out required steel areas for all intermediate sections specified by NSECTION. Column Design 0. Will print out detailed design results. 1. Will mean a print out column interation analysis results in addition to TRACK 0 output. 2. will print out a schematic interaction diagram and intermediate interaction values in addition to all of the above.
WIDTH
ZD
Width of concrete member, in current units. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.
Note: When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters in actual
mm units instead of the barnumber. The following metric bar sizes are available: 4.2mm, 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm.
13A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to locate the possible critical sections. The total number of sections considered is 12 (twelve) unless this number is redefined with an NSECTION parameter. All of these equally spaced sections are scanned to determine moment and shear envelopes.
590 STAAD.Pro

Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of the section properties provided by the user. If the section dimensions are inadequate to carry the applied load, that is if the required reinforcement is greater than the maximum allowable for the cross section, the program reports that beam fails in maximum reinforcement. Rectangular sections are also designed with compression reinforcement. Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of main reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar sizes for the stirrups and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections 1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC Concrete are utilized to obtain the actual amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and ROWMN in the output and can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 13A.1). In addition, the maximum, minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed. It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the flexural design.

Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear forces are calculated at a distance (d+SFACE) and (d+EFACE) away from the end nodes of the beam. SFACE and EFACE have default values of zero unless provided under parameters (see Table 13A.1). Note that the value of the effective depth "d" used for this purpose is the update value and accounts for the actual c.g. of the main reinforcement calculated under flexural design. Clauses 2.1.5-6 and 5.2.4 of NTC Concrete are used to calculate the reinforcement for shear forces and torsional moments. Based on the total stirrup reinforcement required, the size of bars, the spacing, the number of bars and the distance over which they are provided are calculated. Stirrups due to geometric conditions are assumed to be 2-legged, due to design conditions could be 2 or 4-legged.
13A.5.3 Design for Anchorage

In the output for flexural design, the anchorage details are also provided. At any particular level, the START and END coordinates of the layout of the main reinforcement is described along with the information whether anchorage in the form of a hook or continuation is required or not at these START and END points. Note that the coordinates of these START and END points are obtained after taking into account the anchorage requirements. Anchorage length is calculated on the basis of the Clauses described in Section 3.1 of NTC concrete. In case the program selects 2 different diameters for the main or compression reinforcement, only the anchorage for the largest diameter is analyzed.
13A.5.4 Output
Level Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group
Height Height of bar level from the bottom of the beam Bar Info Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and bar size From Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcement bar To Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcement bar Anchor (STA/END) States whether anchorage, either hook or continuation, is needed at the start (STA) or at the end (END). Row Actually required flexural reinforcement (As/bd) where b = width of cross section (ZD for a rectangular or square section) and d = effective depth of cross section (YD minus the distance from extreme tension fiber to the centroid of main reinforcement). ROWMN Minimum required flexural reinforcement (Amin/bd) ROWMX Maximum required flexural reinforcement (Amax/bd) Spacing Distance between centers of adjacent bars of main reinforcement Vu Factored shear force at section Vc Nominal shear strength provided by concrete Vs Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement Tu Factored torsional moment at section Tc Nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete Ts Nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
Example Output for Beam Design

===================================================================== BEAM NO. 2 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE PER CODE NTC FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES,DDF LEN - 6000.00(mm) FY 412. FC 20. SIZE - 253.75 X 253.75(mm) LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR (mm) (mm) (mm) STA END _____________________________________________________________________
592 STAAD.Pro
1 2
42. 212.
5 - 2.MM 5 - 2.MM
2468. 0.
6000. 2782.
NO YES
YES NO
B E A M N O. 2 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR AT START SUPPORT - Vu= 5.63 KN Vc= 0.00 KN Vs= 0.00 KN Tu= 0.09 Kn Me Tc= 0.00 Kn Me Ts= 0.00 Kn Me LOAD STIRRUPS ARE NOT REQUIRED. AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 5.63 KN Vc= 0.00 KN Vs= 0.00 KN Tu= 0.09 Kn Me Tc= 0.00 Kn Me Ts= 0.00 Kn Me LOAD STIRRUPS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
13A.6 Column Design

Columns design in STAAD per the Mexican code is performed for axial force and uniaxial as well as biaxial moments. All active loadings are checked to compute reinforcement. The loading which produces the largest amount of reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and circular sections, reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on all faces. This means that the total number of bars for these sections will always be a multiple of four (4). If the MMAGx & -MMAGy parameters are specified, the column moments are multiplied by the corresponding MMAG value to arrive at the ultimate moments on the column. Minimum eccentricity conditions to be satisfied according to section 2.1.3.a are checked. Method used: Bresler Load Contour Method Known Values: Pu, Muy, Muz, B, D, Clear cover, Fc, Fy Ultimate Strain for concrete : 0.003 Steps involved: 1. Assume some reinforcement. Minimum reinforcement (1% for ductile design or according to section 4.2.2 ) is a good amount to start with. 2. Find an approximate arrangement of bars for the assumed reinforcement. 3. Calculate PNMAX = Po, where Po is the maximum axial load capacity of the section. Ensure that the actual nominal load on the column does not exceed PNMAX. If PNMAX is less than the axial force Pu/FR, (FR is the strength reduction factor) increase the reinforcement and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the reinforcement exceeds 6% (or 4% for ductile design), the column cannot be designed with its current dimensions. 4. For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load, find the uniaxial moment capacities of the column for the Y and the Z axes, independently. These values are referred to as MYCAP and MZCAP respectively. 5. Solve the Interaction Bresler equation: (Mny /Mycap ) +(Mnz/Mzcap ) Where = 1.24. If the column is subjected to uniaxial moment: = 1 6. If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement with available bar sizes, find
the uniaxial capacities and solve the interaction equation again. If the equation is satisfied now, the reinforcement details are written tothe output file. 7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed reinforcement is increased (ensuring that it is under 6% or 4% respectively)and steps 2 to 6 are repeated. By the moment to check shear and torsion for columns the sections have to be checked as beams and the most strict of both shear and torsion reinforcement adopted.
13A.7 Column Interaction

The column interaction values may be obtained by using the design parameter TRACK 1.0 or TRACK 2.0 for the column member. If a value of 2.0 is used for the TRACK parameter, 12 different Pn-Mn pairs, each representing a different point on the Pn-Mn curve are printed. Each of these points represents one of the several Pn-Mn combinations that this column is capable of carrying about the given axis, for the actual reinforcement that the column has been designed for. In the case of circular columns, the values are for any of the radial axes. The values printed for the TRACK 1.0 output are:
l l l l l l l l
P0 = Maximum allowable pure axial load on the column (moment zero). Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column. P_bal = Axial load capacity of balanced strain condition. M_bal = Uniaxial moment capacity of balanced strain condition. E_bal = M_bal / P_bal = Eccentricity of balanced strain condition. M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load. P_tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column. Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the axial load for the critical load case. Des.Mnx = Mux*MMAGx/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Mu is the bending moment for the appropriate axis for the critical load case. Mu = (Mux.Mmagx)+ (Muy.Mmagy) e/h = (Mn/Pn)/h where h is the length of the column
l l
13A.8 Column Design Output

The next table illustrates different levels of the column design output. The output is generated without any TRACK specification:
==================================================================== COLUMN NO. 1 DESIGN PER MEX NTC-87 - AXIAL + BENDING FY - 411.9 FC - 19.6 MPa SQRE SIZE 25.4 x 25.4 (mm) TIED AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 626.700 BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI ---------------------------------------------------------4 - NUMBER 5 1.230 1 END 0.700 (PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS ON EACH FACE)
594 STAAD.Pro
TRACK=1 generates the following additional output:

COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z/Y -AXIS (Kg-cm ) -------------------------------------------------------P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(cm) 2095196.38 2095196.38 727411.12 29235398.00 40.2 M0 P-tens. Des.Pn 'Des.Mn e/h 20606994.00 -550620.00 0.00 20000000.00 NaN --------------------------------------------------------
TRACK=2 generates the following output in addition to all the above:

Pn Mn Pn Mn | 1934027.38 5373253.50 967013.69 27278232.00 P0 |* 1772858.50 11408365.00 805844.75 28658428.00 | * 1611689.50 16296947.00 644675.81 29473708.00 20083028.00 483506.84 28901764.00
Pn,max|__* 1450520.62 | * 1289351.62
23117562.00 322337.91 27205616.00
Pn | * 1128182.62 25462606.00 161168.95 24433192.00 NOMINAL| * AXIAL| * COMPRESSION| * Pb|-------*Mb | * ___________|____*_______ | * M0 Mn, | * BENDING
P-tens|* MOMENT
13A.9 Slab Design

Slabs are designed per Mexican NTC specifications. To design a slab, it must be modeled using finite elements. Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of the element. Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is not performed at any other point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked with Q. A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLB, CLS, CLT, DIM, and EXP listed in Table 11A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned are not used in slab design.
13A.9.1 Example Output for Element Design

ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY ---------------------ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD (SQ.MM/MM) (KN-MM/MM) (SQ.MM/MM) (KN-MM/MM) 47 TOP : Longitudinal direction - Only minimum steel required. 47 TOP : Transverse direction - Only minimum steel required. 47 TOP : 0.205 0.00 / 0 0.205 0.00 / 0 BOTT: 0.254 10.44 / 1 0.362 13.35 / 1 47 SHEAR CAPACITY 57.06 KN ***PASS*** FOR LOAD CASE 3 ***** INDICATES REINFORCEMENT EXCEEDS MAXIMUM ***************************END OF ELEMENT DESIGN***************************
596 STAAD.Pro
13B. Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per NTC 1987

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Mexican code NTC 1987 (Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para Diseo y construccin de Estructuras Metlicas) (Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures Dec. 1987) or the Reglamento de Construcciones para el Distrito Federal (Mexican Construction Code for the Federal District Aug. 1993). Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD Latin American Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
13B.1 General
The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance Method or Limit States Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD). Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, and stability. It allows to check deformation to verify serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that main code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as implemented in STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental concepts is presented here.
13B.2 Limit States Design Fundamentals

The primary objective of the Limit States Design Specification is to provide a uniform reliability for all steel structures under various loading conditions. The Limit States Design Method uses separate factors for each load and resistance. Because the different factors reflect the degree of uncertainty of different loads and combinations of loads and of the accuracy of predicted strength, a more uniform reliability is possible. The method may be summarized by the inequality Yi Qi Rn FR
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the various load effects, Q , multiplied by their respective load factors, Y . The design strength, on the right i i side, is the nominal strength or resistance, R , multiplied by a resistance factor, FR.
n
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the user will use appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary for analysis. The design portion of the program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and moments) obtained from analysis. In calculation of resistances of various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically considered.
13B.3 Member End Forces and Moments

Member end forces and moments in the member result from loads applied to the structure. These forces are in the local member coordinate system. the following figures show the member end actions with their directions. Refer to Section 1.19 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.

The Limit States Design specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as compact (type 2), noncompact (type 3), or slender element (type 4), sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics, besides sections type 1 are able for plastic design. This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the standard shapes and design accordingly.
13B.5 Member in Axial Tension

The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 13B.1), that always refers to the gross section. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or code check accordingly. In addition to the tension resistance criterion, the user defines if tension members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
13B.6 Axial Compression

The column strength equations take into account inelastic deformation and other recent research in column behavior. Two equations governing column strength are available, one for
598 STAAD.Pro
inelastic buckling and the other for elastic or Euler buckling. Both equations include the effects of residual stresses and initial out-of-straightness. Compression strength for a particular member is calculated by STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Section 3.2 of the NTC. For slender elements, the procedure described in Section 2.3.6.NTC is also used. The procedures of Section 3.2 of the Commentaries, design helps and examples of the Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures (de los Comentarios, ayudas de diseo y ejemplos de las Normas Tcnicas Complementarias para el Diseo y Construccin de Estructuras Metlicas, DDF (Comentarios - Julio 1993) were implemented for the determination of design strength for these limit states. Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, LZ. If not provided, the entire member length will be taken into consideration. In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression members are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
13B.7 Flexural Design Strength

In the Limit States Design Method, the flexural design strength of a member is determined mainly by the limit state of lateral torsional buckling. Inelastic bending is allowed and the basic measure of flexural capacity is the plastic moment capacity of the section. The flexural resistance is a function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally unbraced length, limiting laterally unbraced length, buckling moment and the bending coefficient. The limiting laterally unbraced length Lu and flexural resistance Mr are functions of the section geometry and are calculated as per the procedure of Section 3.3.2 of the NTC. The purpose of bending coefficient Cb is to account for the influence of the moment gradient on lateral-torsional buckling. This coefficient can be specified by the user through the use of parameter CB or CBy (see Table 11B.1) or may be calculated by the program (according to LRDF USA specification) if CB is specified as 0.0. In the absence of the parameter CB, a default value of 1.0 will be used. To specify laterally unsupported length, either of the parameters UNL and UNF (see Table 10B.1) can be used. It is taken into account the reduction of flexural resistance due to slender web according to section 4.5.8 of the NTC For the sections where the web and flange are slender the LRDF USA specification was used. Stress areas due to bending about y axis (MY)
Note: The local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards; the
shaded area indicates area under compression; the area not shaded indicates area under tension. Stress areas due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
13B.8 Design for Shear

The procedure of Sect. 3.3.3 of the NTC is used in STAAD to design for shear forces in members. Besides combined bending and shear is checked according to section 3.3.4 of the NTC, considering also the limits for stiffeners of the web according to sections 4.5.6/7 of the NTC. Shear in wide flanges and channel sections is resisted by the area of the web/s..
13B.9 Combined Compression Axial Force and Bending

The interaction of flexure and axial forces in singly and doubly symmetric shapes is governed by formulas of the Section 3.4 of the NTC. These interaction formulas cover the general case of biaxial bending combined with axial force. They are also valid for uniaxial bending and axial force.
600 STAAD.Pro
It is considered that the frames are part of structures that have shear walls or rigid elements so that the lateral displacements of a floor could be disregarded. The program has included formulas to include structures with lateral displacements in the future considering for B2 the columns individually and not the complete floor analysis. It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are angularly restrained.
13B.10 Combined Tension Axial Force and Bending

Based on Section 3.5 4 of the NTC.

Design per Mexican Standards is requested by using the CODE. Other applicable parameters are summarized in Table 11B.1 below. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure. The parameters DMAX and DMIN may only be used for member selection only. Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 13B.1-Design Parameters According to Mexican NTC Standards - Steel Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as MEXICAN. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
0: Design at ends and those locations specified by SECTION command. 1: Design at ends and at every y cada 1/12th point along member length
Parameter Name CB
Default Value
Description
Coefficient C defined per section 3.3.2.2. If Cb is set to 0.0 it will be calculated by the program according to LRFD USA (CbMex=1/CbUSA). Any other value will be directly used in the design. Cfactor for combined forces when there are transverse loads in the members. Section 3.4.3.3.ii of NTC CMB 1.0 = Members ends are restricted angularly. CMB0.85 = Members ends are not restricted angularly.
CMB
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check, TRACK 4.0) Start Joint of member
"Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable local deflection See Note 1 below. Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length ." See Note 1 below.
DJ1
DJ2
End Joint of member
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length." See Note 1 below.
DMAX DMIN
114 cm 0.0 cm
Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth
602 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DSD
Default Value
Description
Perform the ductile seismic design in accordance with Section 11 (True or False). Main design conditions are considered (not including, at the moment, geometric ones)
FU FYLD IMM
4,230 Kg/cm 2 2,530 kg/cm 2 0
Ultimate tensile strength of steel Minimum Yield strength of steel Main or secondary member for the purpose of checking slenderness 0. Main member 1. Secondary and wind trusses
INO
Curve Definition according to NTC.3.2.2.1a, defined for I shapes or tubes 0. n=1.4, laminated I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plates obtained from wider plates cuts with oxygen. 1. n=1,I shapes, tubes or built up with 3 or 4 welded plates
IRR
Variable defined for the whole structure indicating if it is regular or irregular according to section 3.4 of the NTC. 0. Columns that are part of regular structures 1. Columns that are part of irregular structures
KX
1.0
Effective length factor for flexural-torsional buckling
Parameter Name KY
Default Value
Description
1.0
Effective length factor for local Y axis- Usually minor axis Effective length factor for local Z axis- Usually major axis Defines if the structure has elements to bear the wind load (shear walls, wind trusses, or bracing rigid elements ) that restrict lateral displacements and allow to disregard slenderness effects. (True or False) Length fordetermining flexuraltorsional buckling Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Z axis. Net section factor for tension members Permissible ratio of actual load effect and design strength Spacing of stiffeners for beams for shear design Controls the level of detail in output 0. = Suppress all design strengths 1. = Print all design strengths 2. = Print expanded design output
KZ
1.0
LDR
LX
Member length
LY
Member length
LZ
Member length
NSF
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
Longer of Member length or depth 0
TRACK
604 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name UNB
Default Value
Description
Member length
Unsupported length (L) of the bottom* flange for calculating flexural strength . Will be used only if compression is in the bottom flange. See Note 2 below.
UNT
Member length
Unsupported length (L) of the top* flange for calculating flexural strength . Will be used only if compression is in the top flange. See Note 2 below.
1. For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 from Table 2B.1 may be used. All requirements remain the same. 2. Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local Z axis if SET Z UP is used).

Both code checking and member selection options are available in STAAD Mexican Standards implementation. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the Mexican NTC which governed the design. If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be printed out.
606 STAAD.Pro
Section 14
Norwegian Codes
608 STAAD.Pro
14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Norwegian code NS 3472 Steel structures. Design rules (3rd Edition) and NPD 1993 Veiledning om utforming, beregning og dimensjonering av stalkonstruksjoner. Sist enderet 1. (Guidance on the design, calculation and dimensioning of figures constructions. Revision 1). Design of members per NS 3472 / NPD requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
14A.1 - General Notes

This user manual presents a description of the design basis, parameters and theory applied to STAAD.Pro for performing code checks according to NS 3472 ref. [1] and NPD ref. [5]. The code checks include:
l l l l
stability check (buckling) lateral buckling check yield check (von Mises) stability check including local plate buckling of un-stiffened pipe walls according to NPD
The code check is available for the following cross-section types:

l l l l l l l
wide flange profiles (HEA, HEB, IPE etc.) pipe (OD xx ID xx) tube (RHS, HUP) channel angle type (only RA) rectangular massive box (prismatic) user table (wide flange, I-sections, tapered I, tube, channel and RA angle)
The code check is not available for the following cross-section types:
l l l l
Double angles Tapered tubes Prismatic sections with too few section parameters defined Other sections that are not in the available list above
Please note the following:

l
NS 3472 and NPD code checking covered in this document are available through two separate STAAD.Pro Code check packages.
This document is not a lecture in use of NS 3472 or NPD. This document explains how, and which parts of, the Norwegian steel codes that have been implemented in STAAD.Pro. When L-sections are used, the Code Check requires RA angle definition. Weld design is not included in the Norwegian code checks. The prismatic section defined in the code check (rectangular massive box) is not identical to the general prismatic profile defined in the STAAD.Pro analysis package.
l l l
EDR does not accept any liability for loss or damage from or in consequence for use of the program.
14A.1.1 Nomenclature
NS - refers to NS 3472 ref. [1] NS2 - refers to NS 3472 ref. [6] NPD - refers to NPD94 ref. [5]
14A.1.2 References
1. NS 3472 3.utg. 2001 Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner Beregning og dimensjonering 2. STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual, Release 2002 3. NS 3472 1.utg. 1973 Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner Beregning og dimensjonering 4. Roark &Young`s 5th edition 5. NPD utg. 1994 Veiledning om utforming, beregning og dimensjonering av stlkonstruksjoner. Sist endret 1. oktober 1993. 6. NS 3472 2.utg.1984 Prosjektering av stlkonstruksjoner Beregning og dimensjonering
14A.2 - Basis for Code Checking

This section presents general information regarding the implementation of the Norwegian codes of practice for structural steel design. This manual describes the procedures and theory
610 STAAD.Pro
used for both NS and NPD. In general NS is used for all cross sections and shapes listed in section 1 of this manual. An exception is the treatment and check of pipe members in framed structures. NS does not give specific details about the treatment of pipes. Section 3.4 explains how this is adopted when NS is selected for code checking. The NPD however have a more thorough check of pipe members, and consider the effect of local buckling of the pipe wall in conjunction with the stability check. In addition, the NPD code gives joint capacity formulae for brace to chord connections for pipe members. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l l
failure by overstressing failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or capacities and the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like the provision of stiffeners and check the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc. The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters listed in Table 2.1. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most circumstances. However, the user should control the design and verify results through the use of the design parameters.
14A.2.1 Calculation of Forces and Bending Moments

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary loading conditions and combinations provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary load combinations.
14A.2.2 Members with Axial Forces

For tension only members, axial tension capacity is checked for the ultimate limit stress. For compression members, axial compression capacity is checked in addition to lateral buckling and ultimate limit stress. The largest slenderness ratio () shall not be greater than 250 according to NS 11.7 Stability is checked as per the procedure of NS 12.3. The buckling curves of NS fig. 3 have been incorporated into the STAAD.Pro code check. The coefficient (as per NS Table 10) can be specified in both directions through the use of parameters CY and CZ. In the absence of parameters CY and /or CZ, default a- value will be according to NS table 11.
14A.2.3 Members with Axial Force and Bending Moments

For compression members with bending, interaction formulae of NS table 12.3.4.2 are checked for appropriate loading situation. All compression capacities are calculated per the procedure of NS 12.3. The equivalent moment factor is calculated using the procedure of NS table 12. Two different approaches are used depending upon whether the members can sway or not. Conditions for sidesway and transverse loading can be specified through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. For members that cannot sway, without transverse loading, coefficients b are calculated and proper dimensioning moments are used in the interaction formulae.
14A.2.4 Lateral Buckling

Lateral torsional buckling is checked as per the procedure of NS 12.3.4. The procedure for calculation of ideal buckling moment for sections with two axis of symmetry has been implemented. The coefficient can be provided by the user through the use of parameter CB. In the absence of CB, a value of 1.0 will be used. Torsional properties for cross sections (torsional constant and warping constant) are calculated using formulae from NS 3472. This results in slightly conservative estimates of torsional parameters. The program will automatically select the maximum moment in cases where Mvd is less than Mzd.
14A.2.5 Von Mises Yield Criterion

Combined effect of axial, bending, horizontal/vertical shear and torsional shear stress is calculated at 13 sections on a member and up to 9 critical points at a section. The worst stress value is checked against yield stress divided by appropriate material factor. The von Mises calculates as:
j =
(x + by + bz)
+ 3(x + y + z)
fy m
14A.2.6 Material factor and nominal stresses

The design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic material strength by the material factor.
NS 3472
The material factor default value is 1.10. Other values may be input with the MF parameter. The nominal stresses should satisfy
j
fy m
= fd
612 STAAD.Pro
NPD
The general requirement is according to NPD 3.1.1. For stability the NPD 3.1.1 and 3.1.3 requires that the structural coefficient is considered.
S d fkd =
fk m mk (S d)
Where: S = reference stress or load effect resultant

d
f = characteristic capacity
k
kd m
= design capacity = material coefficient = structural coefficient
mk
is default set to 1.10.
shall be equal to 1.0 for frames. For pipe members is a function of the reduced mk mk slenderness. In the STAAD.Pro implemented NPD code this is calculated automatically.
14A.2.7 Code checking according to NPD

The following parts of Chapter 3 in the NPD guidelines have been implemented. a. Control of nominal stresses. (NPD 3.1.2). b. Buckling of pipe members in braced frames, including interaction with local shell buckling (NPD 3.2.2, 3.2.3). c. Buckling of un-stiffened closed cylindrical shells, including interaction with overall column buckling (NPD 3.4.4, 3.4.6, 3.4.7 and 3.4.9). d. Joint capacity check for gap as well as for overlap joints (NPD 3.5.2). Check b) provides the unity check based on the beam-column buckling interaction formulae in NPD 3.2.2. The interaction between global and local buckling due to axial load and hydrostatic pressure is accounted for through computation of an axial characteristic capacity to replace the yield stress inn the beam-column buckling formulae.
Note: Check b) handles members subjected to axial loads, bending moments and
hydrostatic pressure. In other words, check b) assumes that stresses resulting from shear and torsion are of minor importance, e.g., in jacket braces. Check c) provides the unity check based on the stability requirement for un-stiffened cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression or tension, bending, circumferential compression or tension, torsion or shear. The unity check refers to the interaction formulae in NPD 3.4.4.1. The stability requirement is given in NPD 3.4.7.
14A.2.8 Aluminum Check

STAAD.Pro performs a stability check on aluminum alloys according to buckling curve in ECCS (European recommendation for aluminum ally structures 1978). It is possible to select heat-treated or non heat-treated alloy from the parameter list in the STAAD.Pro input file. For heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.1590, and for non heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.2420. Tracks 1.0 and 9.0 print buckling curve H for heat-treated, and buckling curve N for non neat-treated. The yield check is the same as for steel.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Table 14A.1-Design Parameters for Norwegian Steel design code Parameter Name CODE Default Value none Description Reference
Must be secified as either NS3472 for NS or NPD for NPD (NOR may also be used for both). Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
0.0
Parameter BEAM 1.0 ALL tells the program to calculate von Mises at 13 sections along each member, and up to 8 points at each section. (Depending on what kind of shape is used.)
Sec. NS 12.2.2
Note: Must be set to 1.0

BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, for weak axis buckling (y-y) (NOTE: BY > 0.0) Fig. NS 3 Sec. NS 12.3
BZ
1.0
Buckling length coefficient, , for Fig. NS 3 strong axis buckling (z-z) (NOTE: BZ Sec. NS > 0.0) 12.3
614 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name CB
Default Value 1.0
Description
Reference
Lateral buckling coefficient, Y. Used to calculate the ideal buckling moments, M

vi
Sec. NS2 A5.5.2 Fig. NS2 A5.5.2a)-e) Valid for the NPD code only Sec. NS 12.3.4 Fig. NS 6. Fig. NS 3 Sec. NS 12.2 NS Table 11
CMY
1.0
Water depth in meters for hydrostatic pressure calculation for pipe members for sections in connection with LT lateral buckling
CMZ
0.49
CY CZ
Default see NS 3472
Buckling curve coefficient, a about local z-axis (strong axis). Represent the a, a0, b, c, d curve.
DMAX
100.0 [cm] 0.0 [cm]
Maximum allowable depth of steel section. Minimum allowable depth of steel section. Yield strength of steel, fy (St37) [N/mm2 ] Tab. NS 3
DMIN
FYLD
235
MF
1.1 Material factor / Resistance factor, m (NS3472) 1.15 (NPD) 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. 0.0 = No sidesway. calculated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis =SSY
M
Sec. NS 10.4.2 Sec. NPD 3.1
RATIO
Sec. NS 12.3.4.2 Sec. NS 12.3.4 Tab. NS 12 Sec. NPD 3.2.1.4 Sec. NS 12.3.4 Tab. NS 12 Sec NPD 3.2.1.4
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
0.0 = No sidesway. calculated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis
M
Default Value 0.0
Description
Reference
Controls the level of detail in the output: 0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses. 1.0 = Print all critical member stresses, i.e., DESIGN VALUES 2.0 = Print von Mises stresses. 9.0 = Large output, 1 page for each member. See "- Tabulated Results" on page 648 for complete list of available TRACKs and print examples.
UNL
Member length
Effective length for lateral buckling calculations (specify buckling length). Distance between fork supports or between effective side supports for the beam
Sec. NS 12.3
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters. The parameter CB defines the value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
14A.3.1 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the
Norwegian steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* CODE CHECK ACCORDING TO NS3472 PARAMETERS CODE NS3472 BEAM 1.0 ALL FYLD 340 ALL MF 1.10 ALL CY 0.49 MEMB 1
616 STAAD.Pro
CZ 0.49 MEMB 1 BY 0.9 MEMB 1 BZ 0.7 MEMB 1 SSY 1.1 MEMB 1 SSZ 1.3 MEMB 1 CB 0.9 MEMB 1 RATIO 1.0 ALL TRACK 9.0 ALL UNIT KNS METER LOAD LIST 1 CHECK CODE MEMB 1 FINISH
14A.4 Stability Check According to NS 3472

The stability check is based on the assumption that both ends of the member are structural nodes. Buckling lengths and results for member with joints between the structural nodes have to be evaluated in each separate case. Effects from local buckling or external hydrostatic pressure on pipes and tubes are not included. The general stability criteria is: (ref. NS 12.3)
14A.4.1 Buckling
nmax + kz mz + ky my 1
14A.4.2 Lateral Buckling

n y
+ kLT
mz LT
+ k ym y 1
Where: i = z,y nmax = n/min n = Nf/Nd min = min(z,y ) i = Nkd,i/Nd

ki = 1i
n i m
1.5
i = i(2Mi - 4) 0.9
Mi
ref. NS Tab. 12
kLT = 1 LT
n y m
1.0
LT = 0.15(y M - 1) 0.9 i = i/1 i = Lki/ii

i = i =
E fy 1 +
2 2
= 0.5[1 + ( - 0.2) +2 ] ref. NS Tab 10 & 11

LT =
1
2 LT + LT LT 2
2 LT = 0.51 + LT 0.4 + LT
ref. NS sec. 12.3.4.1

LT =
W zfz M cr
Mcr = Mvio ref. NS2 A5.5.2 Sect. a - d

M vio =
L
EI zGIT 1 +
EC w L 2 GI T
14A.4.3 Determination of and

z
The equivalent moment factor (for z and y) is calculated dependant on moment distributions as shown in the following table: Table 14A.2- for different moment distributions Moment diagram
M
= 1.8 - 0.7
( )
LT
618 STAAD.Pro
Moment diagram
M0
= 1.3
( )
LT
M0
= 1.4
M = M , +
M0 M
M,0
M ,
M0 = |Mmax | due to transverse load only M = |Mmax | if the moment has the same sign M = |Mmax | + |Mmin | if the moment changes sign
The user can override the calculated factor with the following parameters: y =SSY z=SSZ
14A.4.4 Lateral buckling

The Ideal lateral buckling moment is calculated according to NS2 A5.5.2
M vi = M vio = L95
E L
I Ix 1 +
L2
2.6C w Ix
concern double symmetric cross sections where y is given in NS fig. A5.5.2, (input parameter CB), L = member length for lateral buckling (input parameter UNL), Cw and Ix , see section 5. For single symmetric cross sections, the ideal lateral buckling moment is
M vix =
2EI y L
2
5a
2
rx 3
2 5a ys + C 2 2 +
rx 3
ys
Where:
C2 =
C w + 0.039L 2I T Iy
= distance from profile CoG to point where the load is acting, assumed to be on top flange. The parameter (ref NS fig. A5.5.2.g) is controlled by the input parameter CB.
Figure 14A.1 - -coefficients for a simple span beam
620 STAAD.Pro
Figure 14A.2 - -coefficients for a partially restrained beam
Figure 14A.3 - -coefficients for a fully restrained beam
622 STAAD.Pro
Figure 14A.4 - -coefficients for the cantilevered beam with single loads and distributed loads. Dashed curves apply load on the surface.
14A.4.5 Stability check of pipe members

The stability criteria applied for members with pipe cross section is:
2 My Mz + + 1.0 M 1 N N M 1 d d N Ezd N Eyd 2
IR =
N N kd
Where:
N N kd
N N = max , N kzd N kyd
M and M are given in NS 5.4.2.

z z
For the print output option TRACK 9.0 K
1.0 and M
vd
14A.4.6 Angle profiles type RA (reverse angle)

The axial contribution to the total interaction ratio is checked according to the modified EECS-method, see NS A5.4. The stability criterion is:
IR =
N N kd
My N M yd1 N Eyd
Mz N M zd1 N Ezd
1.0
Where:
N N kd
N N = max , N kzd N kyd

kzd
kyd
and N
are found from NS 3472 fig. 5.4.la C-curve for y- and z-axis, respectively.
For (2) eff = 0.60 +0.57 For > (2) eff = Where:
=
k fy E
k = lk /i
i = I/ A
Possible lateral buckling effects and torsional buckling (NS A5.4.5) is not included in the code check. This has to be evaluated by the user separately.
14A.4.7 Stability check of members with tapered section

Stability of members with tapered cross section is calculated as described in section 3.1. The cross section properties used in the formulae are calculated based on the average profile height. (i.e., I , I values are taken from the middle of the member.)
z y
14A.4.8 Lateral buckling for tension members

When compressive stress caused by large bending moment about strong axis is greater than tension stress from axial tension force, lateral buckling is considered as defined below. a = N/A (+ tension, - compression) bz = Mz/W z Mwarp = | a + b | W z for a + b < 0 (compression) IR = Mwarp /Mvd + My,max /Myd 1.0
624 STAAD.Pro
14A.5 - Stability Check According to NPD

14A.5.1 Buckling of pipe members
Tubular beam-columns subjected to compression and lateral loading or end moments shall be designed in accordance with NPD 3.2.2
2 cmk + B * b + (B z bz) + (B y by) 2 fy m
Where: = N/A = axial compressive stress

c
mk
= structural coefficient
z y
B = bending amplification factor = 1/ (1 - ), B is taken as the larger of B and B B = bending amplification factor about the Z-axis
z
B = bending amplification factor about the Y-axis

y
= c / fE fE =
2E 2 lk
2
i = I/ A * b = c
fy fk
1 1
fk mfE
l = kl
k
k = effective length factor f = characteristic buckling capacity according to NS fig. 5.4.1a, curve A.
k
14A.5.2 Interaction with local buckling, NPD 3.2.3

If the below conditions are not satisfied, the yield strength will be replaced with characteristic buckling stress given in NPD 3.4. a. members subjected to axial compression and external pressure
d t
0.5
E fy
b. members subjected to axial compression only

d t
0.1
E fy
14A.5.3 Calculation of buckling resistance of cylinders

The characteristic buckling resistance is defined in accordance with NPD 3.4.4
fk =
fy 1+
4
Where:
=
2 f y ao j fea
b0 feb
p 0 fep
fe
2 j = (a + b)2 a + b p + p + 3 2
0 when
a
a0 = 0 < 0 when
a
a0 = -a 0 when
b
b0 = 0 < 0 when
b
b0 = -b 0 when
p
p0 = 0 < 0 when
p
p0 = p = design axial stress in the shell due to axial forces (tension positive)
a
= design bending stress in the shell due to global bending moment (tension
b
positive) = = design circumferential stress in the shell due to external pressure p (tension positive) = design shear stress in the shell due to torsional moments and shear force.
S
f , f , f and f are the elastic buckling resistances of curved panels or circular ea eb ep e cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression forces, global bending moments, lateral pressure, and torsional moments and/or shear forces respectively.
14A.5.4 Elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened, closed cylinders

The elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened closed cylinders according to NPD 3.4.6 is:
fe = k
12 1 t ( ( ) l)
2
2E
626 STAAD.Pro
where k is a buckling coefficient dependent on loading condition, aspect ratio, curvature, boundary conditions, and geometrical imperfections. The buckling coefficient is:
k = 1+
( )
p 2
The values of , , and p are given in Table 4.1 for the most important loading cases. Table 14A.3-Table 4.1 Buckling coefficients for un-stiffened cylindrical shells Axial or Bending stress Torsion and shear force Lateral pressure Hyrdostatic pressure The curvature parameter is defined by
Z=
1 rt
2
0.702 Z 0.856 Z0.75 1.04 Z0.5 1.04 Z0.5

0.5 1 +
1 5.34 4 2
r 0.5 150t
0.6
1 2
For long shells the elastic buckling resistance against shear stresses is independent of shell length. For cases with:
1 r
> 3.85
r t
the elastic buckling resistance may be taken as:

fep = 0.25E
( rt )
14A.5.5 Stability requirements

The stability requirement for curved panels and un-stiffened cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression or tension, bending, circumferential compression or tension, torsion or shear is given by NPD 3.4.7: j < fkd where the design buckling resistance is
fkd =
fk m mk
14A.5.6 Column buckling, NPD 3.4.9

For long cylindrical shells it is possible that interaction between shell buckling and overall column buckling may occur because second-order effects of axial compression alter the stress distribution as compared to that calculated from linear theory. It is necessary to take this
effect into account in the shell buckling analysis when the reduced slenderness of the cylinder as a column exceeds 0,2 according to NPD 3.4.4.1. shall be increased by an additional compressive stress which may be taken as:
b
= Ba
fy fk
1 1
fk fe
+ B 1 b
Where:
B=
1 1
= fy / fe fe =
E 2
2
= slenderness of the cylinder as a column. B, , , and are calculated in accordance with NPD 3.2.2.
a b
14A.6 Yield Check

The yield check is performed at member ends and at 11 equally spaced intermediate sections along the member length. At each section the following forces are applied: F max. axial force along member
x
F actual shear in local y-direction at section

y z
F actual shear in local z-direction at section M max. torsional moment along member
x
M actual bending about local y-axis at section

y z
M actual bending about local z-axis at section For all profiles other than angle sections absolute values of the stresses are used. For double symmetric profiles there will always be one stress point. The stresses are calculated in several stress points at each member section. At each stress point the von Mises stress is checked as follows:
2 j = 2 o + p o p + 3( x + y + z) 2 fy m
Where: tot = | x + by + bz | stress from hydrostatic pressure.

p
628 STAAD.Pro
14A.6.1 Double symmetric wide flange profile

The von Mises stress is checked at four stress points as shown in figure below.
Figure 14A.5 - Stress points checked for a wide flange section
Section Properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database
x x y z
A = h s Applied in STAAD.Pro print option PRINT MEMBER STRESSES

y
Az = (2/3) b t 2 y = Fy /Ay z = Fz/Az A and A are not used in the code check
y z
Cw =
(h t ) b t 24
2 3
ref. NS app. C3
Ty = dA z Tz = dA y
Stress calculation
General stresses are calculated as:
= x + by + bz =
Fx Ax
My Iy
z+
Mz Iz
= x + y + z =
Mx Ix
c+
V yTz I z
VzT y I y
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table: Table 14A.4-Stress calculations at selected stress points for a wide flange section Point No 1
x
by
bz
My b Iy 2 Mz b Iz 2 Mx Ix
0
t
F y bt h 2 I z 2t F y bt h 2 Mx Ix Iz s
0
Fz t b 2 I y 8t
2
Fx Ax
0 0
Mz Iz
h1 s
2 F y bt h 2 + 0.5h 1 s
Iz
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at stress point and warping resistance.
14A.6.2 Single symmetric wide flange profile and tapered section

The von Mises stress is checked at nine stress points as shown in figure below.
Figure 14A.6 - Stress points checked for a singly symmetric wide flange section
630 STAAD.Pro
Section properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database, except for tapered sections x x y z where these values are calculated for each section checked. (i.e., Iz, Iy values are taken from the middle of the member.)
A z = 2 / 3(b t + b 1 t 1) Cw =
b t b 1 t 1(h t / 2 t 1 / 2) 12 b
3 3 2
3 t +b 1 t 1
ref. NS app. C3
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 629 for equations used in section property calculations.
Stress calculation
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 629 for equations used in general stress calculations. Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
Table 14A.5-Stress calculations at selected stress points for a singly symmetric wide flange section Point No 1
x
by
bz
My b Iy 2 Mz Iz Mx Ix
0
h2 t
F y bt (h 1 + t / 2) Iz 2t
0
Fz t b 2 I y 8t
0
My b Iy 2
3 4
Fx Ax
0
Mz Iz
0 0
h1
F y bt (h 1 + t / 2) Iz s
0
Mz Iz
Mx Ix
2 F y bt h 1 + t / 2 + 0.5h 1 s
Iz
s F y b 1t 1(h 3 + t 1 / 2) Iz s
6 7
0
My b 1 Iy 2
h3
0 0
Fz t 1b 2 I y 8t 1
Mz Iz
0
My b 1 Iy 2
h4
Mx Ix
F y b 1t 1(h 3 + t 1 / 2) Iz 2t 1
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at stress point and warping resistance.
14A.6.3 Pipe profile

The von Mises stress is checked in 3 stress points as shown in figure below.
632 STAAD.Pro
Figure 14A.7 - Stress points for a pipe section
Section properties
d = D - 2t r = 0.5 ( D-t ) a = tan-1 M /M Ax = /4
y z z (D2 y
- d 2)
x
A = A = 0.5A
x z
I = 2I =/32 (D4 - d 4) I = I = /64 (D4 - d 4)

y z
Note: In the STAAD.Pro analysis package slightly different values are used
for A , A and I , however this has insignificant influence on the y z x force distribution. A = A = 0.6A
Y z
I =
x
2R3t
Stress calculation at selected stress points
14A.6.4 Tube profile

Tube sections are rectangular or quadratic hollow uniform profiles. Critical stress is checked at 5 locations as shown in figure below.
634 STAAD.Pro
Section Properties
The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.
14A.6.5 Channel profile

For channel profiles the von Mises stress is checked at 6 locations as shown in the figure below.
636 STAAD.Pro
Cross section properties
Stress calculations at selected stress points
The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.f
638 STAAD.Pro
14A.6.6 Angle profile type RA (reverse angle)

For angle profiles the von Mises check is checked at 8 stress points as shown in figure below.
Axes y and z are principal axes. Axes u and w are local axes.
Cross section properties
Section forces
The section forces from the STAAD.Pro analysis are about the principle axis y and z. The second moment of area (Ty L TZ): T =AZ
y z
T =AY
640 STAAD.Pro
An additional torsional moment is calculated based on: M = F Z4

T T y z
M = F Y4 This torsion moment is included in M if F and F exist.

x y Z
Beta-rotation of equal & unequal legged angles

Note: The order of the joint numbers in the member incidence command specifies the
direction of the local x-axis.
642 STAAD.Pro
14A.6.7 Rectangular massive box (prismatic)

Code check of the general purpose prismatic cross section defined in the STAAD.Pro analysis package is not available. The prismatic section is assumed to be a rectangular massive box and the von Mises stress is checked at 3 locations as shown in figure below.
Note: Note that b may not be much greater than h. If that is the case, define the
member with h > b and Beta angle 90 instead.
Section Properties
General Stress Calculation
ref. [4] tab. 20, case 4 at midpoint the largest side i.e., point 2
14A.7 Tubular Joint Check, NPD 3.5

For pipe members, punching shear capacity is checked in accordance with the NPD sections 3.5.1 to 3.5.2, except 3.5.2.4. The chord is defined as the member with the greater diameter in the joint. If the diameters are the same the program selects the member with the greater thickness of the two. The chord members must be collinear by 5 degrees. The punching shear run sequence is performed in two steps. The program will first identify all tubular joints and classify them as T type joints (TRACK99). The joints to be checked will be listed in a file specified in the CODE NPD parameter list, below called GEOM1. This file is used as input in the second run. The file is an editable ACSII file saved under the file name given in the CODE NPD parameter. The TRACK parameter is then set to 98 which directs the program to read from the file GEOM1 file and use it as input to the second run, i.e., the joint capacity checking. The program will check the capacity for both chord members entering the joint. The local y and z moments will be transformed into the plane defined by the joint itself and the far end joints of the brace and chord, defined as in- and out-of plane moments.
644 STAAD.Pro
The ASCII file should be edited to reflect the correct classification of the joints, gap, can or stub dimensions, yield stress and other geometric options if required. The program will not change the brace or chord definition if this is changed or modified in the input file GEOM1. See Appendix A page xx for GEOM1 example file. Joint classification parameters in the file GEOM1 are: KO K joint overlapped KG K joint with gap TY T or Y joint X X joint Input example for the classification run.
*CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS, TRACK 99 UNITS MM NEWTON PARAMETER CODE NPD GEOM1 FYLD 350 ALL TRACK 99 ALL BEAM 1.0 ALL CHECK CODE ALL
14A.7.1 Static strength of tubular joints

The basic consideration is the chord strength. The required chord wall thickness shall be determined when the other dimensions are given. The following symbols are used: T = Cord wall thickness t = Brace wall thickness R = Outer radius of chord r = Outer radius of brace = Angel between chord and considered brace D = Outer diameter of chord d = Outer diameter of brace a = Gap (clear distance) between considered brace and nearest load-carrying brace measured along chord outer surface = r/R
g = R/T g = a/D f = Yield stress

y
Q = Factor
f
Q = See table 6.1

g
Q = See table 6.1

u
Q d = See table 6.1
N = Design axial force in brace M M

IP
= Design in-plane bending moment in brace = Design out-of plane bending moment in brace
OP
N = Characteristic axial load capacity of brace (as governed by the chord k strength) M = Characteristic out-of-plane bending moment capacity of brace (as OPk governed by the chord strength)
ax IP
= Design axial stress in chord = Design in-plane bending stress in chord = Design out-of-plane bending stress in chord
OP
This section gives design formulae for simple tubular joints without overlap and without gussets, diaphragms or stiffeners. Tubular joints in a space frame structure shall satisfy:
N Nk / m
Where:
Nk = Q uQ f
f yT
2
sin
Q is given in Table 6.1 and Q is a factor to account for the nominal longitudinal stress in u f the chord. Qf = 1.0 - 0.03A2
A2 =
2 2 2 ax + IP + OP
0.64f y
646 STAAD.Pro
Table 14A.6-Values for Q Type of joint and geometry
Type of load in brace member Axial In-plane bending 5.0()
Out-of-plane bending 3.2/(1-0.81)
T and Y X K
2.5 +19 (2.7 +13)Q
0.90(2+21)Q
For > 0.6, Q = 0.3/[(1 - 0.833)] For 0.6, Q = 1.0 For 20, Qg = 1.8 - 0.la/T For > 20, Qg = 1.8 - 4g but in no case shall Q be taken as less than 1.0.
g
When 0.9, Q is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading. For cases with f tension in the chord, Qf is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading. The brace end moments shall be accounted for in the following cases: a. Out-of-plane bending moment when > 0.85 b. When the brace acts as a cantilever c. When the rotational stiffness of the connection is considered in the determination of effective buckling length, and / or the structural coefficient = 1.00 for the beammk column design of the brace or chord. See Section 3.1.3. The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to in-plane bending moment shall be determined by:
MIPk = Q uQ f
u
d f yT sin
2
Where Q is given in Table 6.1 and Qf = 1.0 - 0.045A2 The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to out-of-plane bending moment shall be determined by:
MOPk = Q uQ f
u
d f yT sin
2
Where Q is given in Table 6.1 and Qf = 1.0 - 0.021A2
For combined axial and bending loads in the brace, the following interaction equation should be satisfied:
N Nk M IP + M + IPk 2 M OP M OPk
1 m
For overlapping tubular joints without gussets, diaphragms, or stiffeners, the total load component normal to the chord, NN, shall not exceed
NN =
2f y t wl 2 Nk l1 sin + m l 3 m
where (see NPD fig. 3.10) l = circumference for that portion of the brace in contact with the chord l (actual length) l = circumference of brace contact with chord, neglecting presence of overlap N = characteristic axial load capacity of brace
k
t = the lesser of the throat thickness of the overlapping weld or the thickness t w of the thinner brace l = length as shown in NPD fig. 3.10
2
The above formula for the capacity of overlapping joints is valid only for K joints, where compression in a brace is essentially balanced by tension in brace(s) in the same side of the joint.
14A.8 - Tabulated Results

This section presents a table with the various TRACKs available with respect to print out from the code check. Example prints and explanation to the information / heading given on the print out is given in Appendix A. Table 14A.7-Available TRACK parameter values TRACK no. 0 Description
Brief print of member utilizations (2 lines for each member) sorted with highest utilized members first Based on TRACK 3 with additional information regarding stability factors and capacities Simple print of stresses, including von Mises stress Brief print of member utilizations (two lines for each member) Comprehensive print with detailed information about member and member utilization(one page for each member)
2 3 9
648 STAAD.Pro
TRACK no. 99
Description
Used in connection with tubular joint check according to NPD. This TRACK identifies tubular joints to be checked and classifies all members entering the joint as T connection Used in connection with tubular joint check according to NPD. This TRACK performs the joint capacity check Prints member end forces for members entering each joint (at the end of the member connected to the joint) Prints maximum and minimum member end forces (axial force defines max and min) at member end 1 Prints maximum and minimum member end forces (axial force defines max and min) at member end 2
98
49
31
32
14A.8.1 Output for member design

Output example for TRACK 0.0
Symbol MEMB FX Member number Axial force in the member (T = tension, C = compression) Start moment about the y-axis Description Unit kN kNm kNm kNm kNm kNm
MYs
MYm
Mid moment about the y-axis
MYe
End moment about the y-axis
MYb RATIO LOAD TABLE
Buckling moment about the y-axis Interaction ratio The critical load case number Section type (HE, IPE, TUBE, etc.)
Symbol MZs
Description Start moment about z-axis
Unit kNm kNm kNm kNm
MZm
Mid moment about the z-axis
MZe
End moment about the z-axis
MZb COND DIST
Buckling moment about z-axis Critical condition Distance from the start of the member to the critical section
Note: Myb and Mzb are the design moments used for max unity ratio.
NS3472 (VERSION 06002) UNITS ARE KN AND METE MEMB FX MYs MYm MYe MYb RATIO LOAD TABLE MZs MZm MZe MZb COND DIST =============================================================================== 1 12.80 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.08 1 FAIL PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS) 31.9 -15.9 -36.2 36.2 STAB 10.00 4 24.20 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.30 1 FAIL PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS) -0.2 -1.4 -2.9 2.9 STAB 14.14 3 26.31 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.78 1 PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS) 5.1 1.3 2.5 5.1 STAB 0.00 2 4.02 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.58 1 PIPD60 (AISC SECTIONS) 36.4 -38.1 -6.8 38.9 STAB 5.83 5 5.02 T 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.34 1 PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS) 3.6 -1.8 1.7 2.8 VMIS 0.00
Output example for TRACK 1.0
Symbol CURVESt
Description Buckling curve about the strong axis
Unit
650 STAAD.Pro
Symbol CURVEWk Beta Z Beta Y FYLD Betamz Betamy Fak Z Fak Y MYD MZD MVD IR1
Description Buckling curve about the weak axis Buckling length factor about z-axis Buckling length factor about y-axis Allowable yield strength Equivalent moment factor Equivalent moment factor
m m
Unit
N/mm
2
about z-axis about y-axis
Factor k according to 12.3.4.2 about the z-axis Factor k according to 12.3.4.2 about the y-axis Moment capacity about the y axis Moment capacity about the z axis Lateral buckling moment Interaction ratio for buckling without lateral buckling (Cl. 12.3.4.2) Interaction ratio for buckling with lateral buckling (Cl. 12.3.4.2) kN-m kN-m kN-m
IR2
VONMISES Interaction ratio for von Mises

NS3472 (VERSION 06002) UNITS ARE KN AND METE MEMB FX MYs MYm MYe MYb RATIO LOAD TABLE MZs MZm MZe MZb COND DIST =============================================================================== 1 12.80 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.08 1 FAIL PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS) 31.9 -15.9 -36.2 36.2 STAB 10.00 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00 Beta Y 1.00 FYLD= 235. N/MM2 | | Betamz=1.295 Betamy=1.000 FakZ=1.500 FakY=1.500 | | MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM | | IR1 = 5.076 IR2 = 5.076 VON MISES = 3.251 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| 2 4.02 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.58 1 PIPD60 (AISC SECTIONS) 36.4 -38.1 -6.8 38.9 STAB 5.83 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00 Beta Y 1.00 FYLD= 235. N/MM2 | | Betamz=1.377 Betamy=1.000 FakZ=1.021 FakY=1.033 | | MYD =.701E+2 KNM MZD =.701E+2 KNM MVD =.701E+2 KNM | | IR1 = 0.575 IR2 = 0.575 VON MISES = 0.557 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------| 3 26.31 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.78 1 PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS) 5.1 1.3 2.5 5.1 STAB 0.00 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00 Beta Y 1.00 FYLD= 235. N/MM2 | | Betamz=2.152 Betamy=1.000 FakZ=0.602 FakY=1.500 | | MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM | | IR1 = 0.784 IR2 = 0.784 VON MISES = 0.510 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| 4 24.20 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.30 1 FAIL PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS) -0.2 -1.4 -2.9 2.9 STAB 14.14 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00 Beta Y 1.00 FYLD= 235. N/MM2 | | Betamz=1.510 Betamy=1.000 FakZ=1.500 FakY=1.500 | | MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM | | IR1 = 1.304 IR2 = 1.304 VON MISES = 0.310 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
652 STAAD.Pro
Output example for TRACK2.0
Output example for TRACK 3

Member in tension:
654 STAAD.Pro
Member in compression:
656 STAAD.Pro
Member in compression (pipe - NPD):
658 STAAD.Pro
14A.8.2 Tracks for joint capacity code checking

660 STAAD.Pro
14A.8.3 Special prints (not code check)

662 STAAD.Pro
14B. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Norwegian code NORSOK N004 Rev 2, October 2004. Code checks for tubular (pipe) members is performed per the code. Please note the following:
l l
The code check is available for the pipe cross sections only. The design of conical transitions and joints with joint cans is not performed.
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

The implementation of the NORSOK N-004 code in STAAD.Pro considers sections 4, 5, 6 & 7 in of that document. The details of the various clauses implemented from these sections is presented here for member checking and design.
14B.1.1 General Provisions

The general safety check is per Section 4. Checks are made to ensure that the design action effect (S ) is less than or equal to the design resistance (R ):
d d
Sd Rd The design resistance is evaluated for each condition and this check is applied as described in the following sections.
14B.1.2 Steel selection and non destructive testing

Section 5 deals with the choice of design class for structural joints and components. The choice of design class will determine the choice of steel grade & quality and also the determination of inspection category for fatigue. The choice of design class (as per Table 5-1 of the code) is left to you and does not have any direct impact on how STAAD.Pro performs design checks.
14B.1.3 Ultimate Limit States

Clause 6.1 primarily deals with the section of material factors to be used in the various conditions or checks. The material factors chosen are dependent on the section class of a cross section. N-004 does not explicitly specify how to classify various cross sections. Therefore, the section classification is made as given in Section 5.5 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, except when specified explicitly along with member checks (See Member Subject to Axial Compression). Also, N-004 does not specify steel grades to be used. Therefore, this STAAD.Pro uses the steel grades per EN 1993-1-1:2005 for designs per N-004.
Note: Ring stiffener design to CL. 6.3.6.2 is not included for this implementation.
14B.1.4 Tubular Members

Clause 6.3.1 deals with the general considerations while using tubular members.
Warning: Only tubular sections can be used with the N-004 code in STAAD.Pro. A
warning is presented for any other section type. The dimensions of the tubular sections are limited as follows:
l l
The thickness t 6 mm. The thickness t <150 mm. The slenderness ratio of the cross section D/t < 120. Where D is the diameter and t is the wall thickness of the section.
The yield strength for tubular member 500 N/mm 2.
If any of these conditions are not met for a member selected for design, a warning will be issued by the engine and the design of that member is aborted.
Note: N-004 uses Y to define the action effects that is in plane and Z to define out of
plane effects. This is the opposite to what STAAD uses, where Z defines the in plane effects and Y the out of plane effects. This document will follow the STAAD.Pro convention for the Z and Y axes. The N-004 code also segregates members into those that are subject to hydrostatic pressure and those that are not subject to hydrostatic pressure. The program allows you to specify whether a member is subject to hydrostatic pressure or not and, if so, to specify the hydrostatic pressure for the element. By default the program will assume that all members are not subject to any hydrostatic pressure. The design parameter HYD is used to specify the maximum water level with respect to the origin. If the HYD parameter is specified, the program will take that to be the water level and will evaluate the pressure distribution on each element assuming a linear increase in pressure with depth (The density of water is assumed to be 9.8 KN/m 3). Also, if the HYD parameter is specified, the program will assume that the hydrostatic loads have not been included in the analysis. For members that are subject to a combination of loads (i.e., bending plus compression) along with a hydrostatic pressure, the design will be done according to Clause 6.3.9 of the code. In the absence of any hydrostatic pressure on the member the design will be performed in accordance with Clause 6.3.8 of the code.
664 STAAD.Pro
14B.2 .1 Ultimate Limit State 14B.3 Axial Tension

Clause 6.3.2 states that tubular members subject to axial tension shall satisfy the following condition: N Where: N
y Sd Sd
t,Rd
= A f /
y m
= Design axial force (tension positive)
f = Characteristic yield strength A = Cross section area

m
= Default material factor = 1.15
14B.4 Axial Compression

Clause 6.3.3 states that tubular members subject to axial compression shall satisfy the following condition: N Where: N
c Sd Sd
c,Rd
= A f /
c m
= Design axial force (compression positive)
f = Characteristic axial compressive strength

m
= Refer to clause 6.3.7
The design axial compressive strength for a member that is not subject to any hydrostatic pressure will be taken as the smaller of in plane or out of plane buckling strengths determined by the equations given below: f = [1.0 - 028 2]f when 1.34
c c y
f = 0.9/2 f when > 1.34

y
= (f /f ) = k l/( i)(f /E)

cl E cl
Where: f = Characteristic local buckling strength

cl
= Column slenderness parameter f = Smaller Euler buckling strength in y or z direction.

E
E = Young's modulus of elasticity = 2.1x105 MPa k = Effective length factor, refer to Clause 6.3.8.2 l = Longer unbraced length in y or z direction
i = Radius of gyration. The characteristic local buckling strength is determined from: f = f when f /f
cl cl cl y y cle
0.170 (Plastic yielding)

y cle y y cle
f = [1.047 - 0.274 f /f ] f when 0.170 < f /f f =f Where: f

cle e cle
1.911 (Elastic/Plastic)
when f /f
y cle
> 1.911 (Elastic buckling)
= 2C E t/D (Characteristic elastic local buckling strength)

e
C = 0.3 (Critical elastic buckling coefficient) D = Outside diameter t = wall thickness For a member that is subject to pure compression, if f /f > 0.170, the section will be classed y cle as a CLASS 4 (slender section). In such cases, the value of the material factor ( ) used in the m above checks is increased according to equation 6.22 (Cl. 6.3.7) of the code.
14B.5 Bending
Clause 6.3.4 states that tubular members subject to pure bending alone shall satisfy: M Where: M f
Sd Sd
Rd
=f
W/
= Design bending moment
= Characteristic bending strength
W = Elastic section modulus

m

m
The bending strength f f f f

m m m y
is calculated as:
y
= Z/W f when f D/(E t) 0.0517 = [1.13 - 2.58 f D/(E t)] Z/W f when 0.0517 < f D/(E t) 0.1034
y y y
= [0.94 - 0.76 f D/(E t)] Z/W f when 0.1034 < f D/(E t) 120 f /E
y y y y
14B.6 Shear
Clause 6.3.5 states that tubular members subject to shear shall satisfy: V Where: V
Sd Sd
Rd
= A f /(23
y
m)
= Design shear force
666 STAAD.Pro
f = Yield strength
y
A = Cross section area

m
= Default material factor = 1.15
When torsional shear stresses are present, the following condition shall also be satisfied: M Where: M
p T,Sd T,Sd
T,Rd
= 2 I f /(D3
py
m)
= Design bending moment
I = Polar moment of inertia
14B.7 Hydrostatic Pressure

Clause 6.3.6 states that tubular members subject to an external pressure shall primarily be checked for hoop buckling. The condition to be satisfied is: Where:
p,Sd Sd p,Sd
h,Rd
= f /
h m)
=p
Sd
D/(2 t)
= Design hydrostatic pressure
f = Characteristic hoop buckling strength

h
m)

h
The characteristic hoop buckling strength f , will be calculated as follows: f = f when f

h h h y he
> 2.44 f
y y he
f = 0.7 f =f
he
f (f /f )0.4 y he y when f
he
when 2.44 f f
y he
> 0.55 f
0.55 f
The elastic hoop buckling strength f f Where:

he
will be worked out as follows:
= 2C E t/D
h
C = 0.44 t/D when 1.6 D/t

h h h h
C = 0.44 t/D + 0.21 (D/t)3/4 when 0.825 D/t <1.6 D/t C = 0.737/( - 0.579) when 1.5 < 0.825 D/t C = 0.8 when <1.5 = Geometric Parameter = L/D(2 D/t)
L = Length of tubular member between stiffening rings, diaphragms, or end connections.
14B.8 Combined Axial Tension and Bending (without Hydrostatic Pressure)

Clause 6.3.8.1 states that tubular members subject to axial tension and bending shall be designed to satisfy the following condition:
Where: M M N
y,Sd z,Sd
is the design bending moment about the y axis (out-of plane axis) is the design bending moment about the z axis (in plane axis)
Sd Rd
is the design axial force is the moment resistance (as determined by Clause 6.3.4) is the tension capacity of the section (as determined by Clause 6.3.2)
M N
t,Rd
14B.9 Combined Axial Compression and Bending (without Hydrostatic Pressure)

Clause 6.3.8.2 states that tubular members subject to axial tension and bending shall be designed to satisfy the following conditions:
and
Where: N
Sd
is the design axial compression
C and C are the reduction factors corresponding to the Y and Z axes my mz respectively. You may specify a value for these using the CMY and CMZ design parameters, respectively (default is 0.85 for both). N
ey
and N
ez
are the Euler buckling loads about y & z axes and are given by:
668 STAAD.Pro
k is the effective length factor and is given in table 6-2 of the code. N
cl, Rd
is the design axial local buckling resistance given by:
f is the characteristic local buckling strength(as determined by Clause 6.3.3)

cl
The reduction factors used in this clause depend on the structural element type and will be as given in Table 6-2 of N-004. This requires the member to be classified under any one of the section types given in the table.
14B.10 Combined Bending and Shear (without Hydrostatic Pressure)

Clauses 6.3.8.3 & 6.3.8.4 state that tubular members subject to beam shear force (excluding shear due to torsion) and bending moments shall satisfy: M /M
Sd Sd Rd Rd
(1.4 - V /V ) when V /V 0.4

Sd Rd Sd Rd
M /M
1.0 when V /V < 0.4

Sd Rd
If the member is subject to shear forces due to torsion along with bending moments, the condition to be satisfied is: M /M
Sd Sd Red,Rd Red,Rd
(1.4 - V /V ) when V /V 0.4

Sd Rd Sd Rd
M /M Where: M f
1.0 when V /V < 0.4

Sd Rd
Red,Rd
=W f
m
m,Red m T,Sd d R2 t)
m,Red T,Sd
= f [1 - 3(
T,Sd
/f )2]
=M
y m
/(2
f = f /
d
R = Radius of the tubular member

m
14B.11 Combined Loads with Hydrostatic Pressure

Clause 6.3.9 of NS-004 describes two methods to check for members subject to combined forces in the presence of hydrostatic pressure: depending on whether the hydrostatic forces were included as nodal forces in the analysis or not. If the hydrostatic forces have not been included in the analysis as nodal forces, Method A given in the code is used. If, however, the hydrostatic forces have been included in the analysis, then Method B in the code is used. Prior to proceeding with the checks described in the sections below, the section is verified for hoop stress limit per clause 6.3.6 (see Hydrostatic Pressure above). The choice of method for checking members subject to combined forces and hydrostatic pressure used by STAAD.Pro will depend on the HYD parameter specified as a design parameter. If the HYD parameter has been specified, then the program will assume that the hydrostatic forces have not been included in the analysis and will perform the necessary checks as per Method A in code. If, on the other hand, the HYD parameter has not been specified, the program will use the section forces and use Method B in the code.
14B.12 Combined Axial Tension, Bending, and Hydrostatic Pressure

Checks per Clause 6.3.9.1: A. When HYDis specified: The following condition is to be satisfied: a. For the net axial tension condition (
a,Sd
q,Sd
Where: is the design axial stress, excluding any axial compression a,Sd from hydrostatic pressure. is the design axial compressive stress due to hydrostatic q,Sd pressure. (i.e., the axial load arising from the hydrostatic pressure being applied as nodal loads). f f
my,Sd mz,Sd
is the out of plane bending stress is the in plane bending stress

y m m
th,RD
= f / [(1 +0.09 B2 - B2) - 0.3B] = f / [(1 +0.09 B2 - B2) - 0.3B]

m
mh,RD
B=
psd
/f
h,Rd
670 STAAD.Pro
= 5 - 4 f /f
h y a,Sd
b. For the net axial compression condition (
<
q,Sd
Where: f
cl,Rd
= f /
cl m
f is the characteristic local buckling strength(as determined by cl Clause 6.3.3) Additionally, when:
c,Sd
> 0.5 f /
he m
and f
cle
>0.5 f
he
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above check(s):
Where:
c,Sd
is the maximum compressive stress at that section.
B. When HYD has not been specified:
Where:
ac,Sd
is the axial stress in the member
14B.13 Combined Axial Compression, Bending, and Hydrostatic Pressure

Checks per Clause 6.3.9.2: A. Method used when HYDhas been specified: The following condition is to be satisfied:
and
Where: is the design axial stress that excludes the stress from hydrostatic a,Sd pressure
Additionally, when:
c,Sd
> 0.5 f /
he m
and f
cle
>0.5 f
he
B. Method used when HYD has not been specified: The following condition is to be satisfied:
672 STAAD.Pro
a. For the net axial tension condition (
ac,Sd
q,Sd
and
(Refer to the previous section for an explanation of these terms). b. For the net axial compression condition (
ac,Sd
<
q,Sd
(Refer to the previous section for an explanation of these terms). Additionally, when:
c,Sd
> 0.5 f /
he m
and f /
cle m
>0.5 f /
he m
Where:
c,Sd
is the maximum compressive stress at that section.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure.
Table 14B.1-Design Parameters for NORSOK N-004 design code Parameter Name CODE Default Value none Description
Must be specified as NORSOK.
Note: Do not use the shortened NOR, as

this initiates an NS3472 design . FYLD 235 [MPa] Yield strength of steel, f (St37)
y
Note: Note, if the SGR value is specified,

then the associated value of f for y that steel grade will be used for a member in lieu of the FYLD value. KY 1.0 Effective length factor, k, in local Y-axis, usually minor axis. Effective length factor, k, in local Z-axis, usually major axis. Length in local Y axis for slenderness value KL/r Length in local Z axis for slenderness value KL/r Reduction factor C corresponding to the Y m axis. Reduction factor C corresponding to the Z m axis. Length of Tubular between Stiffening Rings. This value is required to calculate Design Hoop Stress due to Hydrostatic Pressure to check Hoop Buckling as per clause 6.3.6.1.
KZ
1.0
LY
LZ
CMY
CMZ
0.85
LSR
674 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name HYD
Default Value 0.0
Description
The Y-coordinate, current units, of the maximum water level with respect to the origin.
Note: If SETZUP command has been

specified, then yi will be the Z coordinate of the max water level. For HYD > 0, the value of max. hydrostatic pressure calculated is reported for each member in a TRACK 2.0 output. PSD 0.0 Water pressure at each section in absence of HYD. Steel Grade per EC3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005): 0.0 = S 235 grade steel 1.0 = S 275 grade steel 2.0 = S 355 grade steel 3.0 = S 420 grade steel 4.0 = S 460 grade steel DMAX DMIN DFF 100.0 [cm] 0.0 [cm] None (Mandatory for deflection check) 0.0 Maximum allowable depth of steel section. Minimum allowable depth of steel section. "Deflection length"/maximum allowable local deflection.
SGR
0.0
MAIN
Option to design for slenderness. 0.0 = Check for slenderness 1.0 = Do not check for slenderness Any value greater than 1.0 is used as the limit for slenderness in compression.
Parameter Name TMAIN
Default Value 180.0
Description
Slenderness limit in tension. Slenderness limit is checked based the MAIN parameter. Output detail: 0.0 = Only a summary of the design checks performed is printed. 2.0 = All the details of the member checks and the various clause checks performed are printed.
TRACK
0.0
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Beam segment locations for design: 0.0 = design only for end moments and those at locations specified by SECTION command. 1.0 = Perform design for moments at twelfth points along the beam.
BEAM
0.0
DJ1
Start Joint of member End Joint of member
Joint No. denoting start point for calculation of deflection length Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of deflection length
DJ2
14B.14.1 Notes
a. C1 and C2 Parameters The default values of these coefficients are taken from Table 6-4 of N-004 and depend on the joint and load type: Table 14B.2-Default values for C1 and C2 parameters Joint Type T or Y joints under brace axial load X joints under brace axial load C1 25 20 C2 11 22
676 STAAD.Pro
Joint Type K joints under balanced axial load All joints under brace moment loading
C1 20 25
C2 22 30
Note: These values can be changed by setting the K, X, and Y values in the
external geometry file.
14B.14.2 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the
NORSOK N-004 steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* CHECK TUBULAR MEMBERS ACCORDING NORSOK N-004 CODENORSOK HYD 3.0 MEMB 1 TO 3 PSD 10 MEMB 7 10 SGR 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10 TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10 CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
14B.15 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate as per N-004. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking. When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of NORSOK code, the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the number of forces in the member) where the critical condition occurs.

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section (i.e., the lightest section which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member). The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limit the maximum and minimum depth of the members.
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table will be limited to sections in the user table.
14B.17 Tubular Joint Checking

The design of tubular joints for this implementation shall be based on section 6.4 of N-004 and will be applicable to joints formed from a connection of two or more members.
Figure 14B.1 - Typical Tubular Joint (Fig 6-1 in N004)
Prior to completing a joint design, the joint should be classified into one of the three categories given by the code. Joint classification is the process whereby a BRACE member connecting into a CHORD member is classified into one of these categories based on the axial force components in the brace. The classification normally considers all the members at a joint that lie in a plane. N-004 defines three joint classification categories: K, X, or Y (or a combination of these). Joint Classification K Description
The axial force in the brace should be balanced by forces in the other braces in the same plane and on the same side of the joint. The code allows a 10% tolerance in the balancing force. The axial force in the brace is reacted as a beam shear in the chord. The axial force in the brace is carried through the chord to braces in the opposite side.
678 STAAD.Pro
Note: Typical examples of these joint types are given in Figure 6-3 of the N-004 code. It is
worth noting that the joint class for each brace will be different for each load case.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not perform an automatic classification of the joints. This is left up
to the engineer. All joints will initially be classified as Y in the generation of the external geometry file. Joints should be re-classified as necessary before performing the final joint capacity checks. The checks for joint capacity are given in Cl. 6.4.3.2 to 6.4.3.6 and STAAD.Pro performs the checks as per these clauses. However, the program does not deal with conical joint transitions and joints with joint cans. The code also specifies checks and limits for the gaps and eccentricity of joints. This implementation will not perform such geometry checks. The details of the checks done and the methodology will be discussed in the following sections.
14B.17.1 Identification and Classification of CHORD and BRACE Members

This is a two step process where the program automatically identifies the CHORD and BRACE members at a joint and perform a default joint check. The input variables used for the initial joint checks will be generated in an external text file. You can then use this text file to edit or modify the input variables and perform a final check as necessary. The following syntax is used to initiate the joint checking in the engine. LOAD LIST load_list PARAMETER 1 CHECK JOINT { node_list | ALL } Where: load_list = a list of load case numbers to be check against node_list = the NODE numbers to be checked. Specifying the ALL keyword option will cause the program to perform the joint check at all the nodes. For each node specified in the CHECK JOINT command, the program automatically separates out all the members at the node into one CHORD member and one or more BRACE members. The section with the biggest diameter is assumed to be the CHORD and all the other members are assumed as BRACE members. If two or more possible CHORD members have the same diameter, the member with the maximum thickness is considered as the CHORD. The angle between the two members should be within the range of 30 and 90 (inclusive). Once all the CHORD and BRACE members are identified, the program considers every CHORD to BRACE connection as a separate JOINT. The program the automatically creates the joints and initially considers all the joints as joint class Y. The program then performs all the
necessary joint checks as detailed in the following sections and produces the design output. The program will also produce an output file called filename_ JOINTS.txt, where "filename" will be the name of the .STD file. This format of this text file is explained in Section 14B.8. You can then edit this text file to set up the necessary design parameters. Once the program finds of the _JOINTS.txt file, it will read in the necessary parameters from this file and perform the subsequent design checks.
Note: This file will be produced only once (i.e., when this file does not exist). If this file
exists, it is assumed that you have already done a joint design check and hence the program reads the values from this file and uses these for joint checks.
14B.18 Tubular Joint Resistance

14B.18.1 Basic Joint Resistances
The characteristic joint resistance between a chord and a brace is given by:
NRd = MRd =
f yT 2 M sin f y T 2d Msin
Q uQ f Q uQ f
Where: N
Rd Rd
is the joint design axial resistance is the joint design bending moment resistance.
M
y
f is the yield strength

m
= Default material resistance =1.15
is the angle between the chord and the brace (max = 90 degrees) Q = Strength factor which varies with the joint type and the action type in the u brace. Refer to Table 6-3 and Clause 6.4.3.3 of N-004 for these equations. Q = 1.0 A2
f
2 2 2 my ,Sd + mz,Sd A 2 = C1 a ,Sd + C 2 2 f 1.62f y y
p,Sd
is the design axial stress in the chord is the design in-plane bending stress in the chord is the design out-of-plane bending stress in the chord
my,Sd mz,Sd
680 STAAD.Pro
C1 is the coefficient used for the axial stress term in calculating the joint resistance. C2 is the coefficient used for the bending stress term in calculating the joint resistance. The default values of C1 and C2 are as given in Table 6-4 of N-004. The actual values used are dependent on the values of K, X, and Y specified for the joint in the external geometry file. See also Figures 6-3 to 6-6 of N-004 for definition of the various terms for various joint classes.
14B.18.2 Strength Check for Joints

Each brace to chord joint to be checked will have to satisfy the following condition:
N Sd N Rd 2
M + z,Sd + M z,Rd
M y ,Sd M y ,Rd
Where: N N
Sd Rd
is the design axial force in the brace, is the joint design axial resistance is the in plane bending moment in the brace is the out of plane bending moment in the brace is the in plane bending moment resistance is the out of plane bending moment resistance
M M M M
z,Sd y,Sd z,Rd y,Rd
14B.19 External Geometry File

The data contained in the filename_JOINTS.NGo file should meet the following format. The overall process of performing punching shear checks consists of two steps which are explained in Section 14B.7.
14B.19.1 General Format

LOAD LIST load_list JOINT NODE K X Y CHORD CLEN D T BRACE BLEN d t GAP j# n# K% X% Y% C# CLEN D T B# BLEN d t gap Where: j# = the joint number n# = the node number K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and Y-type, respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0, X=0 and Y=1). C# = the member numbers of the CHORD
CLEN = the length of chord member D, T = Diameter and thickness of CHORD B# = the member number of the brace BLEN = the length of chord member d, t = Diameter and thickness of BRACE gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially, the value of GAP is assumed as 0.
14B.19.2 Example
LOAD LIST 1 2 4 JOINT NODE BLEN D 1 3 0.140 0.010 2 3 0.075 0.005
K T 0 0 0 0
X GAP 0 0
Y 1 1
CHORD 2 2
CLEN 5.0 5.0
D 0.168 0.168
T 0.10 0.10
BRACE 1 16 4.0
6.04
14B.20 Tabulated Results

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: Member the member number for which the design is performed. TABLE the steel section name which has been checked against the N-004 code or has been selected. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. CRITICAL COND the section of the N-004 code which governs the design. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. LOADING the load case number which governed the design. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
682 STAAD.Pro
LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0, the program will block out part of the table and
will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV).
14B.20.1 Sample TRACK 2.0 Output

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - NORSOK-N004 (V1.0) ************************************************ ALL UNITS ARE - KN MEMBER TABLE METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST PIP13910.0 (BRITISH SECTIONS) PASS Eq. 6.44 0.170 1 0.01 C 1.01 6.39 0.00 ======================================================================= MATERIAL DATA Grade of steel = S 355 Modulus of elasticity = 204999.98 N/mm2 Design Strength (py) =355.00 N/mm2 SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm) Member Length = 400.00 Gross Area of cross section =
40.70 z-axis 862.000 168.554 123.407 4.602 400.000 y-axis 862.000 168.554 123.407 4.602 400.000
Moment of inertia Plastic modulus Elastic modulus Radius of gyration Effective Length DESIGN PARAMETER (units Height of water lavel CMZ : 0.85 CMY KZ : 1.00 KY SECTION CLASSIFICATION
: : : : :
- m) N004/2004 : 3.000 : 0.85 : 1.00 : Class 1
CAPACITIES (units - kN,m) Tension Capacity Compression Capacity Bending Capacity Shear Capacity
: : : :
1256.4 790.1 52.0 362.7
Shear Capacity due to torsional moment:
44.0
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE CALCULATION (units - N,mm) - Cl.6.3.6 Max design hydrostatic pressure, (psd) : 0.000 Max design hoop stress, (sigma_psd)) : 0.000 CRITICAL LOAD FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units - kN,m): CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY Cl:6.3.2 0.000 1 0.0 Cl:6.3.3 0.000 1 0.0 Cl:6.3.4 0.102 1 -5.3 0.0 Cl:6.3.5 0.031 1 -11.2 0.5 Cl:6.3.8.(1 & 2) 0.124 1 0.0 6.4 1.0 Cl:6.3.8.(3 & 4) 0.102 1 -0.5 0.5 -5.3 0.0 Cl:6.3.9 0.170 1 0.0 6.4 1.0 =======================================================================
684 STAAD.Pro
14C. Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Norwegian code NS 3473 2001 Concrete Structures - Design and detailing rules. Design of members per NS 3473 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Table 14C.1-Design Parameters for NS 3473 design code Parameter Default Name Value CODE none Description
Must be specified as NS3473 Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
ACTAGE BRACE
70 years 0
Enter the actual age, in years. Column Brace Parameter 0. Beam/Column braced in both directions. 1. One-way plate/ Column unbraced about the local z axis only. 2. Column unbraced about the local y axis only. 3. Column unbraced in both directions.
CLEAR DRYCIR EFACE
25 mm 100% 0
Clear cover to outermost reinforcing bar. Drying exposure, in percent. Distance from the end node of the beam to face of support for shear design. Member length factor about the local y direction. Member length factor about the local z direction
ELY ELZ
1 1
14C. Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473
Parameter Default Name Value ENVIR 2 Environment class
Description
1. LA Least aggressive 2. NA Aggressive 3. MA Very aggressive FC 35 N/mm 2 500 N/mm 2 7 days 32 Compressive strength of concrete.
FYMAIN
Yield strength of main reinforcing steel.
LAGE MAX MAIN MINMAIN
Age when loaded, in days. Maximum size permitted for main reinforcement bar. Minimum size permitted for main reinforcement bar. moy factor moz factor nmag factor
10
MOY MOZ NMAG REIANG RELHUM RFACE 0 70% 1
Reinforcement angle, in degrees. Relative humidity, in percent. Column bar arrangement 1. Four longitudinal bars. 2. Two faced distribution about minor axis. 3. Two faced distribution about major axis. 4. Faced symmetric distribution
SFACE
Distance from the start node of the beam to face of support for shear design. Stirrup angle, in degrees. Stirrup diameter Torsion angle, in degrees.
STIRANG STIRDIA TORANG
90 10 mm 45
686 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default Name Value TRACK 10
Description
Track parameter to control output detail 10. Beam Ultimate limit state and Service limit state design & Slab Two-way plate design 11. Beam Ultimate limit state and Service limit statedesign with tension stiffening. 12. Beam Ultimate limit statedesign only 20. Slab Plane stress design. 30. Slab Simplified membrane design.
688 STAAD.Pro
Section 15
Russian Codes
690 STAAD.Pro
15A. Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per SNiP 2.03.01-84*

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Russian code 2.03.0184*: (SNiP 2.03.01-84* Building Regulations:Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Construction). Design of members per SNiP 2.03.01-84* requires the STAAD E. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
15A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.0184* plain concrete and concrete structures is based on the method of limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.0184* defines two groups of limit states. Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the following phenomena:
l
brittle, plastic or other type of failure, loss by structure of stable form or position, fatigue failure, failure due to the action of load actions and unfavorable environmental effects.
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the following phenomena:
l
excessive and long-term opening of cracks if they are allowed according to service conditions, excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of the maximum (design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second group of limit states is made in accordance with the operational (normative) loads and actions. Ratio between design and normative loads is called reliability coefficient for loads which is determined according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 Loads and actions. Reliability coefficient n for destination according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 shall be considered in determination of loads and their combinations. Program STAAD.Pro makes it possible to calculate reinforcement for concrete members according to codes of many countries round the World and Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* inclusive. Algorithms for calculation of reinforcement of concrete linear (beams, columns) and 2D (two dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells) members are incorporated in program STAAD.Pro. Not only Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* but also the Guide for design of plain concrete and reinforced concrete structures from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to SNiP 2.03.01-84) have been used in creation of these algorithms.
It is possible using program STAAD.Pro to calculate reinforcement for beams of rectangular or T section and for columns of rectangular or circular section (Fig.1).
Figure 15A.1 - Notation of dimensions for rectangular, circular and T sections
Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle BETA=0, or at the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180.
15A.2 Design Parameters and Input Data

Entry of data of cross-sections of beams and columns is made by the use of MEMBER PROPERTIES command, and thicknesses of 2D members are entered by ELEMENT PROPERTY command. Example:
UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES * COLUMNS OF RECTANGULAR CROSS-SECTION 1 TO 16 PRI YD 350. ZD 350. * COLUMNS OF CIRCULAR CROSS-SECTION 17 TO 22 PRI YD 350. * BEAMS OF T CROSS-SECTION 23 TO 40 PRI YD 450. ZD 550. YB 230. ZB 200. UNIT METER ELEMENT PROPERTY 41 TO 100 THICKNESS 0.14 101 TO 252 THICKNESS 0.16 * FLANGE OF T BEAMS IS LOCATED AT THE BOTTOM ZONE OF CROSSSECTION BETA 180. MEMB 23 TO 40 COMMANDS FOR CALCULATION OF REINFORCEMENT ARE LOCATED IN THE INPUT DATA FILE AFTER THE COMMAND OF ANALYSIS AND AS A RULE, AFTER OUTPUT COMMANDS TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION.
Example:
* COMMAND OF ANALYSIS
692 STAAD.Pro
PERFORM ANALYSIS . .* OUTPUT COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION (ACCORDING TO USERS JUDGMENT) . * COMMAND OF LOADING AND THEIR COMBINATIONS CONSIDERED IN DESIGN LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9 * COMMAND TO START REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION PROCEDURE START CONCRETE DESIGN CODE RUSSIAN .* LIST OF PARAMETERS BEING USED IN REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION . . BCL 20. MEMB 17 TO 22 CL1 0.04 MEMB 1 TO 40 DD2 10. MEMB 23 TO 40 CRA 0.036 MEMB 41 TO 252 . . . * COMMAND OF BEAM REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION DESIGN BEAM 23 TO 40 * COMMAND OF COLUMN REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION DESIGN COLUMN 1 TO 22 * COMMAND OF CALCULATION 2D ELEMENTS (SLABS, WALLS, SHELLS) DESIGN ELEMENT 41 TO 252
* COMMAND OF INTERRUPTION REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION END CONCRETE DESIGN
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of reinforcement for beams, columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is presented. Values of parameters do not depend on UNIT command. In the file of input data only such parameters have to be taken, the values of which differ from determined in the program.
Table 15A.1-Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code - 2.03.01-84* for beams. No. Parameter Default name Value 1 2 NLT RCL 1 3 Description
Number of long-term loading case Class of longitudinal reinforcement:

l
RCL = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I; RCL = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II; RCL = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-III; RCL = 33, if class of reinforcement is A-IIIb; RCL = 4, if class of reinforcement is A-IV; RCL = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V; RCL = 6, if class of reinforcement is A-VI; RCL = 7, if class of reinforcement is A-VII; RCL = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7; RCL = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II; RCL = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-II; RCL = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-I; RCL = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19
694 STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default name Value 2 RCL 3
Description
Class of longitudinal reinforcement: Russian Grade:

l l l l l l
1 = A240; 2 = A300; 3 = A400; 4 = A500; 5 = B500; 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l l l
11 = S240; 12 = S400; 13 = S500;
USM
1.
Total product of service conditions coefficients for longitudinal reinforcement (g )

s
UB2
0.9
Specific service conditions coefficient for concrete (g )

b2
DD1
16.
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars in beam tension zone Diameter of shear reinforcement bars for beam; Compression class of concrete
DD2
16.
BCL
15.
No. Parameter Default name Value 7 BCL 15.
Description
Compression Class of concrete.

l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
10 = B10; 15 = B15 20 = B20; 25 = B25; 30 = B30; 35 = B35; 40 = B40; 45 = B45; 50 = B50; 55 = B55; 60 = B60; 8.10 = C8/10 12.15 = C12/15; 16.20 = C16/20 25.30 = C25/30 30.37 = C30/37 35.45 = C35/45 40.50 = C50/50 45.55 = C45/55 50.60 = C50/60 60.75 = C60/75 70.85 = C70/85 80.95 = C80/95 90.105 = C90/105
UBM
1.
Product of service conditions coefficients for concrete, except UB2 (g )

b
696 STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default name Value 9 TEM 0.
Description
Parameter of concrete hardening conditions:

l
TEM=0, for natural hardening conditions; TEM=1, for steam hardening conditions
10
CL1
0.05
Distance from top/bottom fiber of beam cross section to the center of longitudinal reinforcement bar; Distance from left/right side of beam cross section to the center of longitudinal reinforcement bar Ultimate width of short-term crack Ultimate width of long-term crack Limit state parameter for beam design
l
11
CL2
0.05
12 13 14
WST WLT SSE
0.4 0.3 0
SSE=0, if calculation of reinforcement amount must be carried out according to the requirements of load carrying capacity (the first limit state); SSE=1, if calculation of reinforcement amount must be carried out according to the cracking requirements (the second limit state)
No. Parameter Default name Value 15 RSH 1
Description
Class of shear reinforcement:

l
RSH = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I; RSH = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II; RSH = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-III; RSH = 33, if class of reinforcement is A-IIIb; RSH = 4, if class of reinforcement is A-IV; RSH = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V; RSH = 6, if class of reinforcement is A-VI; RSH = 7, if class of reinforcement is A-VII; RSH = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7; RSH = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II; RSH = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-II; RSH = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-I; RSH = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19
698 STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default name Value 15 RSH 1
Description
Class of shear reinforcement: Russian Grade:

l l l l l l
1 = A240; 2 = A300; 3 = A400; 4 = A500; 5 = B500; 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l l l
11 = S240; 12 = S400; 13 = S500;
16
FWT
ZD
Design width of beam top flange. Use for beam design only with default value provided as ZD in member properties. Design width of beam bottom flange. Use for beam design only with default value provided as ZB in member properties. Design depth of beam section. Use for beam design only with default value provided as YD in member properties. Face of support location at the start of the beam. Use for beam design only. Face of support location at the end of the beam. Use for beam design only. Number of equally-spaced sections for beam design. Use for beam design only. Upper limit is equal to 20.
17
FWB
ZB
18
DEP
YD
19
SFA
0.
20
EFA
0.
21
NSE
13
Table 15A.2-Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code 2.03.01-84* for columns No. Parameter Default Name Value 1 NLT 1 Description
Number of long-term loading case
No. Parameter Default Name Value 2 RCL 3
Description

l l l l l l
1 = A240; 2 = A300; 3 = A400; 4 = A500; 5 = B500; 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l l l
11 = S240; 12 = S400; 13 = S500;
USM
1.

s
UB2
0.9

b2
DD1
16.
Minimum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars for column Maximum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars for column
DD2
16.
700 STAAD.Pro
No. Parameter Default Name Value 7 BCL 15.
Description
Compression class of concrete:

UBM
1.

b
No. Parameter Default Name Value 9 TEM 0.
Description

l
10
CL1
0.05
Distance from edge of column cross section to the center of longitudinal reinforcement bar Column's length coefficient to evaluate slenderness effect in local Y axis Column's length coefficient to evaluate slenderness effect in local Z axis Class of shear reinforcement: Russian Grade:
l l l l l l
11
ELY
1.
12
ELZ
1.
13
RSH
1.
1 = A240; 2 = A300; 3 = A400; 4 = A500; 5 = B500; 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l l l
11 = S240; 12 = S400; 13 = S500;
Table 15A.3-Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*) for slabs and/or walls No. Parameter Default Name Value NLT 1 Description
Number of long-term loading case
702 STAAD.Pro
No.
Parameter Default Name Value RCL 3
Description

l l l l l l
1 = A240; 2 = A300; 3 = A400; 4 = A500; 5 = B500; 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l l l
11 = S240; 12 = S400; 13 = S500;
USM
1.

s
UB2
0.9

b2
SDX
16.
Diameter of reinforcing bars located in the first local (X) direction of slab/wall Diameter of reinforcing bars located in the second local (Y) direction of slab/wall
SDY
16.
No.
Parameter Default Name Value BCL 15.
Description
Compression class of concrete:

UBM
1.

b
704 STAAD.Pro
No.
Parameter Default Name Value TEM 0.
Description

l
10
CL
0.05
Distance from top/bottom face of slab/wall element to the center of longitudinal reinforcing bars located in first local (X) direction. (Main thickness of top/bottom concrete cover for slab/wall element) Distance from top/bottom face of slab/wall element to the center of transverse reinforcing bars located in second local (Y) direction (Secondary thickness of top/bottom concrete cover for slab/wall) Ultimate width of short-term crack Ultimate width of long-term crack
11
CRA
0.05
12 13
WST WLT
0.4 0.3
No.
Parameter Default Name Value STA 0
Description
14
Parameter of limit state for slab/wall design:

l
STA=0, if calculation of nonsymmetrical reinforcement must be carried out according to the requirements of load carrying capacity (the first limit state); STA=1, if calculation of symmetrical reinforcement must be carried out according to the requirements of load carrying capacity (the first limit state); STA=2, if calculation of nonsymmetrical reinforcement must be carried according to the cracking requirements (the second limit state); STA=3, if calculation of symmetrical reinforcement must be carried according to the cracking requirements (the second limit state)
15
SELX
0.
Design length of wall member to evaluate slenderness effect in local X axis Design length of wall member to evaluate slenderness effect in local Y axis Design parameter of slab/wall reinforcement:
l
16
SELY
0.
17
MMA
MMA=0, if reinforcement calculation must be applied by stresses in local axis; MMA=1, if reinforcement calculation must be applied by principal stresses
706 STAAD.Pro
No.
Parameter Default Name Value MMB 1
Description
18
Design parameter of slab/wall reinforcement:

l
MMB=0, if the effect of additional eccentricity is not taken into account; MMB=1, if the effect of additional eccentricity is taken into account
19
RSH
1.
Class of shear reinforcement: Russian Grade:

l l l l l l
1 = A240; 2 = A300; 3 = A400; 4 = A500; 5 = B500; 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l l l
11 = S240; 12 = S400; 13 = S500;
15A.3 Beams
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In calculation of longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis and torsional moments are considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axis is ignored. In calculation of transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis and torsional moments are taken into account. Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or from conditions of open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE). Parameters SFA and FA are considered only in calculation of transverse reinforcement. In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times according to strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width limitation. In reinforcement calculations from conditions of strength design values of load have to be taken and in calculations from conditions of crack width limitation characteristic (normative) load
values are used. Both calculations can be carried out in one session with the use multiple analysis possibility of the program STAAD.Pro. In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a part of loadings. In such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers of loads considered in calculation are indicated. Number of permanent and long-term loads equal to parameter NLT must be included into the list of considered loads. It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not only on the width of opened crack but also in some cases, on design and normative reinforcement resistances. Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class given in SNiP 2.03.01-84* and to any intermediate value as well. It should be remembered, that accuracy of results of calculation of transverse reinforcement increases with the value of parameter NSE. Parameters SFA and FA are considered only in calculations of transverse reinforcement. Beam 1 is shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of which are: at the start of the beam 0.3m and at the end 0.2m. In modeling of the beam the following command can be used.
MEMBER OFFSET 1 START 0.3 0 0 1 END -0.2 0 0
Figure 12A.2 - Diagram of a beam with rigid intervals When command MEMBER OFFSET is used forces corresponding to the beam the length of which is equal to the distance between points a and b are calculated and then used in calculation of reinforcement. In such case it is necessary to take into account default values of parameters SFA and FA equal to zero. When command MEMBER OFFSET is not used forces corresponding to the beam the length of which is equal to the distance between points 10 and 11 are calculated and then used in calculation of reinforcement. In this case it is necessary to consider values of parameters SFA=0.3 and FA=0,2 in reinforcement calculation.
708 STAAD.Pro
In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same. Calculated quantity of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater. For beam the following output is generated:
l
beam number;
method of calculation (according to conditions of strength or limitations of opened crack width);

l l
length and cross-sectional dimensions;
distance from resultant of forces acting in bottom/top reinforcement to bottom/top edge of the section;
l
distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the centroid of longitudinal bars located at this edge;
l l
concrete class; class of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement; assumed in calculations bar diameters of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement; calculation results of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement (in two tables).
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented: Table 15A.4-Beam design output 1 Result Section AsAs+ Moments (-/+) Load. N. (-/+) Acrc1 Acrc2 Description distance of the section from the start of the beam, cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the bottom zone of crosssection of the beam, if angle BETA=0, or in the top zone, if BETA=180 , sq.cm cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the top zone of cross-section of the beam , if angle BETA=0, or in the top zone, if BETA=180 , sq.cm values of bending moments, determining cross-sectional areas of longitudinal reinforcement As- and As+ , kNm numbers of loading versions, determining cross-sectional areas of longitudinal reinforcement short-term opened crack width*, mm long-term opened crack width*, mm
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed according to conditions limiting opened crack width. In ten columns of second table the following results are presented:
Table 15A.5-Beam design output 2 Result Section Qsw Asw Q T Load N. Description distance of the section from the start of the beam, mm intensity of transverse reinforcement, kN/m cross-sectional area of transverse bars, sq.cm, if their step is 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 cm value of shear force parallel to the local axis, kN value of torsional moment, kNm number of loading version, determining intensity of transverse reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below. BEAM NO. 23 DESIGN RESULTS (by limitation of crack width) Length - 6000 mm. Section: BF1= 550 mm, B= 200 mm, HF1=220 mm, H=450 mm. Distance from top/bottom surface of beam to center of longitudinal reinforcement - 40 mm. Distance from side surface of beam to center of longitudinal reinforcement - 30 mm. Concrete class - 25.0 (Rb=13.05 MPa; Rbt=0.94 MPa; Gb2=0.9). Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 MPa; Rsc=365.0 MPa). Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars D=16 mm. Class of shear reinforcement - -I (Rsw=175.0 MPa). Diameter of shear reinforcement bars Dw=10 mm. L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T SectionAs-As+ Moments(-/+)Load.N.(-/+) Acrc1 Acrc2
mm sq.cm kNm mm mm --------------------------------------------------------------------0. 500. 1000. 1500. 2000. 2500. 10.92 4.74 1.13 1.13 1.13 1.13 0.41 0.41 1.13 6.41 9.24 11.53 -152. -5. -8. -11. -14. / 2. / 17. / 75. / 115. / 139. 6 / 4 0.237 5 / 0 0.294 4 / 6 0.000 4 / 6 0.295 4 / 6 0.298 4 / 6 0.271 0.121 0.157 0.000 0.147 0.149 0.134
-60. / 0.
710 STAAD.Pro
3000. 3500. 4000. 4500. 5000. 5500. 6000.
1.19 1.41 1.63 1.95 3.23 0.74 16.89
12.16 10.86 8.28 4.54 0.58 0.41 0.41
-18. -21.
/ 144. / 132.
4 / 6 0.263 4 / 6 0.277 4 / 6 0.296 4 / 6 0.299 5 / 3 0.293 5 / 0 0.271 5 / 0 0.155
0.127 0.130 0.129 0.093 0.157 0.142 0.078
-24. / 103. -27. / 56. -39. / 9. -124. -226. / 0. / 0.
S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T SectionQswAsw, cm^2, if Sw= Q T Load
mmkN/m10cm15cm20cm25cm30cmkN kNm N. 0. 500. 1000. 1500. 2000. 2500. 3000. 3500. 4000. 4500. 5000. 5500. 6000. 95.0 242.5 302.5 302.5 251.3 251.3 174.5 63.9 1.44 2.15 1.44 2.15 1.00 1.50 0.36 0.55 2.87 2.87 1.99 0.73 3.59 3.59 2.49 0.91 4.31 -203.9 4.31 -168.9 2.99 -133.9 1.09 -98.9 0.0 6 0.0 6 0.0 6 0.0 6 -63.9 -28.9 12.7 47.7 82.7 117.7 152.7 187.7 216.1 0.0 5 0.0 5 0.0 5 0.0 5 0.0 6 0.0 6 0.0 5 0.0 5 0.0 5
Minimum detailing requirements ! Minimum detailing requirements ! Minimum detailing requirements ! Minimum detailing requirements ! Minimum detailing requirements ! 0.55 0.82 1.39 2.08 1.73 2.59 1.73 2.59 1.09 2.77 3.46 3.46 1.37 3.46 4.32 4.32 1.64 4.16 5.19 5.19
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required according to calculation.
15A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be calculated. Flexibility of columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of usual analysis (command PERFORM ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by parameters ELY and ELZ, values of which should conform with recommendation of the Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according to deformed diagram) or NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of parameters ELY and ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01. Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only from condition of strength. Longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axes account in longitudinal reinforcement calculations. For rectangular columns the following output is generated: International Design Codes Manual 711 and are taken into
column number; column length and cross-sectional dimensions;
distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the crosssection;
l l
concrete class; longitudinal reinforcement class; range of longitudinal reinforcement bar diameters assumed in calculation; diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained in calculation; total quantity of longitudinal bars; quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local ;
axis
l
quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local .
axis
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the following output is presented: Table 15A.6-Column design output 1 Result Section Astot Asy distance of the section from the start of the column, mm total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section, directed parallel to the local axis Asz , sq.cm
cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section, directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm
Percent Nx, Mz, My
reinforcement percentage in the section respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to the local axes and , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement
Load.N.
number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below. COLUMN NO. 97 DESIGN RESULTS (rectangular section) Length - 4000 mm. Section: B= 350 mm, H=350 mm. Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
712 STAAD.Pro
reinforcement bar - 40 mm. Concrete class - 25.0 (Rb=13.05 Pa; Gb2=0.9). Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 Pa; Rsc=365.0 Pa). Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars: Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation d=20 mm. Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot=6. Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the local Y axis Nyy =2. Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the local Z axis Nzz =3. L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T Section m 0. 4000. Astot sq.cm 16.42 15.35 Asy sq.cm 3.01 3.01 Asz sq.cm 6.20 5.67 Percent % 1.34 1.25 Nx kN 285.5 397.3 Mz kNm 81.9 95.3 My kNm 0.0 0.0 Load N 6 5
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section obtained from calculation should be considered as recommendation. In this case arrangement of reinforcement in the section depends on the orientation of the local axes and is as follows:
Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table and they may differ from recommended on the lower side. When it is not possible according to detailing provisions to arrange in the column longitudinal reinforcement determined from calculation additional message is derived. For columns of circular section the following output is generated:
l
column number; column length and diameter of cross-section;
distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar to the edge of cross-section; longitudinal reinforcement class; assumed in calculation range of diameters of longitudinal reinforcement bars; diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained from calculation; quantity of longitudinal bars.
In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the following results are presented: Section distance of the section from the start of the column, mm Astot Per cent Nx, respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to local and reinforcement reinforcement , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal Mz, My axis Load. N. total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is presented below. COLUMN NO. 80 DESIGN RESULTS (circular section) Length - 4000 mm. Diameter: D= 350 mm. Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal reinforcement bar - 50 mm. Concrete class - 20.0 (Rb=10.35 Pa; Gb2=0.9). Class of longitudinal reinforcement - -III (Rs=365.0 Pa; Rsc=365.0 Pa). Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars: Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation D=20 mm. Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot =7. L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
714 STAAD.Pro
Section m 0. 4000.
Astot sq.cm 17.96 21.86
Percent % 1.87 2.27
Nx kN 195.1 195.1
Mz kNm 59.8 80.2
My kNm 0.0 0.0
Load N 5 5
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section should be considered as recommendation. Arrangement of reinforcement in section in this case is shown below:
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ from recommended on the lower side. When according to detailing provisions it is not possible to arrange in the column longitudinal reinforcement obtained from calculation additional message is derived.
15A.5 Two DimensionalElement (slabs, walls, shells)

In general case calculation of reinforcement for 2D members is carried out two times according to conditions of strength and conditions of limiting opened width of cracks. If reinforcement is calculated according to conditions of strength, design values of loads have to be used, and for conditions of limiting crack width characteristic (normative) loads are employed. Both calculations can be made in one session taking advantage of multiple analysis possibility of the program STAAD.Pro. Symmetric or nonsymmetrical reinforcement of 2D members is calculated according to conditions of strength or according to conditions of limiting opened crack width (see for example STA). In reinforcement calculation for 2D members it is necessary to pay attention to arrangement of local axes of member and direction of reinforcement (see for example CL and CRA).
An example of output of calculation results is presented bellow. SLAB/WALL DESIGN RESULTS (by stresses in local axes for limitation of crack width) Element Asx sq.cm/m 60 TOP BOT 61 TOP BOT 62 TOP BOT Here: Table 15A.7-Slab design output Result Element Description number of finite element, TOP - top zone of member, BOT - bottom zone of member (top zone of member is determined by positive direction of local axis Asx Mx Nx Load N.(X) Asy My Ny Load N.(Y) -see Fig.2) ), 0.00 3.53 0.00 3.87 0.00 4.10 Mx kNm/m - 4.9 - 9.9 - 5.3 - 10.7 - 5.6 - 11.2 Nx kN/m 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Load.N. (X) 1 3 1 3 1 3 Asy sq.cm/m 0.00 3.46 0.00 3.65 0.00 3.77 My kNm/m - 4.5 - 8.9 - 4.7 - 9.4 - 4.8 - 9.6 Ny kN/m 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Load N. (Y) 1 3 1 3 1 3
intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the local axis sq.cm/m distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis , kNm/m
distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the axis , kNm/m number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in the first direction intensity of reinforcing in the second direction (parallel to the local axis sq.cm/m distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis kNm/m ),
distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the local axis kN/m number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in the second direction
716 STAAD.Pro
Figure 2 - Local coordinate system of 2D member and notation of forces
718 STAAD.Pro
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Russian code II-23-81* II (SNiP 2.23-81* Part II Design Standards for Steel Construction). Design of members per SNiP 2.23-81* requires the STAAD E. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
15B.1 General
Design Code SNiP Steel Structures as majority of modern codes is based on the method of limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code. The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability, failure, qualitative changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-allowable residual deformations, displacements, yielding of materials or opening of cracks.
l
The second group is concerned with states of structures making worse normal their service or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections, deviations, settlements, vibrations, etc.
l
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum (design) loads and actions, which can cause failure of structures. Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service (normative) loads and actions. Relation between design and normative loads is referred to as coefficient of load reliability, which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions. Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 shall be taken in to account determining loads or their combinations. In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed assortment sections and also from compound such as double angles of T-type sections, double channels are presented. Design of other members of compound section will be presented in other versions of the program. Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio (RATIO) /Ry yc presented in calculation results. A section is economical when said ratio equals to 0,9 0,95.
15B.2 Built-in Russian Steel Section Library

Typical sections of members being checked and selected according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* are presented in the following tables.
Table 15B.1-Typical Sections for Russian Steel Design Section I-beam (GOST 8239-89) Regular I-beam (GOST 26020-83) Broad-flanged I-beam (GOST 26020-83) Column I-beam (GOST 26020-83) Channel (GOST 8240-89) Section Type Designation form ST I12 ST B1-10
ST SH1-23
ST K1-20
ST C14
Equal legs angle (GOST 8509-89)
ST L100x100x7 RA L100x100x7
Unequal legs angle (GOST 8510-89)
ST L125x80x10 RA L125x80x10
Pipes (welded and for gas piping)
ST PIP102x5.5 or ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055
Roll-formed square and rectangular tubes
ST TUB160x120x3 or ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
720 STAAD.Pro
Table 15B.2-Compound Sections for Russian Steel Design Section Section Type Designation form D C14 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between channel walls) Double equal legs angles LD L100x100x7 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between angle walls) Double unequal legs angles with long legs back to back LD L125x80x10 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between angle walls) Double unequal legs angles with short legs back to back SD L125x80x10 SP 0.01 (SP clear distance between angle walls) Tee with flange at the top T I12 T B1-10 T SH1-23 T K1-20
Double channels
Note: Flange of Tee beam is at the

top part of cross-section if beta angle = 0, or at the bottom part if beta angle = 180.
For entry of cross-sectional dimensions command MEMBER PROPERTIES RUSSIAN is used.
15B.2.1 Example
UNITS METER MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN * I-BEAM 1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10 * CHANNEL 7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14 * UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLE 12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125X80X10 * ROUND ASSORTMENT PIPE 31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102X5.5 * ROUND PIPE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS DEFINED BY CLIENT 47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055 * SQUARE TUBE FROM ASSORTMENT 61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120X120X3 * RECTANGULAR TUBE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSION DEFINED BY CLIENT 69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16 * DOUBLE CHANNEL (DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 ) 96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01 * DOUBLE UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLES WITH SHORT LEGS BACK-TO-BACK (DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 ) 104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125X80X10 SP 0.01 * MEMBER OF TEE SECTION 106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23 * FLANGE OF T-BEAMS AT THE BOTTOM OF CROSS-SECTION BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126 * ORIENTATION OF THE LOCAL ANGLE AXES IN RELATION TO THE GLOBAL AXES OF THE STRUCTURE BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30 COMMANDS OF OUTPUT DATA FOR CHECK AND SELECTION OF SECTIONS ARE LOCATED AFTER COMMANDS OF ANALYSIS AND, AS A RULE, AFTER OUTPUT COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION.

Algorithms for selection and review of sections for steel members according to assortments and databases of the main rolled steel producers from given countries and according to international standards as well are included in STAAD.Pro program. In this program version only assortment sections can be utilized.
722 STAAD.Pro
15B.3.1 Example
* COMMAND OF ANALYSIS PERFORM ANALYSIS * COMMAND OF LOADINGS AND THEIR COMBINATIONS CONSIDERED IN DESIGN LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9 * COMMAND TO START DESIGN ACCORDING TO RUSSIAN CODE PARAMETER CODE RUSSIAN * LIST OF PARAMETERS USED IN CHECKING AND SELECTING BEAM 1. ALL
Obligatory parameter
LY 4. MEMB 1 TO 4 LZ 4. MEM 1 TO 4 MAIN 1. ALL SGR 3. ALL SBLT 0 ALL * PARAMETER OF OUTPUT AMOUNT OF INFORMATION ON CALCULATION RESULTS TRACK 2. ALL . * COMMAND TO START SECTION CHECK PROCEDURE CHECK CODE ALL * COMMAND TO START SECTION SELECTION PROCEDURE SELECT ALL . * COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT CONTENT OF ASSORTMENT TABLES PRINT ENTIRE TABLE * COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL ACCORDING TO SECTIONS STEEL TAKE OFF * COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL ACCORDING TO MEMBERS AND SECTIONS STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
15B.3.2 Axial tension members

Stress in a section of axial tension member shall not exceed design strength R of selected steel y multiplied by coefficient of service conditions (KY and KZ), table 6 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. c Slenderness of tension member (CMM) shall not exceed slenderness limit indicated in table 20 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* (default value u = 200, but another value can be defined). Net section
factor (ratio Anet/Agross (NSF)) is used for tension member to allow for reduction of design cross-section area.
15B.3.3 Axial compression members

All axial compression members are calculated as long bars, i.e., with allowance for slenderness ( = l0 /imin ). The calculation is performed in accordance with the clause 5.3 of SNiP 2.01.07.81*, buckling coefficient is determined by formula 8-10. Effective bar lengths (within and out of plane) taking in to account role and location of the bar in the structure, as well as fixation of ends (l0 = l), are determined according to requirements of chapter 6 or addition 6 to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* and are set by specification of members. Slenderness of compression members (CMN) shall not exceed limit values given in table 19 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Value of coefficient being used in table 19 is taken within limits from 0,5 to 1,0. Limit slenderness value depends on stress acting in the member, section area, buckling coefficient and design resistance of steel. Since slenderness can be different in various planes the greatest slenderness is assumed in calculations.
15B.3.4 Flexural members

Members subjected to the action of bending moments and shear forces are called flexural members. Calculation of flexural members consists of verification of strength, stability and deflection. Normal and tangential stresses are verified by strength calculation of members. Normal stresses are calculated in the outermost section fibres. Tangential stresses are verified in the neutral axis zone of the same section. If normal stresses do not exceed design steel strength and tangential stresses do not exceed design value of steel shear strength Rss then according to clause 5.14 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* principal stresses are checked. General stability of member subjected to bending in one plane are calculated in accordance with clause 5.15 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, and subjected to bending in two planes in accordance with Guide to design of steel structures (to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*). Coefficient b value is determined according to appendix 7 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Additional data about load (concentrated or distributed), numbers of bracing restrains of compression flanges, location of applied load are required. For closed sections it is assumed that coefficient b = 1.0. Simply supported (non-continuous) beams can be calculated in elastic as well as in elasticplastic state according to requirements of clause 5.18 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Calculation can be selected by specification of structure in input data. Stiffness of flexural members is verified comparing input value of deflection limit (through parameter DFF) with maximum displacement of a section of flexural member allowing for load reliability coefficient, which is specified, in input data. Limit values of deflection are determined in accordance with SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 Loads and Actions. Addition chapter 10. Deflections and displacements. Verification of deflection is performed only in the case of review (CHECK) problem.
724 STAAD.Pro
15B.3.5 Eccentric compression/tension members

Eccentric compression or tension members are subjected to simultaneous action of axial force and bending moment. Bending moment appears due to eccentric application of longitudinal force or due to transverse force. Stress in eccentric compression/tension members is obtained as a sum of stresses due to axial force and bending. Following the requirements of clause 5.25 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* resistance of eccentric compression/tension member taking into consideration condition Ry < 530 MPa, < 0.5Rs and N/(An Ry ) > 0.1 is calculated by formula 49, and in other cases-by formula 50. Calculations of stability verification are performed according to requirements of clauses 5.27, 5.30, 5.32 or 5.34. Calculation for strength of eccentric tension members is made according to formula 50 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. When reduced relative eccentricity mef> 20 eccentric compression members are calculated as flexural members (N = 0), when mef< 20 strength by formula 49 is not verified (clause 5.24).

Information on parameters, data used for check and selection of sections in design of steel structures according to Russian Code is presented in the following table. In this version of calculation according to requirements of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* there is common database of equal legs angles and unequal legs angles, therefore solution of section selection problem may give equal legs angle as well as unequal legs angle irrespective of set at the beginning. The same is and with rectangular and square tubes. Values of parameters do not depend on command UNIT. Only these values of parameters, which differ from, defined in the program need to be included in the input data file. Review of sections (command CHECK) can be performed according to the first and the second group of limit states. Selection of section (command SELECT) can be performed only according to the first group of limit states with subsequent recalculation and verification of selected section with allowance for deflection. Calculation for the first group of limit states involves selection of members according to strength and stability. Parameters CMN and CMM give opportunity to set slenderness limit for compression and tension members respectively for their stability calculation, or refuse consideration of slenderness by setting default parameters. In this case selection of sections will be performed with consideration only of strength check. Check for deflection performed by setting parameter DFF (maximum allowable relative deflection value) different from set in the program. In the case of application of steel not defined by SNiP and/or GOST it is necessary to set their design strength by parameters UNL and PY. In determination of steel parameters SBLT and MAIN shall be approved (see Table 12B.4).
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 15B.3-Parameters for Steel design according to Russian Code (SNiP II 23 81*, edition 1990) Parameter Name Default Value Description Member design parameter:
l
BEAM = 0, Design members for forces at their ends or at the sections defined by SECTION command; BEAM = 1, Calculate the major axis moment Mz at 13 points along the beam and design beam at the location of maximum Mz; BEAM = 2, Same as BEAM=1, but additional checks are carried out at beam ends and at critical inter mediate section; BEAM = 3, Calculate forces at 13 points and perform design checks at all locations including the ends
BEAM
1
l
Place of loading on beam: CB 1

l
CB = 1, for loading on top flange; CB = 2, for loading on bottom flange
726 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Slenderness limit value for tension members:

l
MM = 0, if slenderness is suppressed; MM = 2, if ultimate slenderness value is "150"; MM = 2, if ultimate slenderness value is "200"; MM = 3, if ultimate slenderness value is "250"; MM = 4, if ultimate slenderness value is "300"; MM = 5, if ultimate slenderness value is "350"; MM = 6, if ultimate slenderness value is "400
MM
0
l
Set slenderness limit value not equal to "0" for design with evaluation of buckling effect
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Slenderness limit value for compression members:

l
MN = 0, if slenderness is suppressed; MN = 1, if slenderness limit value is "120"; MN = 2, if slenderness limit value is "21060a"; MN = 3, if slenderness limit value is "220-40a"; MN = 4, if slenderness limit value is "220"; MN = 5, if slenderness limit value is "18060a"; MN = 6, if slenderness limit value is "21060a"; MN = 7, if slenderness limit value is "21060a"; MN = 8, if slenderness limit value is "200"; MN = 9, if slenderness limit value is "150";
CMN
Set slenderness limit value not equal to "0" for design with evaluation of buckling effect Allowable limit of relative local deflection (Member length/Deflection Ratio): DFF 0. Default value 0 is valid if design is applied without deflection limitation. Set for deflection check only DMAX 1. [m] DMIN 0. [m] Minimum allowable section depth Maximum allowable section depth
728 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name GAMC1
Default Value 1.0
Description Specific service condition coefficient for buckling design Specific service condition coefficient for strength design Coefficient of effective length in respect to local axis Y (in plane XZ) Coefficient of effective length in respect to local axis Z (in plane XY) Type and position of loading on beam:
l
GAMC2
1.0
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG = 1, for loading concentrated in the middle span; LEG = 2, for loading concentrated in the quarter of the span; LEG = 3, for loading concentrated at the end of bracket; LEG = 4, for loading uniformly distributed on beam; LEG = 5, for loading uniformly distributed on bracket
LEG
LY [m]
Effective length in respect to local axis Y (in Member plane XZ) length Default is selected member's length Effective length in respect to local axis Z (in Member plane XY) length Default is selected member's length
LZ [m]
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description Standard of steel grade (GOST):

l
MAIN = 1, if Standard of steel grade is GOST27772-88; MAIN = 2, if Standard of steel grade is GOST10705-80; MAIN = 3, if Standard of steel grade is GOST10706-76; MAIN = 4, if Standard of steel grade is GOST8731-87; MAIN = 5, if Standard of steel grade is TY14-3-567-76
MAIN
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members or web section area weakening factor for bending members Design steel strength (yield strength):
PY 0 [MPa]
If parameters MAIN according to Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by SGR according to Steel grade (STAL) are not defined Ratio between design and characteristic loads values Number of lateral bracing restraints along the span:
l
RATIO
1.0
SBLT = 0, if beam not fixed; SBLT = 1, one restraint in the middle of the span; SBLT = 2, 3, etc. number of uniformly spaced lateral supports along the span
SBLT
730 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name
Default Value
Description
SGR
Steel grade (STAL). Refer to Table 12B.4 below.
Indication of elastic or elastic-plastic calculation:

l
TB = 0, for elastic calculation TB = 1, for elastic-plastic calculation
TB
Set for members under bending or non-axial compression/tension only. Output parameter:
l
TRACK = 0, for suppressed output information; TRACK = 1, for extended output information; TRACK = 2, for advanced output information
TRACK
Design steel strength (ultimate strength): UNL 0 [MPa] If parameters MAIN according to Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by SGR according to Steel grade (STAL) are not defined
Table 15B.4-Steel types for design of steel structures according to SNiP 2.01.07.-81* (table 51 and 51a) SGR Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Steel C235 C245 C255 C275 C285 C345 C345K C375 C390 C390K C440 C590 C590 BSt3kp 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Parameter MAIN GOST GOST 27772-88 GOST 1070580* GOST 1070580* Tube 3 GOST 1070676* GOST 1070580* Tube 3 GOST 1070676* GOST 8731-87 TY 14-3-567-76 Tube Tube For members* GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F GT, F F F F F F Tube
2 15 BSt3ps
2 16 BSt3sp
17 18
20
16G2F 5
*GT members from sheet and roll-formed tubes F rolled section steel
732 STAAD.Pro
15B.5 Member Selection and Code Check

Both code checking and member selection options are available in SNiP 2.23-81*. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command. Output of selection and check results are given in suppressed, extended and advanced forms. Form of output results depends on value of parameter TRACK. Results are presented in tables. Three versions of output results are possible: suppressed results according the critical strength condition (TRACK=0), extended - results according to all check conditions (TRACK=1) and advanced complete information on results of member design (TRACK=2). In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated: (TRACK=2). In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated: number of member; type and number of cross-section; result obtained (ACCEPTED requirements are met, FAILURE are not met); abbreviated name of normative document (code, standard) (SNiP); number of check clause; safety of strength (ratio between design and normative values); number of the most unfavorable loading; value of longitudinal force acting in the member with subscript indicating its direction (C compression, P tension); bending moments in relation to local member axes Z and Y; distance to section, in which the most unfavorable combination of forces acts.
15B.5.1 Example of TRACK 0 output

In suppressed form (TRACK 0) results are presented according to the critical check for given member with indication of SNiP clause number, according to which strength safety of the member is minimum.
======================================================================== MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
SECTION NO. FX MZ MY LOCATION ======================================================================== 1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1 0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
15B.5.2 Example of TRACK 1 output

In extended form (TRACK 1) results are presented on the basis of all required by SNiP checks for given stress state.
======================================================================== MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ SECTION NO. FX MZ MY LOCATION ======================================================================== 1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1 0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00 1 I60 PASS SNiP- DISPL 0.36 1 0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
15B.5.3 Example of a TRACK 2 output

In advanced form (TRACK=2) in addition to tabled results supplementary information is presented.
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
Material characteristics: Steel; Design resistance; Elasticity modulus; Section characteristics: Length of member; Section area; Net area; Inertia moment (second moment of area) (I); Section modulus (W); First moment of area (S); Radius of gyration; Effective length; Slenderness; Results are presented in two columns, Z and Y respectively. Design forces: Longitudinal force; Moments; Shear force.
734 STAAD.Pro
Signs + and - indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments and shear forces in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD. Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate parameters by formulas in analytical and numerical expression with indication of SNiP clause.
======================================================================== MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ SECTION NO. FX MZ MY LOCATION ======================================================================== 1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1 0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00 1 I60 PASS SNiP- DISPL 0.36 1 0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00 MATERIAL DATA Steel =C245 Modulus of elasticity = 206.E+06 KPA Design Strength (Ry) = 240.E+03 KPA SECTION PROPERTIES (units - m) Member Length = 6.00E+00 Gross Area = 1.38E-02 Net Area = 1.38E-02 z-axis y-axis Moment of inertia (I) : 768.E-06 173.E-07 Section modulus (W) : 256.E-05 182.E-06 First moment of area (S) : 149.E-05 156.E-06 Radius of gyration (i) : 236.E-03 354.E-04 Effective Length : 600.E-02 600.E-02 Slenderness : 0.00E+00 0.00E+00 DESIGN DATA (units -kN,m)SNiP II-23-81*/1998 Axial force : 0.00E+00 z-axis y-axis Moments : -465.E+00 0.00E+00 Shear force : 0.00E+00 500.E-02 CRITICAL CONDITIONS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK F.(39) M/(C1*Wmin)=-465.0E+00/ 1.12E+00* 2.56E-03= 162.1E+03 F.(41) Q/(H*T)= 500.0E-02/ 6.00E-01* 1.20E-02= 694.E+00 RY*GAMAC= 240.0E+03 ACTUAL SECTION DISPLACEMENT = 1.094E-02 M MAXIMUM MEMBER DEFLECTION = 1.094E-02 M Loading No. 1 ULTIMATE ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION VALUE = 3.000E-02 M
Conventional notations assumed in presentation of results: +, -, /, *,**, SQRT, their respective meanings (i.e., addition, subtraction, division, multiplication, raising to the second power (squared), and square root). Conventional notations of stresses, coefficients and characteristics of steel resistance comply with accepted in the SNiP standard. Only Greek letters are changed by their names (e.g., , -GAMAC; -ALPHA; -BETA, -ETA, -PHI, etc.).
c
736 STAAD.Pro
Section 16
Singaporian Codes
738 STAAD.Pro
16A. Singaporean Codes - Concrete Design per CP65

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Singaporean code CP65 Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete. Design of members per CP65 requires the STAAD Asia Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
740 STAAD.Pro

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design per the CP65 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 24.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 16A.1-Singaporean Concrete Design CP65 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as CP65. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BRACE
0.0
Bracing parameter for column design: 0. Column braced in both directions 1. Column braced in only the local Y direction. 2. Column braced in only the local Z direction. 3. Column unbraced in either direction.
CLEAR
20 mm
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0

positive numbers. ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction for column design.
Parameter Name ELZ
Default Value 1.0
Description
Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in current units Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in current units (For slabs, it is for reinforcement in both directions) Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a, in current units. Applicable to shear bars in beams. Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
FC
4.0 ksi
FYMAIN
60 ksi
FYSEC
60 ksi
MAX MAIN
50 mm
MINMAIN
8 mm
MINSEC
8 mm
MMAG
1.0
Factor by which column design moments are magnified Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moment for beam design. The upper limit is 23. Serviceability checks: 0. No serviceability check performed. 1. Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were continuous. 2. Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were simply supported. 3. Perform serviceability check for beams as if they were cantilever beams.
NSE CTION
12
SERV
0.0
SFACE
0.0
Face of support location at start of beam, in current units. (Only applicable for shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for bending )
742 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name SRA
Default Value 0.0
Description
Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer equations where A is the angle in degrees. Two special values are also considered: 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering torsional moment Mxy -slabs only -500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calculate Wood & Armer moments for design.
TRACK
0.0
Controls level of detail in output: 0. Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. Column design gives no detailed results. 1. For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2. Beam design only. Details of reinforcement at sections defined by the NSECTION parameter.
WIDTH
ZD
744 STAAD.Pro
Section 17
South African Codes
746 STAAD.Pro
17A. South African Codes - Concrete Design per SABS-0100-1

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the South African code SABS0100-1 2000 Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete Part1: Design. Design can be performed for beams (flexure, shear, and torsion) and columns (axial load + biaxial bending). Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, the program calculates the required reinforcement. Design of members per SABS-0100-1 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to SABS 0100-1. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 17A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 17A.1-South African Concrete Design SABS 0100-1 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as SABS0100. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BRACE
0.0
Column bracing: 0. Column braced in both directions. 1. Column braced about local Y direction only 2. Column unbraced about local Z direction only 3. Column unbraced in both Y and Z directions
Parameter Name CLB
Default Value
Description
20mm
Clear Cover for outermost bottom reinforcement Clear Cover for outermost side reinforcement Clear Cover for outermost top reinforcement Depth of concrete member, in current units. This value default is as provided as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES. Member length factor about local Y direction for column design. Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in current units. Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in current units. Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a, in current units. Applicable to shear bars in beams Maximum required reinforcement bar size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above. Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 28 32 36 40 50 60 Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to shear reinforcement in beams
CLS
20mm
CLT
20mm
DEPTH
YD
ELY
1.0
ELZ
1.0 30N/mm 2 450 N/mm 2 450N/mm 2
FC
FYMAIN
FYSEC
MAXMAIN
50mm
MINMAIN
8mm
MINSEC
8mm
748 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
0.0
Output detail 0. Critical Moment will not be printed with beam design report. Column design gives no detailed results. 1. For beam gives min/max steel % and spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of output with additional moments calculated. 2. Output of TRACK 1.0 List of design sag/hog moments and corresponding required steel area at each section of member
WIDTH
ZD

UNIT MM MEMBER PROPERTIES *RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300MM WIDE X 450MM DEEP 1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300. *CIRCULAR COLUMN 300MM DIAMETER 11 13 PR YD 300. * T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB) * - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP) 14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition above.
17A.3 Beam Design

Beam design includes flexure, shear and torsion. For all types of beam action, all active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and locate the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed. Design for flexure is carried out as per clause no. 4.3.3.4. Shear design as per SABS 0100 clause 4.3.4 has been followed and the procedure includes computation of critical shear values. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. If torsion is present, the program will also consider the provisions of SABS 0100 clause 4.3.5. Torsional reinforcement is separately reported. A TRACK 2 design output is presented below.
============================================================================ B E A M N O. 4 D E S I G N R E S U L T S M30 Fe450 (Main) Fe450 (Sec.) LENGTH: 6000.0 mm SIZE: 715.0 mm X 380.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET) --------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR (in mm) | MZ Load Case MX Load Case | VY P Load Case --------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 | 84.77 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | 0.00 0 | 500.0 | 70.70 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | 0.00 0 | 1000.0 | 56.64 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | 0.00 0 | 1500.0 | 42.57 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | 0.00 0 | 2000.0 | 28.50 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | 0.00 0 | 2500.0 | 14.43 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | 0.00 0 | 3000.0 | 0.37 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | 0.00 0 | 3500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | -13.70 1 | 4000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | -27.77 1 | 4500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | -41.84 1 | 5000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | -55.90 1 | 5500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1 | -69.97 1 | 6000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
750 STAAD.Pro
| -84.04 1 | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA FOR FLEXURE DESIGN (Sq.mm) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM | STIRRUPS (in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2 legged) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 680.71/ 706.86( 9-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 567.75/ 603.18( 3-16 )| 8 @ 115 mm 1000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 454.79/ 471.24( 6-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 1500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 2000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 2500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 3000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 3500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 4000.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 4500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 5000.0 | 448.91/ 452.40( 4-12 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 5500.0 | 561.87/ 565.50( 5-12 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm 6000.0 | 674.83/ 678.60( 6-12 )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10 )| 8 @ 115 mm ---------------------------------------------------------------------------TORSION REINFORCEMENT : Not required
17A.4 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load and is displayed. The requirements of SABS 0100-1 clause 4.7 are followed, with the user having control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as described in table 12A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is short or slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial bending, the recommendations of 4.7.4.4 of the code are considered. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative results in certain cases. Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load case.
============================================================================ C O L U M N N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S M30 Fe450 (Main) Fe450 (Sec.) LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 715.0 mm X 380.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm ** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 1 END JOINT: 2 SHORT COLUMN DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET) ----------------------DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) INITIAL MOMENTS
: :
-14.6 About Z 0.00
About Y 0.00
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 0.28 0.29 SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 7.89 4.20 ADDITION MOMENTS (Maddz and Maddy) : 0.00 0.00 TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 45.17 9.41 REQD. STEEL AREA : 26.99 Sq.mm. REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 1213.61 Sq.mm. MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 4 - 12 dia. (0.17%, 452.40 Sq.mm.) (Equally Distributed) TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 140 mm c/c SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET) ---------------------------------------------------------Puz : 25.50 Muz1 : 45.22 Muy1 : 51.48 ============================================================================
752 STAAD.Pro
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
17B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote. In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria. The next few sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of SAB0162-1: 1993. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results. Refer to Section 5.37 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.

A steel section library consisting of South African Standards shapes is available for member property specification.
The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
17B.4.1 I Shapes
The following example illustrates the specification of I- shapes.
1 TO 15 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
17B.4.2 H shapes
Designation of H shapes in STAAD is as follows. For example,
18 TO 20 TABLE ST 152X37UC
17B.4.3 PG shapes
Designation of PG shapes in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 720X200PG
17B.4.4 Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)

C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example.
3 TABLE ST 127X64X15C

Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified by preceding the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back to back double channel section PFC140X60 without spacing in between should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D PFC140X60
A back-to-back double channel section 140X60X16C with spacing 0.01 unit length in between should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D 140X60X16C SP 0.01
754 STAAD.Pro
Note: The specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing.
The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
17B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the letter L succeeds the angle name. Thus, a 70X70 angle with a 25mm thickness is designated as 70X70X8L. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 70X70X8L
Note that the above specification is for standard angles. In this specification, the local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y-Y axis shown in the CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y-Y axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
100 TO 150 TABLE RA 45X45X3L
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles are shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD Technical Reference manual.

To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for long leg back-to-back) or SD (short leg back-to-back). For equal angles, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit) after section designation.
100 TO 150 TABLE LD 50X50X3L 3 TABLE LD 40X40X5L SP 0.01
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 40X40X5 angles with a spacing of 0.01 length units.
17B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE T IPE-AA180
will describe a T section cut from a IPE-AA180 section.
17B.4.9 Rectangular Hollow Sections

These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the SAB tables may be specified as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUB60X30X2.5
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width), and TH(for thickness) specifications. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUBE TH 3 WT 100 DT 50
will describe a tube with a depth of 50mm, width of 100mm. and a wall thickness of 3mm. Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
17B.4.10 Circular Hollow Sections

Sections listed in the SAB tables may be provided as follows:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIP34X3.0CHS
In addition to sections listed in the SAB tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIPE OD 50 ID 48
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 50 length units and inside diameter of 48 length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current length unit. A sample input file to demonstrate usage of South African shapes:
STAAD PLANE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 30-MAR-05 END JOB INFORMATION
756 STAAD.Pro
UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 9 0 0; 3 0 6 0; 4 3 6 0; 5 6 6 0; 6 9 6 0; 7 0 10.5 0; 8 9 10.5 0; 9 2.25 10.5 0; 10 6.75 10.5 0; 11 4.5 10.5 0; 12 1.5 11.4 0; 13 7.5 11.4 0; 14 3 12.3 0; 15 6 12.3 0; 16 4.5 13.2 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3; 2 3 7; 3 2 6; 4 6 8; 5 3 4; 6 4 5; 7 5 6; 8 7 12; 9 12 14; 10 14 16; 11 15 16; 12 13 15; 13 8 13; 14 9 12; 15 9 14; 16 11 14; 17 11 15; 18 10 15; 19 10 13; 20 7 9; 21 9 11; 22 10 11; 23 8 10; MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN 1 TABLE ST IPE-AA100 2 TABLE T IPE120 3 TABLE ST 152X23UC 4 TABLE T 152X23UC 5 TABLE ST 812X200PG 6 TABLE T 812X200PG 7 TABLE ST 178X54X15C 8 TABLE D 178X54X15C 9 TABLE D 178X54X15C SP 0.1 10 TABLE ST 25X25X5L 11 TABLE RA 25X25X5L 12 TABLE LD 25X25X5L 13 TABLE SD 25X25X5L 14 TABLE LD 25X25X5L SP 0.1 15 TABLE SD 25X25X5L SP 0.1 16 TABLE ST TUB40X2.5SHS 17 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0 WT 0 DT 50 18 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.02 WT 100 DT 50 20 TABLE ST PIP48X2.0CHS 21 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.5 ID 0.48 PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES FINISH

The SAB specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic (Class 1), compact (Class 2), noncompact (Class 3), or slender element (Class 4) sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and Table 1 of SAB0162-1:1993). This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different
depending on the section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes. Design is performed for sections that fall into the category of Class 1,2, or 3 sections only. Class 4 sections are not designed by STAAD.

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as members unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances. All the members are checked against allowable slenderness ratio as per Cl.10.2 of SAB0162-1: 1993.
17B.6.1 Axial
Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
17B.6.2 Axial Compression

The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY, and LZ (see Table 13B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations are: 1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this. 2. For single angles, asymmetric or cruciform sections are checked as to whether torsional-flexural buckling is critical. But for KL/r ratio exceeding 50,as torsional flexural buckling is not critical, the axial compression capacities are calculated by using Cl.13.3. The reason for this is that the South African code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this. 3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling into account. Parameters KX and LX may be used to provide the effective length factor and effective length value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles. 4. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
758 STAAD.Pro
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
17B.6.3 Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the joints of the member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one-tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are: 1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as: For Class 1 & 2 sections Phi*Py*Fy For Class 3 sections Phi*Sy*Fy Where: Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9 Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis Fy = Yield stress of steel 2. Single angles sections are not designed by STAAD, as the South African code doesnt provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. 3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such as Tees and Double angles, SAB0162-1: 1993 stipulates in Clause 13.6(b), page 31, that a rational method.
17B.6.4 Axial compression and bending

The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these equations, the additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 17B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
17B.6.5 Axial tension and bending

Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The actual RATIO is determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical equation.
17B.6.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 17B.1), the section is considered to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 29 of SABS 0162-1:1993). Checks for safety in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may bypass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.

The design parameters outlined in table below may be used to control the design procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 17B.1-South African Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Must be specified SAB0162. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual. BEAM 0 0 - Perform design at ends and those locations specified
Description
1 - Perform design at ends and 1/12th section locations alo CB 1.0
Greater than 0.0 and less than 2.5,Value of Omega_2 (C1.1 Equal to 0.0: Calculate Omega_2
760 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name CMY 1.0
Default Value 1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis. 2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis
Description
CMZ
1.0
1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis. 2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis
DFF DJ1
0 0
Default is 0 indicating that deflection check is not perfor Start node of physical member for determining deflected set along with DFF parameter End node of physical member for determining deflected set along with DFF parameter Maximum allowable depth Minimum required depth Yield strength of steel Ultimate strength of steel K value for flexural torsional buckling K value in local Y-axis, usually minor axis K value in local Z-axis, usually major axis Length for flexural torsional buckling Length in local Y axis for slenderness value KL/r Length in local Z axis for slenderness value KL/r Flag for controlling slenderness check 0 - For Check for slenderness. 1 - For Do not check for slenderness
DJ2
DMAX DMIN FYLD FU KT KY KZ LT LY LZ MAIN
1000 0 300Mpa 345Mpa 1.0 1.0 1.0 Member length Member length Member length 0
NSF RATIO
1.0 1.0
Net section factor for tension members Permissible ratio of applied load to section capacity
Used in altering the RHS of critical interaction equations SSY 0 Sidesway parameter 0 - Sideway about local Y-axis. 1 - No sideway about local Y-axis.
Parameter Name SSZ 0
Default Value Sidesway parameter 0 - Sideway about local Z-axis. 1 - No sideway about local Z-axis.
Description
TRACK
Track parameter
0. Print the design output at the minimum detail le
1. Print the design output at the intermediate detail 2. Print the design output at maximum detail level UNB UNT Member Length Member Length
Unsupported length in bending compression of bottom f
Unsupported length in bending compression of top flang
17B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the current section properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces obtained from the most recent analysis. The adequacy is checked as per the SAB0162-1: 1993 requirements. Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1 (which is also its default value), moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam. When no section locations are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero, design will be based on member start and end forces only. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. Using the TRACK parameter can control the extent of detail of the output. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
17B.8.1 Example
Sample input data for South African Code Design
PARAMETER CODE SAB0162 MAIN 1 ALL LY 4 MEMB 1 LZ 4 MEMB 1 UNL 4 MEMB 1 CB 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
762 STAAD.Pro
CMZ MEMB 2 1 TO 23 CMY MEMB 2 1 TO 23 SSY 0 MEMB 1 TO 23 SSZ 0 MEMB 1 TO 23 FU 450000 MEMB 1 TO 23 BEAM 1 ALL NSF 0.85 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 RATIO 1.0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL FYLD 300000 1 TO 23 CHECK CODE ALL FINISH

The member selection process involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members listed as PRISMATIC. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the SAB0162-1: 1993 specification, which governed the design. If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, the output will be displayed as follows:
************************************** STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING (SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993)) ************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE LOADING/ LOCATION MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ FX MY RATIO/ MZ
======================================================================= 1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS) PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1 0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08 |--------------------------------------------------------------------| | FACTORED RESISTANCES FOR MEMBER1 UNIT - KN,M PHI = 0.90 | | MRZ= 353.27 MRY= 63.99 | | CR= 453.21 TR= 2308.50 VR= 642.00 | |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
Factored member resistances will be printed out. Following is a description of some of the items printed out. Output Term MRZ MRY CR TR VR Description Factored moment of resistance in z direction Factored moment of resistance in y direction Factored compressive resistance for column Factored tensile capacity Factored shear resistance
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. A typical output of track 2.0 parameter is as follows.
************************************** STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING (SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993)) ************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE LOADING/ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS) PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1 0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08 MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 7.00E+02 MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ FX MY RATIO/ MZ
764 STAAD.Pro
IZ = IY =
2.43E+04 1.36E+03
SZ = SY =
1.19E+03 1.52E+02
PZ = PY =
1.35E+03 2.37E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03 CTORFLX = 4.532E+02 TENSILE CAPACITY = 2.308E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 4.532E+02 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01 MRZ = 3.533E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.420E+02 VRZ = 6.075E+02 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 85.000 KL/RY = 175.514 KL/RZ = 41.522 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 4.000 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.75 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 4.33E+01
Following is a description of some of the items printed out. Output Term CRY CRZ CTORFLX TENSILE CAPACITY FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE Description Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about the local y axis Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about the local z axis Factored compressive resistance against torsional flexural buckling Factored tensile capacity MRY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction MRZ = Factored moment of resistance in z direction VRY = Factored shear resistance in y direction VRZ = Factored shear resistance in z direction
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY Factored compressive capacity

In the next few pages are included three verification examples for reference purposes.

Determine the capacity of a South African I-section column in axial compression per South African steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993)). Column is braced at its ends for both axes.
Reference
Example 4.3.4.1, page 4.18, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa Length = 6000 mm
Comparison
Table 17B.2-SABS 0162-1:1993 Verification problem no.1 comparison Criteria Axial Compressive Strength (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 1,516 1,516 none
Input File
STAAD PLANE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE END JOB INFORMATION UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 0 6 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN 1 TABLE ST 356X67UB DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 1.99947E+008 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8191 ALPHA 6E-006 DAMP 0.03 TYPE STEEL STRENGTH FY 248210 FU 399894 RY 1.5 RT 1.2 END DEFINE MATERIAL
766 STAAD.Pro
UNIT MMS KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL UNIT METER KN SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FY -1500 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER 1 CODE SABS0162 LZ 6 ALL LY 3 ALL FU 450000 ALL BEAM 1 ALL NSF 0.85 ALL TRACK 2 ALL FYLD 300000 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993)) ************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST 356X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS) PASS COMPRESSION 0.989 1 1500.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 IZ = 1.95E+04 SZ = 1.07E+03 IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.57E+02 MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------MEMBER LENGTH = PZ = 1.21E+03 PY = 2.43E+02 6.00E+02
CRY = 1.516E+03 CRZ = 2.038E+03 CTORFLX = 1.516E+03 TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.918E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 1.516E+03 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.561E+01 MRZ = 1.991E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.903E+02 VRZ = 6.461E+02 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 0.850 KL/RY = 75.220 KL/RZ = 39.730 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 200.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 6.000 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 3.65E+01
17B.12 Verification Problem No. 2

Determine the capacity of a South African I-section beam in bending per South African steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993)). The beam has torsional and simple lateral rotational restraint at the supports, and the applied point load provides effective lateral restraint at the point of application is braced at its ends for both axes.
17B.12.1 Reference
Example 4.5, page 4.37, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
17B.12.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
17B.12.3 Comparison
Table 17B.3-SAB 0162 -1:1993 Verification Problem 2 comparison Criteria Major Axis Bending Resistance (kN) Reference STAAD.Pro Difference 353.4 353.3 none
17B.12.4 Input File

STAAD PLANE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE END JOB INFORMATION UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0; 3 7 0 0
768 STAAD.Pro
MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 3; 2 3 2 MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN 1 2 TABLE ST 406X67UB DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1 E 2.00E+008 POISSON 3 DENSITY 977 ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2.00E+008 POISSON 3 DENSITY 8195 ALPHA 2E-005 DAMP 03 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT MMS KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 2 UNIT METER KN SUPPORTS 1 3 PINNED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 MEMBER LOAD 1 CON GY -104 4 1 UNI GY -4 2 UNI GY -2 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE SABS0162 CB 0 ALL UNL 4 MEMB 1 FU 450000 ALL BEAM 1 ALL NSF 85 ALL FYLD 300000 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE MEMB 1 FINISH
17B.12.5 Output
************************************** STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING (SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993)) ************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS) PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1 0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08 MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 7.00E+02 IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03 IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02 MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03 CTORFLX = 4.532E+02 TENSILE CAPACITY = 2.308E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 4.532E+02 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01 MRZ = 3.533E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.420E+02 VRZ = 6.075E+02 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 85.000 KL/RY = 175.514 KL/RZ = 41.522 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 4.000 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.75 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 4.33E+01
17B.13 Verification Problem No. 3

Determine the elastic shear capacity per South African steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993))of a South African I-section which is simply supported over the span of 8 m.
17B.13.1 Reference
Example 4.6.5, page 4.54, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
17B.13.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
770 STAAD.Pro
17B.13.3 Comparison
Table 17B.4-SAB 0162-1:1993 Verification Problem 3 comparison Criteria Shear Capacity (kN) Reference 687.1 STAAD.Pro 687.1 Difference none
17B.13.4 Input File

STAAD PLANE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE END JOB INFORMATION UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 8 0 0 MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2 MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN 1 TABLE ST 457X67UB DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1 E 2E+008 POISSON 3 DENSITY 977 ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2E+008 POISSON 3 DENSITY 8195 ALPHA 2E-005 DAMP 03 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT MMS KN CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 UNIT METER KN SUPPORTS 1 2 PINNED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -70 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER CODE SABS0162 FU 450000 ALL BEAM 1 ALL FYLD 300000 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
17B.13.5 Output
************************************** STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING (SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993)) ************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MEMBER TABLE MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= * 1 ST 457X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS) FAIL SAB-13.8 4.134 1 0.00 0.00 -560.00 4.00 MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM) ----------------------------CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 8.00E+02 IZ = 2.94E+04 SZ = 1.30E+03 PZ = 1.47E+03 IY = 1.45E+03 SY = 1.53E+02 PY = 2.37E+02 MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA) -------------------------------FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M) --------------------------------CRY = 3.738E+02 CRZ = 1.996E+03 CTORFLX = 3.738E+02 TENSILE CAPACITY = 2.257E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 3.738E+02 FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01 MRZ = 1.355E+02 FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.871E+02 VRZ = 5.730E+02 MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION -------------------------NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000 KL/RY = 194.263 KL/RZ = 43.142 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000 UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 8.000 OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00 SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00 SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.04E+01
772 STAAD.Pro
Section 18
Spanish Codes
774 STAAD.Pro
18A. Spanish Codes - Steel Design per NBEMV103-1972

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Spanish code NBE-MV103-1972 Clculo de estructuras de acero laminado en edificacin (Calculation of rolled steel structures construction). Design of members per NBE-MV103-1972 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to the BSK 99 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 26A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 18A.1-Spanish Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as SPANISH. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
Parameter to control the number of sections to checked along the length of a beam: 0. Check sections with end forces only or at locations specified by a SECTION command. 1. Calculate moment at 1/10th points along the beam and maximum Mz for design 2. Check sections with end forces and forces at location of BEAM1.0 check.
18A. Spanish Codes - Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972
Parameter Name C1
Default Value
Description
value as specified in Sections 3.5.5.1 and 3.9.4.1. value as specified in Sections 0 3.5.5.1 and 3.9.4.1. Controls the check Mcrrs as per Section 5.5.3. 0. Perform this check 1. Do not perform this check.
C2
CB
DFF
None
"Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection Node no. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" .
DJ1
Start node of member
DJ2
End node of member Node no. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length". 25.4 meter Maximum allowable depth of steel section. Minimum allowable depth of steel section. Critical Cl. 5.1.3 1. Continue with other code checks, even if the section fails the check per this clause 2. Consider the section failed and cease code checks if the section fails the check per this clause
DMAX
DMIN
ETA
FYLD KY KZ LVV
255 MPa 1.0 1.0 Member Length
Yield strength of steel. K factor in local y axis. K factor in local z axis. Member length to be used in Cl. 3.5.5.1. Compression length in local y axis, Slenderness ratio = (KY)(LY)/(r )
y
LY
Member Length
776 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name LZ
Default Value
Description
Member Length
Compression length in local z axis, Slenderness ratio = (KZ)(LZ)/(r )

z
MAIN
Sets the slenderness limit for checks per Section 3.5.6. 1. Main steel (200) 2. Secondary steel (250)
NSF
1.0
Net tension factor for tension capacity calculation. Permissible ratio of loading to capacity. Net section factor for tension members, as applied to Wn per Cl. 4.5. Used to control the level of detail in the output. 0. = Minimum level of detail 1. = Intermediate level of detail 2. = Maximum level of detail
RATIO
TB
TRACK
UNF
Unsupported length as a fraction of the actual member length. Unsupported length for allowable bending stress.
UNL
Member Length
18A. Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Spanish code EHE Espaola del Hormign Estructural (Spanish Structural Concrete). Design of members per EHErequires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, which are commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 25A.1 contains a list of available parameters and their default values.
18A. Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 18A.2-Spanish Concrete Design per EHEParameters Parameter Name CLB Default Value 1.5 in Description
Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom of cross section. Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the side of the cross section. Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of cross section. Depth of the concrete member. This value defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES. Distance of face of support from end node of beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.
CLS
1.5 in
CLT
1.5 in
DEPTH
YD
EFACE
0.0 Face of Support

numbers. FC FYMAIN FYSEC MAX MAIN 4.0 ksi 60 ksi 60 ksi Number 55 bar Specified compressive strength of concrete. Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel. Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel. Maximum main reinforcement bar size.
MINMAIN Number 10 bar MINSEC Number 10 bar 1.0
Minimum main reinforcement bar size
Minimum secondary (stirrup) reinforcement bar size. A factor by which the column design moments will be magnified. Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in finding critical moments for beam design.
MMAG
NSE CTION
12
778 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name REINF
Default Value 0.0
Description
Used to specify type of column shear reinforcement: 0. Tied Column. 1. Spiral Column.
SFACE
0.0
Distance of face of support from start node of beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.

numbers. TRACK 0.0 Used to specify detail of output: 0. Only minimum details are printed for beam or column designs. 1. Beam Design:Intermediate level of detail. Column Design: TRACK 0 output plus intermediate level of detail. 2. Beam Design: TRACK1 detail plus steel required at 1/12th secitons. Column Design:detailed output. WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
780 STAAD.Pro
Section 19
Swedish Codes
782 STAAD.Pro
19A. Swedish Codes - Steel Design per BSK 99

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Swedish code BSK 99 Swedish Regulations for Steel Structures. Design of members per BSK 99 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to the BSK 99 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 19A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 19A.1-Swedish Steel Design per BSK 99 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as BSK99. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
(Required)Directs the program to divide the beam element into 13 equal length sections for section checks. Buckling length coefficient, , for buckling cd about the weak axis (typically y-y axis). Buckling length coefficient, for buckling cd about the strong axis (typically z-z axis). The reduction factor, CB, for the critical lateral buckling moment according to the theory of elasticity. Describes the boundary conditions for lateral buckling.
BY
BZ
CB
CMY
19A. Swedish Codes - Steel Design per BSK 99
Parameter Name CMZ
Default Value 1
Description
Depends on loading and boundary conditions for bending and controls Mlcr and corresponding moments. Buckling curve coefficient, , about local y1 axis. Buckling curve coefficient, , about local z1 axis. Maximum allowable depth of steel section. Minimum allowable depth of steel section. Yield strength of steel. Material factor and security class factor, .
m n
CY
CZ
DMAX DMIN FYLD MF RATIO SSY
1 meter 0 235 MPa 1.15 1 0
Permissible ratio of loading to capacity. Calculates the design moment about the yaxis. Calculates the design moment about the zaxis.
SSZ
784 STAAD.Pro
Default Value 0
Description
Used to control the level of detail in the output. 0. = Suppress critical member stresses (2 lines/member) 1. = Print all critical member stress (i.e., design values) (6 lines/beam) 2. = Print von Mises stresses 3. = Member results, sorted by member number (2 lines/member) 9. = Print detailed report for each member 31. = Max./min. output for end no. 1 32. = Max./min. output for end no. 2 49. = Joint force output. 98. = Joint capacity. 99. = Joint capacity.
UNL
Member Length
Unrestraint length of member used in calculating the lateral-torsional resistance moment of the member.
786 STAAD.Pro
19B. Swedish Codes - Concrete Design per BBK 94

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Swedish code BBK 94 Swedish Handbook for Concrete Structures. Design of members per BBK94requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
788 STAAD.Pro

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design to the BBK 94 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 19B.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 19C.1-Swedish Concrete Design per BBK 94 Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as SWEDISH. Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
ACTAGE BRACE
70 0.0
Actual age of concrete, in years. Bracing parameter for design: 0. Beam or column braced in both directions 1. One-way plate or column braced in only the local Zdirection. 2. Column braced in only the local Y direction. 3. Column unbraced in either direction.
CLEAR
25 mm
Clearance of reinforcement measured from concrete surface to closest bar perimeter, in current units. Drying exposure, in percent.
DRYCIR
100
EFACE
0.0
Face of support location at end of beam, in current units.

positive numbers.
Parameter Name ELY
Default Value 1.0
Description
Member length factor about local Y direction for column design. Member length factor about local Z direction for column design. Environment class 1. LA Least aggressive 2. NA Aggressive 3. MA Very aggressive
ELZ
1.0
ENVIR
FC FYMAIN LAGE MAX MAIN MINMAIN
35 N/mm 2
Compressive strength of concrete.
500 N/mm 2 Yield strength of main reinforcing steel. 7 days 32 Age when loaded, in days. Maximum size permitted for main reinforcement bar. Minimum size permitted for main reinforcement bar. moy factor moz factor nmag factor 0 40 1 Reinforcement angle, in degrees. Relative humidity, in percent. Column bar arrangement 1. Four longitudinal bars. 2. Two faced distribution about minor axis. 3. Two faced distribution about major axis. 4. Faced symmetric distribution
10
MOY MOZ NMAG REIANG RELHUM RFACE
790 STAAD.Pro
Default Value 0
Description
Distance from the start node of the beam to face of support for shear design.

positive numbers. STIRANG STIRDIA TORANG TRACK 90 10 mm 45 10 Stirrup angle, in degrees. Stirrup diameter Torsion angle, in degrees. Track parameter to control output detail 10. Beam Ultimate limit state and Service limit state design & Slab Two-way plate design 11. Beam Ultimate limit state and Service limit statedesign with tension stiffening. 12. Beam Ultimate limit statedesign only 20. Slab Plane stress design. 30. Slab Simplified membrane design.
792 STAAD.Pro
Section 20
American Aluminum Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing aluminum member design based on the ASD1994 Specifications for Aluminum Structures, Sixth Edition (October, 1994). Design of members per ASD 1994 requires the STAAD US Specialized Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
20A.1 Member Properties

In order to do this design in STAAD, the members in the structure must have their properties specified from Section VI of the above-mentioned manual. The section names are mentioned in Tables 5 through 28 of that manual. All of those tables except Table 10 (Wing Channels) and Table 20 (Bulb Angles) are available in STAAD. Described below is the command specification for various sections:
20A.1.1 Standard single section

MEMB-LIST TA ST SECTION-NAME
Example
1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8 9 TA ST I8.00X13.1 11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625 18 TA ST 1.50PIPEX160 15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
Section 20 American Aluminum Code
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RECTX.500WALL
20A.1.2 Double channel back-to-back

MEMB-LIST TA BACK SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
3 TA BACK C(A-N)7X3.61 SPACING 1.5 5 TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75
20A.2 Double channel front-to-front

MEMB-LIST TA FRONT SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
2 TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0 4 TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5
20A.2.1 Double angle long leg back-to-back

MEMB-LIST TA LD SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5
20A.2.2 Double angle short leg back-to-back

MEMB-LIST TA SD SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25 13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0
20A.3 Design Procedure

The design is done according to the rules specified in Sections 4.1, 4.2 and 4.4 on pages I-A-41 and I-A-42 of the Aluminum code. The allowable stresses for the various sections are computed according to the equations shown in Section 3.4.1 through 3.4.21 on pages I-A-27 through I-A-40. The adequacy of the member is checked by calculating the value of the left-
794 STAAD.Pro
hand side of equations 4.1.1-1, 4.1.1-2, 4.1.1-3, 4.1.2-1, 4.4-1 and 4.4-2. This left-hand side value is termed as RATIO. If the highest RATIO among these equations turns out to be less than or equal to 1.0, the member is declared as having PASSed. If it exceeds 1.0, the member has FAILed the design requirements.
Note: The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently not implemented
in STAAD.Pro.

The following are the parameters for specifying the values for variables associated with the design.
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes. Table 20A.1-Aluminum Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as ALUMINUM Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
ALCLAD
Defines if material is Alclad. 0 - Material used in the section is not an Alclad. 1 - Material used in the section is an Alclad.
ALLOY
34
This variable can take on a value from 1 through 40. The default value represents the alloy 6061-T6. See Table 14A.2 below for a list of values for this parameter and the alloy they represent. Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the Aluminum specifications provides information on the properties of the various alloys.
Parameter Name BEAM
Default Value
Description
0.0
If this parameter is set to 1.0, the adequacy of the member is determined by checking a total of 13 equally spaced locations along the length of the member. If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location check is not conducted, and instead, checking is done only at the locations specified by the SECTION command (See STAAD manual for details). If neither the BEAM parameter nor any SECTION command is specified, STAAD will terminate the run and ask the user to provide one of those 2 commands. This rule is not enforced for TRUSS members. Maximum depth permissible for the section during member selection. This value must be provided in the current units. Minimum depth required for the section during member selection. This value must be provided in the current units. Effective length factor for torsional buckling. It is a fraction and is unitless. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the allowable stress in axial compression. See Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on page I-A-28 of the Aluminum specifications for details.
DMAX
1000 in.
DMIN
0.0 in
KT
1.0
796 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name KY
Default Value
Description
1.0
Effective length factor for overall column buckling in the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the allowable stress in axial compression. Effective length factor for overall column buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the allowable stress in axial compression. Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from torsional buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for determining the allowable stress in axial compression. See Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on page I-A-28 of the Aluminum specifications for details. Effective length for overall column buckling in the local Y-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the allowable stress in axial compression.
KZ
1.0
LT
Member length
LY
Member length
Parameter Name LZ
Default Value
Description
Member length
Effective length for overall column buckling in the local Z-axis. It is input in the current units of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a column completely prevented from buckling) to any user specified large value. It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for determining the allowable stress in axial compression. This variable can take on a value from 1 through 4. They represent: 1 - All 2 - Extrusions 3 - Drawn Tube 4 - Pipe The default value stands for All. The PRODUCT parameter finds mention in Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the Aluminum specifications.
PRODUCT
SSY
0.0
Factor that indicates whether or not the structure is subjected to sidesway along the local Y axis of the member. The values are: 0 - Sidesway is present along the local Y-axis of the member 1 - There is no sidesway along the local Y-axis of the member. The sidesway condition is used to determine the value of Cm explained in Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41 of the Aluminum specifications.
798 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name SSZ
Default Value
Description
0.0
Factor that indicates whether or not the structure is subjected to sidesway along the local Z axis of the member. The values are: 0 - Sidesway is present along the local Z-axis of the member 1 - There is no sidesway along the local Z-axis of the member. The sidesway condition is used to determine the value of Cm explained in Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41 of the Aluminum specifications.
STIFF
Member length
Spacing in the longitudinal direction of shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs. It is input in the current units of length. See section 3.4.21 on page I-A-40 of the Aluminum specifications for information regarding this parameter. In Table 3.4-1 in Section I-A of the Aluminum specifications, it is mentioned that the value of coefficients nu, ny and na are dependent upon whether the structure being designed is a building or a bridge. Users may convey this information to STAAD using the parameter STRUCTURE. The values that can be assigned to this parameter are: 1 - Buildings and similar type structures 2 - Bridges and similar type structures
STR UCTURE
Default Value
Description
This parameter is used to control the level of detail in which the design output is reported in the output file. The allowable values are: 1 - Prints only the member number, section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL status. 2 - Prints the design summary in addition to that printed by TRACK 1 3 - Prints the member properties and alloy properties in addition to that printed byTRACK 2. 4 - Prints the values of variables used in design in addition to that printed by TRACK 3.
UNL
Member length
Distance between points where the compression flange is braced against buckling or twisting. This value must be provided in the current units. This value is used to compute the allowable stress in bending compression. In Table 3.4-2 in Section I-A of the Aluminum specifications, it is mentioned that the value of coefficients Kt and Kc are dependent upon whether or not, the location of the section where design is done is within 1.0 inch of a weld. The WELD parameter is used in STAAD for this purpose. The values that can be assigned to this parameter are: 0 - Region is farther than 1.0in from a weld 1 - Region is within 1.0in from a weld
WELD
800 STAAD.Pro
20A.4.1 Aluminum Alloys available in STAAD

Table 20A.2-Alloy Parameters Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1100-H12 1100-H14 2014-T6 2014-T6510 2014-T6511 2014-T651 3003-H12 3003-H14 3003-H16 3003-H18 3004-H32 3004-H34 3004-H36 3004-H38 5005-H12 5005-H14 5005-H32 5005-H34 5050-H32 5050-H34 5052-H32 5052-H34 5083-H111 5086-H111 5086-H116 Name
Value 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 5086-H32 5086-H34 5454-H111 5454-H112 5456-H111 5456-H112 6005-T5 6105-T5 6061-T6 6061-T6510 6061-T6511 6061-T651 6063-T5 6063-T6 6351-T5
Name
20A.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the initially specified member properties are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to the member due to the loads on the structure. Code checking is done at the locations specified by either the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter described above. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD provides an example on the usage of the CHECK CODE command.
20A.5.1 Example
Sample input data for Aluminum Design
PARAMETER CODE ALUMINUM
802 STAAD.Pro
BEAM 1 ALL KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4 ALLOY 35 ALL PRODUCT 2 ALL TRACK 3 ALL SELECT ALL ALCLAD 1 ALL STRUCT 1 ALL CHECK CODE ALL
20A.6 Member Selection

The member selection process involves the determination of the least weight member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command. Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD provides an example on the usage of the SELECT MEMBER command.
804 STAAD.Pro
Section 21
American Transmission Tower Code
806 STAAD.Pro
21A. American Transmission Tower Code Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the American Transmission Tower code ASCE10-97 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures. Design of members per ASCE 10-97 requires the STAAD USStd Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
21A.1 General Comments

The ASCE 10-97 code is meant to supercede the older edition of the code, available under the name ASCE Publication 52. However, in the interests of backward compatibility, both codes are currently accessible in STAAD.Pro. Design is available for all standard sections listed in the AISC ASD 9th edition manual, namely, Wide Flanges, S, M, HP, Tees, Channels, Single Angles, Double Angles, Tubes and Pipes. Design of HSS sections (those listed in the 3rd edition AISC LRFD manual) and Composite beams (I shapes with concrete slab on top) is not supported. To access the ASCE 52 code, use the commands
PARAMETER CODE ASCE 52
To access the ASCE 10-97 code, use the commands

PARAMETER CODE ASCE
The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.must be performed manually. It is assumed that you are familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
21A.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE 10-97

Member selection and code checking operations in the STAAD implementation of ASCE 10-97 are done to resist loads at stresses approaching yielding, buckling, fracture and other limiting conditions specified in the standard. Those stresses are referred to in the standard as Design Stresses. The appropriate sections of the ASCE standard where the procedure for calculating the design stresses is explained are as follows.
21A.2.1 Design Axial Tensile Stress

Design tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in section 3.10. The NSF parameter (see the Parameters table shown later in this section) may be used if the
section area needs to be reduced to account for bolt holes.
21A.2.2 Design Axial Compressive Stress

Design compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 3.6 through 3.9. For angle members under compression, the procedures of sections 3.7 and 3.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may control the effective lengths for buckling using the LT, LY, LZ and/or KT, KY, KZ parameters (see the Parameters table shown later in this section).
21A.2.3 Design Bending Compressive Stress

Calculations for design bending compressive stress about the major axis and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 3.14. Procedures outlined in sections 3.14.1 through 3.14.6 have been implemented.
21A.2.4 Design Bending Tensile Stress

Calculations for design bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 3.14.2.
21A.2.5 Design Shear Stress

Calculation of the design shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section 3.15 of the ASCE 10-97. The procedure of section 3.15.2 is followed for angles and the procedure of section 3.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
21A.3 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status

These are Clause 3.4 for slenderness limits, Clause 3.12 for Axial Compression and Bending, Clause 3.13 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 3.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 3.15 for Shear.

Design parameters are summarized in the table shown later in this section. These parameters may be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design.
808 STAAD.Pro
Table 21A.1-Steel Design Parameters for ASCE 10-97 Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as ASCE to design per ASCE 10-97. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
1.0
0 = Perform design at beam ends and section locations specified according to the SECTION command 1 = Perform design at the ends and eleven intermediate sections of the beam
CMY CMZ
0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway 45.0 in.
Cm value in local y and z axes as defined in equation 3.12-1 on p.10 of ASCE 10-97.
DMAX
Maximum allowable depth for member selection Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts required and the net section factor. Minimum allowable depth for member selection Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used from among Equations 3.7-4 thru 3.7-7 to determine the KL/R ratio. 1. EQN.3.7-4, Page 4 (VALID FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY) 2. EQN.3.7-5, Page 4 3. EQN.3.7-6, Page 4 4. EQN.3.7-7, Page 5
DBL
0.75 in.
DMIN
0.0 in.
ELA
Parameter Name ELB
Default Value
Description
Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used from among Equations. 3.7-8 thru 3.7-10 and 3.7-12 thru 3.7-14 to determine the KL/R ratio. 1. EQN.3.7-8, Page 5, EQN.3.7-12, Page 5 2. EQN.3.7-9, Page 5, EQN.3.7-13, Page 5 3. EQN.3.7-10, Page 5, EQN.3.714,Page 5
FVB FYB FYLD KT
30 KSI 36 KSI 36.0 KSI 1.0
Shear strength of bolt. Yield strength of bolt. Yield Strength of steel Effective length coefficient for warping restraint (clause 3.14.4, pg 11) Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis) Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about the Z-axis (major axis) This parameter is meant for plain angles. 0. indicates that the angle is connected by both legs and allowable stress in axial tension is 1.0FYLD. 1. indicates that the angle is connected only by the shorter leg and allowable tensile stress is computed per clause 3.10.2 as 0.9FYLD. 2. indicates that the angle is connected by the longer leg.
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG
0.0
LT
Member Length
Effective length for warping.
810 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name LY
Default Value
Description
Member Length Member Length 2
Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis) Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about the Z-axis (major axis) Parameter that indicates the member type for the purpose of calculating the KL/R ratio (SEE CLAUSE 3.4, PAGE 3, ASCE 10-97) 1. Leg member, KL/R <= 150 2. Compression member, KL/R <= 200 3. Tension member, KL/R <= 500 4. Hanger member, KL/R <= 375 (Clause 4C.4, page 43) 5. Redundant member, KL/R <= 250 10. Do not perform the KL/R Check
LZ
MAIN
NHL
Number of bolt holes on the cross section that should be used to determine the net section factor for tension capacity. Net section factor for tension members Permissible ratio that determines the cut off point for pass/fail status. A value below this quantity indicates PASS while a value greater than this quantity indicates FAILURE. 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis 1.0 = No sidesway
NSF RATIO
1.0 1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ TRACK
0.0 0.0
Same as above except in local z-axis 0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable stresses 1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported length of the bottom flange for calculating flexural strength. Will be used only if flexural compression is on the bottom flange.
Parameter Name UNF
Default Value
Description
1.0
Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of the member length Unsupported length of member for calculation of allowable bending stress
UNL
Member Length
UNT
Member Length
Unsupported length of the top flange for calculating flexural strength. Will be used only if flexural compression is on the top flange.
Note: All values must be provided in the current unit system.
21A.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE 10-97 implementation. In general, it may be noted that the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
812 STAAD.Pro
21B. American Transmission Tower Code Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 52 Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers, Second Edition Design of members per ASCE 10-97 requires the STAAD USStd Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.

The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking is based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections describe the salient features regarding the process of calculation of the relevant allowable stresses and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economical section is selected based on the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness requirements, and the width-thickness requirements. The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.must be performed manually. It is assumed that you are familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
21B.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE (Pub. 52)

The member design and code checking in the STAAD implementation of ASCE (Pub. 52) is based upon the allowable stress design method. Appropriate sections of this publication are referenced below.
21B.3 Allowable Axial Tensile Stress

Allowable tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in section 4.10. The NSF parameter (Table 1.1) may be used if the net section area needs to be used.
21B.4 Allowable Axial Compressive Stress

Allowable compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 4.6 through 4.9. For angle members under compression, the procedures of sections 4.7 and 4.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may control the effective lengths for buckling using the LX, LY, LZ and/or KX, KY, KZ parameters (Table 1.1).
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
21B.5 Allowable Bending Compressive Stress

Calculations for allowable bending compressive stress about the major axis and minor axis are based on the procedures of section 4.14. Procedures outlined in sections 4.14.1 through 4.14.6 have been implemented.
21B.6 Allowable Bending Tensile Stress

Calculations for allowable bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are based on the procedures of Section 4.14.2.
21B.7 Allowable Shear Stress

Calculation of the allowable shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section 4.15 of the ASCE Pub. 52. The procedure of section 4.15.2 is followed for angles and the procedure of section 4.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
21B.8 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status

These are Clause 4.4 for slenderness limits, Equation 4.12-1 for Axial Compression and Bending, Equation 4.13-1 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 4.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 4.15 for Shear.

These parameters may be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Table 21B.1-Steel Design Parameters for ASCE (Pub. 52) Based Design Parameter Name Default Value Description Must be specified as ASCE52. CODE Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the Technical Reference Manual. Specifies locations along member length at which member design is deisgned. BEAM 0.0 2.0 = use the section locations specified according to the SECTION command 3.0 = at the ends and eleven intermediate sections of the beam Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts required and the net section factor.
DBL
0.75 in.
814 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DMAX DMIN
Default Value 45.0 in. 0.0 in.
Description Maximum allowable depth for member selection Minimum allowable depth for member selection Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used from among Equations 4.7-4 thru 4.7-7 to determine the KL/R ratio.
ELA
1 = EQN.4.7-4, Page 26 (Valid for leg members only) 2 = EQN.4.7-5, Page 27 3 = EQN.4.7-6, Page 27 4 = EQN.4.7-7, Page 27 Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used from among Equations. 4.7-8 thru 4.7-10 to determine the KL/R ratio. 1 = EQN.4.7-8, Page 27, EQN.4.7-12, Page 28 2 = EQN.4.7-9, Page 27, EQN.4.7-13, Page 28 3 = EQN.4.7-10, Page 27, EQN.4.7-14,Page28
ELB
FVB FYB FYLD KT
30 KSI 36 KSI 36.0 KSI 1.0
Shear strength of bolt. Yield strength of bolt. Yield Strength of steel Effective length coefficient for warping restraint (clause 4.14.4, pg 36) Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis) Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling about the Z-axis (major axis) This parameter is meant for plain angles. 3.0 = the angle is connected by both legs and allowable stress in axial tension is 1.0FYLD 4.0 = the angle is connected only by the shorter leg and allowable tensile stress is computed per Cl. 4.10.2 as 0.9FYLD 5.0 = the angle is connected by the longer leg Effective length for warping.
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LEG
0.0
LT
Member Length
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
Parameter Name LY
Default Value Member Length Member Length
Description Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis) Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about the Z-axis (major axis) Parameter that indicates the member type for the purpose of calculating the KL/R ratio(See Cl. 4.4, p. 25) 1 = Leg member (KL/r 150) 2 = Compression member (KL/r 200) 3 = Tension member (KL/r 500) 4 = Hanger member per Cl. 4C.4, p. 43 (KL/r 375) 5 = Redundant member (KL/r 250) 10 = Do not perform the slenderness (KL/r) check Number of bolt holes on the cross section that should be used to determine the net section factor for tension capacity. Net section factor for tension members Permissible ratio that determines the cut off point for pass/fail status. A value below this quantityindicates PASS while a value greater than this quantity indicates FAILURE. Level of detail in output
LZ
MAIN
NHL
NSF
1.0
RATIO
1.0
TRACK
0.0
0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable stresses 1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of the member length Unsupported length of member for calculation of allowable bending stress
UNF
1.0 Member Length
UNL

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE Pub. 52 implementation. In general, it may be noted that the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design.
816 STAAD.Pro
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
818 STAAD.Pro
Section 22
Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code

The API Steel Design facility in STAAD is based on the API 2A-WSD standard, titled Recommended Practice for Planning, Design and Constructing Fixed Offshore PlatformsWorking Stress Design, 21st Edition (December 2000). Joint checks includes Errata and Supplements 1, 2 & 3 of the code.

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l
Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design; Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection; Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and Specify design parameters to carry out joint checks.
These operations may be repeated any number of times depending upon the design requirements. The basic process is as follows: 1. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading, and analysis. 2. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file (file extension .PUN)
Section 22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
and give preliminary design results. 3. Check and modify the Geometry file as necessary. 4. Re-run the analysis to read the modified Geometry file for the final design results.
22A.1.1 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear checks. It can be used in initial runs for member selection. No classification of the joint is performed using the loading. For the initial run of an API code check, all joints will be assumed to be a T/Y joint. See "Joint Design" for details. No hydrostatic checks are performed.
22A.1.2 Truss Members

A truss member is capable of carrying only axial force. So in design, no time is wasted calculating the allowable bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
22A.2 Allowables per API Code

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by the American Petroleum Institute (API-RP2A) Code. The 21st edition of API Code, as published in 2007, is used as the basis of this design (except for tension stress).
22A.2.1 Tension Stress

Allowable tension stresses, as calculated in STAAD, are based on the API Code, clause (3.2.1-1). Allowable tension stress on the net section Ft = 0.60Fy
22A.2.2 Shear Stress

Beam Shear Stress
Allowable beam shear stress on the gross section must conform to Clause 3.2.4-2 of the APIcode: Fv = 0.4Fy The maximum applied beam shear stress is per Eqn 3.2.4-1: fv = V / 0.5 A
820 STAAD.Pro
Torsional Shear Stress

Allowable torsional shear stress per Eqn. 3.2.4-4: Fvt = 0.4Fy F is the maximum torsional shear stress per Clause 3.2.4-3 of the API code.
vt
22A.2.3 Stress Due to Compression

The allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members is calculated based on the formula 3.2.2-1 in the API Code when the largest effective slenderness ratio, Kl/ris less than or equal to C . If Kl/r exceeds C , then the allowable compressive stress is c c increased as per formula (3.2.2-2) of the Code. Where:
Cc = 2 2
E Fy
For D/t > 60, the lesser of F Where:
xe
or F
xc
is substituted for F .
xy
F = the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical elastic xe buckling coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3) F
xc
= the inelastic local buckling stress. (3.2.2-4)
22A.2.4 Combined Compression and Bending

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy API formula 3.3.1-1 and 3.3.1-2 when fa/Fa > 0.15, otherwise formula 3.3.1-3 applies. It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if fa/Fa > 1.0, the program does not compute the second 3.3.1-1/2.
22A.2.5 Bending Stress

The allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a symmetrical member loaded in the plane of its minor axis, as given in Clause 3.2.3 of the API code, is: a. When D/t 1,500/Fy (Imperial Units), Fb = 0.75Fy b. When 1,500/Fy <D/t 3,000/Fy (Imperial Units), Fb = [0.84 - 1.74 Fy D/(Et)]Fy c. When 3,000/Fy <D/t 300 (Imperial Units), Fb = [0.72 - 0.58 Fy D/(Et)]Fy
22A.2.6 Simple Joints: Capacity Checks

A typical joint and the terms involved with the joint checks are given below:
Figure 22A.1 - Simple joint diagram
Definitions
= Brace included rage g = Gap between braces t = Brace wall thickness at intersection T = Chord wall thickness at intersection d = Brace outside diameter D = Chord outside diameter = d/D = D/(2T) = t/T
Joint Validity
The validity range of the joints that are identified will be checked as per Cl. 4.3.1 of the code. The conditions to be checked for each joint are as given below: 0.2 1.0 10 50 30 90
822 STAAD.Pro
F = 90 ksi (500 MPa)

y
g/D > -0.6 (for K joints) If any of these conditions are not satisfied for the joint under consideration, the programissues a warning message corresponding to the invalid parameter(s). The program will, however, perform the joint checks as the code allows for the design of such joints with modified values of yield strength. You can use the FYLD parameter to reset the yield strength.
Joint Capacity
The capacity of the joint, both the axial capacity and the moment capacity is The allowable capacity for brace axial load, P , is evaluated as:
a
Pa = Q uQ f
F yc T
FSJsin
The allowable capacity for brace bending moment, M , is evaluated as:

a
M a = Q uQ f
F yc T d FSJsin
Where: F = the yield stress of the chord member at the joint (or 0.8 of the tensile stress, y if less) FSJ = the factor of safety parameter (1.6 by default) Q and Q are the strength factor and the Chord factor that are to be u f determined based on the joint type. The strength factor, Q , is to be determined u as given in Section 4.3.3 of the code (ref. Table. 4.3-1 of the APIcode).
FSJPc FSJM c 2 Q f = 1 + C1 C 2 M y C3A Py FSJPc FSJM c A= + Py M y
2 2
P = axial load
c
2 2 M c = M ipb + M opb
C , C , and C are factors determined by the following table:

1 2 3
Joint Type K joints under brace axial loading T/Y joints under brace axial loading
0.2 0.3
0.2 0.3 0 0.8
Joint Type X joints under brace axial loading 0.9 = 1.0
0.2 0.2 0.2
0 0 0
0.5 0.4 0.4
All joints under brace moment loading
Note: For values of between 0.9 and 1.0, coefficients are linearly interpolated between
listed values. For joints that are a mixture of K, X, or Y joints, the capacity of the joint is evaluated as a weighted average of the capacities of each joint. In case the joint is subjected to combined axial load and bending moments (in-plane and/or out-of-plane), the program performs the following interaction check as given by Cl 4.3.6 of the code:
P Pa M + M + a ipb 2 M Ma
1.0
opb

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in Table 22A.1. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, wile in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed.
824 STAAD.Pro
Table 22A.1-American (API) Steel Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as API Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
1.0
Beam parameter: 0.0 = design only for end moments or those at locations specified by the SECTION command. 1.0 = calculate moments at twelfth points along the beam, and use the maximum Mz location for design. 2.0 = Same for BEAM1.0, but additional check is made at each end.
CB
1.0
Cb value as used in Section 1.5 of AISC 0.0 = Cb value to be calculated Any other value will mean the value to be used in design
CMY CMZ DMAX DMIN FSJ
0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway 100.0 in 0.0 1.6
Cm value in local y & z axes
Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Factor of safety used for joint checks. Yield strength of steel.
FYLD
36 ksi
Parameter Name KY
Default Value
Description
1.0
K value in local y-axis. Typically the minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Typically the major axis. Length in local Y-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Length in local Z-axis to calculate slenderness ratio. Design for slenderness. 1.0 = Main member 2.0 = Secondary member
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
1.0
Net section factor for tension members. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses Design for sidesway. 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis 1.0 = No sidesway
RATIO
1.0
SSY
0.0
SSZ
0.0
Design for sidesway in local z-axis
826 STAAD.Pro
Default Value
Description
0.0
Controls the level of detail in the output: 0.0 = Print design output at the minimum level of detail. 1.0 = Print all critical member stresses 2.0 = 3.0 = 100.0 = Suppress all checks except punching shear
UNF
1.0
Same as above provided as a fraction of actual member length Unsupported length for calculating allowable bending stress Weld type, as explained in section 3.1.1 of the APIcode. 1.0 =Welding is one side only except for wide flange or tee sections, where the web is always assumed to be welded on both sides. 2. 0 = Welding is both sides. For closed sections like pipe or tube, the welding will be only on one side.
UNL
Member Length
WELD
WMIN WSTR
1.16 in. 0.4 X FLYD
Minimum thickness Allowable welding stress
Note: The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used for member selection.
22A.4 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the members are adequate as per API. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking. When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of API code (like any of the API specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.), the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the number of forces in the member) where the critical condition occurs. Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2.2 of the Technical Reference manual. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command.
22A.5 Member Selection

The program is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limits the maximum and minimum depth of the members.
l l
Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections. Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
22A.6 Chord Selection and Q Parameter

f
Q is a factor to account for the presence of nominal longitudinal stress in the chord. When f calculating Q for the joints, the moments used in the chord stress calculation will be from f the computer node results and not the representative moments underneath the brace. If the moment varies significantly along the chord, it is more accurate to use the actual chord moment in the middle of the brace foot print. The tests reported in Reference I [1] were performed with a constant moment along the chord. Thus for a local joint check, the local chord moment (under the brace) should be used.
828 STAAD.Pro
STAAD calculates Q based on the moment at the chord member. The chord member can be f selected automatically by initial screening by the program (based on geometry and independent of loading) or specified in the External file. In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5 degree tolerance) are used to identify the chord. The chord is then selected from one of the two members based on the larger diameter then thickness or then by the minimum framing angle; for T joints the first member modeled will be selected as the chord. You should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the program or the user is representative of the local chord moment for the brace in question.
22A.6.1 Reference
1 Ref I: Boone, TJ. Yura, JA. and Hoadley, PW. Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints Chord Stress Effects, OTC 4828, 1984
22A.7 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows: Member the member number for which the design is performed. TABLE AISC steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has been selected. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member. CRITICAL COND the section of the AISC code which governs the design. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed. LOADING provides the load case number which governed the design. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table
and will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV).
22A.7.1 Example of Member Code Check output

For TRACK 0.0 output:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (API ) *********************** PROGRAM CODE REVISION V21_API_2000/1 ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 6 ST PIP40610.0 (BRITISH SECTIONS) PASS API 3.3.1-2 0.024 2 2.76 T 0.00 5.12 3.00 7 ST PIP40610.0 (BRITISH SECTIONS) PASS API 3.3.1-3 0.078 2 98.14 C 0.00 5.12 0.00
For TRACK 1.0 or TRACK2.0 output:

(BRITISH SECTIONS) PASS API 3.3.1-3 0.130 2 67.16 C 0.00 0.29 4.24 |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| | MEMB= 14, UNIT NEW-MMS ,L= 4243. AX= 4670. SZ= 208157. SY= 208157.| | KL/R-Y= 64.6 CB= 1.00 YLD= 248.21 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 186.2 | | FTZ= 186.2 FCY= 186.2 FTY= 186.2 FA= 117.6 FT= 148.9 FV= 99.3 | |-------------------------------------------------------------------------| 14 ST PIP1938.0
22A.7.2 Example of Joint Check output

STAAD.Pro - API JOINT CHECKS TO 21st edition. --------------------------------------------------7 CHORD NO: 7 BRACE NO: 10 RATIO: 7 CHORD NO: 7 BRACE NO: 13 RATIO: 7 CHORD NO: 11 BRACE NO: 14 RATIO:
NODE NO: NODE NO: NODE NO:
0.049 0.245 0.222
PASS PASS PASS

STAAD.Pro - API JOINT CHECKS TO 21st edition. --------------------------------------------------====================================================================== NODE NO : 7 CHORD NO: 7 BRACE NO: 13 ====================================================================== DESIGN DATA : (Units : N , mm ) Chord Memb : D = 406.40 T = 10.01
830 STAAD.Pro
Brace Memb : d = 193.70 t = 8.00 Angle (THETA) = 45.0 deg GAP = 50.80 Fyc = 248.2 BETA = 0.48 GAMMA = 20.30 TAU = 0.80 JOINT CLASS : X + Y Contributions: 0.% K, 50.% X, 50.% Y FACTORS : Factors are not displayed for TRACK 1.0 output ------------------------------------------------------------------Joint Load Strength Chord Load C1 C2 C3 Class Cond factor (Qu) factor (Qf) -------------------------------------------------------------------X AX 10.962 0.988 0.200 0.000 0.500 Y AX 14.299 0.983 0.300 0.000 0.800 X IPB 7.896 0.989 0.200 0.000 0.400 Y IPB 7.896 0.989 0.200 0.000 0.400 ---------------------------------------------------------------------CAPACITY CHECKS BRACE LOAD LC CAPACITY RATIO STATUS (Cl. 4.3) (KN, m ) (KN, m ) ---------------------------------------------------------------------AXIAL : 66.995 2 273.398 0.245 PASS IP BENDING : 0.080 2 33.228 0.002 PASS INTERACTION : 2 0.245 PASS ---------------------------------------------------------------------CRITICAL : 2 0.245 PASS ----------------------------------------------------------------------
22A.8 Joint Design

22A.8.1 Joint Checking
The design of joints is based on Section 4 of the API code. The program only checks simple joints and overlapping joints formed between circular hollow section members. Any other type of joint within the structure or joint cans will not be considered for API joint checks. Other types of joints (such as grouted joints, joints with ring stiffeners, etc.) are not considered.
Material Strength
The API code states in Cl. 4.2.1 that the value of yield stress of the chord member to be used in the calculation of the joint capacity should be limited to 0.8 times the tensile strength of the chord for materials with a yield stress less than or equal to 500 MPa. The yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks value is specified in the joint data file (filename.PUN). For every joint, the value specified in the FYLD column will be used as the yield strength to be used for the joint capacity checks. When the file is created for the first time by the program, a default value of 36 ksi is used for all joints. The value used for each joint check will also be reported in the output file.
Note: All the fields in the joint data file (*.PUN file) are to be in imperial units.
Minimum Joint Capacity

Clause 4.2.3 of the code specifies a minimum capacity for any joint as follows: The connections at the ends of a member should develop the strength required by the design loads, but should not be less than 50% of the effective strength of the member. The effective strength is defined as the buckling load for a compression member or the yield load for members in tension. You, however, must ensure that this condition is satisfied even if the joint strength indicates a PASS status. The program checks to see if the capacity of a joint as calculated by the methods in the code satisfies this requirement. If not the program issues a warning to that effect and marks the joint as FAILED. The program calculates the axial and/or bending moment capacities of the joint and reports the load/capacity ratio for each condition. The program also reports a critical ratio along with the condition that induces this ratio. Note that the maximum among the various individual ratios will be reported as the critical ratio. The program also reports a PASS/FAIL status for the joint. See "Simple Joints: Capacity Checks" for details of capacity checks performed.
Joint Classification
Clause of 4.2.4 of the API code essentially classifies a joint into one of the three basic types: K, X, and Y. Joint classification is the process whereby the axial load in a given brace is subdivided into its K, X, and Y components corresponding to the three joint types. A joint as considered in the codeis the connection between a "chord" and a "brace" that are in the same plane. The program considers any two members to be in the same plane if they lie in planes that are within 15 degrees of each other. The classification of a joint can also be a mixture of any of the basic types mentioned above. Once the classification of a joint has been identified, the capacity of that joint is then evaluated per Section 4.3 of the code. The program automatically identifies the joints in a structure and identifies the chord and the brace members. The program applies the 15 rule to determine the members in a plane and then determines the joint as being the intersection point of these members. Since a joint is between a chord and a brace member, the program considers two members at a time and then proceeds to identify the chord and the brace member at that joint. The program assumes the member with the larger diameter among the two members as the chord member and the other is considered as the brace. If both members have the same diameter, the chord is assumed to be the member with the thicker wall. If both the diameter and thickness of the members are identical, the program will assume the most horizontal member to be the chord. To be automatically considered as a chord member, the member has to be continuous across the joint. The user can always edit the joint data file (*.PUN) to add or delete new BRACE-CHORD joints. The chord and brace member numbers (from the STAAD input file) are saved under the CHORD and BRACE columns in the filename.PUN file.
832 STAAD.Pro
When the joint data file (.PUN)is created by the program, a default joint Class Y is assumed for the initial joint checks. This is indicated by the K, X, and Y column values being set to 0, 0, and 1 respectively. Since the API code allows for a mixed joint classification, you must manually vary the contribution factors for K, X, and Y joint classes for a given joint. For example, if a joint is to be 25% K, 25% X, and 50% Y, then you must assign K column value of 0.25, X column value of 0.25, and a Y column value of 0.50 for that joint. The program will verify that the supplied contributions sum to 1.0. If the joint has a gap (i.e., a K-GAP joint), the gap distance (in inches) must be supplied in the GAPcolumn. The value to be provided will be the actual gap between the brace members at the joint. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative value. The overlapping brace in this case can then be indicated by specifying the member number at the OBRACE (Overlapping brace) column in the data file.
Overlapping Joints
Clause 4.4 of the API discusses overlapping joints. Checks for overlapping joints will be performed as described Section 22A.2.6. The difference will be in that the gap value, g, will be taken as negative in evaluating the various factors. If the axial loads in the overlapping brace and the through brace have the same sign, the axial load in the through brace will be increased to allow for the loads in the overlapping brace. This will be achieved by allowing a portion of the overlapping brace load equal to the proportion of the overlapping brace area to be added to the axial load in the through brace.
Note: The program issues a warning for any joint overlap is less than 0.25D.
22A.8.2 Joint File Format

The data contained in the filename.PUN file should meet the following format. The overall process of performing punching shear checks consists of two steps which are explained in Section 22A.2.6. When the API design module is invoked, the program will initially check for the presence of a filename.PUN file (where filename is the name of the .std file) in the same folder as the input file. If the program does not find such a file, it assumes that the joint design is being run for the first time and will create this file. If the program does find this file, it will assume that the joint design has been run at least once and will attempt to read the input data from this file. Not that modifying and saving the main structure (i.e., any changes to the main model using GUI or text editor) will invalidate all design results and the program will automatically delete all design related files including the *.PUN file. Hence if the user wises to keep an existing version of the *.PUN file, he/she must make a separate copy of this file before making any changes to the model.
Note: Units used in this file must be kips and inches.
General Format
*BRACE CHORD K X Y D T d t GAP FYLD OBRACE TW SWAP b# c# K% X% Y% Dc Tc db tb gap fy ob tw swap Where: b# = the brace member number c# = the chord member number K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and Y-type, respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0, X=0 and Y=1). db, tb = Diameter and thickness of BRACE member Dc, Tc = Diameter and thickness of CHORD member gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially, the value of GAP is assumed as 0. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative value. fy = the yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks ob = member number of the overlapping brace in an overlap joint (i.e., a gap value less than zero) tw = Used in overlap K-joint, taken as the lesser of the weld throat thickness or thickness t of the thinner brace in inches swap = If parameter SWAP 0 is used then major moment Mz is taken for In Plane Bending (IPB). SWAP 1 uses the minor moment My as the IPB.
Example
*BRACE CHORD T GAP 10 7 16.000 0.394 13 7 7.626 0.315 14 11 7.626 0.315 K X Y D FYLD OBRACE TW SWAP 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0 T 0.394 0.394 0.394 D
834 STAAD.Pro
Section 23
ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes
836 STAAD.Pro
23A. ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on ANSI/AISC N690-1994 and as amended by Supplement No. 2 to the Specification of the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel Safety-Related Structures for Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690 1994(R2004)s2). Design of members per ANSI/AISC N690-1994 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
23A.1 General Comments

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by ANSI/AISC N690-1994 and as amended by ANSI/AISC N690 1994(R2004)s2. All the design steps are done as described in section 2.3 Allowable per AISC-ASD (Ninth Edition) Code of Technical Reference manual except for allowable stress in compression for AUSTENlTlC STAINLESS STEEL. Section Q1.5.9 is used to calculate allowable compressive stress for Austenitic Stainless Steel. Correction made in Supplementary s1 published in April 15, 2002 has been applied.
Note: By default, N690 code uses Stainless Steel material in the design. Care should be
taken to assign the proper Stainless Steel material properties to the members for the analysis. There is a parameter STYPE to change material type to either Stainless Steel (STYPE=1) or Carbon Steel (STYPE=0).
23A.1.1 Design Process

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy equation Q1.6-1a:
SFC fa Fa
SMY C my fby
f Fby 1 a F ey
SMZ C mzfbz f Fbz1 a F ez
1.0
and Q1.6-1b:
SFC fa 0.6F y
SMY fby Fby
SMZ fbz Fbz
1.0
when, fa/Fa > 0.15, as per section Q1.6.1 of the code. Otherwise, equation Q1.6-2 must be satisfied:
SFC fa Fa
SMY fby Fby
SMZ fbz Fbz
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the a a program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would
result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and [0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway. Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy equation Q1.6-3:
SFT fa 0.6F y
SMY fby Fby
SMZ fbz Fbz
1.0
Where: SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 23A.1 for details.

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure
Table 23A.1-Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as AISC N690 Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM
Beam parameter 0. Perform design at ends and those locations in the SECTIONcommand. 1. Perform design at ends and at 1/12th section locations along the member length.
838 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name CAN
Default Value 0
Description
Used for Deflection Check only (i.e., when DFFis specified). 0. Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection occurs within the span between DJ1 and DJ2. 1. Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection is of the cantilever type
CB
1.0
Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient, as specified in Chapter Fof AISCASD. 0.0 = CB is calculated itself Any other user-defined value is accepted.
CMY CMZ
0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway 0
COMPOSITE
Composite action with connectors (CMP) 0. No composite action 1. Composite action 2. Ignore positive moments during design
CONDIA
0.625 in
Diameter of shear connectors (DIA), in current units. Height of shear connectors after welding (HGT), in current units. Cycles of maximum stress to which the shear connector is subject(CYC).
CONHEIGHT
2.5 in
CYCLES
500,000
Parameter Name DFF
Default Value None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member 0.4
Description
"Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Ratio of moment due to dead load applied after the concrete hardens to the total moment (DR2). Ratio of moment due to dead load applied before the concrete hardens to the total moment (DR1). Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Effective width of concrete slab (WID).
DJ2
DLR2
DLRATIO
0.4
DMAX DMIN EFFWIDTH
45 inch 0.0 inch 1/4 Member Length 36 KSI 3 KSI
FYLD FPC
Yield strength of steel in current units. Compressive strength of concrete at 28 days, in current units. Full section shear for welding. 0. False 1. True
FSS
FU
60 KSI
Ultimate tensile strength of steel, in current units. Yield strength of steel, in current units. Effective length factor for flexural torsional buckling. Effective Length Factor for Compression in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis.
FYLD KX
46 KSI 1.0
KY
1.0
840 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name KZ
Default Value 1.0
Description
Effective Length Factor for Compression in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length for flexural torsional buckling.
LX
Member Length Member Length Member Length 0.0
LY
Length to calculate slenderness ratio (KL/r) for buckling about local Y axis. Same as above except in z-axis (major).
LZ
MAIN
Design for slenderness: 0. check for slenderness 1. suppress slenderness check
NSF OVR
1.0 1.0
Net section Factor for tension members Factor by which all allowable stresses/capacities should be multiplied. Default of 1.0 indicates that no overstressing is allowed. Thickness of the cover plate welded to the bottom flange of the composite beam (PLT), in current units. Width of the cover plate welded to the bottom flange of the composite beam (PLT), in current units. Used to search for the lightest section for the profile(s) specified for member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Height of ribs of form steel deck (RBH), in current units. Width of ribs of form steel deck (RBW), in current units. Stress limit coefficient for compression (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1.
PLTHICK
PLTWIDTH
PROFILE
None
RATIO
1.0
RIBHEIGHT
RIBWIDTH
SFC
1.0
Parameter Name SFT
Default Value 1.0
Description
Stress limit coefficient for tension (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1. Shear stress calculation option 0. Computes the actual shear stress using VQ/It 1. Computes the actual shear stress using V(Ay or Az)
SHE
SHORING
Temporary shoring during construction 0. Without shoring 1. With shoring
SLABTHICK
4 in
Thickness of concrete slab or thickness of concrete slab above the form steel deck (THK), in current units. Stress limit coefficient for minor axis bending (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1. Stress limit coefficient for major axis bending (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1. Design for sidesway in the local y axis. 0. Sidesway 1. No sidesway
SMY
1.0
SMZ
1.0
SSY
SSZ
Design for sidesway in the local z axis. 0. Sidesway 1. No sidesway
STIFF
Member length or depth whichever is greater 0.0
Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design, in current units.
STYPE
Type of steel material 0. Normal Steel 1. Austenitic Stainless Steel
842 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name TAPER
Default Value 1
Description
Design for tapered member. 0. Design for tapered I-section based on rules in Chapter F and Appendix B. 1. Design for tapered section based on Appendix F.
TMAIN
240 for main member 300 for Truss member
Slenderness limit under tension
TORSION
Design for torsion. 0. Do not design for torsion. 1. Design for torsion.
TRACK
0.0
Controls the levels of detail to which results are reported. 0. Minimum detail 1. Intermediate detail level 2. Maximum detail
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported length of the bottom* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the bottom flange. Unsupported length of the top* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the top flange. Design for weld. 0. Closed sections. 1. Open sections.
UNT
Member Length
WELD
WMAX
1 in
Maximum weld thickness, in current units.
Parameter Name WMIN
Default Value 0.625 in
Description
Minimum weld thickness, in current units. Allowable welding stress, in current units.
WSTR
0.4Fyld
23A.2.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units 2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
23A.3 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
23A.3.1 Example 1
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case1.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress: Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 171.31 Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Cc = [(22 E)/Fy ]1/2 = 127.68 Allowable Compressive Stress for Austentic Stainless Steel, As, (Kl/r)max >Cc Fa = (122 E)/[23(Kl/r)max ] = 5.21 ksi
Comparison
Table 23A.2-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification Problem 1 Value of F (ks)
a
Reference 5.21
STAAD.Pro 5.22
Difference Negligible
Input File
STAAD SPACE
844 STAAD.Pro
START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2.05E+008 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST W6X12 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 PINNED 2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 MEMBER LOAD 1 CON GY -10 2 UNIT METER KIP UNIT METER KN LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -1 LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3 1 1.0 2 9.5 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS UNIT METER KIP PARAMETER 1 CODE AISC N690 TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994) v1.0 ******************************************** |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN INCH UNIT | | * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ | |MEMBER 1 * | AISC SECTIONS | | AX = 3.55 | | * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 | |ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 | | * SZ = 7.33 | | * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 13.12 --->| RY = 0.92 | |************* RZ = 2.50 | | | | 7.4 (KIP-FEET) | |PARAMETER | L1 STRESSES | |IN KIP INCH | IN KIP INCH | |--------------- + L1 L1 -------------| | KL/R-Y= 171.31 | FA = 5.22 | | KL/R-Z= 63.12 + L1 L1 fa = 0.60 | | UNL = 157.48 | FCZ = 14.15 | | CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 | | CMY = 0.85 | L1 L1 FCY = 27.00 | | CMZ = 0.85 + FTY = 27.00 | | FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 12.07 | | NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 | | DFF = 0.00 -0.4 Fey = 4.65 | | dff= 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 34.26 | | (KL/R)max = 171.31 (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 14.40 | | fv = 0.90 | | | | MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) | | ------------------------| | | | AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z | | | | VALUE 2.1 1.1 0.0 0.0 7.4 | | LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.6 | | LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 | | | |**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *| |* -------------*|
846 STAAD.Pro
|* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.968 3 | | 2.14 C 0.00 -7.38 6.56 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.2 Example 2
Solution
y
Cc =
[(22 E)/Fy ]1/2
= 127.68
Allowable Compressive Stress for Austentic Stainless Steel, As, (Kl/r)max < 120.0 Fa = (Fy /2.15) - {[(Fy /2.15) - 6.0]/120.0}x(Kl/r)max = 9.07 ksi
Comparison
a
Reference 9.07
STAAD.Pro 9.08
Difference Negligible
Input File
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 3 0 0 1; 4 2 0 1;
MEMBER INCIDENCES 2 3 4; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2.05E+008 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 2 TABLE ST W6X12 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 3 PINNED 4 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 MEMBER LOAD UNIT METER KIP 2 CON GY -2.24809 1 UNIT METER KN LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2 JOINT LOAD 4 FX -1 LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3 1 1.0 2 9.5 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS UNIT METER KIP PARAMETER 1 CODE AISC N690 TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994) v1.0
848 STAAD.Pro
******************************************** |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN INCH UNIT | | * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ | |MEMBER 2 * | AISC SECTIONS | | AX = 3.55 | | * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 | |ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 | | * SZ = 7.33 | | * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 6.56 --->| RY = 0.92 | |************* RZ = 2.50 | | | | 3.7 (KIP-FEET) | |PARAMETER | L1 STRESSES | |IN KIP INCH | IN KIP INCH | |--------------- + L1 L1 -------------| | KL/R-Y= 85.65 | FA = 9.08 | | KL/R-Z= 31.56 + L1 fa = 0.60 | | UNL = 78.74 | L1 FCZ = 21.60 | | CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 | | CMY = 0.85 | L1 FCY = 27.00 | | CMZ = 0.85 + L1 FTY = 27.00 | | FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 6.04 | | NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 | | DFF = 0.00 -0.2 Fey = 18.60 | | dff= 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 137.05 | | (KL/R)max = 85.65 (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 14.40 | | fv = 0.90 | | | | MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) | | ------------------------| | | | AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z | | | | VALUE 2.1 1.1 0.0 0.0 3.7 | | LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.3 | | LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 | | | |**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *| |* -------------*| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.346 3 | | 2.14 C 0.00 -3.69 3.28 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.3 Example 3
Solution
y
Cc =
[(22 E)/Fy ]1/2
= 127.68
Allowable Compressive Stress for Austentic Stainless Steel, As, 120.0 <(Kl/r)max < Cc Fa = Fy [0.4 - (1/600)x(Kl/r)max ] = 7.08 ksi
Comparison
a
Reference 7.08
STAAD.Pro 7.08
Difference None
Input File
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT METER KN JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 2.85 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 2.05E+008 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195
850 STAAD.Pro
ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST W6X12 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 PINNED 2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1 MEMBER LOAD 1 CON GY -10 2 UNIT METER KIP UNIT METER KN LOAD 2 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 2 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -1 LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3 1 1.0 2 9.5 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS UNIT METER KIP PARAMETER 1 CODE AISC N690 TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994) v1.0 ******************************************** |--------------------------------------------------------------------------| | Y PROPERTIES | |************* | IN INCH UNIT | | * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ | |MEMBER 1 * | AISC SECTIONS | | AX = 3.55 | | * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 | |DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 | |ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 | | * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 9.35 --->| RY = 0.92 | |************* RZ = 2.50 | | | | 4.2 (KIP-FEET) | |PARAMETER | L1 STRESSES | |IN KIP INCH | L1 IN KIP INCH | |--------------- + L1 -------------| | KL/R-Y= 122.06 | L1 FA = 7.08 | | KL/R-Z= 44.97 + L1 fa = 0.60 | | UNL = 112.20 | FCZ = 19.86 | | CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 | | CMY = 0.85 | L1 FCY = 27.00 | | CMZ = 0.85 + L1 FTY = 27.00 | | FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 6.84 | | NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 | | DFF = 0.00 -0.2 Fey = 9.16 | | dff= 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 67.49 | | (KL/R)max = 122.06 (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 14.40 | | fv = 0.54 | | | | MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) | | ------------------------| | | | AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z | | | | VALUE 2.1 1.6 0.0 0.0 4.2 | | LOCATION 0.0 7.0 0.0 0.0 6.2 | | LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 | | | |**************************************************************************| |* *| |* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *| |* -------------*| |* *| |* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *| | FX MY MZ LOCATION | | ====================================================== | | PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.429 3 | | 2.14 C 0.00 -4.18 6.23 | |* *| |**************************************************************************| | | |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
852 STAAD.Pro
23B. ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code

For code checking of steel members, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by the "ANSI/AISC N690-1984:Nuclear Facilities - Steel Safety-Related Structures for Design, Fabrication, and Erection." A brief description of some of the major allowable stresses is described herein.
23B.2 Design Process

The following Checks are to be performed on a Steel Member as per this AISC N690 1984 Code. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
23B.2.1 Slenderness
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Compression (KL/r_min), as per clause Q1.8.4 of the code shall not exceed 200. And the maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Tension (L/r_ min) shall not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for bracing members and other secondary members. This can be controlled by using the existing MAIN and TMAIN parameters respectively. The default value of MAIN is 200 and for TMAIN is 240.
23B.2.2 Check for Element Slenderness and Stress Reduction Factors

The permissible Width-to-Thickness Ratio of Un-stiffened Elements under Compression is determined as per section Q1.9.1 and that of Stiffened Elements under Compression is determined as per section Q1.9.2 of the code. The permissible WidthThickness Ratio of web is determined as per section Q1.10.2.
23B.2.3 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as 0.60Fy , but not more than 0.5Fu on the Effective Net area, as per section Q1.5.1.1. The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with Q1.14, and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. Q1.14), Ae = CtAn Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section Q1.14. The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
23B.2.4 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns which meet the provisions of section Q1.9, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by Q1.5.1.3. The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be in accordance to section Q1.5.9. A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) Cc, Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]} Where: Cc = [(22 E)/Fy ]1/2 2. When (Kl/r) > Cc, Fa = 122 E/[23(kL/r)2 ] B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel: 1. When (Kl/r) 120, Fa = Fy /2.15 - [(Fy /2.16 - 6)/120](kL/r) 2. When (Kl/r) > 120, Fa = 12 - (KL/r)/20 If the provisions of the section Q1.9 are not satisfied, A. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed s values of Qs for different shapes are given in Section QC2. B. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width b is introduced.
e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness: be = 253t/Fy {1 - (50.3/[(b/t)Fy ]} b 2. For other uniformly compressed elements: be = 253t/Fy {1 - (44.3/[(b/t)Fy ]} b Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced and is equal to the effective a area divided by the actual area. Combining both these factors, allowable stress
854 STAAD.Pro
for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed Fa = QsQa[1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]} Where: C'c = [(22 E)/(QsQaFy )]1/2
23B.2.5 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in section Q1.5.1.4 is: A. Along Major Axis: 1. Tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection Q1.5.1.4.1.1 to 7, shall result in a maximum bending stress: Fb = 0.66Fy If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 65/Fy . b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/Fy . c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (640/Fy )[1 3.74(fa/Fy )] when fa/Fy 0.16 d/t = 257/Fy when fa/Fy > 0.16 d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76bf/Fy nor 20000/(d/Af)Fy . 2. For noncompact and slender elements, section Q1.5.1.4.2 is followed. 3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: Fb = 0.60Fy B. Along Minor Axis: 1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of section Q1.5.1.4.1, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed the following value as per section Q1.5.1.4.3: Fb = 0.75Fy
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of section Q1.5.1.4.1, except where bf/2tf > 65/Fy but is less than 95/Fy , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = Fy [0.79 0.002(bf/2tf)Fy ]
23B.2.6 Combined Interaction Check

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy equation Q1.6-1a: SFCfa/Fa + SMYCmy fby /[(1 - fa/F'ey )Fby ] + SMZCmzfbz/[(1 - fa/F'ez)Fbz] 1.0 and Q1.6-1b SFCfa/(0.6Fy ) + SMYfby /Fby + SMZfbz/Fbz 1.0 when, fa/Fa > 0.15, as per section Q1.6.1 of the code. Otherwise, equation Q1.6-2 must be satisfied: SFCfa/Fa + SMYfby /Fby + SMZfbz/Fbz 1.0 It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the a a program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and [0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway. Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy equation Q 1.6-1b: SFTfa/(0.6Fy ) + SMYfby /Fby + SMZfbz/Fbz 1.0 Where SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 17B.1 for details.
23B.2.7 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. section Q1.10.5.2] is calculated as Fv = (Fy /2.89)Cv 0.4Fy Where: Cv = (45,000k)/[Fy (h/t)2 ], when h/t 0.8 Cv = [190/(h/t)](k/Fy ), when h/t > 0.8 k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a/h)2 ], when a/h 1.0 k = 5.34 + [4.00/(a/h)2 ], when a/h > 1.0 For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
856 STAAD.Pro
23B.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel Section Library of STAAD may be used, namely: I-shaped section, Channel, Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, and Double Channel sections. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General and Prismatic member. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure Table 23B.1-Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as AISC N690 1984 to use the ANSI/AISC N690-1984 code for checking purposes. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CAN
Used for Deflection Check only. 0 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection occurs within the span between DJ1 and DJ2. 1 = Deflection check based on the principle that maximum deflection is of the cantilever type
Parameter Name CB
Default Value 1.0
Description
Bending coefficient dependent upon moment gradient 0.0 = CB is calculated itself Any other user-defined value is accepted.
CMY CMZ
0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway 0.75
CT
Reduction Coefficient in computing net effective net area of an axially loaded tension member. "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection
DFF
None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member 45 inch 0.0 inch 60 KSI
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. Yield strength of steel in current units. Effective Length Factor for Compression in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. Effective Length Factor for Compression in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis.
DJ2
DMAX DMIN FU
FYLD KY
36 KSI 1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
858 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name LZ
Default Value Member Length 0.0
Description
Same as above except in z-axis (major).
MAIN
Design for slenderness. 0. Check for slenderness 1. Suppress slenderness check
NSF PROFILE
1.0 None
Net section Factor for tension members Used to search for the lightest section for the profile(s) specified for member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Stress limit coefficient for compression (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1. Stress limit coefficient for tension (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1. Stress limit coefficient for minor axis bending (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1. Stress limit coefficient for major axis bending (SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1.
RATIO
1.0
SFC
1.0
SFT
1.0
SMY
1.0
SMZ
1.0
STIFF
Member Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design length or depth whichever is greater 0.0 0.0 = Normal Steel 1.0 = Austenitic Stainless Steel
STYPE
TMAIN
Default Value 0.0
Description
UNB
Member Length
Unsupported length of the bottom* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the bottom flange. Unsupported length of the top* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the top flange.
UNT
Member Length
23B.4.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units 2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the AISC N690 1984 code. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
23B.6 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
23B.6.1 .Example 1 - Pipe Section

This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\nuclear code samples\N690_1984_ Pipe_Section.std
860 STAAD.Pro
Problem
A 10 ft long simply supported beam subject to axial (+/- 10 kip) and bending loads (3 kip/ft) in both the local y and z axis. The beam is a 5" diameter, Schedule 40 Pipe section made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties: Ax = 4.30 in.2 Iy = Iz = 15.20 in.4 r = (15.20/4.30)1/2 = 1.88 in. O.D. = 5.56 in., t = 0.26 in. Sx = Sy = 15.20 in.4 2/5.56 in. = 5.468 in.3
Load Case 1: Tension-only

Allowable Tensile Stress: Ft = min(0.6Fy , 0.5Fu ) = 0.6(36 ksi) = 21.60 ksi Actual Tensile Stress: ft = P/Ae Where: Ae = CtAn = 0.75(4.30 in.2 ) = 3.23 in.2 ft = 10 kip/ 3.23 in.2 = 3.10 ksi Stress Ratio = 3.10 ksi/21.60 ksi = 0.144 < 1.0, OK.
Load Case 2: Compression-only

Allowable Compressive Stress: Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 1.0(10 ft)(12 ft/in.)/1.88in. = 63.83 <200, OK. Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
Cc =
[(22 E)/Fy ]1/2
= 127.68
(Kl/r)max < Cc
Fc = Fy
1.0
5 3 ( Kl / r) 2 2C c 2
1.0
3
(63.83)
2 2 3 3
= 36ksi
2(127.68) 5 3
3( Kl / r) 8C c
( Kl / r) 3 8C c
3(63.83) 8(127.68)
(63.83)
= 17.06ksi
8(127.68)
Actual Compressive Stress: fa = 10 kip/4.30 in.2 = 2.33 ksi Stress Ratio = 2.33 ksi/17.06 ksi = 0.136 < 1.0, OK.
Load Case 3: Tension +Bending

Allowable Bending Stress: Fby = Fbz = 0.66Fy = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.): My = 0.315 kip/ft (10 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 47.2 inkip Mz = 0.3 kip/ft (10 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 45.0 inkip fby = 47.2 inkip/5.468 in.3 = 8.63 ksi fbz = 45.0 inkip/5.468 in.3 = 8.23 ksi Stress Ratio = 8.63 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.363 < 1.0 Stress Ratio = 8.23 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.346 < 1.0 Combined Stress Check: fa/(0.6Fy ) +fby /Fby +fbz/Fbz = 3.10 ksi/[0.6(36 ksi)] +0.363 +0.346 = 0.853
Load Case 4:Compression + Bending

Combined Stress Check: fa/Fa = 0.136 < 0.15 fa/Fa +fby /Fby +fbz/Fbz = 0.136 +0.363 + 0.346 = 0.845 <1.0, OK
Comparison
Table 23B.2-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 1 Condition Tension (0.107, CT = 1.0) Compression Tension +Bending (0.817, CT = 1.0) Compression +Bending 0.845 0.844 Negligible 0.136 0.853 0.815 2.51% 0.136 None Reference 0.144 0.108 STAAD.Pro Difference
862 STAAD.Pro
Input File
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT FEET KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 4.176E+006 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 0.489024 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL UNIT INCHES KIP MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST PIPS50 UNIT FEET KIP CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 PINNED 2 FIXED BUT FX LOAD 1 TENSION ONLY JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10 LOAD 2 COMPRESSION ONLY JOINT LOAD 2 FX -10 LOAD 3 TENSION+BENDING SELFWEIGHT Y -1 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD 2 FX 10 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GZ 0.3 LOAD 4 COMPRESSION+BENDING SELFWEIGHT Y -1 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -0.3 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -10 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GZ 0.3 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL UNIT INCHES KIP LOAD LIST 1 PARAMETER 1 CODE AISC N690 1984 CB 1 ALL CMY 0 ALL CMZ 0 ALL * 36 & 58 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 1 ALL KZ 1 ALL MAIN 200 ALL NSF 1 ALL RATIO 1 ALL TMAIN 300 ALL TRACK 2 ALL UNB 30 ALL UNT 30 ALL CT 0.75 ALL CHECK CODE ALL ** FOLLOWING TO CHECK IF THE NET AREA IS USED IN CALCULATING TENSILE STRESS PARAMETER 11 CODE AISC N690 1984 FU 40 ALL CHECK CODE ALL
864 STAAD.Pro
LOAD LIST 2 PARAMETER 2 CODE AISC N690 1984 CB 1 ALL CMY 0 ALL CMZ 0 ALL * 36 & 58 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 1 ALL KZ 1 ALL MAIN 200 ALL NSF 1 ALL RATIO 1 ALL TMAIN 300 ALL TRACK 2 ALL UNB 30 ALL UNT 30 ALL CT 0.75 ALL CHECK CODE ALL LOAD LIST 3 PARAMETER 3 CODE AISC N690 1984 CB 1 ALL CMY 0 ALL CMZ 0 ALL * 36 & 58 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 1 ALL KZ 1 ALL MAIN 200 ALL NSF 1 ALL RATIO 1 ALL TMAIN 300 ALL TRACK 2 ALL UNB 30 ALL UNT 30 ALL CT 0.75 ALL CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 4 PARAMETER 4 CODE AISC N690 1984 CB 1 ALL CMY 0 ALL CMZ 0 ALL * 36 & 58 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 1 ALL KZ 1 ALL MAIN 200 ALL NSF 1 ALL RATIO 1 ALL TMAIN 300 ALL TRACK 2 ALL UNB 30 ALL UNT 30 ALL CT 0.75 ALL CHECK CODE ALL LOAD LIST ALL PARAMETER 5 CODE AISC N690 1984 CB 1 ALL CMY 0 ALL CMZ 0 ALL * 36 & 58 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 1 ALL KZ 1 ALL MAIN 200 ALL NSF 1 ALL RATIO 1 ALL TMAIN 300 ALL TRACK 2 ALL UNB 30 ALL UNT 30 ALL CT 0.75 ALL CHECK CODE ALL
866 STAAD.Pro
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984) v1.0 ******************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST PIPS50 (AISC SECTIONS) PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.844 4 10.00 C 44.84 47.02 120.00 |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 63.83 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00 | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.71E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.38E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.38E+01 | | SHEAR: 1.44E+01 | | ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 2.33E+00 FBZ: 8.60E+00 FBY: 8.20E+00 SHEAR: 9.12E-01 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) | | AXX: 4.30 AYY: 2.27 AZZ: 2.27 RZZ: 1.88 RYY: 1.88 | | SZZ: 5.46 SYY: 5.46 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | KL/R-Z: 63.83 KL/R-Y: 63.83 UNL: 30.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY: 0.60 | | CB: 1.00 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00 | | CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 0.0 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) |
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY | | TENSION 0.108 1 1.00E+01 | | COMPRESSION 0.136 2 1.00E+01 | | COMP&BEND 0.844 4 1.00E+01 4.70E+01 4.48E+01 | | TEN&BEND 0.815 3 1.00E+01 4.70E+01 4.48E+01 | | SHEAR-Y 0.063 3 1.96E+00 | | SHEAR-Z 0.060 3 1.87E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23B.6.2 Example 2 - W-Section

This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\nuclear code samples\N690_1984_ W-Section.std
Problem
A 12 ft long simply supported beam subject to uniform load (3 kip/ft). The beam is a W6x12 section made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties: A = 3.55 in.2 d = 6.03 in. tw = 0.230 in. Sz = 7.31 in.3 Allowable Bending Stress: Fbz = 0.66Fy = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.): Mz = 0.312 kip/ft (12 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 67.4 inkip fbz = 67.4 inkip/7.31 in.3 = 9.22 ksi Stress Ratio = 9.22 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.388 < 1.0, OK Allowable Shear Stress: Fv = 0.4Fy = 0.4(36 ksi) = 14.40 ksi Actual Shear Stress:
868 STAAD.Pro
Vz = 0.5(12 ft)(0.312 kip/ft) = 1.872 kip fvz = 1.872 kip/(6.03 in. x 0.230 in.) = 1.35 ksi Stress Ratio = 1.35 ksi/ 14.40 ksi = 0.094 <1.0, OK.
Comparison
Table 23B.3-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 3 Condition Bending Shear Reference 0.388 0.094 STAAD.Pro 0.387 0.094 Difference Negligible None
Input File
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09 END JOB INFORMATION INPUT WIDTH 79 UNIT FEET KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 12 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 4.176E+006 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 0.489024 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST W6X12 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 2 PINNED LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -0.3 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL *UNIT KIP INCH PARAMETER 1 CODE AISC N690 1984 CB 1 ALL CMY 0 ALL CMZ 0 ALL * 36 & 58 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 1 ALL KZ 1 ALL MAIN 200 ALL NSF 1 ALL RATIO 1 ALL TMAIN 300 ALL TRACK 2 ALL UNB 3 ALL UNT 3 ALL UNIT KIP INCH CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984) ******************************************** INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) v1.0
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP MEMBER TABLE
RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W6X12 (AISC SECTIONS) PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.387 1 0.00 T 0.00 -67.40 72.00 |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
870 STAAD.Pro
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 156.64 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 300.00 | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 6.09E+00 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01 | | SHEAR: 1.44E+01 | | ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 0.00E+00 FBZ: 9.20E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 0.00E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) | | AXX: 3.55 AYY: 1.39 AZZ: 1.49 RZZ: 2.50 RYY: 0.92 | | SZZ: 7.33 SYY: 1.50 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | KL/R-Z: 57.71 KL/R-Y:156.64 UNL: 36.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY: 0.60 | | CB: 1.00 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00 | | CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 0.0 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) | | CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY | | TENSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 | | COMPRESSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 | | COMP&BEND 0.387 1 0.00E+00 6.74E+01 0.00E+00 | | TEN&BEND 0.000 1 0.00E+00 6.74E+01 0.00E+00 | | SHEAR-Y 0.094 1 1.87E+00 | | SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 0.00E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
872 STAAD.Pro
Section 24
American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Codes
874 STAAD.Pro
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility Code, ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 .
Note: From design point of view, there are no major differences between NF-3000 1974
and NF-3000 1977 version of codes. Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
24A.1 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks Each one of the checks are described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
24A.1.1 Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24A.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than y (0.5*F ) on the Net area.
u
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of NF-3000 1974, and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24A.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-2213 of NF3000 1974.
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
a. Gross Sections of Columns: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
Fa = Fy
2 ( KL / r) 1 2 2 C c
5/3+
3( KL / r) 8C c
( KL / r) 3 8C c
Where:
Cc =
2 E Fy
2
2. When (Kl/r) > Cc,

Fa =
12 E 23(KL / r ) 2
2
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Fas =
Fa Eq. (a1) or Eq. (a 2) 1.6
( )
l 200r
b. Member elements other than columns: 1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60Fy 2. For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75Fy The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the sub-sections of clause XVII-2224 of NF-3000 1974. If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied, a. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor, Q , is introduced. Detailed s values of Q for different shapes are given in the clause XVII-2225.2 of NF-3000 1974.
s
b. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width, b , is introduced.

e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:

be =
253t f
50.3 1 b / t f b ( )
2. For other uniformly compressed elements:

be =
253t f
44.3 1 b / t f b ( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual a area is introduced.
876 STAAD.Pro
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
2 ( KL / r) Q sQ a1 2 2C c
Fa = Fy
5/3+
3( KL / r) 8C c
( KL / r) 3 8C c
Where:
C c =
2 E Q sQ aF
2
24A.1.4 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in XVII-2214 of NF-3000 1974 is: a. Along Major Axis: a. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress: F = 0.66*F
b y
If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of un-stiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 52.2/F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/F .
y
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (412/F )[1 2.33(F /F )]
y a y
except that it need not be less than 257/F .

y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than boxshaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y f y
b. For noncompact and slender elements, clause XVII-2214.2 and XVII-2214.5 of NF-3000 1974 are followed respectively. c. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: F = 0.60*F
b y
b. Along Minor Axis: For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of XVII-2214.1(a) and (b) of NF-3000 1974, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
F = 0.75*F
b
24A.1.5 Combined Interaction Check

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy
fa Fa C my fby
C mzfbz (1 fa / F ex )Fbx
(1 fa / F ey)Fby
1.0
and
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
when fa/Fa > 0.15, otherwise

fa Fa
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the a a program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for sidesway and 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway. Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
24A.1.6 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. XVII-2263.2 of NF-3000 1974] is calculated as
Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv 0.4Fy
Where:
Cv = Cv =
45, 000k F y (h / t ) 190 h/t
2
, when Cv < 0.8 , when Cv > 0.8
k Fy
k = 4.00 + 5.34 / (a / h )2 , when a/h < 1.0 k = 5.34 + 4.00 / (a / h )2 , when a/h > 1.0
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.
878 STAAD.Pro
24A.2 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel Section Library of STAAD may be used namely I-shaped section, Channel, Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, Double Channel section. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General and Prismatic member. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0. Table 24A.1-ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as CODE NF3000 1974 or CODE NF3000 1977 Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CAN
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
Parameter Name CB
Default Value
Description
1.0
CMY CMZ
0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member 45 inch
DFF
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Maximum allowable depth. Used only with the MEMBER SELECTION command. Minimum allowable depth. Used only with the MEMBER SELECTION command. Yield strength of steel at temperature in current units. Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis.
DJ2
DMAX
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
880 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name LZ
Default Value
Description
Member Length 0.0
Same as above except in z-axis (major).
MAIN
NSF
1.0
Net Section Factor for tension member. Used in member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design
PROFILE
None
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
Member length or depth whichever is greater 240 for main member 300 for Truss member
TMAIN
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member Length
UNT
Member Length
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
24A.4 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-3000 1974 and ASME NF-3000 1977 codes. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
24A.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and 5 kip lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1974. The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT INCHES KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 29000 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST W24X104 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED
882 STAAD.Pro
LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -5 FY -5 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT SUPPORT REACTION PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS PRINT MEMBER FORCES PARAMETER 1 CODE NF3000 1974 FYLD 36 ALL FU 58 ALL KY 0.9 ALL KZ 0.9 ALL NSF 0.85 ALL CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is as follows:

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ASME NF3000-74) ******************************************** ALL UNITS ARE - KIP MEMBER TABLE v1.0
INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST W24X104 (AISC SECTIONS) PASS NF-74-EQN-21 0.032 1 5.00 C 0.00 150.00 0.00 |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 9.28 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00 | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 2.07E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01 | | SHEAR: 1.44E+01 | | ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.63E-01 FBZ: 5.82E-01 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 4.16E-01 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) | | AXX: 30.60 AYY: 12.03 AZZ: 12.75 RZZ: 10.07 RYY: 2.91 | | SZZ: 257.69 SYY: 40.63 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | KL/R-Z: 2.68 KL/R-Y: 9.28 UNL: 30.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00 | | CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.85 | | | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) | | CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY | | TENSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 | | COMPRESSION 0.008 1 5.00E+00 | | COMP&BEND 0.032 1 5.00E+00 1.50E+02 0.00E+00 | | TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 1.50E+02 0.00E+00 | | SHEAR-Y 0.029 1 5.00E+00 | | SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 0.00E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
884 STAAD.Pro
24B. ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code

24B.1 Design Process
The design process follows the following design checks. 1. Slenderness 2. Tension 3. Compression 4. Bending Stress 5. Combined Interaction Check 6. Shear Stress Each one of the checks are described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
24B.2 .1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24B.3 .2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than y (0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area. u The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), n and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted e by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)), A =C *A e t n Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75. The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3). The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24B.4 .3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3). a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
Fa = Fy
2 ( KL / r) 1 2 2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r) 8C c
( KL / r) 3 8C c
Where:
Cc =
2 E Fy
2

Fa =
12 E 23(KL / r ) 2
2
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Fas =
Fa Eq. (a1) or Eq. (a 2) 1.6
( )
l 200r
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel: 1. When (Kl/r) 120,
Fa = Fy 0.47
( (
KL / r 444
) )
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Fa = Fy 0.40
KL / r 600
c. Member elements other than columns: 1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60Fy 2. For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75Fy The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d). If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
886 STAAD.Pro
a. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor, Q , is introduced. Detailed s values of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
s
b. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width, b , is introduced.

e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:

be =
253t f
50.3 1 b / t f b ( )

be =
253t f
44.3 1 b / t f b ( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual a area is introduced. Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
2 ( KL / r) Q sQ a1 2 2C c
Fa = Fy
5/3+
3( KL / r) 8C c
( KL / r) 3 8C c
Where:
C c =
2 E Q sQ aF
2
24B.5 .4 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in NF3322.1(d) is: a. Along Major Axis: 1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress: F = 0.66*F b y If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 65/F . y b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/F . y
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (640/F )[1 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16 y a y a y d/t = 257/F when f /F > 0.16 y a y d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /F nor 20000/(d/A )F . f y f y 2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively. 3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: F = 0.60*F b y b. Along Minor Axis: 1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: F = 0.75*F b y 2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/F but is less than 95/F , maximum f f y y tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: F = F [1.075 0.005(b /2t )F ] b y f f y
24B.6 .5 Combined Interaction Check

fa Fa
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C my fby
(1 fa / F ey)Fby
1.0
and
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0

fa Fa
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
888 STAAD.Pro
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
24B.7 .6 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. NF-3322.6(e)(2)] is calculated as
Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv 0.4Fy
Where:
Cv = Cv =
45, 000k F y (h / t ) 190 h/t
2
, when Cv < 0.8 , when Cv > 0.8
k Fy
24B.8 Member Property Specification


The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Table 24B.1-ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as NF3000 1989. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CAN
CB
1.0
CT
0.75
Reduction Coefficient in computing effective net area of an axially loaded tension member. [Refer NF3322.8(c)(1)(d)] Cm value in local y & z axes
CMY CMZ DFF
0.85 for sidesway and calculated for no sidesway None (Mandatory for deflection check) Start Joint of member End Joint of member 45 inch
DJ1
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Maximum allowable depth, in current units. Used only with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
DJ2
DMAX
890 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DMIN
Default Value
Description
0.0 inch
Minimum allowable depth, in current units. Used only with the MEMBER SELECTION command. Yield strength of steel at temperature in current units. Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis. Same as above except in z-axis (major). 0.0 = check for slenderness 1.0 = suppress slenderness check
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
LZ
Member Length
MAIN
0.0
NSF
1.0
Net Section Factor for tension member. Used in member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design
PROFILE
None
RATIO
1.0
STIFF
STYPE
0.0 = Normal Steel 1.0 = Austenitic Stainless Steel
TMAIN
24B. 18B.6 Example
Default Value
Description
0.0
UNB
Member Length
UNT
Member Length

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-3000 1989 code. Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking command. Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection command.
24B. 18B.6 Example

A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and a uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole span. The beam is assigned with B571806 steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1989. The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08 END JOB INFORMATION
892 STAAD.Pro
JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 360 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 29000 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST B571806 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -5 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100 PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT SUPPORT REACTION PARAMETER 1 CODE NF3000 1989 STYPE 1 ALL FYLD 36 ALL KY 0.75 ALL KZ 0.75 ALL FU 58 ALL NSF 0.9 ALL CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ASME NF3000-89) ******************************************** v1.0
24B. 18B.6 Example
INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST B571806 (AISC SECTIONS) PASS SHEAR Y 0.770 1 5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00 |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 75.08 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00 | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.13E+01 FCZ: 2.08E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.16E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01 | | SHEAR: 5.18E+00 | | ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) | | AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60 | | SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | KL/R-Z: 11.84 KL/R-Y: 75.08 UNL: 360.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00 | | CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90 | | CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) | | CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY | | TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 | | COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 | | COMP&BEND 0.290 1 5.00E+00 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 | | TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 | | SHEAR-Y 0.770 1 1.00E+02 |
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP MEMBER TABLE
894 STAAD.Pro
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 0.00E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
896 STAAD.Pro
24C. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code

24C.1 Design Process
The design process follows the following design checks. 1. Slenderness 2. Tension 3. Compression 4. Bending Stress 5. Combined Interaction Check 6. Shear Stress Each one of the checks are described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
24C.2 .1 Slenderness
24C.3 .2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than y (0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area. u The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), n and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted e by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)), A =C *A e t n Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75. The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3). The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24C. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
24C.4 .3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3). a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
Fa = Fy
2 ( KL / r) 1 2 2C c
5/3+
3( KL / r) 8C c
( KL / r) 3 8C c
Where:
Cc =
2 E Fy
2

Fa =
12 E 23(KL / r ) 2
2
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Fas =
Fa Eq. (a1) or Eq. (a 2) 1.6
( )
l 200r
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel: 1. When (Kl/r) 120,
Fa = Fy 0.47
( (
KL / r 444
) )
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Fa = Fy 0.40
KL / r 600
c. Member elements other than columns: 1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60Fy 2. For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75Fy The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d). If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
898 STAAD.Pro
a. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor, Q , is introduced. Detailed s values of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
s
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting elements of compression flanges of girder, When 95 / Fy / kc < b / t < 195 / Fy / kc , Q s = 1.293 0.00309 b / t When b / t > 195 / Fy / kc ,
Qs =
26, 200kc F y (b / t )
2
( )
Fy / kc
Where:
kc =
4.05 (h / t ) 0.46
when h/t > 70, otherwise, kc = 1.0.

e
b. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width, b , is introduced. 1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
be =
253t f
50.3 1 b / t f b ( )

be =
253t f
44.3 1 b / t f b ( )
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual a area is introduced. Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
2 ( KL / r) Q sQ a1 2 2C c
Fa = Fy
5/3+
3( KL / r) 8C c
( KL / r) 3 8C c
Where:
C c =
2 E Q sQ aF
2
24C.5 .4 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in NF3322.1(d) is: a. Along Major Axis:
24C. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress: F = 0.66*F b y If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 65/F . y b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/F . y c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (640/F )[1 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16 y a y a y d/t = 257/F when f /F > 0.16 y a y d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /F nor 20000/(d/A )F . f y f y 2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively. 3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: F = 0.60*F b y b. Along Minor Axis: 1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: F = 0.75*F b y 2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/F but is less than 95/F , maximum f f y y tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: F = F [1.075 0.005(b /2t )F ] b y f f y
24C.6 .5 Combined Interaction Check

fa Fa
C mzfbz
(1 fa / F ex )Fbx
C my fby
1 fa / F ey Fby
1.0
and
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
900 STAAD.Pro

fa Fa
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
24C.7 .6 Shear Stress

Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv 0.4Fy
Where:
Cv = Cv =
45, 000k F y (h / t ) 190 h/t
2
, when Cv < 0.8 , when Cv > 0.8
k Fy
24C.8 Member Property Specification

24C. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0. Table 24C.1-ASME NF 3000 1998 Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as NF3000 1998. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CAN
CB
1.0
902 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name CMY CMZ CT
Default Value
Description
Reduction Coefficient in computing effective net area of an axially loaded tension member. [Refer NF3322.8(c)(1)(d)] "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local deflection Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Maximum allowable depth, in current units. Used only with the MEMBER SELECTION command. Minimum allowable depth, in current units. Used only with the MEMBER SELECTION command. Yield strength of steel at temperature in current units. Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis.
DFF
DJ1
DJ2
End Joint of member
DMAX
45 inch
DMIN
0.0 inch
FYLD
36 KSI
FU
60 KSI
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
Member Length
24C. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
Parameter Name LZ
Default Value
Description
Member Length
Same as above except in z-axis (major). 0.0 = check for slenderness 1.0 = suppress slenderness check
MAIN
0.0
NSF
1.0
Net Section Factor for tension member. Used in member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details. Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design
PROFILE
None
STIFF
STYPE
TMAIN
TRACK
0.0
RATIO
1.0
Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses. Unsupported length of the bottom* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the bottom flange.
UNB
Member Length
904 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name UNT
Default Value
Description
Member Length
Unsupported length of the top* flange for calculating allowable bending compressive stress. Will be used only if flexural compression on the top flange.
Notes 1. All values are entered in the current units. 2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
24C.10 Code Checking and Member Selection

24C. 18C.6 Example

STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT INCHES KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2;
24C. 18C.6 Example
DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 29000 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST B571806 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -5 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER 1 CODE NF3000 1998 STYPE 1 ALL FYLD 36 ALL KY 0.75 ALL KZ 0.75 ALL FU 58 ALL NSF 0.9 ALL CT 0.85 ALL CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL CHECK CODE ALL FINISH

INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION =======================================================================
906 STAAD.Pro
(AISC SECTIONS) PASS SHEAR Y 0.635 1 5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00 |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 20.85 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00 | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.20E+01 FCZ: 2.22E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.22E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01 | | SHEAR: 6.28E+00 | | ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) | | AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60 | | SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | KL/R-Z: 3.29 KL/R-Y: 20.85 UNL: 100.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00 | | CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90 | | CT: 0.85 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) | | CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY | | TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 | | COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 | | COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 | | TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 | | SHEAR-Y 0.635 1 1.00E+02 | | SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 0.00E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
ST
B571806
908 STAAD.Pro
24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Nuclear Facility Code, ASME NF 3000 - 2004.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) NRC (build 20.07.07.30)or
higher. Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 2004 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design Codes SELECTCode Pack.
24D.1 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks. 1. Slenderness 2. Tension 3. Compression 4. Bending Stress 5. Combined Interaction Check 6. Shear Stress Each one of the checks is described in the following sections. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the checks.
24D.1.1 Slenderness
24D.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60F ), but not more than (0.5F ) y u on the Effective Net area. The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), n and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that. The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted e by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)), A e = Ct A n
24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75. The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3). The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
24D.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3). A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel: 1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) Cc, Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]} (Eq. A1) Where: Cc = [(22 E)/Fy ]1/2 2. When (Kl/r) > Cc, Fa = 122 E/[23(kL/r)2 ] (Eq. A2) 3. When (Kl/r) > 120, Fas = Fa[(Eq.A1) or (Eq. A2)]/{1.6 - [l/(200r)]} B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel: 1. When (Kl/r) 120, Fa = Fy [0.47 - (Kl/r)/444] 2. When (Kl/r) > 120, Fa = Fy [0.40 - (Kl/r)/600] C. Member elements other than columns: 1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60Fy
910 STAAD.Pro
2. For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75Fy The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).. If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied, a. For un-stiffened compression element, A reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values of Q for different shapes are given s s in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d). In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting elements of compression flanges of girder, When 95/(Fy /kc)1/2 < b/t < 195/(Fy /kc)1/2 , Qs = 1.293 - 0.00309(b/t)(Fy /kc)1/2 When b/t > 195/(Fy /kc)1/2 , Qs = 26,200kc/[Fy (b/t)2 )] Where: kc = 4.05/[(h/t)0.46 ] if h/t >70, otherwise kc = 1.0. b. For stiffened compression element, A reduced effective width b is introduced.
e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness: be = 253t/(f){1 - 50.3/[(b/t)(f)]} b 2. For other uniformly compressed elements: be = 253t/(f){1 - 44.3/[(b/t)(f)]} b Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced and is equal to the effective area a divided by the actual area. Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed Fa = QsQa[1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8Cc3 )]} Where: C'c = [(22 E)/(QsQaFy )]1/2
24D.1.4 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in NF3322.1(d) is:
24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
A. Along Major Axis: 1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress: Fb = 0.66Fy If meeting the requirements of this member of: a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 65/Fy . b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed 190/Fy . c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed d/t = (640/Fy )[1 3.74(fa/Fy )] when fa/Fy 0.16 d/t = 257/Fy when fa/Fy > 0.16 d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76bf/Fy nor 20000/(d/Af)Fy . 2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively. 3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is: Fb = 0.75Fy B. Along Minor Axis: 1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = 0.75Fy 2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where bf/2tf > 65/Fy but is less than 95/Fy , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed: Fb = Fy [1.075 0.005(bf/2tf)Fy ]
24D.1.5 Combined Interaction Check

fa Fa C my fby
C mzfbz (1 fa / F ex )Fbx
(1 fa / F ey)Fby
1.0
and
912 STAAD.Pro
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0

fa Fa
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
fa 0.60F y
fbz Fbz
fby Fby
1.0
24D.1.6 Shear Stress

Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv 0.4Fy
Where:
Cv = Cv =
45, 000k F y (h / t ) 190 h/t
2
, when Cv < 0.8 , when Cv > 0.8
k Fy
24D.2 Member Property Specification

24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0. Table 24D.1-ASME NF 3000 2004 Design Parameters Parameter Name CODE Default Value Description
Must be specified as NF3000 2004 Specified design code is followed for code checking purpose. Design Code to follow. See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
CB
1.0
CMY CMZ
CT
Reduction Coefficient in computing effective net area of an axially loaded tension member. [Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)]
914 STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name DFF
Default Value None (Mandatory for deflection check)
Description
DJ1
Start Joint of the member End Joint of the member 45 inch 0.0 inch 36 KSI
Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation of "Deflection Length"
DJ2
Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of "Deflection Length" Maximum allowable depth Minimum allowable depth Yield strength of steel at temperature in current units. Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current units. K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis. K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis. Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling about local Y axis. Same as above except in z-axis (major).
DMAX DMIN FYLD
FU
60 KSI
KY
1.0
KZ
1.0
LY
LZ
MAIN
NSF RATIO
1.0 1.0
Net Section Factor for tension member. Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses.
STIFF
Member Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design length or depth whichever is greater
24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
Parameter Name STYPE
Default Value 0.0
Description
TRACK
0.0
UNB
Member Length
UNT
Member Length
Notes 1. All values are entered in the current units. 2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
24D.4 Code Checking and Member Selection

24D.5 Example
916 STAAD.Pro
STAAD SPACE START JOB INFORMATION ENGINEER DATE 18-JUN-08 END JOB INFORMATION UNIT INCHES KIP JOINT COORDINATES 1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0; MEMBER INCIDENCES 1 1 2; DEFINE MATERIAL START ISOTROPIC STEEL E 29000 POISSON 0.3 DENSITY 76.8195 ALPHA 1.2E-005 DAMP 0.03 END DEFINE MATERIAL MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN 1 TABLE ST B571806 CONSTANTS MATERIAL STEEL ALL SUPPORTS 1 FIXED LOAD 1 JOINT LOAD 2 FX -5 MEMBER LOAD 1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100 PERFORM ANALYSIS PARAMETER 1 CODE NF3000 2004 STYPE 1 ALL FYLD 36 ALL KY 0.75 ALL KZ 0.75 ALL FU 58 ALL NSF 0.9 ALL CT 0.85 ALL CB 0 ALL TRACK 2 ALL
24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code
CHECK CODE ALL FINISH

INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ FX MY MZ LOCATION ======================================================================= 1 ST B571806 (AISC SECTIONS) PASS NF-3322.1(b) 0.635 1 5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00 |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 20.85 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00 | | ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.20E+01 FCZ: 2.22E+01 FCY: 2.31E+01 FTZ: 2.22E+01 FTY: 2.31E+01 | | SHEAR: 6.28E+00 | | ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) | | AXX: 47.00 AYY: 25.08 AZZ: 15.00 RZZ: 22.80 RYY: 3.60 | | SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) | | KL/R-Z: 3.29 KL/R-Y: 20.85 UNL: 100.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00 | | CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.90 | | CT: 0.85 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------| | CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) | | CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY |
918 STAAD.Pro
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 | | COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 | | COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 | | TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 | | SHEAR-Y 0.635 1 1.00E+02 | | SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 0.00E+00 | |----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
920 STAAD.Pro
Section 24 Technical Support
Section 24
Technical Support
These resources are provided to help you answer support questions:
l
Service Ticket Manager http://www.bentley.com/serviceticketmanager Create and track a service ticket using Bentley Systems' online site for reporting problems or suggesting new features. You do not need to be a Bentley SELECT member to use Service Ticket Manager, however you do need to register as a user. Knowledge Base http://appsnet.bentley.com/kbase/ Search the Bentley Systems knowledge base for solutions for common problems. FAQs and TechNotes http://communities.bentley.com/Products/Structural/Structural_Analysis___ Design/w/Structural_Analysis_and_Design__Wiki/structural-product-technotesand-faqs.aspx Here you can find detailed resolutions and answers to the most common questions posted to us by you. Ask Your Peers http://communities.bentley.com/forums/5932/ShowForum.aspx Post questions in the BeCommunity forums to receive help and advice from fellow users.
922 STAAD.Pro
Index
British A AIJ 1991 AIJ 2002 AIJ 2005 AISC Alclad Aluminum Design SeeConcrete Design, AIJ 1991 SeeSteel Design, AIJ 2002 SeeSteel Design, AIJ 2005 80 795 793 Codes
49 SeeNational Annex, British 67 SeeSteel Design, BS 5950-5 283 79 SeeSteel Design, BS5400 SeeSteel Design, BS5950 SeeConcrete Design, BS8110 C
National Annex British Codes BS 5950-5 BS EN 1993-1-1 BS4360 BS5400 BS5950 BS8110
American Transmission Tower Code813 Analysis PDelta ANSI/AISC N690 Codes AS 1170 AS 3600 - 2001 14 835 21 SeeConcrete Design, AS 3600
CAN/CSA-086-01 SeeWood Design, CAN/CSA-086-01 Canadian Codes 119
Canadian Wood Design Manual 183 Cold Formed Steel IS801 Concrete Design AIJ 1991 AS 3600 B4 BBK 94 BS8007 BS8110 CP65 CSA A23.3 Cyprus 543 11 371 787 97 51, 54 739 121 195 505
AS 4100 - 1998 SeeSteel Design, AS 4100 ASCE 10-97 ASCE Manuals ASME NF Codes Australian Codes Axial Compression Axial Tension Clause 3.13 Axially Loaded Members Design SeeSteel Design, ASCE 10-97 813 873 9 808 808 808 224, 240, 242, 244
224, 240, 242, 244
Index:CSA Japanese
DIN 1045 EHE Eurocode EC2 IS13920 IS456 NS 3473 NTC 1987 SABS-0100-1 CSA CSA A23.3
399 777 215 441 419 685 585 747 122, 125 SeeConcrete Design, CSA A23.3 SeeSteel Design, CSA CAN/CSA-S1601
Eurocode Steel Design
221, 224, 238, 240, 242, 244, 256 224, 240, 242, 244, 256 213, 215, 238, 240, 242, 244, 256 798 F
European Codes Extrusions
Finnish National Annex French Codes Concrete Design National Annex 379 381 SeeNational Annex, French 387 G GB 1591 I IS 800 2007 IS13920 SeeSteel Design, IS 800 2007 SeeConcrete Design, IS13920 SeeConcrete Design, IS456 SeeSteel Design, IS801 J Japanese Codes Concrete Design 541 SeeConcrete Design, AIJ 1991 79 SeeNational Annex, Finnish
CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01
D DD ENV DD ENV 1993 Design 221 221, 224 224, 240, 242, 244, 256 Steel Design
Axially Loaded Members 224, 240, 242, 244 Design Rules Structural Steelwork Dutch National Annex SeeNational Annex, Dutch 387 387
IS456 IS801
E EC5 EN 1993 Equivalent slenderness 349 237 74
924 STAAD.Pro
Steel Design
SeeSteel Design, AIJ 2005 M
Polish National Annex SeeNational Annex, Polish
Modulus of Elasticity N N690 Codes National Annex Belgian British Dutch Finnish French Norwegian output Polish Singaporean
27 S136-94 835 237, 271 284 283 283 284 284 284 281 284 284 AIJ 2002 AIJ 2005 SABS-0100-1
S SeeSteel Design, S136-94 SeeSteel Design, SAB0162-1 1993 SeeConcrete Design, SABS-0100-1 284 SeeSteel Design, SNiP 2.23-81 284 224, 240, 242, 244, 256, 813 565 551 837 19 807 375 101 93 67 783 129 407 203 221, 224, 238, 240, 242, 244, 256 387 513
SAB0162-1 1993
SFS EN 1993-1-1 SNiP 2.23-81 SS EN 1993-1-1 Steel Design
ANSI/AISC N690-1994 AS 4100 ASCE 10-97 B7 BS 5950-5 BS5400 BS5950
National Application Documents 215, 222 NBN EN 1993-1-1 NEN-EN 1993 NF EN 1993-1-1 Norwegian National Annex SeeNational Annex, Norwegian 284 SeeConcrete Design, NTC 1987 P PN EN 1993-1-1 284 284 283 284
BSK 99 CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01 DIN 18800 DS412 Eurocode French Code IS 800 2007
NS-EN 1993 NTC 1987
Index:Steel Design per IS 800 Young's Modulus
IS 802 IS801 NBE-MV103-1972 NEN 6770 NORSOK N-004 NS 3472 / NPD NTC 1987 S136-94 SAB0162-1 1993 SNiP 2.23-81 Steel Design per IS 800 Steel Section Library British Japanese Structural Steelwork Design Rules Swedish Codes T Timber Design EC5 U UK National Annex
483 505 775 209 663 609 597 165 753 719 465
ASME NF 3000 1998 ASME NF 3000 2004 British Cold Formed Steel CSA CSA Wood EC5 SAB0162-1 W Weld Type Wood and Armer Moments Wood Design
905 916 112
148, 151, 154, 156 183 360, 364 765, 768, 770
80 53, 99, 199, 743
68 565 387 387 781
CAN/CSA-086-01 Y Young's Modulus
173
SeeModulus of Elasticity
349
SeeNational Annex, British
V Verification Problem AIJ 2005 ASME NF 3000 1974 ASME NF 3000 1989 559 882 892
926 STAAD.Pro
Bentley Systems, Incorporated 685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341 USA +1 (800) 236-8539 www.bentley.com

International Codes V8i

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

International Codes V8i

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

STAAD.

International Design Codes Manual

Restricted Rights Legends

End User License Agreements

International Design Codes Manual i

Batch Design versus Design Modes

Section 1 Australian Codes

Section 2 British Codes

Section 3 Canadian Codes

Section 4 Cypriot Codes

International Design Codes Manual iii

Section 5 Danish Codes

Section 6 Dutch Codes

Section 7 European Codes

Section 8 Finnish Codes

Section 9 French Codes

Section 10 German Codes

Section 11 Indian Codes

Section 12 Japanese Codes

Section 13 Mexican Codes

Section 14 Norwegian Codes

Section 15 Russian Codes

Section 16 Singaporian Codes

Section 17 South African Codes

Section 18 Spanish Codes

Section 19 Swedish Codes

Section 20 American Aluminum Code Section 21 American Transmission Tower Code

International Design Codes Manual v

Section 24 Technical Support

International Design Codes Manual 1

International Design Codes Manual 3

About the STAAD.Pro Documentation Getting Started and Tutorials

About the STAAD.Pro Documentation

Getting Started and Tutorials

About the STAAD.Pro Documentation

Technical Reference Manual

International Design Codes

International Design Codes Manual 5

Batch Design versus Design Modes Batch Design

Batch Design versus Design Modes

Batch Design versus Design Modes

International Design Codes Manual 7

International Design Codes Manual 9

1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001

1A.1 Section Types for Concrete Design

1A.2 Member Dimensions

1A.3 Design Parameters

International Design Codes Manual 11

1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001

Parameter Name FYSEC

Default Value 450 N/mm 2

International Design Codes Manual 13

1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001

Parameter Name TRACK

Default Value 0.0

1A.4 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration

1A.5 Beam Design

1A.5.1 Design for Flexure

1A.5.2 Design for Shear

International Design Codes Manual 15

1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001

1A.6 Column Design

1A.7 Slab or Wall Design